FX3G-EEPROM-32L

## **USER'S MANUAL** 

## **Hardware Edition** 

## **Main Unit** 

## **AC Power Type** 

FX3GMR/ES FX3GMT/ES FX3GMT/ESS **DC Power Type** FX3GMR/DS FX3GMT/DS FX3GOo MT/DSS 

## **DC Power Type** 

## **Input/Output Powered Extension Unit** 

FX2NE - 

**Input/Output Extension Block** FX2N-8E oo - FX2N-16E - 

## **Display Module** 

FX3G-5DM 

**Memory Cassette** ~~—~~ FX3G-EEPROM-32L 

## **Safety Precautions** 

(Read these precautions before use.) 

Before installation, operation, maintenance or inspection of this product, thoroughly read through and understand this manual and all of the associated manuals. Also, take care to handle the module properly and safely. 

This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories: 

and 

. 

**==> picture [125 x 80] intentionally omitted <==**

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage. 

Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by may also cause severe injury. It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety. Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user. 

## **1. DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- **Reference** 

- • Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the 95 

- equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 118 

- 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs 134 

- are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control 167 

- block, output control may be disabled. 181 

- External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 219 

- 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the 240 

- absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC 279 

- are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. 344 

- External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

- 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

||**Reference**|
|---|---|
|•<br>Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the<br>control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line.<br>Noise may cause malfunctions.<br>•<br>Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors.<br>Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.|95<br>118<br>134<br>167<br>181<br>219<br>240<br>279<br>344|



(1) 

## **Safety Precautions** 

(Read these precautions before use.) 

## **2. INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS** 

|**2. **|**INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS**|**INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS**|
|---|---|---|
||||
|||**Reference**|
|•|Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.|95<br>344|
||||
|||**Reference**|
|•<br>•<br>•<br>•<br>•<br>•<br>•<br>•<br>•<br>•<br>•|Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in section 4.1 of this manual.<br>Never use the product in areas with excessive dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt air, Cl2, H2S,<br>SO2or NO2), flammable gas, vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature, condensation, or rain and wind.<br>If the product is used in such conditions, electric shock, fire, malfunctions, deterioration or damage may occur.<br>Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly.<br>Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions.<br>Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws.<br>Install the product on a flat surface.<br>If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the PC board, thereby causing nonconformities.<br>Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws.<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>Loose connections may cause malfunctions.<br>When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits.<br>Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC’s ventilation port when installation work is completed.<br>Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>Connect the extension cables, peripheral device cables, input/output cables and battery connecting cable securely<br>to their designated connectors.<br>Loose connections may cause malfunctions.<br>Connect the display module, memory cassette, and expansion board securely to their designated connectors.<br>Loose connections may cause malfunctions.<br>Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices.<br>Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions.<br>-<br>Peripheral devices, display modules, expansion boards and special adapters<br>-<br>Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks<br>-<br>Battery and memory cassette<br>Connect the memory cassette securely to the appropriate connector.<br>Loose connections may cause malfunctions.<br>Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions.<br>Terminal block<br>DIN rail only<br>Main unit, FX2NSeries I/O extension unit/block, FX2N/FX3USeries special<br>function block, and special adapter<br>DIN rail or direct mounting|96<br>345|



## **3. WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

||**Reference**|
|---|---|
|•<br>Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.<br>•<br>Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation<br>after installation or wiring work.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock.|96<br>118<br>134<br>167<br>181<br>219<br>240<br>345|



(2) 

## **Safety Precautions** 

(Read these precautions before use.) 

||**Reference**|
|---|---|
|•<br>Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service power supply) on the main unit or extension<br>units.<br>Doing so may cause damage to the product.<br>•<br>Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100<br>or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit and<br>extension units with a wire 2 mm2or thicker.<br>Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to section 9.3).<br>•<br>Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.<br>If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn<br>out.<br>•<br>Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.<br>If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn<br>out.<br>•<br>Do not wire vacant terminals externally.<br>Doing so may damage the product.<br>•<br>When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.<br>Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>•<br>Make sure to properly wire the FX3GSeries main unit and FX2N/FX3USeries extension equipment in accordance<br>with the following precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or<br>damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>•<br>Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or<br>damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>-<br>Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.<br>-<br>Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.<br>-<br>Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.<br>-<br>Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.<br>•<br>Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or<br>damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.|97<br>119<br>135<br>168<br>171<br>176<br>177<br>180<br>182<br>219<br>240<br>345<br>354|



## **4. STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS** 

||**Reference**|
|---|---|
|•<br>Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.<br>Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.<br>•<br>Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock.<br>•<br>Use the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual.<br>-<br>Use the battery only for the specified purpose.<br>-<br>Connect the battery correctly.<br>-<br>Do not charge, disassemble, heat, put in fire, short-circuit, connect reversely, weld, swallow or burn the battery,<br>or apply excessive forces (vibration, impact, drop, etc.) to the battery.<br>-<br>Do not store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight.<br>-<br>Do not expose to water, bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly.<br>-<br>Incorrect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation, bursting, ignition, liquid leakage or<br>deformation, and lead to injury, fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment.<br>•<br>Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and<br>the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.<br>An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.<br>•<br>Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time. (i.e. from<br>a programming tool and a GOT)<br>Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program.|194<br>299<br>377|



(3) 

## **Safety Precautions** 

(Read these precautions before use.) 

||**Reference**|
|---|---|
|•<br>Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette. If the memory cassette is<br>attached or detached while the PLC’s power is on, the data in the memory may be destroyed, or the memory<br>cassette may be damaged.<br>•<br>Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.<br>Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.<br>For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.<br>•<br>Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.<br>Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>•<br>Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices.<br>Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>-<br>Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards, and special adapters<br>-<br>Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks<br>-<br>Battery and memory cassette|194<br>299<br>367<br>377|



## **5. DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS** 

||**Reference**|
|---|---|
|•<br>Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of<br>your device.<br>When disposing of batteries, separate them from other waste according to local regulations.<br>(For details of the Battery Directive in EU countries, refer to Appendix E)|194|
|**6. TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS**||
||**Reference**|
|•<br>When transporting the FX3GSeries PLC incorporating the optional battery, turn on the PLC before shipment,<br>confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF, and check the battery life.<br>If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted, the battery-backed data may be unstable<br>during transportation.<br>•<br>The PLC is a precision instrument. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general<br>specifications (section 4.1). Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC.<br>After transportation, verify the operations of the PLC.<br>•<br>When transporting lithium batteries, follow required transportation regulations.<br>(For details of the regulated products, refer to Appendix D)|194<br>377|



(4) 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 

**==> picture [499 x 114] intentionally omitted <==**

## **FX3G Series Programmable Controllers** 

## **User's Manual [Hardware Edition]** 

**==> picture [499 x 114] intentionally omitted <==**

|Manual number|JY997D31301|
|---|---|
|Manual revision|H|
|Date|5/2012|



## **Foreword** 

This manual contains text, diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation, safe use and operation of the FX3G Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit. 

And, store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user. 

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual. 

© 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 

**1** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 

## **Outline Precautions** 

- This manual provides information for the use of the FX3G Series Programmable Controllers. The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of such a person or persons is as follows; 

   - 1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment. 

   - 2) Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job. These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices. 

   - 3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices. The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment. 

   - **Note:** the term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual 

- This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life. 

- Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric. 

- This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system. 

- When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standard and the code, or regulations with which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system, machine, and apparatus with which a user is using. 

- If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or use, please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative. 

- Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference, please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples. 

- This manual content, specification etc. may be changed without a notice for improvement. 

- The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you have noticed a doubtful point, a doubtful error, etc., please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative. 

## **Registration** 

- Microsoft[®] and Windows[®] are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 

- The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company. 

**2** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

## **Table of Contents** 

||**SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................................................(1)**|
|---|---|
||**Standards**<br>**14**|
||Certification of UL, cUL standards ................................................................................................ 14|
||Compliance with EC directive (CE Marking) ................................................................................. 14|
||Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive................................................................... 14|
||Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive.................................................................... 17|
||Caution for compliance with EC Directive.............................................................................. 18|
||**1.  Introduction**<br>**19**|
||1.1  Introduction of Manuals................................................................................................................. 19|
||1.1.1  Classification of major components in this manual........................................................................ 19|
||1.1.2  Manual organization and position of this manual .......................................................................... 21|
||1.1.3  List of manuals .............................................................................................................................. 22|
||1.2  Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals.................................................................... 26|
||**2.  Features and Part Names**<br>**28**|
||2.1  Major Features.............................................................................................................................. 28|
||2.2  Names and Functions of Parts...................................................................................................... 30|
||2.2.1  Front Panel.................................................................................................................................... 30|
||2.2.2  Sides.............................................................................................................................................. 32|
||**3.  Introduction of Products**<br>**33**|
||3.1  List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names..................................................................... 33|
||3.1.1  Main units ...................................................................................................................................... 34|
||3.1.2  Input/output powered extension units............................................................................................ 35|
||3.1.3  Input/output extension blocks........................................................................................................ 36|
||3.1.4  Special function blocks.................................................................................................................. 37|
||3.1.5  Display module.............................................................................................................................. 37|
||3.1.6  Expansion boards.......................................................................................................................... 37|
||3.1.7  Connector conversion adapter ...................................................................................................... 38|
||3.1.8  Special adapters............................................................................................................................ 38|
||3.1.9  Extension power supply unit.......................................................................................................... 38|
||3.1.10  Extension cables and connector conversion adapter/ Battery/Memory cassettes ...................... 38|
||3.1.11  FX Series terminal blocks (cables and connectors) .................................................................... 39|
||3.1.12  Remote I/O .................................................................................................................................. 39|
||3.1.13  Power supply unit ........................................................................................................................ 39|
||3.2  Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication.......................................................... 40|
||3.2.1  Programming tool .......................................................................................................................... 41|
||3.2.2  Communication cables .................................................................................................................. 41|
||3.2.3  Converters and interface ............................................................................................................... 41|
||3.2.4  The accessing path to the FX3Gfrom CC-Link ............................................................................. 42|
||**4.  Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units)**<br>**43**|
||4.1  Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................. 43|
||4.1.1  Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test..................................................... 44|
||4.2  Power Supply Specifications......................................................................................................... 45|
||4.2.1  AC Power Supply Type ................................................................................................................. 45|
||4.2.2  DC Power Supply Type ................................................................................................................. 45|



**3** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

4.3  Input Specifications....................................................................................................................... 46 4.3.1  24V DC Input (sink/source) ........................................................................................................... 46 4.4  Output Specifications .................................................................................................................... 47 4.4.1  Relay output .................................................................................................................................. 47 4.4.2  Transistor output............................................................................................................................ 48 4.5  Performance Specifications .......................................................................................................... 49 4.6  External Dimensions (Weight/Accessories/Installation)................................................................ 51 4.6.1  Main units ...................................................................................................................................... 51 4.7  Terminal Layout ............................................................................................................................ 52 4.7.1  Interpretation of terminal block layout............................................................................................ 52 4.7.2  FX3G-14M� .................................................................................................................................. 53 4.7.3  FX3G-24M� .................................................................................................................................. 53 4.7.4  FX3G-40M� .................................................................................................................................. 54 4.7.5  FX3G-60M� .................................................................................................................................. 54 

||**5.**|**Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability**<br>**55**|
|---|---|---|
|||5.1  Version Information....................................................................................................................... 55|
|||5.1.1  Manufacturer's serial number check method................................................................................. 55|
|||5.1.2  Version check method................................................................................................................... 56|
|||5.1.3  Version upgrade history................................................................................................................. 56|
|||5.2  Programming Tool Applicability..................................................................................................... 57|
|||5.2.1  Applicable versions of programming tool....................................................................................... 57|
|||5.2.2  In the case of programming tool (version) not applicable.............................................................. 58|
|||5.2.3  Program transfer speed and programming tools........................................................................... 58|
|||5.2.4  Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter..... 59|
|||5.2.5  Cautions on write during RUN....................................................................................................... 59|
|||5.3  Precautions on Use of (Built-in USB) Programming Port.............................................................. 62|
|||5.3.1  Installation of USB driver (GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later)....................................................... 62|
|||5.3.2  Setting in GX Developer (Ver. 8.72A or later) ............................................................................... 62|
|||5.4  Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series ................................ 63|
|||5.5  Cautions on using transparent port (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series ................................... 64|
|||5.6  Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability...................................................................................... 65|
|||5.6.1  Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability...................................................................................... 65|
||**6.**|**Examination of System Configuration**<br>**66**|
|||6.1  Configuration of a Whole System.................................................................................................. 66|
|||6.1.1Expansion board/connector conversion adapter/memory cassette/display module configuration...... 67|
|||6.2  Rules of System Configuration...................................................................................................... 68|
|||6.3  Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output  Points ........................... 70|
|||6.3.1  Calculation of number of input/output points ................................................................................. 70|
|||6.3.2  Maximum number of input/output points when CC-Link master is used ....................................... 72|
|||6.4  Number of Connected Extension Devices (Including Extension Cable) ....................................... 73|
|||6.4.1  Number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters.................................................. 73|
|||6.4.2  Input/output powered extension units............................................................................................ 73|
|||6.4.3  Extension Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................................ 73|
|||6.4.4  Special function blocks.................................................................................................................. 73|
|||6.4.5  Extension cable ............................................................................................................................. 73|
|||6.5  Expansion of Main Unit ................................................................................................................. 74|
|||6.5.1  When adding input/output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the|
|||main unit........................................................................................................................................ 75|
|||6.5.2  Selection example 1 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit............................. 77|
|||6.5.3  Selection example 2 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit............................. 78|
|||6.6  Expansion of FX2NSeries I/O Powered Extension Unit ............................................................... 79|
|||6.6.1  Quick reference matrix (when only input/output devices are added)............................................. 79|
|||6.6.2  When special extension devices are also added (calculation of current consumption)................. 82|
|||6.7  Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V)...................................................... 84|



**4** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

|||6.8  Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption......................................... 86|
|---|---|---|
|||6.8.1  [A] Main units................................................................................................................................. 86|
|||6.8.2  [B] Input/output powered extension units/blocks ........................................................................... 87|
|||6.8.3  [C] Special function devices .......................................................................................................... 88|
|||6.8.4  [D] Extension Power Supply Unit................................................................................................... 88|
||**7.**|**Assignment of Input/Output Numbers and Unit Numbers**<br>**89**|
|||7.1  Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y)..................................................................................89|
|||7.1.1  Concept of assigning..................................................................................................................... 89|
|||7.1.2  Example of assigning .................................................................................................................... 90|
|||7.1.3  Application of I/O number label ..................................................................................................... 90|
|||7.2  Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks..................................................................................... 91|
|||7.2.1  Concept of assigning..................................................................................................................... 91|
|||7.2.2  Example of assigning .................................................................................................................... 91|
|||7.2.3  Application of unit number labels................................................................................................... 92|
|||7.3  Assignment of Communication Channels ..................................................................................... 93|
|||7.3.1  Assignment of communication channels ....................................................................................... 93|
|||7.4  "Station No." Label of Expansion Board (FX3G-485-BD).............................................................. 94|
|||7.5  Trimmer Layout Label of Expansion Board (FX3G-8AV-BD) ........................................................ 94|
||**8.**|**Installation In Enclosure**<br>**95**|
|||8.1  Installation location........................................................................................................................ 98|
|||8.1.1  Installation location in enclosure.................................................................................................... 98|
|||8.1.2  Spaces in enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 99|
|||8.2  Layout in Enclosure....................................................................................................................... 99|
|||8.2.1  1-stage layout................................................................................................................................ 99|
|||8.2.2  2-stage layout.............................................................................................................................. 100|
|||8.3  Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure .......................................................................... 101|
|||8.3.1  Installing methods........................................................................................................................ 101|
|||8.3.2  Cautions on examining installing method.................................................................................... 101|
|||8.3.3  Examples of installation............................................................................................................... 101|
|||8.4  Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail.......................................................... 103|
|||8.4.1  Preparation for installation........................................................................................................... 103|
|||8.4.2  Installation of main unit................................................................................................................ 104|
|||8.4.3  Installation of input/output powered extension unit/block and special function block.................. 105|
|||8.4.4  Removal of main unit................................................................................................................... 106|
|||8.5  Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws).................................................................... 107|
|||8.5.1  Hole pitches for direct mounting.................................................................................................. 107|
|||8.5.2  Example of mounting hole pitches............................................................................................... 109|
|||8.5.3  Installation of main unit................................................................................................................ 110|
|||8.5.4  Installation of input/output powered extension unit/block and special function block.................. 110|
|||8.6  Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices ........................................................ 111|
|||8.6.1  Connection of extension devices................................................................................................. 111|
|||8.6.2  Connecting method A - connection of expansion board.............................................................. 112|
|||8.6.3  Connecting method B - connection of connector conversion adapter......................................... 113|
|||8.6.4  Connecting method C - connection of special adapter................................................................ 115|
|||8.6.5  Connecting method D - connection of powered extension units/blocks to main unit................... 115|
|||8.6.6  Connecting method E - connection of powered extension units/blocks ...................................... 116|
|||8.6.7  Connecting method F - connection of extension cable and FX2N-CNV-BC................................ 116|
|||8.6.8  Connecting method G - connection of input/output powered extension unit ............................... 117|
|||8.6.9  Connecting method H - connection of extension block to input/output powered extension unit.. 117|
||**9.**|**Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures**<br>**118**|
|||9.1  Preparation for Wiring ................................................................................................................. 120|
|||9.1.1  Wiring procedures ....................................................................................................................... 120|
|||9.1.2  Removal and installation of quick-release terminal block............................................................ 120|



**5** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

||9.2  Cable Connecting Procedures .................................................................................................... 121|
|---|---|
||9.2.1  Input/output terminal block (power supply and input/output wiring)............................................. 121|
||9.2.2  Input/output connectors............................................................................................................... 124|
||9.2.3  Terminal block (for europe) [expansion board and special adapters].......................................... 125|
||9.3  Grounding ................................................................................................................................... 126|
||9.4  Examples of External Wiring [AC Power Supply Type]............................................................... 127|
||9.4.1  Example of input/output wiring with 24V DC service power supply............................................. 127|
||9.4.2  Example of sink input [-common] wiring...................................................................................... 128|
||9.4.3  Example of source input [+common] wiring................................................................................. 129|
||9.4.4  An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit (sink input [-common]) ............ 130|
||9.4.5  An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit (source input [+common])....... 131|
||9.5  Examples of External Wiring [DC Power Supply Type]............................................................... 132|
||9.5.1  Example of sink input [-common] wiring...................................................................................... 132|
||9.5.2  Example of source input [+common] wiring................................................................................. 133|
||**10.  Input Wiring Procedures**<br>**134**|
||10.1  Before Starting Input Wiring...................................................................................................... 136|
||10.1.1  Sink and source input................................................................................................................ 136|
||10.2  24V DC input (Sink and source input type)............................................................................... 138|
||10.2.1  Handling of 24V DC input.......................................................................................................... 138|
||10.2.2  Instructions for connecting input devices................................................................................... 139|
||10.2.3  Examples of external wiring (sink input) [AC Power Supply Type]............................................ 141|
||10.2.4  Examples of external wiring (source input) [AC Power Supply Type] ....................................... 143|
||10.2.5  Examples of external wiring (sink input) [DC Power Supply Type]............................................ 144|
||10.2.6  Examples of external wiring (source input) [DC Power Supply Type] ....................................... 146|
||10.3  100V AC Input........................................................................................................................... 147|
||10.3.1  Input specifications.................................................................................................................... 147|
||10.3.2  Handling of 100V AC Input........................................................................................................ 147|
||10.3.3  Examples of external wiring (100V AC input)............................................................................ 148|
||10.4  Input Interruption (I00�to I50�) .............................................................................................. 149|
||10.4.1  Allocation of pointers to input numbers (input signal ON/OFF duration) ................................... 149|
||10.4.2  Cautions for input interruption ................................................................................................... 149|
||10.4.3  Examples of external wiring....................................................................................................... 150|
||10.5  Pulse Catch (M8170 to M8175) ................................................................................................ 151|
||10.5.1  Allocation of special memories to input numbers (ON duration of input signals) ...................... 151|
||10.5.2  Cautions for pulse catch............................................................................................................ 151|
||10.5.3  Examples of external wiring....................................................................................................... 152|
||10.6  Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function (Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later)................... 153|
||10.6.1  Allocation of special memories to input numbers ...................................................................... 153|
||10.6.2  Cautions for pulse width/period measurement function............................................................. 153|
||10.6.3  Examples of external wiring....................................................................................................... 154|
||**11.  Use of High-speed Counters**<br>**155**|
||11.1  Outline....................................................................................................................................... 155|
||11.2  Types of Counting and Operations ........................................................................................... 155|
||11.2.1  Types and input signal forms..................................................................................................... 155|
||11.2.2  High-speed counter device notations ........................................................................................ 155|
||11.2.3  Cautions in connecting mating device....................................................................................... 155|
||11.3  List of Device Numbers and Functions ..................................................................................... 156|
||11.4  Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers ...................................................................... 157|
||11.4.1  Allocation table .......................................................................................................................... 157|
||11.4.2  Restriction of redundant use of input numbers.......................................................................... 157|
||11.5  Handling of High-speed Counters............................................................................................. 158|
||11.5.1  1-phase 1-count input................................................................................................................ 158|
||11.5.2  1-phase 2-count input................................................................................................................ 159|
||11.5.3  2-phase 2-count input................................................................................................................ 160|



**6** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

||11.6  Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value .................................. 161|
|---|---|
||11.6.1  Timing of updating of current value ........................................................................................... 161|
||11.6.2  Comparison of current value ..................................................................................................... 161|
||11.7  Response Frequency and Overall Frequency........................................................................... 162|
||11.8  Examples of External Wiring (Rotary Encoder)......................................................................... 163|
||11.8.1  1-phase 1-input [C235 to C245] ................................................................................................ 163|
||11.8.2  2-phase 2-input [C251 to C255] ................................................................................................ 164|
||11.9  Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures .............................................................. 165|
||11.9.1  Related devices......................................................................................................................... 165|
||11.9.2  [Function switching] switching of allocation and functions of input terminals ............................ 166|
||11.10  Cautions on Use...................................................................................................................... 166|
||**12.  Output Wiring Procedures**<br>**167**|
||12.1  External Wiring for Relay Output Type...................................................................................... 169|
||12.1.1  Product life of relay contacts ..................................................................................................... 169|
||12.1.2  Handling of relay output............................................................................................................. 169|
||12.1.3  External wiring precautions ....................................................................................................... 170|
||12.1.4  Example of external wiring ........................................................................................................ 171|
||12.2  External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type ......................................................... 172|
||12.2.1  Transistor Output Sink and Source ........................................................................................... 172|
||12.2.2  Handling of transistor output...................................................................................................... 173|
||12.2.3  External wiring precautions ....................................................................................................... 175|
||12.2.4  Example of external wiring ........................................................................................................ 176|
||12.3  External Wiring for Triac (SSR) Output Type............................................................................ 178|
||12.3.1  Handling of triac output.............................................................................................................. 178|
||12.3.2  External wiring precautions ....................................................................................................... 179|
||12.3.3  Example of external wiring ........................................................................................................ 180|
||**13.  Examples of Wiring for Various Uses**<br>**181**|
||13.1  Notes about Examples of Wiring............................................................................................... 182|
||13.2  Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]...................................... 183|
||13.2.1  When DSW instructions are used.............................................................................................. 183|
||13.2.2  When BIN instructions are used................................................................................................ 186|
||13.3  Input Matrix [MTR Instructions (FNC 52)] ................................................................................. 187|
||13.4  Seven Segment with Latch [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)].............. 190|
||13.4.1  When SEGL instructions are used ............................................................................................ 190|
||13.4.2  When BCD instructions are used .............................................................................................. 192|
||**14.  Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting**<br>**194**|
||14.1  Preparation for Test Operation.................................................................................................. 195|
||14.1.1  Preliminary inspection [power OFF] .......................................................................................... 195|
||14.1.2  Connection to built-in programming connector (RS-422) .......................................................... 195|
||14.1.3  Connection to built-in programming connector (USB)............................................................... 196|
||14.1.4  Writing of program and program check [power ON and PLC stopped] ..................................... 197|
||14.2  Running and Stopping Procedures [Power ON]........................................................................ 198|
||14.2.1  Methods of running and stopping .............................................................................................. 198|
||14.2.2  Use of several running/stopping methods ................................................................................. 199|
||14.3  Operation and Test [Power ON and PLC Running] .................................................................. 200|
||14.3.1  Self-diagnostic function ............................................................................................................. 200|
||14.3.2  Test functions ............................................................................................................................ 200|
||14.3.3  Program modification function................................................................................................... 201|
||14.3.4  Built-in variable analog potentiometer function.......................................................................... 201|
||14.4  Maintenance and Periodic Inspection ....................................................................................... 202|
||14.4.1  Procedures for checking model name....................................................................................... 202|
||14.4.2  Periodic inspection - battery life, etc.......................................................................................... 202|
||14.4.3  Maintenance -  product life of relay contacts............................................................................. 203|



**7** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

14.5  Troubleshooting with LEDs ....................................................................................................... 205 14.5.1  POW LED [on/flashing/off]......................................................................................................... 205 14.5.2  ALM LED [on/off] ....................................................................................................................... 205 14.5.3  ERR LED [on/flashing/off].......................................................................................................... 206 14.6  Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes ................................................ 207 14.6.1  Operation and check by GX Developer..................................................................................... 207 14.6.2  Operation and check on display module (FX3G-5DM) .............................................................. 208 14.6.3  Representation of errors............................................................................................................ 209 14.6.4  Error Code List and Action ........................................................................................................ 210 14.7  Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 217 14.7.1  Output does not operate (main unit and input/output extension blocks) ................................... 217 14.7.2  24V DC input does not operate (main unit and input/output extension blocks)......................... 217 14.7.3  Cautions in registering keyword ................................................................................................ 218 

||**15.  Input/Output Powered Extension Units**<br>**219**|
|---|---|
||15.1  Outline....................................................................................................................................... 220|
||15.1.1  Product configuration................................................................................................................. 220|
||15.1.2  Product list................................................................................................................................. 220|
||15.2  Power supply specifications...................................................................................................... 221|
||15.2.1  Weight, accessories, etc............................................................................................................ 221|
||15.2.2  Part names ................................................................................................................................ 222|
||15.3  FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS........................................................ 224|
||15.3.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 224|
||15.3.2  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 225|
||15.3.3  Terminal layout.......................................................................................................................... 226|
||15.4  FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS.................................................. 227|
||15.4.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 227|
||15.4.2  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 228|
||15.4.3  Terminal layout.......................................................................................................................... 229|
||15.5  FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D.................................................................................. 230|
||15.5.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 230|
||15.5.2  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 231|
||15.5.3  Terminal layout.......................................................................................................................... 232|
||15.6  FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D................................................................................... 233|
||15.6.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 233|
||15.6.2  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 234|
||15.6.3  Terminal layout.......................................................................................................................... 235|
||15.7  FX2N-32ES ............................................................................................................................... 236|
||15.7.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 236|
||15.7.2  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 237|
||15.7.3  Terminal layout.......................................................................................................................... 237|
||15.8  FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL ................................................................................................................. 238|
||15.8.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 238|
||15.8.2  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 239|
||15.8.3  Terminal layout.......................................................................................................................... 239|



||**16.  Input/Output Extension Blocks**<br>**240**|
|---|---|
||16.1  Outline....................................................................................................................................... 241|
||16.1.1  Product configuration................................................................................................................. 241|
||16.1.2  Product list................................................................................................................................. 241|
||16.2  FX2N-8ER-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input, Relay Output) ................................................. 243|
||16.2.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 243|
||16.2.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement........................................................................... 244|
||16.2.3  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 245|
||16.3  FX2N-8ER (24V DC Sink Input, Relay Output) ......................................................................... 246|
||16.3.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 246|
||16.3.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement........................................................................... 247|
||16.3.3  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 248|



**8** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

16.4  FX2N-8EX-ES/UL, FX2N-16EX-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input) ........................................ 249 16.4.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 249 16.4.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement........................................................................... 250 16.4.3  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 251 16.5  FX2N-8EX, FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C .............................................................................. 252 16.5.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 252 16.5.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement........................................................................... 253 16.5.3  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 254 16.6  FX2N-16EXL-C (5V DC Input: 16 Points).................................................................................. 256 16.6.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 256 16.6.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement........................................................................... 257 16.6.3  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 257 16.6.4  Example of wiring ...................................................................................................................... 257 16.7  FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL (100V AC Input)......................................................................................... 259 16.7.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 259 16.7.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement........................................................................... 260 16.7.3  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 260 16.8  FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output) ................... 261 16.8.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 261 16.8.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement........................................................................... 262 16.8.3  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 264 16.9  FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL, FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output) ............................................. 265 16.9.1  Product specifications................................................................................................................ 265 16.9.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement........................................................................... 266 16.9.3  External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 267 16.10  FX2N-8EYR, FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output) ............................................................................. 268 16.10.1  Product specifications.............................................................................................................. 268 16.10.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement......................................................................... 269 16.10.3  External dimensions ................................................................................................................ 270 16.11  FX2N-8EYT, FX2N-16EYT, FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output) ............................................ 271 16.11.1  Product specifications.............................................................................................................. 271 16.11.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement......................................................................... 272 16.11.3  External dimensions ................................................................................................................ 273 16.12  FX2N-8EYT-H (Transistor Output) .......................................................................................... 275 16.12.1  Product specifications.............................................................................................................. 275 16.12.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement......................................................................... 276 16.12.3  External dimensions ................................................................................................................ 276 16.13  FX2N-16EYS (Triac Output: 16 Points)................................................................................... 277 16.13.1  Product specifications.............................................................................................................. 277 16.13.2  Parts identification and terminal arrangement......................................................................... 278 16.13.3  External dimensions ................................................................................................................ 278 

||**17.  Extension Power Supply Unit**<br>**279**|
|---|---|
||17.1  Outline....................................................................................................................................... 279|
||17.2  Specifications............................................................................................................................ 280|
||17.2.1  Generic Specifications............................................................................................................... 280|
||17.2.2  Performance Specifications....................................................................................................... 280|
||17.2.3  External Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 280|
||17.3  Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution .................................................................... 281|



## **18.  Other Extension Devices and Optional Units** 

||**18.  Other Extension Devices and Optional Units**|
|---|---|
||**(External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement)**<br>**282**|
||18.1  Special Function Units/Blocks................................................................................................... 282|
||18.1.1  FX2N-2AD.................................................................................................................................. 282|
||18.1.2  FX2N-2DA.................................................................................................................................. 282|
||18.1.3  FX3U-4AD.................................................................................................................................. 283|
||18.1.4  FX3U-4DA.................................................................................................................................. 283|
||18.1.5  FX2N-4AD.................................................................................................................................. 284|



**9** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

||18.1.6  FX2N-4DA.................................................................................................................................. 284|
|---|---|
||18.1.7  FX2N-4AD-PT............................................................................................................................ 285|
||18.1.8  FX2N-4AD-TC............................................................................................................................ 285|
||18.1.9  FX2N-5A .................................................................................................................................... 286|
||18.1.10  FX3U-4LC ................................................................................................................................ 286|
||18.1.11  FX2N-2LC ................................................................................................................................ 287|
||18.1.12  FX2N-8AD................................................................................................................................ 287|
||18.1.13  FX3U-16CCL-M ....................................................................................................................... 288|
||18.1.14  FX2N-16CCL-M ....................................................................................................................... 288|
||18.1.15  FX2N-32CCL ........................................................................................................................... 289|
||18.1.16  FX3U-64CCL ........................................................................................................................... 289|
||18.1.17  FX2N-64CL-M.......................................................................................................................... 290|
||18.2  Special Adapters....................................................................................................................... 291|
||18.2.1  FX3U-4AD-ADP ......................................................................................................................... 291|
||18.2.2  FX3U-4DA-ADP ......................................................................................................................... 291|
||18.2.3  FX3U-3A-ADP............................................................................................................................ 291|
||18.2.4  FX3U-4AD-PT(W)-ADP ............................................................................................................. 292|
||18.2.5  FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP ................................................................................................................ 292|
||18.2.6  FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP ................................................................................................................... 292|
||18.2.7  FX3U-232ADP(-MB) .................................................................................................................. 293|
||18.2.8  FX3U-485ADP(-MB) .................................................................................................................. 293|
||18.3  Expansion Board....................................................................................................................... 294|
||18.3.1  FX3G-232-BD ............................................................................................................................ 294|
||18.3.2  FX3G-422-BD ............................................................................................................................ 294|
||18.3.3  FX3G-485-BD ............................................................................................................................ 295|
||18.3.4  FX3G-2AD-BD ........................................................................................................................... 295|
||18.3.5  FX3G-1DA-BD ........................................................................................................................... 296|
||18.3.6  FX3G-8AV-BD ........................................................................................................................... 296|
||18.4  Power Supply............................................................................................................................ 297|
||18.4.1  FX2N-20PSU ............................................................................................................................. 297|
||18.5  Connector Conversion Adapter................................................................................................. 297|
||18.5.1  FX3G-CNV-ADP ........................................................................................................................ 297|
||18.5.2  FX2N-CNV-BC........................................................................................................................... 298|
||18.6  Interface Module ....................................................................................................................... 298|
||18.6.1  FX-232AWC-H........................................................................................................................... 298|
||**19.  Display Module(FX3G-5DM)**<br>**299**|
||19.1  Specifications............................................................................................................................ 299|
||19.1.1  Applicable PLC.......................................................................................................................... 299|
||19.1.2  Display/switch specifications ..................................................................................................... 299|
||19.1.3  Part Names................................................................................................................................ 300|
||19.1.4  External Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 300|
||19.2  Installation and Removal........................................................................................................... 301|
||19.2.1  Installation (when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter is not used together)... 301|
||19.2.2  Installation (when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter is used together)......... 302|
||19.3  Summary of Functions .............................................................................................................. 303|
||19.4  Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen ............................................ 304|
||19.4.1  Title screen................................................................................................................................ 304|
||19.4.2  Top screen (time display) .......................................................................................................... 304|
||19.4.3  Menu screen.............................................................................................................................. 304|
||19.5  Menu Structure.......................................................................................................................... 305|
||19.6  Monitor/Test Mode .................................................................................................................... 307|
||19.6.1  Relevant devices ....................................................................................................................... 307|
||19.6.2  Monitor mode operation............................................................................................................. 308|
||19.6.3  Monitor screen and status display............................................................................................. 309|
||19.6.4  Test mode operation.................................................................................................................. 311|
||19.6.5  Test mode operation notes........................................................................................................ 314|
||19.7  Error Check............................................................................................................................... 314|



**10** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

||19.8  LANGUAGE (Menu Display Language Setting)........................................................................ 315|
|---|---|
||19.8.1  Changing to Japanese menus................................................................................................... 315|
||19.8.2  Changing to English menus....................................................................................................... 316|
||19.8.3  D8302 changes by program and related devices...................................................................... 316|
||19.9  Contrast..................................................................................................................................... 317|
||19.10  Clock Menu (Current Time Setting)......................................................................................... 318|
||19.10.1  Clock setting procedure........................................................................................................... 318|
||19.10.2  Displaying the current time...................................................................................................... 319|
||19.10.3  Changing the current time's "Year" from 2-digit format to 4-digit format ................................. 319|
||19.11  Keyword .................................................................................................................................. 320|
||19.11.1  Keyword types and levels........................................................................................................ 320|
||19.11.2  Level-specific restrictions screen list ....................................................................................... 320|
||19.11.3  Keyword storage...................................................................................................................... 321|
||19.11.4  Screens requiring keyword for access..................................................................................... 321|
||19.11.5  Canceling a keyword ............................................................................................................... 322|
||19.11.6  Enabling a keyword ................................................................................................................. 323|
||19.12  Memory Cassette Transfers.................................................................................................... 324|
||19.12.1  Transfer from internal EEPROM to memory cassette (Cassette <- PLC) ............................... 324|
||19.12.2  Transfer from memory cassette to internal EEPROM (Cassette -> PLC) ............................... 325|
||19.13  System Information (Restrictions From PLC).......................................................................... 327|
||19.13.1  System information list ............................................................................................................ 327|
||19.13.2  System information setting program example ......................................................................... 327|
||19.14  Specified Device Monitor Function.......................................................................................... 328|
||19.14.1  System information - specified device monitor function .......................................................... 328|
||19.14.2  Differences between specified device monitor screen and monitor/test screen...................... 329|
||19.14.3  Program example1 (when monitoring/testing a timer)............................................................. 329|
||19.14.4  Program example2 (when monitoring consecutive timers using operation keys).................... 330|
||19.14.5  Program example3 (when monitoring non-consecutive timers using operation keys) ............ 331|
||19.14.6  Monitor operation on specified device monitor screen ............................................................ 332|
||19.14.7  Specified device monitor screen for monitoring....................................................................... 332|
||19.14.8  Test operation on specified device monitor screen ................................................................. 333|
||19.15  Screen saver function ............................................................................................................. 334|
||19.15.1  System information - Screen saver function............................................................................ 334|
||19.15.2  Screen saver display ............................................................................................................... 334|
||19.15.3  Program example (screen saver time setting)......................................................................... 334|
||19.16  Display Screen Protect Function............................................................................................. 335|
||19.16.1  System information - display screen protect function.............................................................. 335|
||19.16.2  Program example (screen protect function setting)................................................................. 335|
||19.16.3  Keyword and display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions............... 336|
||19.16.4  Relationship between keyword and display screen protect function ....................................... 336|
||19.16.5  Keyword levels ........................................................................................................................ 337|
||19.16.6  Relationship between specified device monitor function and|
||display screen protect function................................................................................................ 337|
||19.16.7  Pointers for using the display screen protect function............................................................. 338|
||19.17  Operation Button ON/OFF Information ................................................................................... 339|
||19.17.1  Various applications ................................................................................................................ 339|
||19.17.2  System information - operation button ON/OFF information ................................................... 339|
||19.18  Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format ...................................................... 340|
||19.18.1  System information - specifying a hexadecimal current value display format ......................... 340|
||19.18.2  Program example 1 (specifying a hexadecimal data display format) ...................................... 340|
||19.18.3  Program example 2 (specifying a decadal data display format).............................................. 340|
||19.19  Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions................................................................. 341|
||19.19.1  When a "Fatal error occurred" message appears ................................................................... 342|
||19.20  Menu Display Characters - Japanese and English Display Character|
||Correspondence Table ...........................................................................................................343|
||**20.  Terminal Block**<br>**344**|
||20.1  Outline....................................................................................................................................... 346|
||20.1.1  Product configuration................................................................................................................. 347|
||20.2  External Dimensions and Component Names .......................................................................... 348|



**11** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

20.3  Terminal Layout ........................................................................................................................ 349 20.4  Installation Work........................................................................................................................ 351 20.4.1  Installation ................................................................................................................................. 351 20.4.2  Removal .................................................................................................................................... 351 20.4.3  Input/output cable connection.................................................................................................... 351 20.4.4  Connection to terminal block ..................................................................................................... 352 20.5  FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB ............................................................................................................ 353 20.5.1  Internal circuit ............................................................................................................................ 353 20.5.2  Example of input external wiring................................................................................................ 354 20.5.3  Output external wiring................................................................................................................ 354 20.6  FX-16EX-A1-TB ........................................................................................................................ 355 20.6.1  Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 355 20.6.2  Internal circuit ............................................................................................................................ 356 20.6.3  Example of input external wiring................................................................................................ 356 20.7  FX-16EYR-TB ........................................................................................................................... 357 20.7.1  Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 357 20.7.2  Internal circuit ............................................................................................................................ 358 20.7.3  Example of output external wiring ............................................................................................. 358 20.7.4  External wiring precautions ....................................................................................................... 359 20.7.5  Product life of relay contacts ..................................................................................................... 360 20.8  FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB ............................................................................................... 361 20.8.1  Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 361 20.8.2  Internal circuit ............................................................................................................................ 362 20.8.3  Example of output external wiring ............................................................................................. 362 20.8.4  External wiring precautions ....................................................................................................... 363 20.9  FX-16EYS-TB ........................................................................................................................... 364 20.9.1  Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 364 20.9.2  Internal circuit ............................................................................................................................ 365 20.9.3  Example of output external wiring ............................................................................................. 365 20.9.4  External wiring precautions ....................................................................................................... 366 

||**21.  Memory Cassette**<br>**367**|
|---|---|
||21.1  Outline....................................................................................................................................... 367|
||21.2  Specifications............................................................................................................................ 367|
||21.2.1  Electrical specifications ............................................................................................................. 367|
||21.2.2  Part names and External dimensions........................................................................................ 367|
||21.3  Installation................................................................................................................................. 368|
||21.3.1  Installation (when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter is not used together)... 368|
||21.3.2  Installation (when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter is used together)......... 369|
||21.4  Removal.................................................................................................................................... 371|
||21.4.1  Removal (when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter are not used together) ... 371|
||21.4.2  Removal (when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter are used together) ......... 372|
||21.5  Saved Data Content.................................................................................................................. 373|
||21.6  PROTECT Switch ..................................................................................................................... 374|
||21.6.1  PROTECT switch setting........................................................................................................... 374|
||21.6.2  PROTECT switch operation ...................................................................................................... 374|
||21.6.3  Precautions when setting and using the switch......................................................................... 374|
||21.7  Memory Cassette <-> PLC (EEPROM Memory) Transfers by Loader Function....................... 375|
||21.7.1  Writing (WR: 32L ->  PLC)......................................................................................................... 375|
||21.7.2  Reading (RD: 32L <- PLC) ........................................................................................................ 376|
||21.8  Operation Precautions .............................................................................................................. 376|
||**22.  Battery**<br>**377**|
||22.1  Battery Purpose ........................................................................................................................ 377|
||22.2  Specifications............................................................................................................................ 377|
||22.3  Setting for Battery ..................................................................................................................... 378|
||22.3.1  Attaching the battery.................................................................................................................. 378|
||22.3.2  Setting the battery mode (GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later) ................................................... 378|



**12** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_Table of Contents_ 

||22.4  Battery Handling........................................................................................................................ 379|22.4  Battery Handling........................................................................................................................ 379|
|---|---|---|
||22.4.1  Battery life and replacement guidelines..................................................................................... 379||
||22.4.2  Reading the date of manufacture .............................................................................................. 379||
||22.4.3  Special "battery low-voltage" device & notification program example ....................................... 379||
||22.5  Battery Replacement................................................................................................................. 380||
||22.6  Battery Related Precautions ..................................................................................................... 380||
||**Appendix A:  Special Device List**|**381**|
||Appendix A-1  Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511) ........................................................|381|
||Appendix A-2  Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)...........................................................|388|
||Appendix A-3  Analog expansion boards[M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279] ...................|394|
||Appendix A-3-1  Special auxiliary relays (M8260 to M8279)................................................................. 394||
||Appendix A-3-2  Special data registers (D8260 to D8279).................................................................... 395||
||Appendix A-4  Analog special adapters[M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299]......................|396|
||Appendix A-4-1  Special auxiliary relays (M8280 to M8299)................................................................. 396||
||Appendix A-4-2  Special data registers (D8280 to D8299).................................................................... 398||
||**Appendix B:  Instruction List**|**400**|
||Appendix B-1  Basic Instructions ...............................................................................................|400|
||Appendix B-2  Step Ladder Instructions ....................................................................................|400|
||Appendix B-3  Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number..............................|401|
||**Appendix C:  Discontinued models**|**405**|
||||
||**Appendix D:  Precautions for Battery Transportation**|**407**|
||Appendix D-1  Regulated FX3GSeries products.......................................................................|407|
||Appendix D-2  Transport guidelines ..........................................................................................|407|
||**Appendix E:  Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in**||
||**EU Member States**|**409**|
||Appendix E-1  Disposal precautions..........................................................................................|409|
||Appendix E-2  Exportation precautions .....................................................................................|409|
||Appendix E-3  Regulated FX3GSeries products .......................................................................|409|
||**Warranty.................................................................................................................................**|**411**|
||**Revised History .....................................................................................................................**|**412**|



**13** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Standards 

## **Standards** 

## **Certification of UL, cUL standards** 

FX3G series main units, FX3G series interface adapter, FX3U series special adapters and FX2N input/output extension units/blocks supporting UL, cUL standards are as follows: 

**UL, cUL file number : E95239** 

|**Models :**|**MELSEC FX3G/FX3U series manufactured**|**MELSEC FX3G/FX3U series manufactured**|**MELSEC FX3G/FX3U series manufactured**|||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||FX3G-<br>MR/ES|FX3G-<br>MT/ES|FX3G-|MT/ESS||
||FX3G-<br>MR/DS|FX3G-<br>MT/DS|FX3G-|MT/DSS||
||Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60<br>FX3G-CNV-ADP|||||
||FX3U-232ADP(-MB)|FX3U-485ADP(-MB)||||
||FX3U-4AD-ADP|FX3U-4DA-ADP|FX3U-3A-ADP||FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP|
||FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP|FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP|FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP|||
|**Models :**|**MELSEC FX2N series manufactured**|||||
||FX2N-<br>ER-ES/UL|FX2N-<br>ET-ESS/UL||||
||Where<br>indicates:32,48|||||
||FX2N-48ER-DS|FX2N-48ET-DSS|FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL|||
||FX2N-8ER-ES/UL|FX2N-8EX-ES/UL|FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL||FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL|
||FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL|FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL||||
||FX2N-16EX-ES/UL|FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL|FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL||FX2N-16EYS|



## **Compliance with EC directive (CE Marking)** 

This note does not guarantee that an entire mechanical module produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with the following standards. 

Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user / manufacturer. For more details please contact to the local Mitsubishi Electric sales site. 

## **Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive** 

The following products have shown compliance through direct testing (of the identified standards below) and design analysis (through the creation of a technical construction file) to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility (2004/108/EC) when used as directed by the appropriate documentation. 

## **Attention** 

- This products is designed for use in industrial applications. 

## **Note** 

- Manufactured by: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 

   - 2-7-3 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-8310 Japan 

- Manufactured at: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Himeji Works 840 Chiyoda-machi, Himeji, Hyogo, 670-8677 Japan 

- Authorized Representative in the European Community: Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Gothaer Str. 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany 

**14** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Standards 

|**Type :**<br>**Programmable Controller (Open Type Equipment)**<br>**Models :**<br>**MELSEC FX3G/FX3U series manufactured**<br>from June 1st, 2005<br>FX3U-232ADP<br>FX3U-485ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-ADP<br>FX3U-4DA-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP<br>from April 1st, 2007<br>FX3U-232ADP-MB<br>FX3U-485ADP-MB<br>from December 1st, 2007<br>FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP<br>from November 1st, 2008<br>FX3G-<br>MT/ES<br>Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60<br>FX3G-232-BD<br>FX3G-422-BD<br>FX3G-485-BD<br>FX3G-EEPROM-32L<br>FX3G-CNV-ADP<br>FX3G-2AD-BD<br>FX3G-1DA-BD<br>FX3G-8AV-BD<br>FX3G-5DM<br>from December 1st, 2008<br>FX3G-<br>MR/ES<br>Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60<br>from March 1st, 2009<br>FX3G-<br>MT/ESS<br>Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60<br>from June 1st, 2009<br>FX3U-3A-ADP<br>from December 1st, 2009<br>FX3G-<br>MR/DS<br>FX3G-<br>MT/DS<br>FX3G-<br>MT/DSS<br>Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60|**Type :**<br>**Programmable Controller (Open Type Equipment)**<br>**Models :**<br>**MELSEC FX3G/FX3U series manufactured**<br>from June 1st, 2005<br>FX3U-232ADP<br>FX3U-485ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-ADP<br>FX3U-4DA-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP<br>from April 1st, 2007<br>FX3U-232ADP-MB<br>FX3U-485ADP-MB<br>from December 1st, 2007<br>FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP<br>from November 1st, 2008<br>FX3G-<br>MT/ES<br>Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60<br>FX3G-232-BD<br>FX3G-422-BD<br>FX3G-485-BD<br>FX3G-EEPROM-32L<br>FX3G-CNV-ADP<br>FX3G-2AD-BD<br>FX3G-1DA-BD<br>FX3G-8AV-BD<br>FX3G-5DM<br>from December 1st, 2008<br>FX3G-<br>MR/ES<br>Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60<br>from March 1st, 2009<br>FX3G-<br>MT/ESS<br>Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60<br>from June 1st, 2009<br>FX3U-3A-ADP<br>from December 1st, 2009<br>FX3G-<br>MR/DS<br>FX3G-<br>MT/DS<br>FX3G-<br>MT/DSS<br>Where<br>indicates:14,24,40,60|
|---|---|
|**Standard**|**Remark**|
|EN61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers<br>- Equipment requirements and tests|Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.<br>EMI<br>•<br>Radiated Emission<br>•<br>Conducted Emission<br>EMS<br>•<br>Radiated electromagnetic field<br>•<br>Fast transient burst<br>•<br>Electrostatic discharge<br>•<br>High-energy surge<br>•<br>Voltage drops and interruptions<br>•<br>Conducted RF<br>•<br>Power frequency magnetic field|



**15** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Standards 

## **Models : MELSEC FX2N series manufactured** 

from July 1st, 1997 FX2NER-ES/UL FX2NET-ESS/UL Where indicates:32,48 FX2N-16EX-ES/UL FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL from April 1st, 1998 FX2N-48ER-DS FX2N-48ET-DSS from August 1st, 1998 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL from August 1st, 2005 FX2N-8ER-ES/UL FX2N-8EX-ES/UL FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL from September 1st, 2010 FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL 

For the products above, PLCs manufactured 

before March 31st, 2002 are compliant with EN50081-2 (EN61000-6-4) and EN50082-2 from April 1st, 2002 to April 30th, 2006 are compliant with EN50081-2 (EN61000-6-4) and EN61131-2:1994 +A11:1996+A12:2000 

after May 1st, 2006 are compliant with EN61131-2:2007 

|**Standard**|**Remark**|
|---|---|
|EN61000-6-4:2007 - Generic emission standard<br>Industrial environment<br>EN50081-2:1993<br>Electromagnetic compatibility|Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.<br>•<br>Emission-Enclosure port<br>•<br>Emission-Low voltage AC mains port<br>•<br>Emission-Telecommunications/network port|
|EN50082-2:1995<br>Electromagnetic compatibility<br>- Generic immunity standard<br>Industrial environment|Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.<br>•<br>RF immunity<br>•<br>Fast Transients<br>•<br>ESD<br>•<br>Conducted<br>•<br>Power magnetic fields|
|EN61131-2:1994<br>Programmable controllers<br>/A11:1996<br>- Equipment requirements and tests<br>/A12:2000|Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.<br>•<br>Radiated electromagnetic field<br>•<br>Fast transient burst<br>•<br>Electrostatic discharge<br>•<br>Damped oscillatory wave|
|EN61131-2:2007<br>Programmable controllers<br>- Equipment requirements and tests|Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.<br>EMI<br>•<br>Radiated Emission<br>•<br>Conducted Emission<br>EMS<br>•<br>Radiated electromagnetic field<br>•<br>Fast transient burst<br>•<br>Electrostatic discharge<br>•<br>High-energy surge<br>•<br>Voltage drops and interruptions<br>•<br>Conducted RF<br>•<br>Power frequency magnetic field|



**16** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Standards 

## **Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive** 

The following products have shown compliance through direct testing (of the identified standards below) and design analysis (through the creation of a technical construction file) to the European Directive for Low Voltage (2006/95/EC) when used as directed by the appropriate documentation. 

## **Type : Programmable Controller (Open Type Equipment)** 

**Models : MELSEC FX3G series manufactured** 

from November 1st, 2008 FX3GMT/ES Where indicates:14,24,40,60 from December 1st, 2008 FX3GMR/ES Where indicates:14,24,40,60 from March 1st, 2009 FX3GMT/ESS Where indicates:14,24,40,60 from December 1st, 2009 FX3GMR/DS Where indicates:14,24,40,60 **Standard Remark** EN61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a suitable - Equipment requirements and tests enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131-2:2007 

**Models : MELSEC FX2N series manufactured** 

from July 1st, 1997 FX2NER-ES/UL FX2NET-ESS/UL Where indicates:32,48 FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL from April 1st, 1998 FX2N-48ER-DS from August 1st, 1998 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL from August 1st, 2005 FX2N-8ER-ES/UL FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL from September 1st, 2010 FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL 

For the products above, PLCs manufactured before March 31st, 2002 are compliant with IEC1010-1 from April 1st, 2002 to April 30th, 2006 are compliant with EN61131-2:1994+A11:1996+A12:2000 after May 1st, 2006 are compliant with EN61131-2:2007 

|**Standard**|**Remark**|
|---|---|
|IEC1010-1:1990<br>Safety requirements for electrical<br>/A1:1992<br>equipment for measurement, control,<br>and laboratory use<br>- General requirements|The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a<br>suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of IEC 1010-<br>1:1990+A1:1992|
|EN61131-2:1994 Programmable controllers<br>/A11:1996 - Equipment requirements and tests<br>/A12:2000|The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a<br>suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131-<br>2:1994+A11:1996+A12:2000|
|EN61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers<br>- Equipment requirements and tests|The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a<br>suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131-2:2007|



**17** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Standards 

## **Caution for compliance with EC Directive** 

## **1. Installation in Enclosure** 

Programmable logic controllers are open-type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control boxes. Please use the FX3G Series programmable logic controllers while installed in conductive shielded control boxes. Please secure the control box lid to the control box (for conduction). Installation within a control box greatly affects the safety of the system and aids in shielding noise from the programmable logic controller. 

## **2. Caution for Analog Products in use** 

The analog products have been found to be compliant to the European standards in the aforesaid manual and directive. However, for the very best performance from what are in fact delicate measuring and controlled output devices, Mitsubishi Electric would like to make the following points; 

As analog devices are sensitive by nature, their use should be considered carefully. For users of proprietary cables (integral with sensors or actuators), these users should follow those manufacturers' installation requirements. 

Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used. If NO other EMC protection is provided, users may experience temporary loss or accuracy between +10% / -10% in very heavy industrial areas. However, Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed for the users complete control system. 

- Sensitive analog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling. Where possible, users should run analog cables separately. 

- Good cable shielding should be used. When terminating the shield at Earth - ensure that no earth loops are accidentally created. 

- When reading analog values, EMC accuracy can be improved by averaging the readings. This can be achieved either through functions on the analog special adapters/boards/blocks or through a user's program in the FX3G Series PLC main unit. 

**18** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction _1.1 Introduction of Manuals_ 

**1 2 3 4 5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**10** 

**10** 

## **1. Introduction** 

This manual explains the procedures for selecting the system components, main unit specifications and procedures for installing the main unit, specifications for the input/output powered extension units/blocks, and procedures for adding input/output devices, and procedures for operating the display module etc. FX3G PLCs can make various kinds of control in combination with the main unit functions and many extension devices (expansion board, special adapters and special function blocks). 

The detailed explanation of the sequence instructions, communication control, analog control and positioning control are given in separate manuals. 

→ **For information on manual organization, refer to Subsection 1.1.2.** 

## **1.1 Introduction of Manuals** 

## **1.1.1 Classification of major components in this manual** 

## **1) Main unit (Chapter 1 to Chapter 14)** 

|**Division**|**Outline**|**Reference**|
|---|---|---|
|Introduction of manuals|This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for obtaining the manuals<br>and the abbreviations.|Chapter 1|
|Features and part names|This chapter contains explanations of the product features and the names and<br>functions of the parts.|Chapter 2|
|Introduction of product|This chapter contains explanations of the structures for model names, extension<br>products.|Chapter 3|
|Specifications|This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for power supply and<br>input/output, external dimensions and terminal block layout.|Chapter 4|
|Version information|This chapter contains explanation for upgrading of FX3GPLCs and information for<br>the application of programming tools.|Chapter 5|
|System configuration|Procedure for determining whether or not a system configuration is possible.<br>Extension device current consumption and configuration examples.|Chapter 6|
|Input/output No. and unit No.<br>assignment|Input/output assignment procedure for input/output powered extension units/<br>blocks, etc., and unit No. assignment procedure for special function blocks.|Chapter 7|
|Installation|This chapter contains explanations for the panel layout and the procedures for<br>installing with DIN rail or screws and how to connect extension devices.|Chapter 8|
|Power supply wiring|This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for preparing for wiring,<br>power supply specifications and instructions for wiring.|Chapter 9|
|Input wiring|This chapter contains explanations of the input specifications and instructions for<br>wiring.|Chapter 10|
|High-speed counter|This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the high-speed<br>counter examples of programming.|Chapter 11|
|Output wiring|This chapter contains explanations for the output specifications and instructions<br>for wiring.|Chapter 12|
|Examples of wiring for each use|This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring input/output<br>devices for main uses.|Chapter 13|
|Test operation, adjustment,<br>maintenance and error check|This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for test operation and<br>adjustment, maintenance and error check items and measures to be taken upon<br>occurrence of error.|Chapter 14|



**8** 

**9** 

**19** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction _1.1 Introduction of Manuals_ 

## **2) Extension devices (Chapter 15 to Chapter 18)** 

|**Division**|**Outline**|**Reference**|
|---|---|---|
|Input/output powered extension<br>units|This chapter contains explanations for the input/output specifications, external<br>dimensions and terminal layout for each product.|Chapter 15|
|Input/output extension blocks||Chapter 16|
|Extension<br>power<br>supply<br>unit<br>(FX3U-1PSU-5V)|This chapter contains explanations of specifications for the extension power<br>supply unit and external dimensions.|Chapter 17|
|Extension products for special<br>functions, such as analog control<br>and communication|This chapter contains explanations for the external dimensions and terminal<br>layout (For details, refer to the manual for each extension device).|Chapter 18|



## **3) Optional products (Chapter 19 to Chapter 22)** 

|**Division**|**Outline**|**Reference**|
|---|---|---|
|Display module|This  chapter  contains  explanation  of  the  specifications,  external  dimensions,<br>mounting procedures and operating procedures for display modules(FX3G-5DM).|Chapter 19|
|FX Series terminal blocks|This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring FX-16/32E<br>-TB.|Chapter 20|
|Memory cassette|This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for the memory cassette<br>and the installation procedures.|Chapter 21|
|Battery|This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for replacing the battery and<br>detecting battery voltage drop.|Chapter 22|



## **4) Others (Appendix A to Appendix E)** 

|**Division**|**Outline**|**Reference**|
|---|---|---|
|List of special devices|This chapter contains an explanation list of the special auxiliary relays (M8000 to<br>M8511) and special data registers (D8000 to D8511)<br>(For details, refer to the programming manual.)|Appendix A|
|List of instructions|This chapter contains an explanation list of the basic instructions and applied<br>instructions<br>(For details, refer to the programming manual.)|Appendix B|
|List of discontinued models|The discontinued MELSEC-F Series PLC models and programming tools<br>described in this manual.|Appendix C|
|Precautions for battery<br>transportation|This chapter contains explanations for transport regulations and guidelines.|Appendix D|
|Handling of batteries and devices<br>with Built-in batteries in EU<br>member states|This chapter contains explanations for the disposal precautions of batteries and<br>exporting batteries to EU member states.|Appendix E|



**20** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction _1.1 Introduction of Manuals_ 

**1** 

**2 3 4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8** 

**9** 

## **1.1.2 Manual organization and position of this manual** 

This manual describes detail on the hardware, including the system configuration, selection, installation and wiring. The instructions, communication control, analog control and positioning control are explained in separate manuals. Refer to the manuals as needed. 

**==> picture [496 x 633] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FX3G Series<br>Manual for each use (separate volume)<br>Built-in functions Refer to the manual for each purpose of use.<br>(Main unit)<br>Sequence instructions<br>High-speed counter User's Manual - Hardware Edition this manual<br>Positioning instructions JY997D31301 (Model: FX3G-HW-E)<br>PID<br>Details of hardware, including input/<br>FX3G<br>output specifications, wiring,<br>Additional options separate installation and maintenance of PLC<br>manual<br>Input/output powered extension main unit<br>units/blocks<br>L N COM24+ X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions<br>IN 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 POWER JY997D16601 (Model: FX-P3-E)<br>COM1Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 COM2FX   -48ERY42NY5 Y6 Y7 COM3 Y0 Y1OUTY2 Y300 11 COM422 33Y4 44Y555 Y666 Y777 Y00 Y11 Y22 Y33 4Y4 5Y5 6Y6 7 Y7COM5 FXFX3GC3G/FX/FX3U3UC/ Details of sequence program,including basic and applied<br>instructions and various devices<br>separate<br>manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be<br>Expansion board, Special adapters available in or after September, 2008.<br>FX   -4AD-ADP3U Analog<br>POWER Communication Structured Programming Manual<br>For details on structured programming,<br>FX refer to the following manual.<br>separate · MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured<br>manual Programming Manual<br>(Fundamentals)<br>SH-080782(Model: Q/FX-KP-KI-E)<br>Special function blocks · FXCPU Structured Programming<br>Analog Manual[Device & Common]<br>JY997D26001(Model: FX-KP-DK-E)<br>· FXCPU Structured Programming<br>Manual[Basic & Applied instruction]<br>JY997D34701(Model: FX-KP-SM-E)<br>As for FX2N Series, refer to individual · FXCPU Structured Programming<br>manuals. Manual[Application Functions]<br>JY997D34801(Model: FX-KP-OK-E)<br>Options<br>User's Manual - Analog Control Edition<br>Display module<br>JY997D16701 (Model: FX3U-U-ANALOG-E)<br>Memory cassette<br>Battery FX3G/FX3U/ Details of analog special function<br>FX3GC/FX3UC blocks and analog special adapters<br>separate The manuals for FX3G Series will be<br>manual available in or after September, 2008.<br>User's Manual - Data Communication Edition<br>Manuals supplied with product JY997D16901 (Model: FX-U-COMMU-E)<br>Each product comes with the installation manual or Details of N:N Network,<br>FX<br>the User's Manual (except the input/output powered parallel link, computer link, non-<br>separate<br>extension units/blocks). protocol communication and<br>manual<br>programming communication<br>Installation manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be<br>The part names, installation procedures and available in or after September, 2008.<br>specifications are shown.<br>As for the functions and program examples, refer to User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition<br>the separate User's Manual -  Edition). JY997D16801 (Model: FX3U-U-POS-E)<br>User's manual's manuals manual FX3G/FX3U/ Details of wiring, instructions andoperations of positioning functions in<br>The procedures for wiring and installing, FX3GC/FX3UC PLC main unit<br>specifications and functions are explained. separate<br>The manuals for FX3G Series will be<br>To use some products, separate manuals may be manual<br>available in or after September, 2008.<br>24+24-<br>COM1I1+COM2V1+V2+I2+V3+<br>COM3COM4I3+V4+I4+<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


User's manual's manuals manual The procedures for wiring and installing, specifications and functions are explained. To use some products, separate manuals may be necessary. 

**10** 

**21** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction _1.1 Introduction of Manuals_ 

## **1.1.3 List of manuals** 

FX3G Series PLC main units supplied only with the hardware manual. 

For the details of the hardware of FX3G Series, refer to this manual. 

For instructions for programming and hardware information on special function devices, refer to the relevant manuals. 

: Indispensable manuals : Manuals necessary for some purposes : Manuals with separate volumes for details 

|||**Manual title**|**Manual number**|**Contents**|**Model name**<br>**code**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Manuals for PLC main unit**||||||
|**FX3G  PLC main unit**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3GSeries<br>HARDWARE MANUAL|JY997D33401|Extractions of descriptions of input/output<br>specifications, wiring and installation of FX3GSeries<br>PLC main unit from FX3GSeries User's Manual -<br>Hardware Edition<br>For the detailed explanation, refer to this manual.|-|
||Separate<br>volume|FX3GSeries User's Manual<br>- Hardware Edition<br>(this manual)|JY997D31301|Details of hardware of FX3GSeries PLC main unit,<br>including input/output specifications, wiring,<br>installation and maintenance|09R521|
|**Programming**||||||
||Separate<br>volume|FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series Programming<br>Manual - Basic & Applied<br>Instruction Edition|JY997D16601|Details of sequence programming for FX3GSeries,<br>including explanation for basic instructions, applied<br>instructions and various devices|09R517|
||Separate<br>volume|MELSEC-Q/L/F<br>Structured<br>Programming<br>Manual (Fundamentals)|SH-080782|Programming methods, specifications, functions, etc.<br>required to create structured programs|13JW06|
||Separate<br>volume|FX CPU Structured<br>Programming Manual<br>[Device & Common]|JY997D26001|Devices, parameters, etc. provided in structured<br>projects of GX Works2|09R925|
||Separate<br>volume|FX CPU Structured<br>Programming Manual<br>[Basic & Applied Instruction]|JY997D34701|Sequence instructions provided in structured projects<br>of GX Works2|09R926|
||Separate<br>volume|FX CPU Structured<br>Programming Manual<br>[Application Functions]|JY997D34801|Application functions provided in structured projects<br>of GX Works2|09R927|
|**FX Series terminal block**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX INPUT AND<br>OUTPUT TERMINAL<br>BLOCKS USER'S GUIDE|JY992D50401|Procedures for handling FX Series terminal block|-|
|**Manuals for communication control**||||||
|**Common**||||||
||Separate<br>volume|FX Series User's Manual -<br>Data Communication<br>Edition|JY997D16901|Details of N:N Network, parallel link, computer link<br>and no-protocol communication (RS instructions,<br>FX2N-232IF)|09R715|
||Separate<br>volume|FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual<br>- MODBUS Serial<br>Communication Edition|JY997D26201|Details on MODBUS serial communication<br>in FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UCPLCs.|-|
|**RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485 communication**<br>When using each product, refer also to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed.||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-232-BD<br>Installation Manual|JY997D32001|Procedures for handling the RS-232C<br>communication expansion board<br>When using, refer to FX Series User's Manual - Data<br>Communication Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-232ADP-MB<br>Installation Manual|JY997D26401|Procedures for handling the RS-232C<br>communication special adapter<br>For details on MODBUS serial<br>communication, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/<br>FX3UCSeries User’s Manual - MODBUS Serial<br>Communication Edition.<br>For details on other supported serial communication,<br>refer to the FX Series User’s Manual - Data<br>Communication Edition.|-|



**22** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction _1.1 Introduction of Manuals_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6 7** 

**8** 

**9** 

|||**Manual title**|**Manual number**|**Contents**|**Model name**<br>**code**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-232ADP<br>Installation Manual|JY997D13701|Procedures for handling the RS-232C<br>communication special adapter<br>When using, refer to FX Series User's Manual - Data<br>Communication Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-422-BD<br>Installation Manual|JY997D32101|Procedures for handling the RS-422 communication<br>expansion board<br>When using, refer to FX Series User's Manual - Data<br>Communication Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-485-BD<br>Installation Manual|JY997D32201|Procedures for handling the RS-485 communication<br>expansion board<br>When using, refer to FX Series User's Manual - Data<br>Communication Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-485ADP-MB<br>Installation Manual|JY997D26301|Procedures for handling the RS-485 communication<br>special adapter<br>For details on MODBUS serial<br>communication, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/<br>FX3UCSeries User’s Manual - MODBUS Serial<br>Communication Edition.<br>For details on other supported serial communication,<br>refer to the FX Series User’s Manual - Data<br>Communication Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-485ADP<br>Installation Manual|JY997D13801|Procedures for handling the RS-485 communication<br>special adapter<br>When using, refer to FX Series User's Manual - Data<br>Communication Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX-485PC-IF<br>Hardware Manual|JY992D81901|Procedures<br>for<br>handling<br>the<br>RS-232C/RS-485<br>conversion interface<br>When using, refer to FX Series User's Manual - Data<br>Communication Edition.|-|
|**CC-Link, CC-Link/LT**<br>When using each product, refer also to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed.||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-16CCL-M<br>Installation Manual|JY997D43401|Procedures for handling the CC-Link master special<br>function block<br>When using, refer to FX3U-16CCL-M User's Manual.|-|
||Separate<br>volume|FX3U-16CCL-M<br>User's Manual|JY997D43601|Details of CC-Link master special function block|09R724|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-16CCL-M<br>Hardware Manual|JY992D87801|Procedures for handling the CC-Link master special<br>function block<br>When using, refer to FX2N-16CCL-M User's Manual.|-|
||Separate<br>volume|FX2N-16CCL-M<br>User's Manual|JY992D87901|Details of CC-Link master special function block|09R710|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-64CCL<br>Installation Manual|JY997D29801|Procedures for handling the CC-Link Intelligent<br>device station special function block<br>When using, refer to FX3U-64CCL User's Manual.|-|
||Separate<br>volume|FX3U-64CCL<br>User's Manual|JY997D30401|Details of the CC-Link Intelligent device station<br>special function block|09R718|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-32CCL<br>User's Manual|JY992D71701|Procedures for handling the CC-Link remote device<br>station special function block|09R711|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|Remote I/O station, remote<br>device station and intelligent<br>device station for CC-Link|As for the remote I/O station, remote device station and intelligent<br>device station for CC-Link, refer to the relevant manuals and related<br>documents.||-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-64CL-M<br>User's Manual -<br>Hardware Volume|JY997D05401|Procedures for handling the CC-Link/LT master<br>special function block<br>When using, refer to FX2N-64CL-M User's Manual -<br>Details.|-|
||Separate<br>volume|FX2N-64CL-M<br>User's Manual -<br>Detailed Volume|JY997D08501|Details of the CC-Link/LT master special function<br>block|09R706|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|Remote I/O station, remote<br>device station, power supply<br>adapter and dedicated<br>power supply for CC-Link/<br>LT|As for the remote I/O station, remote device station, power supply<br>adapter and dedicated power supply for CC-Link/LT, refer to the relevant<br>manuals and related documents.||-|



**10** 

**23** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction _1.1 Introduction of Manuals_ 

|||**Manual title**|**Manual number**|**Contents**|**Model name**<br>**code**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Manuals for analog/temperature control**||||||
|**Common**||||||
||Separate<br>volume|FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual -<br>Analog Control Edition|JY997D16701|Details of analog special function block (FX3U-4AD,<br>FX3U-4DA, FX3UC-4AD) and analog special adapter<br>(FX3U-***-**-ADP)|09R619|
|**Analog input, temperature input and temperature control**<br>When using each product, refer also to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed.||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-2AD-BD<br>Installation Manual|JY997D33501|Procedures for handling the 2-ch analog input<br>expansion board<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4AD<br>Installation Manual|JY997D20701|Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog input special<br>function block<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-2AD<br>User's Guide|JY992D74701|Procedures for handling the 2-ch analog input special<br>function block|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-4AD<br>User's Guide|JY992D65201|Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog input special<br>function block|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-8AD<br>User's Manual|JY992D86001|Procedures for handling the 8-ch analog input special<br>function block (to be used also for thermocouple<br>input)|09R608|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4AD-ADP<br>User's Manual|JY997D13901|Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog input special<br>adapter<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP<br>User's Manual|JY997D14701|Procedures for handling the 4-ch Pt100 temperature<br>sensor input special adapter<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP<br>User's Manual|JY997D29101|Procedures for handling the 4-ch Pt100 temperature<br>sensor input special adapter<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-4AD-PT<br>User's Guide|JY992D65601|Procedures for handling the 4-ch Pt100 temperature<br>sensor input special function block|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP<br>User's Manual|JY997D29201|Procedures for handling the 4-ch Pt1000/Ni1000<br>temperature sensor input special adapter<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP<br>User's Manual|JY997D14801|Procedures for handling the 4-ch thermocouple input<br>special adapter<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-4AD-TC<br>User's Guide|JY992D65501|Procedures for handling the 4-ch thermocouple input<br>special function block|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-2LC<br>User's Guide|JY992D85601|Procedures for handling the 2-ch temperature control<br>special function block<br>When using, refer to FX2N-2LC User's Manual.|-|
||Separate<br>volume|FX2N-2LC<br>User's Manual|JY992D85801|Procedures for handling the 2-ch temperature control<br>special function block|09R607|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4LC<br>Installation Manual|JY997D38901|Procedures for handling the 4-ch temperature control<br>special function block<br>When using, refer to FX3U-4LC User's Manual.|-|
||Separate<br>volume|FX3U-4LC<br>User's Manual|JY997D39101|Procedures for handling the 4-ch temperature control<br>special function block|09R625|
|**Analog output**<br>When using each product, refer also to the Use's Manual - Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed.||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-1DA-BD<br>Installation Manual|JY997D33601|Procedures for handling the 1-ch analog output<br>expansion board<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|



**24** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction _1.1 Introduction of Manuals_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9** 

**10** 

|||**Manual title**|**Manual number**|**Contents**|**Model name**<br>**code**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4DA-ADP<br>User's Manual|JY997D14001|Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog output<br>special adapter<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-4DA<br>Installation Manual|JY997D20801|Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog output<br>special function block<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-2DA<br>User's Guide|JY992D74901|Procedures for handling the 2-ch analog output<br>special function block|-|
|**Analog input/output (mixed)**<br>When using each product, refer also to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed.||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-3A-ADP<br>User's Manual|JY997D35601|Procedures for handling the 2-ch analog input and 1-<br>ch analog output special adapter<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition.|-|
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX2N-5A<br>User's Manual|JY997D11401|Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog input and 1-<br>ch analog output special function block|09R616|
|**Manuals for positioning control**||||||
|**Common**||||||
||Separate<br>volume|FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series User's Manual -<br>Positioning Control Edition|JY997D16801|Details of positioning functions of FX3G/FX3U/<br>FX3GC/FX3UCSeries|09R620|
|**Manuals for FX-30P**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX-30P<br>Installation Manual|JY997D34201|Describes FX-30P specification extracted from the<br>FX-30P Operation manual.<br>For datails, refer to FX-30P Operation manual.|-|
||Separate<br>volume|FX-30P<br>Operation Manual|JY997D34401|Describes<br>Handy<br>Programming<br>Panel<br>FX-30P<br>datails.|09R924|
|**Other manuals**||||||
|When using each product, refer also to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed.||||||
|**Variable analog potentiometers**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-8AV-BD<br>Installation Manual|JY997D33701|Procedures for handling the 8-ch variable analog<br>potentiometers expansion board<br>When using, refer to FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC<br>Series Programming Manual -Basic & Applied<br>Instruction Edition|-|
|**Connector conversion**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-CNV-ADP<br>Installation Manual|JY997D32301|Procedures for handling the conversion function<br>expansion adapter for connectors for connecting<br>communication and analog special adapters|-|
|**Battery (maintenance option)**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-32BL Battery|JY997D14101|Battery life and handling procedures|-|
|**Memorry cassette**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-EEPROM-32L<br>Installation Manual|JY997D32401|Specifications and operating procedures of the<br>memory cassette|-|
|**Display module**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3G-5DM<br>Installation Manual|JY997D33801|Procedures  for  mounting  and  handling  the  display<br>module|-|
|**Extension power supply unit**||||||
||Supplied<br>with<br>product|FX3U-1PSU-5V<br>Installation Manual|JY997D22501|Specifications and operating procedures of the<br>extension power supply unit|-|



**10** 

**25** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction _1.2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals_ 

## **1.2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals** 

|**Abbreviation/**<br>**generic name**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|**PLCs**||
|FX3GSeries|Generic name for FX3GSeries PLCs|
|FX3USeries|Generic name for FX3USeries PLCs|
|FX2NSeries|Generic name for FX2NSeries PLCs|
|FX3GPLCs or main units|Abbreviation of FX3GSeries PLC main units|
|Expansion boards|Generic name for the following models<br>FX3G-232-BD, FX3G-422-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-2AD-BD, FX3G-1DA-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD|
|Special adapters|Generic name for communication special adapters and analog special adapters|
|Communication special<br>adapters|Generic name for the following models<br>FX3U-232ADP(-MB), FX3U-485ADP(-MB)|
|Analog special adapters|Generic name for the following models<br>FX3U-4AD-ADP, FX3U-4DA-ADP, FX3U-3A-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP,<br>FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP, FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP|
|Extension devices|Generic name for FX3USeries special function blocks, FX2NSeries extension devices|
|FX2NSeries extension devices|Generic name for FX2NSeries input/output powered extension units, FX2NSeries input/output<br>extension blocks and FX2NSeries special function blocks|
|Input/output extension devices|Generic name for FX2NSeries input/output powered extension units, FX2NSeries input/output<br>extension blocks|
|FX2NSeries input/output<br>powered extension units|Generic name for the following models<br>FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-32ER, FX2N-32ES, FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ER,<br>FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS,<br>FX2N-48ET-DSS, FX2N-48ER-D, FX2N-48ET-D|
|FX2NSeries input/output<br>extension blocks|Generic name for the following models<br>FX2N-8ER-ES/UL, FX2N-8ER|
|FX2NSeries input extension<br>blocks|Generic name for the following models<br>FX2N-16EX-ES/UL, FX2N-16EX, FX2N-16EX-C, FX2N-16EXL-C, FX2N-8EX-ES/UL,<br>FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL, FX2N-8EX|
|FX2NSeries output extension<br>blocks|Generic name for the following models<br>FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR, FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL, FX2N-16EYT, FX2N-16EYS,<br>FX2N-16EYT-C, FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL, FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL, FX2N-8EYR,<br>FX2N-8EYT, FX2N-8EYT-H|
|Special function blocks|Generic name for FX3USeries special function blocks, FX2NSeries special function blocks|
|FX3USeries special function<br>blocks|Generic name for the following models<br>FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-64CCL, FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4LC, FX3U-4DA|
|FX2NSeries special function<br>blocks|Generic name for the following models<br>FX2N-16CCL-M, FX2N-32CCL, FX2N-64CL-M, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD-PT,<br>FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC, FX2N-2DA, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-5A|
|Memory cassettes|Generic name for the following models<br>FX3G-EEPROM-32L|
|Display module|Generic name for the following models<br>FX3G-5DM|
|Battery|Abbreviation of model FX3U-32BL battery|
|FX Series terminal blocks|Generic name for the following models<br>FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB, FX-16EX-A1-TB, FX-16EYR-TB, FX-16EYS-TB, FX-16EYT-TB,<br>FX-16EYT-H-TB|
|Extension cables|Generic name for the following models<br>FX0N-30EC, FX0N-65EC|
|Input/output cables|Generic name for the following models<br>FX-16E-500CAB-S, FX-16E<br>CAB, FX-16E-<br>CAB-R, FX-A32E-<br>CAB<br>150, 300 or 500 is entered in<br>.|
|Connectors for input/output|Generic name for the following models<br>FX2C-I/O-CON, FX2C-I/O-CON-S, FX2C-I/O-CON-SA|
|CC-Link master|Generic name for the following models<br>FX3U-16CCL-M, FX2N-16CCL-M|
|Remote device stations|Abbreviation of FX2N-32CCL interface block|
|Intelligent device stations|Abbreviation of FX3U-64CCL interface block|
|Peripheral devices|Generic name for programming software, handy programming panel (HPP) and indicator|
|Programming tool|Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel (HPP)|



**26** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

1 Introduction 

_1.2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

**10** 

|**Abbreviation/**<br>**generic name**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|Programming software|Generic name for GX Works2, GX Developer and FX-PCS/WIN (-E)|
|GX Works2|Abbreviation of programming software packages SW<br>DNC-GXW2-J and SW<br>DNC-GXW2-E|
|GX Developer|Abbreviation of programming software packages SW<br>D5C-GPPW-J and SW<br>D5C-GPPW-E|
|FX-PCS/WIN (-E)|Abbreviation of programming software packages FX-PCS/WIN and FX-PCS/WIN-E|
|Handy programming panels<br>(HPP)|Generic name for the following models<br>FX-30P, FX-20P, FX-20P-E|
|RS-232C/RS-422 converters|Generic name for the following models<br>FX-232AW, FX-232AWC, FX-232AWC-H|
|RS-232C/RS-485 converters|Abbreviation of FX-485PC-IF|
|**Indicators**||
|GOT1000 Series|Generic name for GT15, GT11 and GT10|
|GOT-900 Series|Generic name for GOT-A900 Series and GOT-F900 Series|
|GOT-A900 Series|Generic name for GOT-A900 Series|
|GOT-F900 Series|Generic name for GOT-F900 Series|
|**Manuals**||
|FX3GHardware Edition|Abbreviation of FX3GSeries User's Manual - Hardware Edition|
|Programming manual|Abbreviation of FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UCSeries Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction<br>Edition|
|Data Communication Edition|Abbreviation of FX Series User's Manual - Data Communication Edition|
|Analog Control Edition|Abbreviation of FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UCSeries User's Manual - Analog Control Edition|
|Positioning Control Edition|Abbreviation of FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UCSeries User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition|



**27** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

2 Features and Part Names _2.1 Major Features_ 

## **2. Features and Part Names** 

## **2.1 Major Features** 

## **1. Basic functions** 

## **[Up to 256 input/output points]** 

The total number of inputs and outputs (128 points maximum) directly connected to the PLC and remote inputs and outputs (128 points maximum) of the CC-Link can be extended to 256 points. 

## **[Program memory]** 

## **[Remote debugging of program]** 

Use of programming software (GX Works2, GX Developer)  enables you to remotely transfer programs and monitor PLC operation through a modem connected to the RS-232C expansion board or RS-232C communication special adapter. 

## **2. Input/output high-speed processing functions of main unit** 

The PLC has a 32K-step EEPROM memory. 

## **[Built-in USB port]** 

The PLC has a built-in USB port for the programming communication function to enable high-speed communication at 12Mbps. 

## **[High-speed counter function]** 

Input terminals of main unit 

- Input of open collector transistor output 

- 1-phase 60kHz x 4 points + 10kHz x 2 points 

- 2-phase 30kHz x 2 points + 5kHz x 1 points 

## **[Built-in RUN/STOP switch]** 

The PLC can be started and stopped with the built-in switch. 

RUN and STOP commands can be given to the PLC through a general-purpose input terminal or peripheral device. 

## **[Built-in Variable analog potentiometers]** 

The PLC has two built-in variable analog potentiometers available for adjusting the timer set time. 

## **[Writing during RUN]** 

The programming software for personal computer enables you to modify the program while the PLC is running. 

## **[Built-in clock function]** 

The PLC has a clock function to control the time. 

## **[Programming tool]** 

Use a version of a programming tool supporting the FX3G. 

## → **Refer to 5. Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability in this manual.** 

*For peripheral devices not applicable to FX3G Series, specify FX1N Series for model selection, and you can program the sequence. 

In this case, use instructions and devices within the ranges common to FX3G Series and the selected model of PLC. 

## → **Refer to 11. Use of High-speed Counters in this manual and Programming Manual.** 

## **[Pulse catch function]** 

Signals with short ON width or OFF width can be captured without a complicated program. 

→ **Refer to 10. Input Wiring Procedures in this manual and Programming Manual.** 

|**Input terminal**|**Signal ON/OFF width**|
|---|---|
|X000, X001, X003, X004|10 s|
|X002, X005|50 s|



## **[Input interruption function]** 

The PLC can process interruption routines with higher priority using external signals whose minimum ON duration or OFF duration is 10 s (X000, X001, X003 and X004) or 50 s (X002 and X005). (The timer interruption function is also provided.) 

- → **Refer to 10. Input Wiring Procedures in this manual and Programming Manual.** 

## **[Pulse  width/period measurement function] (Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later)** 

The width/period of pulses from input terminals (X000, X001, X003 and X004) of the main unit can be measured in units of 10 s. 

- → **Refer to 10. Input Wiring Procedures and Programming Manual.** 

**28** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

2 Features and Part Names 

_2.1 Major Features_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

## **[Pulse output function]** 

When output terminals in the transistor output type main unit are used, pulses (open collector outputs) of up to 100kHz can be output simultaneously to 3 axes[*1] (Y000, Y001 and Y002). 

- *1. 2 axes (Y000 and Y001) in 14-point and 24-point type main units 

Using a number of instructions programming is simplified. 

→ **Refer to Positioning Control Edition.** 

## **[Various positioning instructions]** 

## → **Refer to Positioning Control Edition.** 

|**Instruction**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|DSZR|Mechanical zero return instruction with DOG<br>search function|
|ABS|Instruction to read the current value from our<br>servo amplifier with absolute position (ABS)<br>detecting function|
|DRVI|Positioning (relative positioning) to specify the<br>movement from the current position|
|DRVA|Positioning (absolute positioning) to specify<br>the target position based on the current<br>value 0|
|PLSV|Instruction to change the pulse train output<br>frequency|
|TBL|Instruction for positioning based on batch<br>setting of positioning operation, moving<br>distance and speed|



## **3. Display functions (display module) (Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later)** 

FX3G-5DM Display Module (option) can be incorporated in the PLC. 

## **[Monitor/test function]** 

Devices can be monitored and tested by operating the buttons on the display module. The button operations can be inhibited by the user program. 

- Computer link → **Refer to Data Communication Edition.** 

- Inverter communication (Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later) 

   - → **Refer to Data Communication Edition.** 

• Non-protocol communication through built-in RS-422/RS-232C/RS-485 

      - → **Refer to Data Communication Edition.** 

- CC-Link 

   - Master station (Compatible with CC-Link Ver. 2.00 and Ver. 1.10): FX3U-16CCL-M 

   - - Master station (Compatible with CC-Link Ver. 1.10): 

FX2N-16CCL-M 

   - Intelligent device station FX3U-64CCL 

   - Remote device station FX2N-32CCL 

      - → **Refer to the manual for each product.** 

- CC-Link/LT 

   - Master station : FX2N-64CL-M 

   - Remote I/O station, Remote device station → **Refer to the manual for each product.** 

## **5. Analog functions** 

The expansion board, special adapter and special function block for each analog function are connected. 

→ **Refer to Analog Control Edition.** 

## **[Kinds of analog functions]** 

- Voltage/current input 

- Voltage/current output 

- Temperature sensor input (thermocouple and platinum resistance thermometer sensor) 

- Temperature control 

**6** 

**7** 

## **[Other functions]** 

On the display module, you can set the time, adjust the contrast and display the PLC version and error codes. 

→ **Refer to 19. Display Module(FX3G-5DM) in this manual.** 

## **4. Communication and network functions** 

The expansion board, special adapter and special function block for each communication function can be connected. 

## **[Kinds of communication functions]** 

- Programming communication through RS232C, RS-422 and USB 

→ **Refer to Data Communication Edition.** 

- N:N Network 

**10** 

→ **Refer to Data Communication Edition.** 

- Parallel link 

   - → **Refer to Data Communication Edition.** 

**29** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

2 Features and Part Names _2.2 Names and Functions of Parts_ 

## **2.2 Names and Functions of Parts** 

## **2.2.1 Front Panel** 

Factory default configuration (standard) 

**==> picture [185 x 147] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[3] [4] [5]<br>[2]<br>[6]<br>[1]<br>[7]<br>[8]<br>[9]<br>[10]<br>[12]<br>[11]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**[1] Peripheral device connecting** The peripheral device connector, variable analog potentiometers and RUN/STOP switch **connector cover** are located under this cover. 

- **[2] Terminal names** 

- **[3] Top cover(S) (40points, 60points type only)** 

- **[4] Top cover [5] Terminal block covers** 

The signal names for power supply, input and output terminals are shown. 

Mount the expansion board and memory cassette under this cover. 

Mount the expansion board, display module, memory cassette and battery under this cover. 

The covers can be opened for wiring. 

Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running (the unit power is on). 

- **[6] Input display LEDs (red)** 

When an input terminal (X000 or more) is turned on, the corresponding LED lights. 

**[7] Extension device connecting** Connect the extension cables of input/output powered extension unit/block or special **connector cover** function block to the extension device connecting connectors under this cover. FX3U Series extension devices and FX2N Series extension devices can be connected. 

→ **For details on the extension devices, refer to Chapter 15, Chapter 16, Chapter 17 and Section 18.1.** 

- **[8] Operation status display LEDs** 

The operation status of the PLC can be checked with the LEDs. The LEDs turn off, light and flash according to the following table. 

→ **For details on the operation status, refer to Section 14.5.** 

|**Display color**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|Green|On while power is on the PLC.|
|Green|On while the PLC is running.|
|Red<br>Red|Flashing when a program error occurs.|
||Lights when a CPU error occurs.|
|Red|Lights when the battery voltage drops.<br>(When the optional battery is used)|



**[9] Output display LEDs (red)** When an output terminal (Y000 or more) is turned on, the corresponding LED lights. **[10] Model name (abbreviation)** The model name of the main unit is indicated. Check the nameplate on the right side for the model name. 

- **[10] Model name (abbreviation)** 

The main unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail (35mm (1.38") wide). 

- **[11] DIN rail mounting hooks** 

- **[12] The year and month of production** 

- The year and month of production of the main unit is indicated. 

   - → **For details on the year and month of production, refer to Subsection** 

**5.1.2.** 

**30** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

2 Features and Part Names 

_2.2 Names and Functions of Parts_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6 7** 

## **When the top covers are open** 

**==> picture [185 x 142] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[4] [5] [6]<br>[3] [7]<br>[8]<br>[2]<br>[1]<br>[10] [9]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- **[1] Peripheral device connecting** Connect a programming tool(PC) to program a sequence. **connector (USB)** → 

→ **For details on applicable peripheral devices, refer to Chapter 5.** 

- **[2] Peripheral device connecting** Connect a programming tool to program a sequence. **connector (RS-422)** → 

→ **For details on applicable peripheral devices, refer to Chapter 5.** 

To stop writing (batch) of the sequence program or operation, set the switch to STOP (slide it downward). 

- **[3] RUN/STOP switch** 

To start operation (run the machine), set it to RUN (slide it upward). 

- **[4] Variable analog potentiometers** 

- **[5] Optional equipment connector1** 

- **[6] Optional equipment connector2 (40points, 60points type only)** 

- **[7] Battery connector** 

- **[8] Battery holder** 

Two variable analog potentiometers are built in. Upper side : VR1, Lower side : VR2 

Connect the expansion board and memory cassette to the connector. 

Connect the expansion board, display module and memory cassette to the connector. 

Connect the optional battery to the connector. 

   - This holder accommodates the optional battery. 

- **[9] Optional equipment connecting** These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with 

- **screw holes2 (2 places)** screws. 

- **(40points, 60points type only)** 

- **[10] Optional equipment connecting** These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with **screw holes1 (2 places)** screws. 

## **When the terminal block covers are open** 

**==> picture [187 x 149] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[2]<br>[1] [3]<br>[5] [4]<br>[2]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Connect the power supply to the main unit. 

- **[1] Power supply terminal** 

If the main unit must be replaced, loosen the screws (slightly loosen the left and right screws), and the upper part of the terminal block can be removed. 

- **[2] Terminal block mounting screws** 

   - → **For anchoring of the terminal block, refer to Subsection 9.1.2.** 

- **[3] Input (X) terminals** 

Wire switches and sensors to the terminals. 

- **[4] Output (Y) terminals** 

Wire loads (contactors, solenoid valves, etc.) to be driven to the terminals. 

- **[5] Terminal cover** A protective terminal cover (refer to the following drawing) is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block. 

The cover prevents fingers from touching terminals, thereby improving safety. 

**8** 

**9** 

**10** 

**31** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

2 Features and Part Names _2.2 Names and Functions of Parts_ 

## **2.2.2 Sides** 

**==> picture [450 x 185] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Left side Right side<br>[1]<br>[2]<br>[3]<br>[1] Connector  conversion  adapter<br>These holes are designed to secure the connector conversion adapter with screws.<br>connecting screw holes1 (2 places)<br>[2] Nameplate The product model name, control number and power supply specifications are shown.<br>→  For details on the manufacturer's serial number, refer to Subsection<br>5.1.1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [365 x 8] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[3] DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail (35 mm (1.38") wide).<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**32** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products 

_3.1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names_ 

**1 2 3** 

## **3. Introduction of Products** 

## **3.1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names** 

The following system configuration is classified into product groups A to O in the product introduction sections given below. 

**==> picture [528 x 575] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E Display module F Expansion boards K Battery L Memory cassettes 3<br>press . FX3G-5DM HEFT| [cacal|] * FX3G-232-BD : FX3G-2AD-BD . FX3U-32BL firs] . FX3G-EEPROM-32L<br>[|[le 1 I 1° FXFX3G3G-422-BD-485-BD FXFX3G3G-1DA-BD-8AV-BD (=) 1 a1<br>!Te ——ee ee eeaee ee ee ee Ee —_——_eeoneee eee eeeee eeeeeeee 1bene c eee e eee e eee<br>moat<br>P 4<br>S ~ e)- f e e owen |3 i<br>————<br>= > eo} by E qeneennnneeee ete ecccccce rl<br>D rro [_| xe-40m fs on<br>t] ime { _ee=<br>H Special adapters G Connector  A Main units C Input/output extension blocks<br>conversion<br>Analog adapter Input/output Input Output 5<br>FXFX3U3U-4AD-ADP-4DA-ADP FX3G-CNV-ADP FXFX3G3G-14MR/ES-24MR/ES FXFX3G3G-14MT/ES(S)-24MT/ES(S) FXFX2N2N-8EX-ES/UL-8EX FXFX2N2N-8EYR-ES/UL-8EYR-S-ES/UL<br>FX3U-3A-ADP FX3G-40MR/ES FX3G-40MT/ES(S) FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL<br>FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3G-60MR/ES FX3G-60MT/ES(S) FX2N-16EX-ES/UL FX2N-8EYR<br>FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX2N-16EX FX2N-8EYT<br>FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX3G-14MR/DS FX3G-14MT/DS(S) FX2N-16EX-C FX2N-8EYT-H<br>FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3G-24MR/DS FX3G-24MT/DS(S) FX2N-16EXL-C FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL<br>FX3G-40MR/DS FX3G-40MT/DS(S) FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL<br>FXFXCommunication3U3U-232ADP(-MB)-485ADP(-MB) FX3G-60MR/DS FX3G-60MT/DS(S) FXFXInput/output2N2N-8ER-ES/UL-8ER FXFXFXFX2N2N2N2N-16EYR-16EYT-16EYT-C-16EYS 6<br>FX Series terminal blocks can be connected to<br>connector type units.<br>J Extension cables J Connector conversion adapter<br>FX0N-30EC FX2N-CNV-BC<br>FX0N-65EC 7<br>[SEEEEEEEEEEEEEREET SO) a<br>el ae os ee —<br>Le | weasmerc w iee | ogagggaggsaseesas FX UH ECC L M<br>cIsisissisisisisieisisislaieisiel/o| _<br>B Input/output powered D Special function blocks 8<br>extension units<br>Analog Network<br>Input/output FX3U-4AD FX3U-16CCL-M<br>FX2N-32ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER-DS FX3U-4DA FX3U-64CCL<br>FX3U-4LC<br>FX2N-48ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER-D<br>FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL<br>FX2N-2AD FX2N-16CCL-M<br>FX2N-32ER<br>FX2N-2DA FX2N-32CCL<br>FX2N-48ER<br>FX2N-4AD FX2N-64CL-M<br>9<br>FX2N-4AD-TC<br>FX2N-32ES<br>FX2N-4AD-PT<br>FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ET-DSS FX2N-4DA To Network<br>FX2N-5A<br>FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ET-D<br>FX2N-8AD<br>FX2N-32ET<br>FX2N-2LC<br>FX2N-48ET<br>I Extension power supply unit 10<br>FX3U-1PSU-5V<br>O Power supply unit The configuration is remote I/O for CC-Link.<br>N Remote I/O M FX Series terminal block<br>FX2N-20PSU<br>Introduction Product<br>Specifications<br>DevicesPeripheral  Version and<br>ConfigurationSystem<br>Nos., Unit Nos.Input/Output Input/Output<br>Installation<br>WiringPower Supply Preparation and Power Supply Preparation and Preparation and<br>Input Wiring<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [24 x 280] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7<br>8<br>9<br>10<br>Nos., Unit Nos.Input/Output Input/Output<br>Installation<br>WiringPower Supply Preparation and Power Supply Preparation and Preparation and<br>Input Wiring<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**10** 

**33** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products 

_3.1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names_ 

## **3.1.1 Main units** 

|A|The main unit incorporates a CPU, memory, input and output terminals and power supply.<br>To establish a system, at least one main unit is necessary.|
|---|---|
||FX3G<br>M<br>Incorporating power supply, CPU, memory and input/output<br>Power supply, Input/output type: Connection on terminal block<br>Series name<br>Main unit<br>Total number of input<br>and output points<br>T/ESS: AC power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Transistor (source) output<br>T/ES  : AC power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Transistor (sink) output<br>R/ES  : AC power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Relay output<br>T/DSS: DC power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Transistor (source) output<br>T/DS  : DC power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Transistor (sink) output<br>R/DS  : DC power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Relay output|



|**Model name**|**Number of input/output points**<br>**Total number**<br>**of points**<br>**Number of**<br>**input points**<br>**Number of**<br>**output points**|**Number of input/output points**<br>**Total number**<br>**of points**<br>**Number of**<br>**input points**<br>**Number of**<br>**output points**|**Number of input/output points**<br>**Total number**<br>**of points**<br>**Number of**<br>**input points**<br>**Number of**<br>**output points**|**Input type**|**Output type**|**Connection**<br>**form**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Number of**<br>**input points**|**Number of**<br>**output points**||||
|**AC power supply co**|**mmon to 24V DC sink and source input**||||||
|FX3G-14MR/ES|14(16)*1|8|6(8)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX3G-14MT/ES|14(16)*1|8|6(8)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-14MT/ESS|14(16)*1|8|6(8)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-24MR/ES|24(32)*1|14(16)*1|10(16)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX3G-24MT/ES|24(32)*1|14(16)*1|10(16)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-24MT/ESS|24(32)*1|14(16)*1|10(16)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-40MR/ES|40|24|16|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX3G-40MT/ES|40|24|16|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-40MT/ESS|40|24|16|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-60MR/ES|60(64)*1|36(40)*1|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX3G-60MT/ES|60(64)*1|36(40)*1|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-60MT/ESS|60(64)*1|36(40)*1|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|**DC power supply co**|**mmon to 24V DC sink and source input**||||||
|FX3G-14MR/DS|14(16)*1|8|6(8)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX3G-14MT/DS|14(16)*1|8|6(8)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-14MT/DSS|14(16)*1|8|6(8)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-24MR/DS|24(32)*1|14(16)*1|10(16)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX3G-24MT/DS|24(32)*1|14(16)*1|10(16)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-24MT/DSS|24(32)*1|14(16)*1|10(16)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-40MR/DS|40|24|16|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX3G-40MT/DS|40|24|16|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-40MT/DSS|40|24|16|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-60MR/DS|60(64)*1|36(40)*1|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX3G-60MT/DS|60(64)*1|36(40)*1|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX3G-60MT/DSS|60(64)*1|36(40)*1|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|



*1. Each value inside ( ) indicates the number of occupied points. 

**34** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products _3.1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8** 

**9 10** 

**10** 

## **3.1.2 Input/output powered extension units** 

The input/output powered extension unit incorporates a power supply circuit and input and output terminals. B It is designed to add input and output terminals. It can supply power to extension devices connected on the downstream side. 

**==> picture [454 x 159] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FX2N E Incorporating power supply and input/output terminals<br>Classification 1: None: Not compliant with standard<br>Series name<br>                          UL:Compliant with standard<br>Power supply, Input/output type: Connection on terminal block<br>·R : AC Power supply/24V DC (sink) input/Relay output<br>·S : AC Power supply/24V DC (sink) input/Triac (SSR) output<br>·T : AC Power supply/24V DC (sink) input/Transistor (sink) output<br>·R-ES: AC Power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Relay output<br>·T-ESS: AC Power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Transistor (source) output<br>Total number of input Input/output<br>and output points extension ·R-UA1: AC Power supply/100V AC input/Relay output<br>·R-DS: DC Power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Relay output<br>·T-DSS: DC Power supply/24V DC (sink/source) input/Transistor (source) output<br>·R-D: DC Power supply/24V DC (sink) input/Relay output<br>·T-D: DC Power supply/24V DC (sink) input/Transistor (sink) output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


|**Model name**|**Number of input/output points**<br>**Total number**<br>**of points**<br>**Number of**<br>**input points**<br>**Number of**<br>**output points**|**Number of input/output points**<br>**Total number**<br>**of points**<br>**Number of**<br>**input points**<br>**Number of**<br>**output points**|**Number of input/output points**<br>**Total number**<br>**of points**<br>**Number of**<br>**input points**<br>**Number of**<br>**output points**|**Input type**|**Output type**|**Connection**<br>**form**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Number of**<br>**input points**|**Number of**<br>**output points**||||
|**AC power supply co**|**mmon to 24V DC sink and source input**||||||
|FX2N-32ER-ES/UL|32|16|16|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL|32|16|16|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX2N-48ER-ES/UL|48|24|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL|48|24|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|**AC power supply only for 24V DC sink input**|||||||
|FX2N-32ER|32|16|16|24V DC(sink)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-32ES|32|16|16|24V DC(sink)|Triac|Terminal block|
|FX2N-32ET|32|16|16|24V DC(sink)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX2N-48ER|48|24|24|24V DC(sink)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-48ET|48|24|24|24V DC(sink)|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|**AC power supply common to 100V AC sink and source input**|||||||
|FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL|48|24|24|100V AC|Relay|Terminal block|
|**DC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input**|||||||
|FX2N-48ER-DS|48|24|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-48ET-DSS|48|24|24|24V DC(sink/source)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|**DC power supply only for 24V DC sink input**|||||||
|FX2N-48ER-D|48|24|24|24V DC(sink)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-48ET-D|48|24|24|24V DC(sink)|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|



**35** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products _3.1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names_ 

## **3.1.3 Input/output extension blocks** 

C 

The input/output extension block has built-in input or output terminals to add input or output terminals. Connect the input/output extension block to the main unit or input/output powered extension unit. 

FX2N E Incorporating input or output terminals Classification 1: None: Not compliant with standard Series name UL: Compliant with standard Input/output type: Connection on terminal block or with connector · ER            : 24V DC (sink) input/relay output/terminal block · ER-ES      : 24V DC (sink/source) input/relay output/terminal block · X               : 24V DC (sink) input/terminal block · X-C           : 24V DC (sink) input/connector · X-ES         : 24V DC (sink/source) input/terminal block · XL-C         : 5V DC input/connector · X-UA1       : 100V AC input/terminal block · YR            : Relay output/terminal block · YR-ES      : Relay output/terminal block · YR-S-ES : Relay output (separate reference terminals (Commons)) /terminal block Total number of input Input/output · YT             : Transistor (sink) output/terminal block and output points extension · YT-H         : Transistor (sink) output/terminal block · YT-C         : Transistor (sink) output/connector · YT-ESS    : Transistor (source) output/terminal block · YS : Triac (SSR) output/terminal block 

|**Model name**|**Number of input/output points**|**Number of input/output points**|**Number of input/output points**|**Input type**|**Output type**|**Connection**<br>**form**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**Total number**<br>**of points**|**Number of**<br>**input points**|**Number of**<br>**output points**||||
|**Input/Output extension type**|||||||
|FX2N-8ER-ES/UL|8(16)*1|4(8)*1|4(8)*1|24V DC(sink/source)|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8ER|8(16)*1|4(8)*1|4(8)*1|24V DC(sink)|Relay|Terminal block|
|**Input extension type**|||||||
|FX2N-8EX-ES/UL|8|8|-|24V DC(sink/source)|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EX|8|8|-|24V DC(sink)|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL|8|8|-|100V AC|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EX-ES/UL|16|16|-|24V DC(sink/source)|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EX|16|16|-|24V DC(sink)|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EX-C|16|16|-|24V DC(sink)|-|Connector|
|FX2N-16EXL-C|16|16|-|5V DC|-|Connector|
|**Output extension type**|||||||
|FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL|8|-|8|-|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL|8|-|8|-|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL|8|-|8|-|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EYR|8|-|8|-|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EYT|8|-|8|-|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EYT-H|8|-|8|-|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL|16|-|16|-|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL|16|-|16|-|Transistor(source)|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYR|16|-|16|-|Relay|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYT|16|-|16|-|Transistor(sink)|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYT-C|16|-|16|-|Transistor(sink)|Connector|
|FX2N-16EYS|16|-|16|-|Triac|Terminal block|



*1. Each value inside ( ) indicates the number of occupied points. 

**36** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products 

_3.1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

**10** 

## **3.1.4 Special function blocks** 

For details of each product, refer to the product manual. 

- 1) Analog control 

|**Model name**|**Analog**|**Analog**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**Input**|**Output**||
|**Analog input**||||
|FX3U-4AD|4ch|-|Voltage/current input|
|FX2N-2AD|2ch|-|Voltage/current input|
|FX2N-4AD|4ch|-|Voltage/current input|
|FX2N-8AD|8ch|-|Voltage/current/temperature (thermocouple) input|
|FX2N-4AD-PT|4ch|-|Platinum resistance thermometer sensor input|
|FX2N-4AD-TC|4ch|-|Temperature (thermocouple) input|
|**Analog output**||||
|FX3U-4DA|-|4ch|Voltage/current output|
|FX2N-2DA|-|2ch|Voltage/current output|
|FX2N-4DA|-|4ch|Voltage/current output|
|**Analog input/output mixed**||||
|FX2N-5A|4ch|1ch|Voltage/current input/output|
|**Temperature control**||||
|FX3U-4LC|4 loops|-|Temperature control (resistance thermometer sensor/thermocouple/micro<br>voltage input)|
|FX2N-2LC|2 loops|-|Temperature control (resistance thermometer sensor/thermocouple)|



## 2) Data link functions 

|**Model name**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|FX3U-16CCL-M|Master for CC-Link (Compatible with Ver. 2.00 and Ver. 1.10)<br>Connectable stations: Remote I/O station, Remote device station, Intelligent device station|
|FX2N-16CCL-M|Master for CC-Link (Compatible with Ver. 1.10)<br>Connectable stations: Remote I/O station, Remote device station|
|FX3U-64CCL|Intelligent device station for CC-Link<br>[1 to 4 stations occupied]|
|FX2N-32CCL|Remote device station for CC-Link<br>[1 to 4 stations occupied]|
|FX2N-64CL-M|Master for CC-Link/LT|



## **3.1.5 Display module** 

|**Model name**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|FX3G-5DM|Display module that can be incorporated in FX3GSeries main unit|



## **3.1.6 Expansion boards** 

|**Model name**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|FX3G-232-BD|For RS-232C communication|
|FX3G-422-BD|For RS-422 communication|
|FX3G-485-BD|For RS-485 communication|
|FX3G-8AV-BD|For 8-ch Analog volume|
|FX3G-2AD-BD|2-ch voltage/current input|
|FX3G-1DA-BD|1-ch voltage/current output|



**37** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products _3.1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names_ 

## **3.1.7 Connector conversion adapter** 

|**3.1.8**<br>G|**Model name**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
||FX3G-CNV-ADP|Special adapter connection conversion adapter|
||**Special adapters**||
||||
||||
|H|**Model name**<br>**Description**<br>FX3U-232ADP(-MB)<br>RS-232C communication<br>FX3U-485ADP(-MB)<br>RS-485 communication<br>FX3U-4AD-ADP<br>4-ch voltage/current input<br>FX3U-4DA-ADP<br>4-ch voltage/current output<br>FX3U-3A-ADP<br>2-ch voltage/current input 1-ch voltage/current output<br>FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP<br>4-ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input (-50 to 250 C)<br>FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP<br>4-ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input (-100 to 600 C)<br>FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP<br>4-ch Pt1000/Ni1000 resistance thermometer sensor input<br>FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP<br>4-ch thermocouple (K, J type) temperature sensor input||
||**Model name**|**Description**|
||FX3U-232ADP(-MB)|RS-232C communication|
||FX3U-485ADP(-MB)|RS-485 communication|
||FX3U-4AD-ADP|4-ch voltage/current input|
||FX3U-4DA-ADP|4-ch voltage/current output|
||FX3U-3A-ADP|2-ch voltage/current input 1-ch voltage/current output|
||FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP|4-ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input (-50 to 250 C)|
||FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP|4-ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input (-100 to 600 C)|
||FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP|4-ch Pt1000/Ni1000 resistance thermometer sensor input|
||FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP|4-ch thermocouple (K, J type) temperature sensor input|



## **3.1.9 Extension power supply unit** 

|**Model name**|**Description**|**Driving power supply**|
|---|---|---|
|FX3U-1PSU-5V|Extension power supply  5V DC 1A|100 to 240V AC|



## **3.1.10 Extension cables and connector conversion adapter/ Battery/Memory cassettes** 

|**Classification**|**Model name**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Extension<br>cables<br>J|FX0N-65EC*1|0.65m<br>(2’1")|These cables are used to mount input/output extension units/blocks for FX2N<br>and special function blocks away from the main unit.|
||FX0N-30EC*1|0.3m<br>(0’11")||
|Connector<br>conversion<br>adapter<br>J|FX2N-CNV-BC|Connector conversion adapter to connect input/output extension blocks for FX2Nand<br>special function blocks with model FX0N-30/65EC extension cable||
|Battery<br>K|FX3U-32BL|This battery backs up the following data.<br>•<br>General devices (Parameter setting is required.)<br>-<br>M1536 to M7679<br>-<br>S1000 to S4095<br>-<br>D1100 to D7999<br>-<br>R0 to R23999<br>•<br>Time on clock||
|Memory<br>cassettes<br>L|FX3G-EEPROM-32L|32k-step EEPROM memory (with transfer switch)||



*1. When the extension cable (FX0N-30EC or FX0N-65EC) is used, use up to one cable for one system. When an extension block is added, use FX2N-CNV-BC in addition to the cable. 

**38** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products 

_3.1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names_ 

**1** 

**2 3 4** 

**5** 

**6 7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

## **3.1.11 FX Series terminal blocks (cables and connectors)** 

## **1. FX Series terminal blocks** 

|**Model name**|**Number of**<br>**input points**|**Number of**<br>**input points**|**Number of**<br>**output points**|**Function**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|FX-16E-TB|16 input points or<br>16 output points|||To be directly connected to the PLC input/output connector|
|FX-32E-TB|32 input points,<br>32 output points or<br>16 input/output points||||
|FX-16EX-A1-TB|16||-|100V AC input|
|FX-16EYR-TB|-||16|Relay output|
|FX-16EYS-TB|-||16|Triac output|
|FX-16EYT-TB|-||16|Transistor output (sink)|
|FX-16EYT-H-TB|-||16|Transistor output (sink)|
|**Input/output cables**<br> **Input/output connector**<br>**Model name**<br>**Function**<br>FX-16E-500CAB-S<br>5m(16’4")<br>•<br>Single wire (Wire color: red)<br>•<br>PLC side: A 20-pin connector<br>FX-16E-150CAB<br>1.5m(4’11")<br>•<br>Flat cables (with tube)<br>•<br>A 20-pin connector at both ends<br>FX-16E-300CAB<br>3m(9’10")<br>FX-16E-500CAB<br>5m(16’4")<br>FX-16E-150CAB-R<br>1.5m(4’11")<br>•<br>Round multicore cables<br>•<br>A 20-pin connector at both ends<br>FX-16E-300CAB-R<br>3m(9’10")<br>FX-16E-500CAB-R<br>5m(16’4")<br>FX-A32E-150CAB<br>1.5m(4’11")<br>•<br>Flat cables (with tube)<br>•<br>PLC side: Two 20-pin connectors in 16-point units.<br>•<br>Terminal block side: A dedicated connector<br>•<br>One common terminal covers 32 input/output terminals.<br>FX-A32E-300CAB<br>3m(9’10")<br>FX-A32E-500CAB<br>5m(16’4")<br>**Model name**<br>**Function**<br>FX2C-I/O-CON<br>10-piece set<br>Input/output connector for flat cable<br>FX2C-I/O-CON-S<br>5-piece set<br>Input/output connector for bulk wire for 0.3 mm2[AGW22]<br>FX2C-I/O-CON-SA<br>5-piece set<br>Input/output connector for bulk wire for 0.5 mm2[AGW20]|||||
|**Model name**|**Function**||||
|FX2C-I/O-CON|10-piece set|Input/output connector for flat cable|||
|FX2C-I/O-CON-S|5-piece set|Input/output connector for bulk wire for 0.3 mm2[AGW22]|||
|FX2C-I/O-CON-SA|5-piece set|Input/output connector for bulk wire for 0.5 mm2[AGW20]|||



## **3.1.12 Remote I/O** 

For the remote I/O of CC-Link and CC-Link/LT, refer to the manual and catalog of each master. 

## N 

## **3.1.13 Power supply unit** 

|**Model name**|**Description**|**Driving power supply**|
|---|---|---|
|FX2N-20PSU|24V DC power supply|100 to 240V AC|



**39** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products 

_3.2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication_ 

## **3.2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication** 

**==> picture [472 x 641] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
a 4 RS-232C/RS-422 cable<br>Connection cabling<br>Connection cabling for<br>Peripheral device connector extension devices<br>FX-232AWC-H<br>6<br>RS-232C 1 2 RS-422<br>@. <,_45 LU)<br>1 _<br>FX-30P<br>7 8 9 10<br>3 FX-20P-CAB0<br>2<br>q Oo | oo Oo Oo<br>USB 4<br>3<br>Special adapter 4 FX3U-232ADP(-MB) 6 FX3G-CNV-ADP<br>—— RS-232C 5 = 0 | |<br>1<br>Expansion board<br>4 FX3G-232-BD<br>RS-232C 5<br>1<br>yy -_*____ FX-232AWC-H - penne<br>5 FX3G-422-BD<br>RS-232C 1 2 RS-422<br>FX-30P<br>2<br>3 FX-20P-CAB0<br>No. Shape of connector or combination with cable No. Shape of connector or combination with cable<br>| 2 "FX-422CAB0"+ | 1  "F2-232CAB-1" FX3G-232-BD D-SUB 9Pin [RS-232C]<br>+ "FX-232AW/FX-232AWC/FX-232AWC-H" | 4 FX3U-232ADP(-MB) D-SUB 9Pin [RS-232C]<br>D-SUB 9Pin<br>= 5 FX-232CAB-1 [| 5 FX3G-422-BD MINI DIN 8Pin [RS-422]<br>a "FX-232AW/FX-232AWC/FX-232AWC-H"2 "FX-422CAB0"+  a 1 "F2-232CAB-2"+ | 6 FX3G-CNV-ADP<br>7 1 Half pitch 14Pin Peripheral device connector [USB]<br>. 5 FX-232CAB-2 [| 7 MINI B connector female [USB2.0]<br>a 2 "FX-422CAB0"+  a 1 "F2-232CAB" + Peripheral device connector [RS-422]<br>"FX-232AW/FX-232AWC/FX-232AWC-H" | 8 MINI DIN 8Pin<br>D-SUB 25Pin<br>. 5 F2-232CAB-1 [| 9 Expansion board connector<br>FX-30P MINI DIN<br>2 8Pin [RS-422] 3 FX-20P-CAB0 FX3U-64CCL CC-Link connection terminal block<br>|e<br>10 Accessing the other station from CC-Link is used.<br>USB A connector, 4 USB cable →  Refer to Subsection 3.2.4.<br>3 female →  Refer to Subsection 3.2.2.<br>oe -<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


When FX-232AW or FX-232AWC is used, the communication baud rate is 19,200 bps or less. 

→ **For details, refer to Subsection 3.2.3.** 

**40** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products _3.2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8** 

**9 10** 

**10** 

## **3.2.1 Programming tool** 

The following programming tools support FX3G Series PLCs. 

|**Model name**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|GX Works2|Version 1.07H or later of SW<br>DNC-GXW2-J supports the FX3G.<br>Version 1.08J or later of SW<br>DNC-GXW2-E supports the FX3G.|
|GX Developer|Version 8.72A or later of SW<br>D5C-GPPW-J and SW<br>D5C-GPPW-E supports FX3G.<br>Although the tool earlier than version 8.72A can be used for programming by selecting FX1N(C), restrictions<br>will be made on programming.|
|FX-30P|FX-30P (From first version) supports FX3GPLCs (Ver. 1.10 or later)|



→ **For more information, refer to 5. Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability.** 

## **3.2.2 Communication cables** 

|**Model name**|**Model name**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**USB cable**||||
|USB cable*1<br>4||3m<br>(9’10")|USB A plug<br>USB MINI B plug<br>For connection between personal computer and FX3Gprogramming port (USB)|
|**RS-232C cable**||||
|F2-232CAB-1<br>1||3m<br>(9’10")|D-SUB 9Pin<br>D-SUB 25Pin<br>For connection between personal computer and RS-232C/RS-422 converter|
|F2-232CAB<br>1||3m<br>(9’10")|D-SUB 25Pin<br>D-SUB 25Pin<br>For connection between personal computer and RS-232C/RS-422 converter|
|F2-232CAB-2<br>1||3m<br>(9’10")|Half-pitch 14-pin<br>D-SUB 25Pin<br>For connection between personal computer and RS-232C/RS-422 converter|
|FX-232CAB-1<br>5||3m<br>(9’10")|D-SUB 9Pin<br>D-SUB 9Pin<br>For connection between personal computer and RS-232C/RS-422 converter FX3G-232-BD,<br>FX3U-232ADP(-MB)|
|FX-232CAB-2<br>5||3m<br>(9’10")|Half-pitch 14-pin<br>D-SUB 9Pin<br>For connection between personal computer and RS-232C/RS-422 converter FX3G-232-BD,<br>FX3U-232ADP(-MB)|
|**RS-422 cable**||||
|FX-422CAB0<br>2||1.5m<br>(4’11")|D-SUB 25Pin<br>MINI DIN 8Pin<br>For connection between RS-232C/RS-422 converter and FX3Gprogramming port (RS-422),<br>FX3G-422-BD|
|FX-20P-CAB0<br>3||1.5m<br>(4’11")|MINI DIN 8Pin<br>MINI DIN 8Pin<br>For connection between FX-30P and FX3Gprogramming port (RS-422), FX3G-422-BD|
|*1.|The following USB cables are applicable.|||
||**Model name**||**Description**|
||MR-J3USBCBL3M||USB cable 3m(9’10")|
||GT09-C30USB-5P||USB cable to transfer personal computer data (USB A plug) 3m(9’10")|



## **3.2.3 Converters and interface** 

|**Model name**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|**RS-232C/RS-422 Converters**||
|FX-232AWC-H*1|RS-232C/RS-422 converter (high-speed type)<br>Communication speed: Applicable to 9,600 to 115,200 bps .|
|FX-232AW|RS-232C/RS-422 converters<br>Communication speed: Applicable to 9,600/19,200 bps|
|FX-232AWC||



*1. When the programming software is not applicable to FX3G, the converter is applicable only to 9,600 or 19,200 bps. 

**41** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

3 Introduction of Products 

_3.2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication_ 

## **3.2.4 The accessing path to the FX3G from CC-Link** 

The FX3G connected to the FX3U-64CCL can be accessed via CC-Link from the FX master station (FX3U16CCL-M) and Q CPU (Q mode) master/local station when GX Works2 is used. Accessing permits read, write, verify, device batch monitoring and device test. The communication path of CC-Link is illustrated as follows. 

→ **For details, refer to the manual of GX Works2 or GX Developer** 

- 1) The path when accessing from the FX3U-16CCL-M 

**==> picture [282 x 170] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
*1<br>PC FX3G<br>FX3U-16CCL-M<br>(GX Works2) main unit<br>CC-Link<br>FX3G FX3U-64CCL<br>main unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 2) The path when accessing from the master QCPU (Q mode) station 

**==> picture [199 x 157] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Q<br>GX Works2PC *1 (Q mode)QCPU masterstation<br>etc.<br>CC-Link<br>FX3G FX3U-64CCL<br>main unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 3) The path when accessing from a local QCPU (Q mode) station 

**==> picture [252 x 178] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Q<br>QCPU<br>master<br>(Q mode) station<br>CC-Link<br>PC<br>GX Works2<br>etc.<br>*1<br>Q FX3G FX3U-64CCL<br>QCPU local main unit<br>(Q mode) station<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. Direct connection or connection using the GOT transparent mode. 

**42** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.1 Generic Specifications_ 

**1 2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**10** 

## **4. Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units)** 

This Chapter explains the specifications, external dimensions and terminal layout of the main units. → **For the specifications for the input/output powered extension units, refer to Chapter 15.** → **For the specifications for the input/output extension blocks, refer to Chapter 16.** 

## **4.1 Generic Specifications** 

|**Item**<br>|**Specifications**<br>|**Specifications**<br>|**Specifications**<br>|**Specifications**<br>|**Specifications**<br>|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Ambient temperature|0 to 55 C (32 to 131 F) when operating and -25 to 75 C (-13 to 167 F) when stored|||||
|Ambient humidity|5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating|||||
|Vibration resistance*1||Frequency(Hz)|Acceleration(m/s2)|Half amplitude(mm)||
||When installed on<br>DIN rail|10 to 57<br>57 to 150|-|0.035|Sweep Count for<br>X, Y, Z: 10 times<br>(80 min in each<br>direction)|
||||4.9|-||
||When installed<br>directly|10 to 57<br>57 to 150|-|0.075||
||||9.8|-||
|Shock resistance*1|147m/s2Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z|||||
|Noise resistance|By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1,000Vp-p, noise width of 1 s, rise time of 1ns and period of 30 to 100Hz|||||
|Dielectric withstand<br>voltage|1.5kV AC for one minute||Between each terminals and ground terminal*2|||
||500V AC for one minute|||||
|Insulation resistance|5M<br>or more by 500V DC megger|||||
|Grounding|Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100<br>or less)<br><Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed>*3|||||
|Working atmosphere|Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dust|||||
|Working altitude|< 2000m*4|||||



- *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. 

- *2. For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resistance test of the terminals of each product, refer to the following. 

→ **Refer to Subsection 4.1.1.** 

- *3. Ground the PLC independently or jointly. 

→ **Refer to Section 9.3.** 

**==> picture [319 x 56] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Other Other Other<br>PLC PLC PLC<br>equipment equipment equipment<br>Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding<br>Best condition Good condition Not allowed<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *4. The PLC cannot be used at a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure to avoid damage. 

**9** 

**43** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.1 Generic Specifications_ 

## **4.1.1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test** 

Perform dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test at the following voltage between each terminals and the main unit ground terminal. 

|**Between terminals**|**Dielectric strength**|**Insulation**<br>**resistance**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**Terminals of main unit and input/output powered extension unit/block**||||
|Between power supply terminal (AC power<br>supply) and ground terminal|1.5kV AC for 1min|5M<br>or more<br>on 500V DC<br>Megger|-|
|Between power supply terminal (DC power<br>supply) and ground terminal|500V AC for 1min||-|
|Between 24V DC service power supply<br>connected to input terminal (24V DC) and<br>ground terminal|500V AC for 1min||-|
|Between input terminal (100V AC) and<br>ground terminal|1.5kV AC for 1min||Only input/output powered extension unit/block|
|Between output terminal (relay) and ground<br>terminal|1.5kV AC for 1min||-|
|Between output terminal (transistor) and<br>ground terminal|500V AC for 1min||-|
|Between output terminal (triac) and ground<br>terminal|1.5kV AC for 1min||Only input/output powered extension unit/block|
|**Terminals of expansion board, special adapter and special function block**||||
|Between terminal of expansion board and<br>ground terminal|Not allowed|Not allowed|Since the expansion board and the main unit<br>CPU are not insulated, it is not allowed to<br>perform the dielectric withstand voltage test and<br>insulation resistance test between them.|
|Between terminal of special adapter and<br>ground terminal|500V AC for 1min|5M<br>or more<br>on 500V DC<br>Megger|-|
|Special function block|Each manual||Refer to the manual for each special function<br>block.|



**44** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) _4.2 Power Supply Specifications_ 

**1** 

**2 3 4** 

**5 6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

## **4.2 Power Supply Specifications** 

The specifications for the main unit power supply are explained below. 

For the power (current) consumed by the special function blocks, refer to this manual or the special function units/blocks manual. 

## **4.2.1 AC Power Supply Type** 

|**Item**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||**FX3G-14M**<br>**/E**|**FX3G-24M**<br>**/E**|**FX3G-40M**<br>**/E**|**FX3G-60M**<br>**/E**|
|**Supply voltage**|100 to 240V AC||||
|**Allowable supply**<br>**voltage range**|85 to 264V AC||||
|**Rated frequency**|50/60Hz||||
|**Allowable**<br>**instantaneous power**<br>**failure time**|Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or less.||||
|**Power fuse**|250V 1A||250V 3.15A||
|**Rush current**|30A max. 5ms or less/100V AC, 50A max. 5ms or less/200V AC||||
|**Power consumption*1**|31W|32W|37W|40W|
|**24V DC service power**<br>**supply*2**|400mA||||



- *1. This item shows values when all 24V DC service power supplies are used in the maximum configuration connectable to the main unit, and includes the input current (5 or 7mA per point). 

- *2. When input/output extension blocks are connected, the 24V DC service power changes the current consumed by the point (number) of the block connected. 

   - → **For details on the 24V DC service power supply, refer to Subsection 6.5.** 

## **4.2.2 DC Power Supply Type** 

|**Item**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||**FX3G-14M**<br>**/D**|**FX3G-24M**<br>**/D**|**FX3G-40M**<br>**/D**|**FX3G-60M**<br>**/D**|
||||||
|**Supply voltage**|24V DC||||
|**Allowable supply**<br>**voltage range**|20.4 to 28.8V DC||||
|**Allowable**<br>**instantaneous power**<br>**failure time**|Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 5 ms or less.||||
|**Power fuse**|125V 2.5A||125V 3.15A||
|**Rush current**|30A max. 1ms or less/24V DC||||
|**Power consumption*1**|19W|21W|25W|29W|
|**24V DC service power**<br>**supply**|-||||



- *1. There power consumption values are maximum values which include consumption of all expansion equipment and input current (5 or 7 mA per point). 

**45** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.3 Input Specifications_ 

## **4.3 Input Specifications** 

The main unit input specifications are explained below. 

## **4.3.1 24V DC Input (sink/source)** 

The input numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers. "X010 or more" means the numbers from X010 to the largest number that the main unit has. 

(The input numbers for FX3G-14M are X000 to X007.) 

→ **For details on  input and source input, refer to Subsection 10.1.1** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|**Specifications**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**FX3G-14M**|||**FX3G-24M**||||||**FX3G-40M**||**FX3G-60M**||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
|**Number of input points**||8 points|||14 points (16)*1||||||24 points||36 points (40)*1||||||
|**Input connecting type**||Removable terminal block (M3 screw)|||||||||||||||||
|**Input form**||sink/source|||||||||||||||||
|**Input signal voltage**||AC power supply type: 24V DC ±10%  DC power supply type: 20.4V to||||||||||||||28.8V DC|||
|**Input impedance**|**X000 to X007**|3.3k|||||||||||||||||
||**X010 or more**|-|||4.3k||||||||||||||
|**Input signal**<br>**current**|**X000 to X007**|7mA/24V DC|||||||||||||||||
||**X010 or more**|-|||5mA/24V DC||||||||||||||
|**ON input**<br>**sensitivity current**|**X000 to X007**|4.5mA or more|||||||||||||||||
||**X010 or more**|-|||3.5mA or more||||||||||||||
|**OFF input sensitivity current**||1.5mA or less|||||||||||||||||
|**Input response time**||Approx. 10ms|||||||||||||||||
|**Input signal form**||No-voltage contact input<br>Sink input: NPN open collector transistor<br>Source input: PNP open collector transistor|||||||||||||||||
|**Input circuit insulation**|||||||Photocoupler insulation||||||||||||
|**Input operation display**||LED|||||on panel lights when photocoupler is driven.||||||||||||
|**Input circuit configuration**||•<br>AC power supply type|||||||||||||||||
|||Sink inp|ut wiring||||Fuse||S||ource input wiring|||||100 to 240V AC<br>Fuse|||
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
|||||~~N~~||||||||||~~N~~|||||
||||*3<br>*3|||||||||*|||||||
|||||24||V|o|||||3|2|4V|||||
|||||||||||||*|||||||
|||||0||V||||||3|0|V|||||
||||||||||||||||||||
|||||S/||S|||||||S|/S|||||
||||*2|~~X~~||||||||*2||~~X~~|||||
||||||||||||||||||||
|||•<br>DC po|wer supply type|||||||||||||Fuse<br><br>24V DC|||
|||Sink inp|ut wiring||||<br>24V DC<br>Fuse||||Source i|nput wiring|||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||2|||||||||||
|||||S||/S|||||||S||/S||||
||||*2|||~~X~~||||||*2|||~~X~~||||
||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||



- *1. Each value inside ( ) indicates the number of occupied points. 

- *2. Input impedance 

- *3. The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

**46** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.4 Output Specifications_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

## **4.4 Output Specifications** 

The main unit output specifications are explained below. 

## **4.4.1 Relay output** 

**==> picture [457 x 414] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Relay output specifications<br>Item<br>FX3G-14MR/ FX3G-24MR/ FX3G-40MR/ FX3G-60MR/<br>Number of output points 6 points(8) [*1] 10 points(16) [*1] 16 points 24 points<br>Connecting type Removable terminal block (M3 screw)<br>Output type Relay<br>30V DC or less<br>External power supply<br>240V AC or less(250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)<br>2A/point<br>The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value.<br>Resistance →  For details on the common terminal for each model,<br>load refer to the Section 4.7 Terminal Layout.<br>Max. load • 1 output point/common terminal: 2A or less<br>• 4 output points/common terminal: 8A or less<br>80VA<br>Inductive<br>→  For the product life,refer to Subsection 14.4.3.<br>load<br>→  For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.1.4.<br>Min.load 5V DC, 2mA (reference value)<br>Open circuit leakagecurrent -<br>Response OFF ON Approx. 10ms<br>time ON OFF Approx. 10ms<br>Circuit insulation Mechanical inslation<br>Display of output<br>LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil.<br>operation<br>Load<br>Y<br>DC power<br>supply<br>COM<br>Fuse<br>Output circuit Load<br>configuration Y<br>AC power<br>supply<br>COM<br>Fuse<br>A common number applies to the of [COM ].<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. Each value inside ( ) indicates the number of occupied points. 

**47** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.4 Output Specifications_ 

## **4.4.2 Transistor output** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|**Transistor output specifications**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**FX3G-14MT/**||||**FX3G-24MT/**||**FX3G-40MT/**||||**FX3G-60MT/**|
||||||||||||||
|**Number of output points**||6 points(8)*1||||10 points(16)*1||16 points||||24 points|
|**Connecting type**||Removable terminal block (M3 screw)|||||||||||
|**Output type/form**||Transistor/sink output(FX3G-<br>MT/<br>S)<br>Transistor/source output(FX3G-<br>MT/<br>SS)|||||||||||
|**External power supply**||5 to 30V DC|||||||||||
|**Max. load**|**Resistance**<br>**load**|0.5A/point<br>The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value.<br>→**For details on the common terminal for each model,**<br>**refer to the Section 4.7 Terminal Layout.**<br>•<br>1 output point/common terminal: 0.5A or less<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 0.8A or less|||||||||||
||**Inductive**<br>**load**|12W/24V DC<br>The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value.<br>→**For details on the common terminal for each model,**<br>**refer to the Section 4.7 Terminal Layout.**<br>•<br>1 output point/common terminal: 12W or less/24V DC<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 19.2W or less/24V DC|||||||||||
|**Open circuit leakage**<br>**current**||0.1mA or less/30V DC|||||||||||
|**ON voltage**||1.5 V or less|||||||||||
|**Response**<br>**time**|**OFF**<br>**ON**|Y000, Y001:5 s or less/10mA or more<br>(5 to 24V DC)<br>Y002 or more:0.2ms or less/200mA or more<br>(at 24V DC)||||||Y000 to Y002:5 s or less/10mA or more<br>(5 to 24V DC)<br>Y003 or more:0.2ms or less/200mA or more<br>(at 24V DC)|||||
||**ON**<br>**OFF**|Y000, Y001:5 s or less/10mA or more<br>(5 to 24V DC)<br>Y002 or more:0.2ms or less/200mA or more<br>(at 24V DC)||||||Y000 to Y002:5 s or less/10mA or more<br>(5 to 24V DC)<br>Y003 or more:0.2ms or less/200mA or more<br>(at 24V DC)|||||
|**Circuit insulation**||||||Photocoupler insulation|||||||
|**Display of output**<br>**operation**||||||LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven.|||||||
|**Output circuit**<br>**configuration**||Load<br>Fuse<br>DC power<br>supply<br>~~Y~~<br>COM<br>A common number applies<br>to the of [COM ].<br>Sink output wiring|||||||Load<br>Fuse<br>DC power<br>supply<br>~~Y~~<br>+V<br>A common number applies<br>to the of [+V ].<br>Source output wiring||||
||||Load<br><br>output wiring||||||||||
||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||
||||Fuse||||||Fuse<br><br>||||
|||||DC power<br>supply<br>COM<br>mon number applies<br> of [COM ].||M|||||||



- *1. Each value inside ( ) indicates the number of occupied points. 

**48** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.5 Performance Specifications_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8** 

**9** 

## **4.5 Performance Specifications** 

The main unit performance specifications are explained below. 

|**Item**|**Item**|**Performance**|**Performance**|**Performance**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Operation control system**||Stored program repetitive operation system with interruption function|||
|**Input/output control system**||Batch processing system (when END instruction is executed)<br>Input/output refresh instruction and pulse catch function are provided.|||
|**Programming language**||Relay symbol system + step-ladder system (SFC notation possible)|||
|**Program memory**|**Max. memory capacity/type**|32000-step/EEPROM memory<br>Max. allowable write: 20,000 times|||
||**Memory cassette (Option)**|32000-step/EEPROM memory (with loader function)<br>Max. allowable write: 10,000 times|||
||**Writing function during**<br>**running**|Provided (Program can be modified while the PLC is running.)<br>→For the writing function during running,<br>refer to Subsection 5.2.5.|||
||**Keyword function**|With keyword/Customer keyword function|||
|**Real-time clock**|**Clock function*1**|Built-in<br>1980 to 2079 (with correction for leap year)<br>2- or 4-digit year, accuracy within 45 seconds/month at 25 C|||
|**Kinds of**<br>**instructions**|**Basic instructions**|Sequence instructions: 29<br>Step-ladder instructions: 2|||
||**Applied instructions**|124 kinds|||
|**Processing**<br>**speed**|**Basic instructions**|Standard mode*3: 0.21 s/instruction<br>Extension mode*3: 0.42 s/instruction|||
||**Applied instructions**|Standard mode*3: 0.5 s to several hundred s/instruction<br>Extension mode*3: 1.2 s to several hundred s/instruction|||
|**Number of input/**<br>**output points**|**(1)Extension-combined**<br>**number of input points**|128 points or less|(3)Total points|(1) + (2)  (3) total number of points is<br>128 or less.|
||**(2)Extension-combined**<br>**number of output points**|128 points or less|||
||**(4)Remote I/O number of**<br>**points (CC-Link)**|128 points or less|-||
||**(3) + (4) total number of**<br>**points**|256 points or less|||
|**Input/output**<br>**relay**|**Input relay**|X000 to X177|The device numbers are octal.||
||**Output relay**|Y000 to Y177|||
|**Auxiliary relay**|**For general**|M0 to M383|384 points|-|
||**EEPROM keep**|M384 to M1535|1152 points|-|
||**For general*2**|M1536 to M7679|6144 points|-|
||**For special**|M8000 to M8511|512 points|-|
|**State**|**For initial state**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|S0 to S9|10 points|-|
||**EEPROM keep**|S10 to S999|990 points|-|
||**For general*2**|S1000 to S4095|3096 points|-|
|**Timer**<br>**(on-delay**<br>**timer)**|**100ms**|T0 to T191|192 points|0.1 to 3,276.7 sec|
||**100ms**<br>**(for subroutine/interruption**<br>**subroutine)**|T192 to T199|8 points|0.1 to 3,276.7 sec|
||**10ms**|T200 to T245|46 points|0.01 to 327.67 sec|
||**1ms accumulating type**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|T246 to T249|4 points|0.001 to 32.767 sec|
||**100ms accumulating type**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|T250 to T255|6 points|0.1 to 3,276.7 sec|
||**1ms**|T256 to T319|64 points|0.01 to 327.67 sec|
|**Variable analog potentiometers**||Available as analog timers<br>VR1 : D8030<br>VR2 : D8031|||
|**Counter**|**16 bits up**<br>**(For general)**|C0 to C15|16 points|Counting from 0 to 32,767|



**10** 

**49** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.5 Performance Specifications_ 

||**Item**|**Performance**|**Performance**|**Performance**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Counter**|**16 bits up**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|C16 to C199|184 points|Counting from 0 to 32,767|
||**32 bits up/down**<br>**(For general)**|C200 to C219|20 points|Counting from -2,147,483,648 to<br>+2,147,483,647|
||**32 bits up/down**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|C220 to C234|15 points||
|**High-speed**<br>**counter**|**1-phase 1-count input in**<br>**both directions**<br>**(32 bits up/down)**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|C235 to C245|Counting from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647||
||**1-phase 2-count input in**<br>**both directions**<br>**(32 bits up/down)**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|C246 to C250|||
||**2-phase 2-count input in**<br>**both directions**<br>**(32 bits up/down)**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|C251 to C255|||
|**Data register**<br>**(32 bits when**<br>**paired)**|**For general (16 bits)**|D0 to D127|128 points|-|
||**For EEPROM keep (16 bits)**|D128 to D1099|972 points|-|
||**For general*2 (16 bits)**|D1100 to D7999|6900 points|-|
||**File register**<br>**(EEPROM keep)**|D1000 to D7999|Maximum 7000<br>points|Can be set as file registers in units of<br>500 points from D1000 in the program<br>area (EEPROM) using parameters.|
||**For special (16 bits)**|D8000 to D8511|512 points|-|
||**For index (16 bits)**|V0 to V7<br>Z0 to Z7|16 points|-|
|**Extension**<br>**register**|**For general*2(16 bits)**|R0 to R23999|24000 points|-|
|**Extension file**<br>**register**|**For EEPROM keep (16 bits)**|ER0 to ER23999|24000 points|Stored in the EEPROM built-in the main<br>unit, or stored in the EEPROM in the<br>memory cassette when the memory<br>cassette is used.|
|**Pointer**|**For branching of JUMP and**<br>**CALL**|P0 to P2047|2048 points|For CJ instructions and CALL<br>instructions|
||**Input interruption**|I0<br>to I5|6 points|-|
||**Timer interruption**|I6<br>to I8|3 points||
|**Nesting**|**For master control**|N0 to N7|8 points|For MC instructions|
|**Constant**|**Decimal number (K)**|16bits|-32,768 to +32,767||
|||32bits|-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647||
||**Hexadecimal number (H)**|16bits|0 to FFFF||
|||32bits|0 to FFFFFFFF||
||**Real number (E)*4**|32bits|-1.0 x 2128to -1.0 x 2-126, 0 , 1.0 x 2-126to 1.0 x 2128<br>Decimal-point and exponential notations are possible.||



- *1. The current time of the clock is backed up by the capacitor built-in the PLC. Supply the power to the PLC for 30 minutes or more to completely charge this large-capacity capacitor. (The capacitor works for 10 days (atmosphere: 25 C ) 

The current time can be backed up by the battery when the optional battery is incorporated. 

   - → **For details on the battery, refer to Chapter 22.** 

- *2. These devices can be changed to the keep (battery backup) type using a parameter when the optional battery is used. 

→ **For the parameter setting method, refer to Chapter 22.** 

- *3. The standard mode is selected when the program capacity is set to 16000 steps or less using a parameter. 

   - The extension mode is selected when the program capacity is set to 16001 steps or more using a parameter. 

      - → **For parameter settings, refer to the Programming Manual.** 

- *4. Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later 

**50** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) _4.6 External Dimensions (Weight/Accessories/Installation)_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**5** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**10** 

**10** 

## **4.6 External Dimensions (Weight/Accessories/Installation)** 

The external dimensions of the main unit are explained. 

## **4.6.1 Main units** 

|Unit: mm (inches)<br>86(3.39")<br>8(0.32")<br>90(3.55")<br>lepitch)<br>82(3.23")(mounting hole pitch)|Unit: mm (inches)<br>86(3.39")<br>8(0.32")<br>90(3.55")<br>lepitch)<br>82(3.23")(mounting hole pitch)|Unit: mm (inches)<br>86(3.39")<br>8(0.32")<br>90(3.55")<br>lepitch)<br>82(3.23")(mounting hole pitch)|Unit: mm (inches)<br>86(3.39")<br>8(0.32")<br>90(3.55")<br>lepitch)<br>82(3.23")(mounting hole pitch)|
|---|---|---|---|
|**Model name**|**W: mm (inch**|**es)**<br>**W1: mm (inches)**|**MASS (weight): kg (lbs)**|
|FX3G-14MR/ES<br>FX3G-14MT/ES<br>FX3G-14MT/ESS<br>FX3G-14MR/DS<br>FX3G-14MT/DS<br>FX3G-14MT/DSS|90 (3.55")|82 (3.23")|0.50 (1.10 lbs)|
|FX3G-24MR/ES<br>FX3G-24MT/ES<br>FX3G-24MT/ESS<br>FX3G-24MR/DS<br>FX3G-24MT/DS<br>FX3G-24MT/DSS|90 (3.55")|82 (3.23")|0.55 (1.21lbs)|
|FX3G-40MR/ES<br>FX3G-40MT/ES<br>FX3G-40MT/ESS<br>FX3G-40MR/DS<br>FX3G-40MT/DS<br>FX3G-40MT/DSS|130 (5.12")|122 (4.81")|0.70 (1.54 lbs)|
|FX3G-60MR/ES<br>FX3G-60MT/ES<br>FX3G-60MT/ESS<br>FX3G-60MR/DS<br>FX3G-60MT/DS<br>FX3G-60MT/DSS|175 (6.89")|167 (6.58")|0.85 (1.87 lbs)|



**4** 

- 1) Accessories 

Dust proof protection sheet Manual supplied with product 

**9** 

- 2) Installation 

35mm(1.38") wide DIN rail or Direct installation (with screws) (M4 x 2) 

**51** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.7 Terminal Layout_ 

## **4.7 Terminal Layout** 

The terminal layout in the main unit is shown below. 

## **4.7.1 Interpretation of terminal block layout** 

**==> picture [410 x 166] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
|||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Power supply terminals|Input terminal|
|S/S|X1|X3|X5|X7|X11|X13|X15|X17X21|X23|X25|X27|
|L|N|X0|X2|X4|X6|X10|X12|X14|X16|X20|X22|X24|X26|
|Output terminals|
|FX3G-40MT/ES|connected to COM5|[ · ] Vacant terminal (Do not use.)|
|0V|Y0|Y1|Y2|Y4|Y6|Y10|Y12|Y14|Y16|
|24V|COM0|COM1|COM2|Y3|COM3|Y5|Y7|COM4|Y11|Y13|COM5Y15|Y17|
|24V DC service|Common terminal|Output|Partition|
|power supply|(4 points/common|terminal|
|terminal)|

**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- Indication of Power supply terminals The AC power supply type has [L] and [N] terminals. The DC power supply type has [ ] and [ ] terminals. For external wiring, make sure to read the power supply wiring described later. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 9.** 

- Indication of 24V DC service power supply The AC power supply type has [0V] and [24V] terminals, whereas the DC power supply type shows [•] since the DC power supply type does not have the service power supply. Do not connect with [•] terminals. 

For external wiring, make sure to read the power supply wiring described later. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 9.** 

- Indication of Input terminal Both AC and DC power supply type have the same input terminals, however, the external input wiring differs fromeach other. 

For external wiring, make sure to read the input wiring described later. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 10.** 

- Indication of output terminals connected to common terminal One common terminal covers 1, 2, 3 or 4 output points. The output numbers (Y) connected to a common terminal are enclosed with heavy partition lines. For transistor output (source) type, [COM ] is [+V ]. 

**52** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.7 Terminal Layout_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**6 7 8** 

**10** 

## **4.7.2 FX3G-14M** � 

- AC power supply type 

S/S X1 X3 X5 X7 L N X0 X2 X4 X6 FX3G-14MR/ES, FX3G-14MT/ES 0V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 24V COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 FX3G-14MT/ESS 0V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 24V +V0 +V1 +V2 +V3 +V4 +V5 • DC power supply type S/S X1 X3 X5 X7 X0 X2 X4 X6 FX3G-14MR/DS, FX3G-14MT/DS Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 FX3G-14MT/DSS Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 +V0 +V1 +V2 +V3 +V4 +V5 

**==> picture [42 x 124] intentionally omitted <==**

**==> picture [42 x 75] intentionally omitted <==**

**5** 

## **4.7.3 FX3G-24M** � 

- AC power supply type 

S/S X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13X15 L N X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 FX3G-24MR/ES, FX3G-24MT/ES 0V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y10 24V COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 Y4 COM4 Y7 Y11 FX3G-24MT/ESS 0V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y10 24V +V0 +V1 +V2 +V3 Y4 +V4 Y7 Y11 • DC power supply type S/S X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 FX3G-24MR/DS, FX3G-24MT/DS Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y10 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 Y4 COM4 Y7 Y11 FX3G-24MT/DSS Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y10 +V0 +V1 +V2 +V3 Y4 +V4 Y7 Y11 

**9** 

**10** 

**53** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 

_4.7 Terminal Layout_ 

## **4.7.4 FX3G-40M** � 

- AC power supply type 

S/S X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 L N X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 FX3G-40MR/ES, FX3G-40MT/ES 0V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14Y16 24V COM0 COM1 COM2 Y3 COM3 Y5 Y7 COM4 Y11 Y13 COM5 Y15Y17 FX3G-40MT/ESS 0V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14Y16 24V +V0 +V1 +V2 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 +V4 Y11 Y13 +V5 Y15Y17 DC power supply type S/S X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17X21 X23 X25 X27 X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 FX3G-40MR/DS, FX3G-40MT/DS Y0 Y1 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 COM0 COM1 COM2 Y3 COM3 Y5 Y7 COM4 Y11 Y13 COM5 Y15 Y17 FX3G-40MT/DSS Y0 Y1 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 +V0 +V1 +V2 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 +V4 Y11 Y13 +V5 Y15 Y17 

- DC power supply type 

## **4.7.5 FX3G-60M** � 

- AC power supply type 

S/S X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27X31 X33 X35 X37 X41X43 L N X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 X30 X32 X34 X36 X40 X42 FX3G-60MR/ES, FX3G-60MT/ES 0V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 24V COM0 COM1 COM2 Y3 COM3 Y5 Y7 COM4 Y11 Y13 COM5 Y15 Y17 COM6 Y21 Y23 COM7 Y25 Y27 FX3G-60MT/ESS 0V Y0 Y1 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 24V +V0 +V1 +V2 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 +V4 Y11 Y13 +V5 Y15 Y17 +V6 Y21 Y23 +V7 Y25 Y27 DC power supply type S/S X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 X31 X33 X35 X37 X41 X43 X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 X30 X32 X34 X36 X40 X42 FX3G-60MR/DS, FX3G-60MT/DS Y0 Y1 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 COM0 COM1 COM2 Y3 COM3 Y5 Y7 COM4 Y11 Y13 COM5 Y15 Y17 COM6 Y21 Y23 COM7 Y25 Y27 FX3G-60MT/DSS Y0 Y1 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 +V0 +V1 +V2 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 +V4 Y11 Y13 +V5 Y15 Y17 +V6 Y21 Y23 +V7 Y25 Y27 

- DC power supply type 

**54** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 

_5.1 Version Information_ 

**1 2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6 7 8** 

## **5. Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability** 

## **5.1 Version Information** 

## **5.1.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method** 

The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the name plate, and on the front of the product. 

## **1. Checking the nameplate** 

The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer's serial number "S/N" indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product. 

Example nameplate (manufacturer's serial number: 1010001) 

**==> picture [428 x 216] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER<br>MODEL<br>FX3G-40MT/ES<br>Right side 100-240VAC 50/60Hz 37W<br>OUT:5~30VDC           0.5A<br>S/N 1010 0 01<br>MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION<br>MADE IN JAPAN<br>* Actual product nameplate differs<br>from the example shown above.<br><Product during December, 2009 or earlier> <Product from January, 2010><br>9 Z 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1<br>Control number Control number<br>M onth (Example: Dec.): M onth (Example: Jan.):<br>1 to 9 = January to September, 1 to 9 = January to September,<br>X = October, Y = November, Z = December X = October, Y = November, Z = December<br>Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Checking the front of the product** 

The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer's serial number "LOT" on the front (at the bottom) of the product. 

- Products manufactured in and after October 2008 and after. 

**==> picture [138 x 97] intentionally omitted <==**

**==> picture [141 x 99] intentionally omitted <==**

<Product during December, 2009 or earlier> <Product from January, 2010> 9 Z 1 0 1 Month (Example: Dec.): Month (Example: Jan.): 1 to 9 = January to September, 1 to 9 = January to September, X = October, Y = November, Z = December X = October, Y = November, Z = December Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year 

<Product during December, 2009 or earlier> 

**9** 

**10** 

**55** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability _5.1 Version Information_ 

## **5.1.2 Version check method** 

In FX3G PLCs, users can obtain the PLC version information by monitoring special data register D8001 (decimal number). 

**==> picture [323 x 52] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
D8001 2 6 1 0 0<br>PLC type and<br>version Version information (Example: Ver. 1.00)<br>PLC type (Example: 26 = FX3G PLC)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **5.1.3 Version upgrade history** 

FX3G Series performed the following upgrade. 

|**Version**|**Manufacturer’s**<br>**serial number**|**Contents of version upgrade**|
|---|---|---|
|Ver. 1.00|86****<br>(June, 2008)|From first version|
|Ver. 1.10|8X****<br>(October, 2008)|•<br>Supports following 15 instructions:<br>FLT(FNC49), VRRD(FNC85), VRSC(FNC86), ECMP(FNC110), EMOV(FNC112),<br>EADD(FNC120), ESUB(FNC121), EMUL(FNC122), EDIV(FNC123), ESQR(FNC127),<br>INT(FNC129), IVCK(FNC270), IVDR(FNC271), IVRD(FNC272), IVWR(FNC273)<br>•<br>Supports connection of following expansion boards:<br>FX3G-2AD-BD, FX3G-1DA-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD<br>•<br>Supports connection of display module (FX3G-5DM)<br>•<br>Supports of the inverter communication function<br>•<br>Supports of the pulse width measurement function|
|Ver. 1.20|96****<br>(June, 2009)|•<br>Supports connection of following special adapter:<br>FX3U-3A-ADP<br>•<br>Supports the hardware error function of FX3U-4DA-ADP.|
|Ver. 1.40|111****<br>(January, 2011)|•<br>Supports the following instruction.<br>IVMC(FNC275)|
|Ver. 2.00|124****<br>(April, 2012)|•<br>Supports the following functions of the FX3U-16CCL-M:<br>-<br>Network parameter<br>-<br>Accessing the other station from CC-Link<br>-<br>Remote device station initialization procedure registration<br>-<br>CC-Link diagnostics<br>•<br>Special parameter error (M8489 and D8489) is added.|



**56** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability _5.2 Programming Tool Applicability_ 

**1** 

**2 3 4** 

**5 6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

**10** 

## **5.2 Programming Tool Applicability** 

## **5.2.1 Applicable versions of programming tool** 

## **1. GX Works2** 

- GX Works2 English version (SW DNC-GXW2-E) is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following versions. 

|**FX3G PLC version**|**Model name**<br>**(Media model name is**<br>**shown below.)**|**Applicable GX Works2**<br>**version**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Before Ver. 1.40|GX Works2<br>SW<br>DNC-GXW2-E|Ver. 1.08J or later|-|
|Before Ver. 2.00||Ver. 1.62Q or later||
|Ver. 2.00||Ver. 1.87R or later||
|•<br>GX Works2 Japanese version (SW<br>DNC-GXW2-J) is applicable to FX3GPLCs from the following<br>versions.||||
|**FX3G PLC version**|**Model name**<br>**(Media model name is**<br>**shown below.)**|**Applicable GX Works2**<br>**version**|**Remarks**|
|Before Ver. 1.40|GX Works2<br>SW<br>DNC-GXW2-J|Ver. 1.07H or later|-|
|Before Ver. 2.00||Ver. 1.56J or later||
|Ver. 2.00||Ver. 1.86Q or later||



## **2. GX Developer** 

- GX Developer English version (SW D5C-GPPW-E) is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following versions. 

|**FX3G PLC version**|**Model name**<br>**(Media model name is**<br>**shown below.)**|**Applicable**<br>**GX Developer version**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Before Ver. 1.10|GX Developer<br>SW<br>D5C-GPPW-E|Ver. 8.72A or later|-|
|Ver. 1.10||Ver. 8.78G or later||



- GX Developer Japanese version (SW D5C-GPPW-J) is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following versions. 

|**FX3G PLC version**|**Model name**<br>**(Media model name is**<br>**shown below.)**|**Applicable**<br>**GX Developer version**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Before Ver. 1.10|GX Developer<br>SW<br>D5C-GPPW-J|Ver. 8.72A or later|-|
|Ver. 1.10||Ver. 8.76E or later||



## **3. FX-30P** 

FX-30P is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following version. 

|**FX3G PLC version**|**Model name**|**Applicable**<br>**FX-30P version**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Ver. 1.00|FX-30P|Ver. 1.00 or later|FX-30P(From first version) supports FX3GPLCs<br>(Ver. 1.10 or later).<br>The IVMC instruction is not supported.|



**57** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability _5.2 Programming Tool Applicability_ 

## **5.2.2 In the case of programming tool (version) not applicable** 

Inapplicable programming tools can be used by selecting an alternative PLC model. 

## **1. Alternative model setting** 

|**Model to be programmed**|**Model to be set**<br>**Priority High**<br>**Low**|
|---|---|
|FX3GPLC|FX3G<br>FX1N*1<br>FX2N*1<br>FX2|



- *1. "FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used. 

## **2. Contents of restrictions** 

- Programming is enabled only for the range of functionality available in the PLC selected as the alternative model, such as instructions, device ranges and program sizes. When the FX-10P(-E) is used, the range of functionality is limited to that available in the FX2N PLC. 

- Use a programming tool that can select either FX3G to change parameters, i.e. memory capacity, file register capacity, etc. 

- The built-in USB port cannot be used for programming communication. 

## **5.2.3 Program transfer speed and programming tools** 

## **1. Built-in USB communication** 

The FX3G PLC has a built-in USB communication port, and performs program writing, program reading and monitoring at high speed (12 Mbps) with a personal computer that supports USB. 

- 1) Supported programming tools 

GX Works2 (Ver. 1.08J or later), GX Developer (Ver. 8.72A or later) 

- 2) In programming tools not supporting USB Communication is performed via RS-422 or RS-232C. 

## **2. RS-422/RS-232C communication** 

The FX3G PLC can write and read programs and perform monitoring at 115.2 kbps through RS-422/RS-232C communication. 

- 1) 115.2 kbps supported programming tools GX Works2 (Ver. 1.08J or later), GX Developer (Ver. 8.72A or later), FX-30P (Ver. 1.00 or later) 

- 2) 115.2 kbps supported interfaces 

   - Standard built-in port (RS-422) or expansion board FX3G-422-BD for RS-422 When the RS-232C/RS-422 converter FX-232AWC-H is connected. 

   - Expansion board FX3G-232-BD for RS-232C 

   - Special adapter FX3U-232ADP(-MB) for RS-232C 

- 3) In programming tools not supporting 115.2 kbps Communication is executed at 9,600 or 19,200 bps. 

**58** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 

_5.2 Programming Tool Applicability_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**8** 

**9** 

## **5.2.4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter.** 

When connecting peripheral equipment (programming tool or GOT [CPU direct connection]) by way of the FX3G-232-BD, FX3G-422-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB), set the connection channel (CH1 or CH2) as follows. If the connection channel is not specified with the status below, communication error may occur in the connected peripheral equipment. 

- → **For details, refer to the Data Communication Edition.** 

- - Set to "K0" the special data register for communication format setting of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment (CH1: D8400 or D8120, CH2: D8420). 

- Set the communication parameter "PLC system [2]" of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment to "Not set" (as shown in the window below). 

**==> picture [86 x 8] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Leave this unchecked.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**5** 

## **5.2.5 Cautions on write during RUN** 

In FX3G PLCs, write during RUN (program changes in the RUN mode) is enabled using the following programming tools. 

→ **For the operating procedure of and cautions on write during RUN, refer to the manual of the used programming tool.** 

## **Programming tools supporting write during RUN** 

- Japanese version 

|**Programming tool**|**Version**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|
|GX Works2*1<br>(SW<br>DNC-GXW2-J)<br>~~:|~~|Ver. 1.07H or later <br>~~|~~|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3GPLCs<br>earlier than Ver. 1.40.<br>~~|~~|
||Ver. 1.56J or later<br>~~:|~~|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3GPLCs<br>Ver. 1.40.<br>~~|~~|
|GX Developer*2<br>(SW<br>D5C-GPPW-J)<br>~~|~~<br>~~°|~~|Ver. 2.00A or later<br>~~|~~|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX2NPLCs<br>Ver. 1.00.<br>~~|~~|
||Ver. 5.00A or later<br>~~|~~|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1NPLCs<br>Ver. 1.00.|
||Ver. 8.72A or later<br>~~°|~~|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3GPLCs<br>earlier than Ver. 1.10.|
||Ver. 8.76E or later<br>~~|~~|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3GPLCs<br>Ver. 1.10.|
|FX-PCS/WIN*2|Ver. 4.00 or later|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1NPLCs<br>Ver. 1.00.|



**10** 

**59** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 

_5.2 Programming Tool Applicability_ 

## • English version 

|**Programming tool**|**Version**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|
|GX Works2*1<br>(SW<br>DNC-GXW2-E)|Ver. 1.08J or later|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs<br>earlier than Ver. 1.40.|
||Ver. 1.62Q or later|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs<br>Ver. 1.40.|
|GX Developer*2<br>(SW<br>D5C-GPPW-E)|Ver. 2.00A or later|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX2NPLCs<br>Ver. 1.00.|
||Ver. 5.00A or later|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1NPLCs<br>Ver. 1.00.|
||Ver. 8.72A or later|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3GPLCs<br>earlier than Ver. 1.10.|
||Ver. 8.78G or later|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3GPLCs<br>Ver. 1.10.|
|FX-PCS/WIN-E*2|Ver. 3.00 or later|Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1NPLCs<br>Ver. 1.00.|



- *1. Write during RUN is not possible with a SFC program. 

- *2. Write during RUN is not possible with a list program or a SFC program. 

## **Cautions on write during RUN** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**Caution**|
|---|---|---|
|Program memories which can be<br>written in RUN mode||Built-in EEPROM and optional memory cassette (whose write protect switch is set to OFF)|
|Number of<br>program steps<br>which can be<br>written for<br>circuit change<br>in RUN mode|•<br>GX Works2<br>Ver. 1.08J or late<br>•<br>GX Developer<br>Ver. 8.72A or late|r<br>r<br>256 steps or less after edition (addition/deletion) (including NOP<br>immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit)|
||•<br>GX Developer<br>Ver. 8.70Y or<br>former<br>•<br>FX-PCS/WIN(-E)|127 steps or less after edition (addition/deletion) (including NOP<br>immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit)|
|Circuit blocks which cannot be writte<br>in RUN mode||n<br>Circuit blocks*1in which labels P and I are added, deleted or changed in edited circuits<br>Circuit blocks in which 1-ms timers (T246 to T249 and T256 to T319) are added in edited circuits<br>Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits<br>•<br>Instruction to output high-speed counters C235 to C255 (OUT instruction)<br>•<br>TBL (FNC152) instruction|



- *1. Circuit blocks cannot be edited to insert a label as shown below when written during RUN. 

**==> picture [251 x 276] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Step FNC 04<br>0 EI<br>Added, deleted, or changed<br>FNC 06<br>FEND<br>Pointer for<br>interrupt<br>Label I is inserted by editing the circuit block<br>I001<br>Added, deleted, or changed<br>FNC 03<br>IRET<br>END<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**60** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability _5.2 Programming Tool Applicability_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

|**Item**|**Caution**|**Caution**|
|---|---|---|
|Circuit blocks which cannot be<br>written in RUN mode|Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution.<br>If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse<br>output.<br>•<br>DSZR (FNC150), ZRN (FNC156), PLSV (FNC157) instructions [with acceleration/deceleration<br>operation], DRVI (FNC158) and/or DRVA (FNC159) instructions||
||Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instruction during execution.<br>If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block, the PLC immediately stops pulse output.<br>•<br>PLSV (FNC157) instruction [without acceleration/deceleration operation]||
||Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution of<br>communication.<br>If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block, the PLC may stop communication after that.<br>If the PLC stops communication, set the PLC to the STOP mode once, and then set it to the RUN<br>mode again.<br>•<br>IVCK (FNC270), IVDR (FNC271), IVRD (FNC272), IVWR (FNC273) and IVMC (FNC275)<br>instructions||
|||•<br>Instructions for falling edge pulse<br>When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse<br>(LDF, ANDF, or ORF instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without<br>regard to the ON/OFF status of the target device.<br>When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse<br>(PLF instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON/<br>OFF status of the device that is set as the operation condition.<br>It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it<br>to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse.<br>•<br>Instructions for rising edge pulse<br>When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse,<br>the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising<br>edge pulse or the operation condition device is ON.<br>Target instructions for rising edge pulse: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and pulse operation type applied<br>instructions (such as MOVP)<br>*1 The PLS instruction is not executed.<br>**Contact ON/OFF status**<br>**(while write during RUN is executed)**<br>**Instruction for**<br>**rising edge pulse**<br>**Instruction for**<br>**falling edge pulse**<br>OFF<br>Not executed<br>Not executed<br>ON<br>Executed*1<br>Not executed|
|Circuit blocks which require attention<br>on operation after write during RUN|Writing in RUN mode to circuit blocks including the following instructions results in the following<br>operation<br>•<br>MEP instruction (Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse instruction)<br>When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEP instruction, the execution<br>result of the MEP instruction turns ON (conducting state) if the operation result up to the MEP<br>instruction is ON.<br>•<br>MEF instruction (Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse instruction)<br>When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEF instruction, the execution<br>result of the MEF instruction turns OFF (nonconducting state) regardless of the operation result<br>(ON or OFF) up to the MEF instruction.<br>When the operation result up to the MEF instruction is set to ON once and then set to OFF, the<br>execution result of the MEF instruction turns ON (conducting state)<br>**Operation result up to MEP/MEF instruction**<br>**MEP instruction**<br>**MEF instruction**<br>OFF<br>OFF (nonconduct-<br>ing)<br>OFF (nonconduct-<br>ing)<br>ON<br>ON (conducting)<br>OFF (nonconduct-<br>ing)||
|Others||•<br>When writing during RUN with GX Works2 Ver. 1.08J or later, GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or<br>later, the program is as follows.<br>When the number of program steps is reduced by deletion of contacts, coils and applied<br>instructions, the program capacity becomes smaller by as many as the reduced number of<br>steps.|



**61** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability _5.3 Precautions on Use of (Built-in USB) Programming Port_ 

## **5.3 Precautions on Use of (Built-in USB) Programming Port** 

Make sure to set the contents described in this section when executing circuit monitor, device registration monitor, program reading/writing, etc. in the FX3G PLC using the (built-in USB) programming port and GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later. For GX Developer is prior to Ver. 8.72A, communication using the (built-in USB) programming port is not available. 

## **5.3.1 Installation of USB driver (GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later)** 

It is necessary to install the USB driver to execute USB communication using the (built-in USB) programming port. 

For the USB driver installation method and procedure, refer to the following manual. 

→ **GX Developer Operating Manual (Startup)** 

## **5.3.2 Setting in GX Developer (Ver. 8.72A or later)** 

**1. Select [Online]** > **[Transfer setup...] to open the "Transfer setup" dialog box.** 

**2. Double-click [Serial] in [PC side I/F] to open the "PC side I/F Serial setting" dialog box.** 

**3. Select "USB (Built-in port)".** 

**==> picture [318 x 130] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Double-click it. |<br>Cont MNETYII Link ___Ethermet C24 G4 Bus<br>side I/F Serial setting & fie PC side I/F Serial setting (<)<br>{include FX-USB-AW / FX3U-USB-BD) Cateel include FX-USB-AW / FX3U-USB-BD] Cancel<br>C USBIGOT transparent mode) USBIGOT transparent mode}<br>COM port fcom1 PLC direct coupled setti<br>Teananistion speed [1TE2bps=]<br>PLC type<br>NET()  CC-Link  Ethemet - —_ va |OOOSOSC~S<br>System image... Select "USB (Built-in port)"<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


A display screen is the example of Ver.8.72A. 

## **4. Click the [OK] button to finish the setting.** 

**62** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability _5.4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4 5 6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

**10** 

## **5.4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series** 

When monitoring circuits, device registration, etc. or reading/writing programs in an FX3G PLC from GX Developer Ver.8.22Y or later using the transparent function by way of USB in the GOT1000 Series, make sure to execute the following setting. 

If the following setting is not provided, a communication error occurs. 

||**GX Developer Ver.8.21X or former**|**GX Developer Ver8.22Y or later*1**|
|---|---|---|
|When using transparent function by way of<br>USB in GOT1000 Series|Not supported (not available)|Setting shown below is required.|
|When using transparent function by way of<br>RS-232 in GOT1000 Series|Set "COM port" and "Transmission speed"<br>on "PC side I/F Serial setting" dialog box.|Select "RS-232C" in setting shown below,<br>and set "COM port" and "Transmission<br>speed".|
|When directly connecting GX Developer to<br>PLC|||



- *1. GX Developer Ver.8.72A or later supports the FX3G Series. 

## **Setting in GX Developer (Ver. 8.22Y or later)** 

**1. Select [Online] [Transfer setup...] to open the "Transfer setup" dialog box.** 

**2. Double-click [Serial] in [PC side I/F] to open the "PC side I/F Serial setting" dialog box.** 

**3. Select "USB (GOT Transparent mode)".** 

**==> picture [56 x 7] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Double-click it.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [73 x 18] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Select "USB (GOT<br>transparent mode)"<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


A display screen is the example of Ver.8.72A. 

## **4. Click the [OK] button to finish the setting.** 

**63** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability _5.5 Cautions on using transparent port (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series_ 

## **5.5 Cautions on using transparent port (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series** 

When monitoring circuits, device registration, etc. in an FX3G PLC from GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later using the transparent (2-port) function in the GOT-F900 Series, make sure to execute the following setting. If the following setting is not provided, write to PLC, read from PLC, verify with PLC, etc. operate normally, but monitoring (ladder monitor, entry datemonitor, etc.) cannot be normally executed. 

||**GX Developer Ver. 8.12N or earlier**|**GX Developer Ver. 8.22Y or later**|**GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later**|
|---|---|---|---|
|When directly<br>connecting GX Developer<br>to PLC|Set "COM port" and "Transmission<br>speed" on "PC side I/F Serial<br>setting" dialog box.|Select "RS-232C" on "PC side I/F<br>Serial setting" dialog box, and set<br>"COM port" and "Transmission<br>speed."|Select "RS-232C" on "PC side I/F<br>Serial setting" dialog box, and set<br>"COM port" and "Transmission<br>speed."|
|When using transparent<br>function in GOT-F900<br>Series|Setting shown below is not required.|Setting<br>shown<br>below<br>is<br>not<br>required.|Select "RS-232C" on "PC side I/F<br>Serial setting" dialog box, and<br>execute setting shown below.|



## **Setting in GX Developer (Ver. 8.22Y or later)** 

**1. Select [Online]** > **[Transfer setup...] to open the "Transfer Setup" dialog box.** 

**2. Double-click [PLC module] in [PLC side I/F] to open the [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module] dialog box.** 

**3. Put a check mark to the check box [via GOT-F900 transparent mode] as shown below** 

**==> picture [328 x 100] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Double-click it.<br>h rn faostras A A Bus<br>side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module kil El<br>via MAC/MTA transparent mode _txee_|Cancel<br>Connection channel list...<br>PLC direct coupled setting<br>via GOT-F900 transparent made Put a check mark to the<br>type. check box "via GOT-F900<br>' transparent mode."<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


A display screen is the example of Ver. 8.72A. 

## **4. Click the [OK] button to finish the setting.** 

**64** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability _5.6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8** 

**9 10** 

## **5.6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability** 

## **5.6.1 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability** 

|**Model name**|**Applicability**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|
|GOT1000 Series|Applicable|Standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS which support the FX3GPLC<br>are required.<br>For details, refer to the GOT manual.<br>This series is subject to the following restrictions when connected using unsupported<br>standard monitor OS, communication driver or option OS.<br>**Contents of restrictions**<br>•<br>Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions, device ranges<br>and program sizes available in the FX1Nand FX1NCPLCs.<br>•<br>The list editor function for MELSEC-FX is not available. When using the list editor<br>function for MELSEC-FX, upgrade the standard monitor OS, communication driver and<br>option OS to the version compatible with the FX3GPLC.<br>Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual.|
|F940WGOT|Not available|The following restriction applies when connected.<br>**Contents of restrictions**<br>•<br>Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions, device ranges<br>and program sizes available in the FX1Nand FX1NCPLCs.<br>→**For applicable models, refer to the GOT manual.**<br>For connection using the 2-port interface function*1, refer to Section 5.5.|
|F940GOT F940 Handy GOT|Not available||
|F930GOT(-K)|Not available||
|F920GOT(-K)|Not available||
|ET-940|Not available||
|FX-10DM(-SET0)|Not available|The following restriction applies when connected.<br>**Contents of restrictions**<br>•<br>Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions, device ranges<br>and program sizes available in the FX1Nand FX1NCPLCs.<br>→**For supported models and device ranges, refer to the FX-**<br>**10DM USER'S MANUAL**<br>**(Manual No. JY992D86401).**|
|FX-10DU|Not available|The following restriction applies when connected.<br>**Contents of restrictions**<br>It is limited to the device range and function range supported by the highest class model<br>(FX1Nor FX2N) applicable in the product version.<br>→**For supported models and device ranges,**<br>**refer to the FX-10DU-E/FX-20DU-E User's Manual**<br>**(Manual No. JY992D54801).**|



*1. The F940GOT and ET-940 whose version is former than Ver. 1.10 do not support the transparent (2port) function of the GX Developer. 

**65** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.1 Configuration of a Whole System_ 

## **6. Examination of System Configuration** 

## **6.1 Configuration of a Whole System** 

The configuration of a whole system is shown below as an example. 

**==> picture [441 x 498] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Configuration of whole system<br>Determination of number of<br>1 Expansion board/Special adapters/Memory cassette 2 extension devices to be connected<br>Display module/Connector conversion adapter to main unit<br>Memory cassette Expansion board Display module<br>Extension devices for<br>FX2N/FX3U Series<br>Input extension Output<br>Main unit block extension block<br>Special Connector conversion FX3G-40MT/ES FX2N-16EX FX2N-16EYT<br>*1<br>adapters adapter  X000 to X027 X030 to X047 -<br>Y000 to Y017 Y020 to Y037<br>Range of devices powered from<br>main unit<br>3 Selection of extension cable<br>4 Determination of number of devices to be connected to extension unit/ Refer to this chapter.<br>extension power supply unit<br>FX2N input/output powered Extension devices for FX2N/FX3U Series<br>extension unit [*3]<br>Extension power supply unit [*4] Input extension Special<br>block*2 function block<br>FX2N-32ER-ES/UL FX2N-16EX-C FX2N-16CCL-M<br>X050 to X067 X070 to X107 Unit No.0<br>The range of devices powered from<br>the FX2N input/output powered<br>extension unit or the extension<br>power supply unit<br>Y040 to Y057<br>6 FX Series terminal block Refer to Cha pter 19. 5 When CC-Link is used<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. The connector conversion adapter is required to use a special adapter. 

- *2. Included in the number of units connectable to the main unit when the input extension block (including the FX2N-8ER-ES/UL and FX2N-8ER) is used and the extension power supply unit is located on the upstream side. 

- *3. When using an input/output extension unit, select a power supply type that is the same as the main unit. 

- *4. Available when the main unit is the AC power supply type. 

**66** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.1 Configuration of a Whole System_ 

**1 2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8** 

**10** 

## **6.1.1 Expansion board/connector conversion adapter/memory cassette/display module configuration** 

The connection positions and number of expansion boards, connector conversion adapter and memory cassette configuration vary depending on the number of points in main units. For details, refer to the description below. 

- In the case of the main units(40/60 point type) 

||Main|Main|Main|unit|||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||||BD1<br>(2nd position)||BD2<br>(2nd position)||||
||BD1<br>(1st position)<br>BD1<br>(2ndposition)|||BD2<br>(2ndposition)|||||||||
||||||||BD1<br>(1st position)||BD2<br>(1st position)||||
||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||
||(Front panel)||||||||||||
||||||||||||||
||**Model name**||||||**Available connection position**||||||
||||||**BD1 (1st position)**|||**BD1 (2nd position)**||**BD2 (1st position)**||**BD2 (2nd position)**|
|Expansion board<br>(Except for the FX3G-8AV-BD)||||||||-||||-|
|FX3G-8AV-BD|||||-|||-||||-|
|Connector conversion adapter<br>(FX3G-CNV-ADP)||||||||-||-||-|
|Memory cassette*1|||||*2|||||*2*3|||
|Display module*1|||||-|||-||*4*5|||



- *1. When the memory cassette and display module are used together, the transfer function of the memory cassette is not available. Use the display module to transfer data stored in the memory cassette. 

- *2. Can be connected in any position however only one device can be connected at one time. 

- *3. The memory cassette cannot be connected when the display module is connected to the BD2 (1st position). 

- *4. Only the BD2 (1st position) and the BD2 (2nd position) can be used for connection. Only one display module can be connected to the main unit. 

- *5. The display module cannot be connected when the memory cassette is connected to the BD2 (1st position). 

- In the case of the main units(14/24 point type) 

**==> picture [197 x 89] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Main unit<br>BD<br>BD<br>(2nd position) (2nd position)<br>BD<br>BD (1st position)<br>(1st position)<br>Main unit<br>(Front panel) (Side)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


|**Model name**|**Available connection position**|**Available connection position**|
|---|---|---|
||**BD (1st position)**|**BD (2nd position)**|
|Expansion board<br>Connector conversion adapter<br>(FX3G-CNV-ADP)||-|
|Memory cassette|*1|*1*2|
|Display module|*1|*1*3|



**9** 

- *1. Can be connected in either position only one device can be at one time. 

- *2. The memory cassette cannot be connected when the display module is connected to the BD (1st position). 

**10** 

- *3. The display module cannot be connected when the memory cassette is connected to the BD (1st position). 

**67** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.2 Rules of System Configuration_ 

## **6.2 Rules of System Configuration** 

The system configuration must meet the following four requirements. 

## **1 Number of input/output points** 

The total number of input and output points should be 256 or less in the whole system. 

- → **For details, refer to 6.3 Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output** 

**Points.** 

**==> picture [428 x 243] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Number of input/output points on whole system Up to 256 points<br>1. Number of input/output points (including input/output occupied points) Up to 128 points<br> · Expansion board Main unit Input/outputextension functionSpecial CC-Link/LT CC-Link master<br> · Special adapter unit/block block master<br>CC-Link/LT<br>Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station<br>2. Number of remote I/O points Up to 128 points<br>CC-Link system<br>Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2 Number of connected special extension devices** 

The figure below shows the number of connectable expansion boards, special adapters, extension power supply units[*1] and special function blocks. The connector conversion adapter (FX3G-CNVADP) is required as the expansion board when special adapters are connected. 

   - → **For details, refer to 6.4 Number of Connected Extension Devices (Including Extension Cable).** 

- FX3G Main units (40/60 point type) 

|•|Special<br>adapter<br>(analog)|Special adapter<br>(communication)|Expansion<br>board|Main unit<br>40/60 point type|Input/output<br>powered<br>extension unit|Extension<br>power supply<br>unit*1|Special<br>function bloc|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||Up to 2 units|Up to 2 units|Up to 2 units||Up to 2 units|Only 1 unit|Up to 8 units|
||FX3GMain units (14/24 point type)|||||||
||Special<br>adapter<br>(analog)|Special adapter<br>(communication)|Expansion<br>board|Main unit<br>14/24 point type|Input/output<br>powered<br>extension unit|Extension<br>power supply<br>unit*1|Special<br>function bloc|
||Only 1 unit|Only 1 unit|Only 1 unit||Up to 2 units|Only 1 unit|Up to 8 units|



- *1. Available when the main unit is the AC power supply type. 

**68** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.2 Rules of System Configuration_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4 5 6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

## **3 Connection restriction and calculation of current consumption** 

The number of points and number of units connected are restricted by the number of extension blocks connected to the main unit. 

The built-in power supply of the input/output powered extension unit and extension power supply unit supplies the power to a unit/block/board extended to the corresponding unit. The built-in power supply refers to the 24V DC service power supply, 5V DC power supply and internal 24V DC power supply.The consumed power varies depending on the type of extended unit/block/board. 

|Special<br>adapter|Special<br>adapter|Expansion<br>board|Main unit|Extension block<br>(some blocks can<br>be connected)|Extension block<br>(some blocks can<br>be connected)|Input/output<br>~~d~~|Extensionblock|Extension<br>power supply<br>unit|Extension block<br>(some blocks can<br>be connected)|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||an<br>|~~powere~~<br>~~extension~~|(some blocks can<br>|pow||
|||||||unit|be connected)|||
|Power supply<br>from main unit<br>Power supply<br>from main unit||||||||||
|||||||||||
|||||||Power supply from<br>input/output powered<br>extension unit|||Power supply from<br>extension power<br>supply unit*1|
|Refer to Section 6.5.<br>Refer to Section 6.4.||||||||||



- *1. When connecting an input extension block on the downstream side of an extension power supply unit, supply the power to the input extension block from the nearest main unit on the upstream side, or from an input/output powered extension unit on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit. The extension power supply unit is available only when the main unit is a AC power supply type. In the example above, the input/output powered extension unit supplies the power to extension blocks. 

→ **For details, refer to 6.5 Expansion of Main Unit.** → **For details, refer to 6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit.** → **For details, refer to 6.7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V).** 

## **4 Other restrictions** 

- Restrictions in the use of the FX3G-422-BD 

   - When connecting a device (such as GOT) which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of the RS-422 port built in the main unit and the FX3G-422-BD at the same time, avoid continuous use of either device. If both devices are used continuously, their life may be shortened due to heat generation. 

<Configuration example 1> 

RS-422 port built-in main unit + GT1020LBL (5V DC type) FX3G-422-BD + GT1020LBL (5V DC type) 

Avoid continuous use of two GT1020LBL (5V DC type) units. 

- When connecting a device (such as GOT) which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of two FX3G-422BD units connected to the (40-point/60-point type) main unit, avoid continuous use of either device. If both devices are used continuously, their life may be shortened due to heat generation. 

## <Configuration example 2> 

When connecting the 40-point type main unit and two FX3G-422-BD units FX3G-422-BD + GT1020LBL (5V DC type) 

FX3G-422-BD + GT1020LBL (5V DC type) 

Avoid continuous use of two GT1020LBL (5V DC type) units. 

   - It is not allowable to connect a device (such as GOT) which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of the RS-422 port in the (40-point/60-point type) main unit and two FX3G-422-BD units (3 channels in total) at the same time. 

- Restrictions in the use of an input/output powered extension unit When using an input/output extension unit, select a power supply type that is the same as the main unit. 

**10** 

**69** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration 

_6.3 Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output Points_ 

## **6.3 Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output Points** 

## **6.3.1 Calculation of number of input/output points** 

To obtain the total number of input/output points, count the input/output points of input/output powered extension units/blocks and the input/output occupied points of special function blocks. The number of remote I/O points on CC-Link network must be excluded. 

## **1 Total the number of input/output points on the main unit and the number of those on the input/output powered extension units/blocks.** 

To obtain the total number of input/output points, count the input points (X000 and more) and output points (Y000 and more) of the main unit and input/output powered extension units/blocks. The number of input/output points of each type of device is shown on the list below. 

→ **The list of numbers of input/output points is shown in Section 6.8.** 

## **2 Count the input/output points of the remote I/O stations connected on FX2N64CL-M network.** 

Add the number of remote I/O points to the number of input/output points from the main unit and input/output powered extension units/blocks calculated in the above step. 

→ **For the remote I/O point calculation method, refer to the FX2N-64CL-M manual.** 

## **3 Count the number of input/output occupied points of special function blocks.** 

The number of occupied input/output points per unit is 8. 

The number of occupied input/output points of each type of device can be obtained by the following formula or from the list shown below. 

→ **For a list of occupied input/output points, refer to Section 6.8.** 

**==> picture [364 x 124] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Number of special function Number of occupied<br>Number of points per unit<br>blocks input/output points<br>units 8 points points<br>= Total number of<br>Each special function block<br>Number of special function used for FROM/TO instructions occupied input/<br>blocks output points<br>occupies eight input or output<br>points.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Observe the following instructions when using the following products. 

- FX3U-16CCL-M (CC-Link master) Only one FX3U-16CCL-M unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit. This master cannot be used together with FX2N-16CCL-M. 

- FX2N-16CCL-M (CC-Link master) When more than one master station is connected, a remote I/O station cannot be connected to the 2nd and following master stations. This master cannot be used together with FX3U-16CCL-M. 

- FX3U-64CCL 

Only one FX3U-64CCL unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit. 

**70** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration 

_6.3 Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output Points_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

## **4 Calculate the total number of input/output points.** 

Total the number of points counted in Steps 1, 2 and 3, and check that it does not exceed 128 points (maximum number of input/output points). 

**==> picture [462 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Maximum number of Number of input/output occupied<br>Number of input/output points<br>input/output points points<br>128 points (A) + (B) + (C) (E)     units  8 points<br>Maximum number of + (D) + Each special function unit/block<br>points controllable on used for FROM/TO instructions<br>system Total number of input/output points of input/ occupies eight input or output<br>output powered extension units and input/output points.<br>extension blocks<br>(A) : Number of input/output points of main unit (D) : Number of remote I/O points of FX2N-64CL-M<br>(B) : Number of input/output points of input/ (E) : Number of special function blocks<br>        output powered extension units<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- (C) : Number of input/output points of input/ output extension blocks 

## **5 When CC-Link master is used, count the remote I/O points.** 

When CC-Link is used, the total number of input/output points of the remote I/O stations connected on the network and the number of input/output points calculated in the previous step are 256 or less. 

## **1. FX3U-16CCL-M, FX2N-16CCL-M (CC-Link master)** 

Calculate the number of remote I/O points connected on the network in the following step. 

**71** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.3 Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output Points_ 

## **6.3.2 Maximum number of input/output points when CC-Link master is used** 

## **1. Calculation of maximum number of input/output points** 

When CC-Link master block is used, the following maximum number of input/output points can be connected. 

**==> picture [471 x 132] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Maximum number of Number of input/ Number of input/output<br>CC-Link remote I/O<br>input/output points output points occupied points<br> 8  32   128<br>256 points (A)(B)(C)(D) (E)  units (F)  stations<br>points points points<br>Total number of points obtained by formula<br>Maximum number + +<br>Total number of Number of points occupied "number of remote I/O stations    32 points"<br>of points<br>input/output points by special function blocks (The number is multiplied by 32 points<br>controllable on<br>regardless of the number of remote I/O<br>system<br>points.)<br>For details, refer to Subsection 6.3.1.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- (A) : Number of input/output points of main unit 

(D) : Number of remote I/O points of FX2N-64CL-M 

- (B) : Number of input/output points of input/output (E) : Number of input/output points occupied by special function blocks powered extension units (F) : Number of remote I/O stations (units) connected to CC-Link (C) : Number of input/output points of input/output master extension blocks 

The number of CC-Link points is calculated by the formula "32 points  number of stations" even when remote I/O stations having less than 32 points are used. 

For details, refer to the manual of the CC-Link master block used. 

## **2. Procedures for calculating number of input/output points based on example of system configuration** 

For the main unit, input/output powered extension units/blocks and CC-Link remote I/O stations, the number of input/output points and the total number of points are restricted. 

**==> picture [451 x 337] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
X000 to X027 X030 to X047 X050 to X067 X070 to X107 - -<br>Input/output Input Input<br>Special FX3U-16CCL-M<br>Main unit powered extension extension<br>function block<br>extension unit block block<br>Y000 to Y017 Y020 to Y037 - - - -<br>24/16=40 16/16=32 16/0=16<br>8/0=8 points 8 points 8 points<br>points points points<br>CC-Link network<br>Remote I/O Remote I/O Remote I/O<br>(32 points) (32 points) (32 points)<br>Number of input/output points occupied by<br>special function blocks(16 points)<br>0 points 96 112 128 160 256 points<br>Number of input/output points Number of<br>remaining<br>(96 points) points<br>Number of input/output points (excluding remote I/O points on<br>CC-Link) + Number of input/output occupied points<br>Up to 128 points<br>Number of<br>remaining 32 points 3 units = 96 points<br> points<br>Number of CC-Link input/output points<br>128 points or less in total<br>256 points or less in total<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**72** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.4 Number of Connected Extension Devices (Including Extension Cable)_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5 6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

## **6.4 Number of Connected Extension Devices (Including Extension Cable)** 

## **6.4.1 Number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters** 

The number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters varies depending on the number of points in the main unit. The connector conversion adapter (FX3G-CNV-ADP) is required to connect the special adapter. → **For assignment of communication channels, refer to Section 7.3.** 

- In the case of Main units (40/60 point type) 

|**Use of expansion board**||**Number of connectable**<br>**expansion boards**|**Number of connectable special adapters of each type**|**Number of connectable special adapters of each type**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**Communication**<br>**special adapters**|**Analog**<br>**special adapters**|
|When expansion board is not used||0|2 units|2 units|
|When expansion board is used|1 unit|Communication expansion board*1|1 unit|2 units|
|||<br>Analog expansion board|2 units|1 unit|
|||2 units*2|Cannot be connected.|Cannot be connected.|



- *1. FX3G-8AV-BD included. 

- *2. Only one FX3G-8AV-BD can be connected to a single PLC main unit. 

- In the case of Main units (14/24 point type) 

|**Use of expansion board**|**Number of connectable**<br>**expansion boards**|**Number of connectable special adapters of each type**|**Number of connectable special adapters of each type**|
|---|---|---|---|
|||**Communication**<br>**special adapters**|**Analog  special adapters**|
|When expansion board is not used|0|1 unit|1 unit|
|When expansion board is used|1 unit|Cannot be connected.|Cannot be connected.|



## **6.4.2 Input/output powered extension units** 

Up to 2 input/output powered extension units can be connected in one system. 

## **6.4.3 Extension Power Supply Unit** 

Only one extension power supply unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V) unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit. Available when the main unit is the AC power supply type. 

## **6.4.4 Special function blocks** 

Up to 8 special function units/blocks can be connected in one system. 

When connecting the following products, take into consideration the combination, number of units/blocks and connecting order. 

|**Type**|**Limitations**|
|---|---|
|FX3U-16CCL|•<br>Only one FX3U-16CCL-M unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit.<br>•<br>This master cannot be used together with FX2N-16CCL-M.|
|FX2N-16CCL-M|•<br>When some units are used, a remote I/O station cannot be connected to the second and following master stations.<br>•<br>This master cannot be used together with FX3U-16CCL-M.|
|FX3U-64CCL|•<br>Only one FX3U-64CCL unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit.|
|FX2N-2AD<br>FX2N-2DA|When any of these products is connected to a FX2NSeries input/output powered extension unit, the current<br>consumption is restricted.<br>The total current consumption of FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA must be the following value or less.<br>-<br>FX2N-32E<br>: 190mA or less<br>-<br>FX2N-48E<br>: 300mA or less|



## **6.4.5 Extension cable** 

One extension cable can be used in a system. 

The FX2N-CNV-BC is required when the extension block is connected. 

**10** 

- FX0N-65EC(650mm(25.59")) 

- FX0N-30EC(300mm(11.81")) 

**73** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.5 Expansion of Main Unit_ 

## **6.5 Expansion of Main Unit** 

The extendibility of the main unit varies depending on the power supply type (AC power supply type or DC power supply type).  Select proper extension devices in accordance with the power supply type of the main unit used. 

## **In the case of AC power type main unit** 

The allowable extension to the AC power supply type main unit varies depending on used extension blocks as described below. 

## **1. When connecting only the input/output extension block** 

## **Input/output extension blocks of up to 32 points can be connected.** 

However, when the extension power supply unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V) is used and the main unit is the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit, make sure that the number of points including the input extension block (including the FX2N-8ER-ES/UL and FX2N-8ER) extended to the extension power supply unit does not exceed 32. 

## **2. When connecting the input/output extension block and special function block** 

## **Input/output extension blocks of up to 16 points can be connected.** 

However, when the extension power supply unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V) is used and the main unit is the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit, make sure that the number of points including the input extension block (including the FX2N-8ER-ES/UL and FX2N-8ER) extended to the extension power supply unit does not exceed 16. 

## **Only 1 special function block can be connected.** 

## **3. When connecting only the special function block** 

## **Up to 2 special function blocks can be connected.** 

When extension of the above points 1 to 3 is carried out and further extension is required, determine whether extension is possible using one of the following methods: 

- Using the 24V DC service power supply (400mA) of the main unit 

- Using an input/output powered extension unit 

- Using an extension power supply unit 

- For details, refer to the following. 

→ **Refer to 6.5.1 When adding input/output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit.** → **Refer to 6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit.** → **Refer to 6.7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V).** 

**74** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.5 Expansion of Main Unit_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

## **In the case of DC power type main unit** 

The allowable extension to the DC power supply type main unit varies depending on used extension blocks as described below. 

## **1. When connecting only the input/output extension block** 

**Input/output extension blocks of up to 32 points can be connected.** 

## **2. When connecting the input/output extension block and special function block** 

**Input/output extension blocks of up to 16 points can be connected. Only 1 special function block can be connected.** 

## **3. When connecting only the special function block** 

## **Up to 2 special function blocks can be connected.** 

When extension of the above points 1 to 3 is carried out and further extension is required, determine whether extension is possible using one of the following methods: 

For details, refer to the following. 

- → **Refer to 6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit.** 

## **6.5.1 When adding input/output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit** 

When extension is prohibited in the AC power supply type main unit due to restrictions in connection described above, it is possible to add extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit. 

For adding extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply, it is necessary to examine again whether extension is possible for all of extension blocks selected in the preceding subsection and extension blocks to be selected in this subsection. 

Note that only up to two network-related special function blocks can be connected including extension to the main unit. 

## **1 Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main unit.** 

**7** 

The priority is set to each extension block to be connected, and required to judge the possibility of extension to the main unit. The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to the connection position. 

When the extension power supply unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V) is used and the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit is the main unit, the priority should be considered also for input extension blocks (including the FX2N-8ER-ES/UL and FX2N-8ER) extended to the extension power supply unit. 

**==> picture [356 x 66] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
<Priority><br>Priority High Priority Low<br>Output extension FX2N-8ER-ES/UL Input extension<br>Special function<br>block FX2N-8ER block<br>block > > ><br>Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**8** 

**9** 

## **2 Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible.** 

Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for all extension blocks in turn, starting from the extension block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1. Consider that 16 input/output points are provided in each of the FX2N-8ER-ES/UL and FX2N-8ER. Eight output points have higher priority over 8 input points. For judgment about the possibility of extension to the main unit, refer to the Section 6.5. 

**10** 

**75** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.5 Expansion of Main Unit_ 

## **3 Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible.** 

Check using the quick reference matrix shown below whether the number of points whose extension is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added using the 24V DC service power supply. A special function block is handled in the same way as 16 output points. 

**==> picture [180 x 117] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output<br>(Example)<br>16 100 0<br>8 250 150 50<br>0 400 300 200 100 0<br>0 8 16 24 32<br>Number of added points Input<br>Number of<br>added points<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Example: When 8 input points and 8 output points are connected, the current of the 24V DC service power supply becomes 150mA or less. 

## **4 Confirm the current capacity of the 24V DC service power supply from the value shown in the quick reference matrix.** 

This remaining power supply capacity (current) can be used as a power supply for external loads (such as sensors), special adapters and special function blocks by the user. 

→ **For the current capacity of a special adapter, refer to the manual for each special adapter.** → **For the current capacity of a special function block, refer to Subsection 6.8.3.** 

If it is not possible to connect input/output extension blocks even using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit, consider adding an input/output powered extension unit to the system. 

→ **Refer to 6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit.** 

**76** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.5 Expansion of Main Unit_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6 7 8** 

**9 10** 

## **6.5.2 Selection example 1 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit** 

This subsection explains an example in which 8 input points and 16 output points are added to the following system configuration using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit. 

|**<Example of configuration>**|**<Example of configuration>**|**<Example of configuration>**|**<Example of configuration>**|Output extension<br>block<br>16 points<br>Extension blocks to be added<br>(Input 8 points + Output 16 points)<br>Input extension<br>block<br>8 points|Output extension<br>block<br>16 points<br>Extension blocks to be added<br>(Input 8 points + Output 16 points)<br>Input extension<br>block<br>8 points|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Main unit|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points|Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL|Output extension<br>block<br>8 points|Output extension<br>block<br>16 points|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points|
||Rane extendible to main unit|||||
|||||||
|g<br>(Special function block 1unit + Input/output 16 points)||||||



## **1 Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main unit.** 

The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to the connection position from the main unit as shown below. 

|**<Priority>**|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Output extension<br>block<br>16 points<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 3|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Output extension<br>block<br>16 points<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 3|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Output extension<br>block<br>16 points<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 3|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Output extension<br>block<br>16 points<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 3|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Output extension<br>block<br>16 points<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 3|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Main unit|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points|Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL|Output extension<br>block<br>8 points|Output extension<br>block<br>16 points|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points|
||||Priorit 2|||
||Pii 3|Pii 1|||Piit 3|
|||||||



## **2 Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible.** 

Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for all extension blocks in turn, starting from a block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1. 

In this example, due to the restriction "one special extension block and 16 points in input/output extension block", the only FX3U-64CCL (priority 1) and 16 points of the output extension block (priority 2) can be connected to the main unit. 

## **3 Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible.** 

Check using the quick reference matrix whether 16 input points and 8 output points whose extension is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added. 

**==> picture [180 x 117] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output<br>16 100 0<br>8 250 150 50<br>0 400 300 200 100 0<br>0 8 16 24 32<br>Number of added points Input<br>Number of<br>added points<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


After 16 input points and 8 output points are connected, the remaining current of the 24V DC service power supply is 50mA or less. Accordingly, it is possible to add 16 input points and 8 output points. 

The remaining power supply capacity (50mA) can be used as a power supply for external loads (such as sensors), special adapters and special function blocks by the user. 

**77** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.5 Expansion of Main Unit_ 

## **6.5.3 Selection example 2 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit** 

This subsection explains an example in which FX2N-2AD and 8 output points are added to the following system configuration using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit. 

|**<Example of configuration>**|**<Example of configuration>**|**<Example of configuration>**|**<Example of configuration>**|Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD<br>Extension blocks to be added<br>(Special function block 1unit + output<br>8 points)<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points|Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD<br>Extension blocks to be added<br>(Special function block 1unit + output<br>8 points)<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Main unit|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points|Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL|Output extension<br>block<br>8 points|Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD|Output extension<br>block<br>8 points|
||Rane extendible to main unit|||||
|||||Extension blocks to be added||
|g<br>(Special function block 1unit + Input/output 16 points)||||||



## **1 Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main unit.** 

The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to the connection position from the main unit as shown below. 

|**<Priority>**|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 1|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 1|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 1|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 1|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 1<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 3<br>Output extension<br>block<br>8 points<br>Priority 2<br>Priority 1|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Main unit|Input extension<br>block<br>8 points|Special function<br>block<br>FX3U-64CCL|Output extension<br>block<br>8 points|Special function<br>block<br>FX2N-2AD|Output extension<br>block<br>8 points|
|||||||
||Pii 3|Pii 1|Priorit 2|Pii 1|Piit 2|
|||||||



## **2 Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible.** 

Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for all extension blocks in turn, starting from a block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1. 

In this example, due to the restriction "two special function blocks", only the FX3U-64CCL (priority 1) and FX2N-2AD (priority 1) can be connected to the main unit. 

## **3 Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible.** 

Check using the quick reference matrix whether 8 input points and 16 output points whose extension is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added. 

**==> picture [180 x 116] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output<br>16 100 0<br>8 250 150 50<br>0 400 300 200 100 0<br>0 8 16 24 32<br>Number of added points Input<br>Number of<br>added points<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


After 8 input points and 16 output points are connected, the remaining current of the 24V DC service power supply is 50mA or less. Accordingly, it is possible to add 8 input points and 16 output points. 

**78** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5 6** 

**7** 

**10** 

## **6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit** 

When extension is not possible due to the main unit connection restrictions described in the preceding section and extension of input/output is required, select the input/output powered extension unit. 

Since input/output powered extension units have built-in input/output terminals, reexamine the input/output devices connected to the main unit to ensure the required number of points. 

**==> picture [400 x 138] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Range to be covered<br>by main unit Range exceeding power supply capacity<br>Before Main unit Input/outputextension Special Input extensionblock Output extension Special<br>selection block function block  (16 points) block (16 points) function block<br>After Main unit Input/outputextension Special Input/output poweredextension unit Special<br>selection function block function block<br>block (32 points)<br>Replaced with input/output<br>powered extension unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Determine whether extension devices can be connected to the input/output powered extension unit by the following method. 

- When only input/output extension devices are added, use the quick reference matrix. 

   - → **Refer to 6.6.1 Quick reference matrix (when only input/output devices are added).** 

- When also special extension devices are added, calculate the current consumption to ensure that the total current to be consumed by the added extension devices can be supplied by the built-in power supply. 

- → **Refer to 6.6.2 When special extension devices are also added (calculation of current consumption).** 

## **6.6.1 Quick reference matrix (when only input/output devices are added)** 

In the following quick reference matrix, the value at the intersection of the number of input points to be added (horizontal axis) with the number of output points to be added (vertical axis) indicates the remaining power supply capacity. 

## **1 Select the input/output extension block (number of points) to be connected to the main unit.** 

Check that the number of input/output points can be added. 

When connecting the FX3U-1PSU-5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest upstream unit to the FX3U-1PSU-5V is an input/output powered extension unit, include the current consumption by the input extension blocks (including FX2N-8ER-ES/UL and FX2N-8ER) connected to the FX3U-1PSU-5V when calculating the total current consumption of the input/output powered extension unit. 

## **1. AC power supply/DC input type** 

**8** 

- 1) FX2N-32ER, FX2N-32ET, FX2N-32ES FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL 

**==> picture [261 x 98] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply Output<br>DC input type<br>24 25 (Example)<br>FX2N-32E 16 100 50 0<br>8 175 125 75 25<br>0 250 200 150 100 50<br>0 8 16 24 32 Input<br>Number of added points<br>Number of<br>added points<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- (Example) When a 16-input and 0-output point extension block is connected to FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, the current of the 24V DC service power supply becomes 150mA or less. 

**9** 

**10** 

**79** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit_ 

- 2) FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ET FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL 

**==> picture [353 x 371] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply Output<br>DC input type<br>48 10 (Example)<br>FX2N-48E 40 85 35<br>32 160 110  60  10<br>24 235 185 135 85 35<br>16 310 260 210 160 110 60 10<br>8 385 335 285 235 185 135 85 35<br>0 460 410 360 310 260 210 160 110 60<br>0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Input<br>Number of added points<br>(Example) When a 32-input and 16-output point extension block is connected to FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, the<br>current of 24V DC service power supply becomes 110mA or less.<br>DC power supply/DC input type<br>2N-48ER-D, FX2N-48ET-D-48ER-D, FX2N-48ET-D2N-48ET-D-48ET-D<br>2N-48ER-DS, FX2N-48ET-DSS-48ER-DS, FX2N-48ET-DSS2N-48ET-DSS-48ET-DSS<br>(24V DC service power supply is not provided.)<br>DC power supply Output<br>DC input type 48 ✓<br>FX2N-48E�-D� 40 ✓ ✓ (Example)<br>32 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓<br>24 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓<br>16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓<br>8 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓<br>0 − ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓<br>0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Input<br>Number of added points<br>Number of<br>added points<br>Number of<br>added points<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


(Example) When a 32-input and 16-output point extension block is connected to FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, the current of 24V DC service power supply becomes 110mA or less. 

## **2. DC power supply/DC input type** 

- 1) FX2N-48ER-D, FX2N-48ET-D-48ER-D, FX2N-48ET-D2N-48ET-D-48ET-D FX2N-48ER-DS, FX2N-48ET-DSS-48ER-DS, FX2N-48ET-DSS2N-48ET-DSS-48ET-DSS 

   - (24V DC service power supply is not provided.) 

(Example) When adding 32 inputs to FX2N-48ER-DS, a maximum of 24 outputs are expandable 

## **3. AC power supply/AC input type** 

- 1) FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL 

   - (24V DC service power supply is not provided.) 

**==> picture [351 x 141] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply Output<br>DC input type (Example)<br>48<br>FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL 40<br>32<br>24<br>16<br>8<br>0<br>0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Input<br>Number of added points<br>Number of<br>added points<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


(Example) When adding 24 inputs to FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL, a maximum of 32 outputs are expandable 

**80** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8** 

**10** 

**10** 

## **2 Check the current capacity of the 24V DC service power supply based on the value shown in the quick reference matrix.** 

## **1. In the case of AC power supply/DC input type** 

The remaining power supply capacity (current) can be used as a power supply to loads (sensors or the like). When special adapters and special function units/blocks are connected by external wiring, it is necessary to consider whether they can be covered by the remaining power supply capacity. 

## **2. In the case of DC power supply/DC input type** 

- 24V DC service power supply is not provided. 

## **3. In the case of AC power supply/AC input type** 

- 24V DC service power supply is not provided. 

## **3 When the power supply capacity is insufficient, connect another input/output powered extension unit.** 

When two input/output powered extension units or more are connected, calculate the power supply capacities of the input/output extension blocks and special function blocks connected to them, and check the capacity. 

**9** 

**81** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit_ 

## **6.6.2 When special extension devices are also added (calculation of current consumption)** 

## **1 Select an input/output powered extension unit.** 

→ **For the data on the number of input/output occupied points and current consumption of each type,refer to Section 6.8.** 

|||||||**type,refer to Section 6.8.**|**type,refer to Section 6.8.**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|1|**Power supply**<br>**classification**|**Classification**|**Number of**<br>**connected units**|**Type**|**Number of input/**<br>**output points**<br>**[points]**|**Capacity of built-in power supply**||
|||||||**5V DC power**<br>**supply [mA]**|**24V DC service**<br>**power supply**<br>**[mA]**|
||||||1 -1|1 -2|1 -3|
||With built-in<br>power<br>supply|B1|-|FX2N-||||
|||Example of entry<br>FX2N-48ER-ES/UL<br>48||||690<br>460||



## **2 Enter the specifications for the products to be added.** 

Enter the data for the input/output extension blocks and special function blocks to be connected to the input/output powered extension unit, and calculate the current. 

→ **For data on the number of input/output occupied points and current consumption of each type,** 

**refer to Section 6.8.** 

|||||||**refer to Section 6.8.**|**refer to Section 6.8.**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|2|**Power supply**<br>**classification**|**Classification**|**Number of**<br>**connected**<br>**units**|<br>**Type**|**Number of input/**<br>**output points**<br>**[points]**|**Calculation of current consumption**<br>**of built-in power supply**||
|||||||**5V DC power**<br>**supply [mA]**|**24V DC power**<br>**supply [mA]**|
||Enter the<br>products<br>connected to<br>the input/<br>output powered<br>extension unit|Input/output<br>extension<br>block*1<br>B2|-|FX2N-||-||
|||||FX2N-||-||
|||||FX2N-||-||
|||||FX2N-||-||
|||||FX2N-||-||
|||||FX2N-||-||
|||||FX2N-||-||
|||||FX2N-||-||
|||Special<br>function<br>unit/block<br>C|8*2|FX2N/FX3U-||||
|||||FX2N/FX3U-||||
|||||FX2N/FX3U-||||
|||||FX2N/FX3U-||||
|||||FX2N/FX3U-||||
|||||FX2N/FX3U-||||
|||||FX2N/FX3U-||||
|||||FX2N/FX3U-||||
|||||||||
||||||2<br>-1|2<br>-2|2<br>-3|
||Calculate the totals|||||||



*1. When connecting the FX3U-1PSU-5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest upstream unit to the FX3U-1PSU-5V is input/output powered extension unit, also enter the current consumption and number of occupied I/O points for the input extension blocks (including FX2N-8ERES/UL and FX2N-8ER) that are connected to the FX3U-1PSU-5V. 

- *2. A maximum of 8 special function blocks are connectable, including the main unit and extension power supply unit. 

**82** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6 7** 

**9 10** 

**10** 

## **3 Determine whether FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA can be added.** 

Determine the number of analog special function blocks (FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA) to be connected to the input/output powered extension unit by the following method. 

- When connecting to FX2N-32E 

**==> picture [347 x 196] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Total current<br>Analog special function block<br>consumption<br>FX2N-2AD FX2N-2DA<br>50mA + 85mA = 190mA<br>units units mA<br>• When connecting to FX2N-48E<br>Total current<br>Analog special function block<br>consumption<br>FX2N-2AD FX2N-2DA<br>50mA + 85mA = 300mA<br>units units mA<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **4 Determine whether the devices can be added to the input/output powered extension unit.** 

Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected. 

## **1. Calculate the current consumption of the built-in 24V DC power supply (24V DC service power supply).** 

The value obtained by this calculation (when the value is positive) indicates the remaining capacity of 24V DC service power supply, and the capacity can be used for external loads. 

|||Input/output powered<br>extension unit<br>Capacity of 24V DC<br>power supply||Total of current consumed by<br>extension devices<br>Current consumption||Calculation result|||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Calculate the current consumption of the built-in 5V DC power supply**<br>mA<br>2<br>-3<br>mA<br>1<br>-3<br>-<br>mA<br>0mA<br>=|||||||
|||mA<br>1<br>-2<br>Capacity of 5V DC<br>power supply<br>Input/output powered<br>extension unit|mA<br>2<br>-2<br>-<br>=<br>Current consumption<br>Total of current consumed by<br>extension devices|||mA<br>Calculation result||0mA|



**2. Calculate the current consumption of the built-in 5V DC power supply.** 

**8** 

If the calculation results for the current consumption of the 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply are negative values, the current consumption exceeds the capacity of the built-in power supply. Reconfigure the system, adding input/output powered extension units or extension power supply units. 

**83** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V)_ 

## **6.7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V)** 

Select the extension power supply unit for adding special function blocks when extension is prohibited in the AC power supply type main unit due to restrictions in connection described in Section 6.5. 

## **1 Enter the current supply specification of the extension power supply unit.** 

The output current of the extension power supply unit is proportional to the ambient temperature as shown by the derating curve below. Enter the output current value, based on this derating curve. Also verify that the number of occupied input/output points from input/output extension block(s) connected to the extension power supply unit is less than 32. 

**==> picture [133 x 106] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Derating curve<br>Output current [A]<br>5V DC<br>1.0<br>0.8<br>24V DC<br>0.3<br>0.2<br>0 40 55<br>Ambient temperature [°C]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


3 

|**Power supply**<br>**classification**|**Classification**|**Number of**<br>**connected**<br>**units**|**Type**|**Capacity of built-in power supply**|**Capacity of built-in power supply**|**Connectable I/O**<br>**occupied  points**<br>**[points]**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**5V DC power**<br>**supply [mA]**|**Power supply for**<br>**internal 24V DC**<br>**[mA]**||
|||||3 -1|3 -2|3 -3|
|With built-in<br>power supply|D1|-|FX3U-1PSU-5V|||32|



## **2 Enter the specifications for the products to be added.** 

Enter the data on the input/output extension blocks and special function units/blocks to be connected to the input/output powered extension unit, and calculate the current. 

→ **For the data on the number of input/output occupied points and current consumption of each type,** 

## **refer to Section 6.8.** 

|**Power supply**<br>**classification**|**Classification**|**Number of**<br>**connected**<br>**units**|<br> <br>**Type**|**Capacity of built-in power supply**|**Capacity of built-in power supply**|**Number of**<br>**I/O occupied**<br>**points*1**<br>**{points]**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**5V DC power**<br>**supply [mA]**|**Power supply for**<br>**internal 24V DC**<br>**[mA]**||
|Enter the<br>products<br>connected to<br>the extension<br>power supply<br>unit|B2|-|FX2N-|-|||
||||FX2N-|-|||
||||FX2N-|-|||
||||FX2N-|-|||
||Special<br>function<br>unit/block<br>C|8*3|FX2N/FX3U-|||-|
||||FX2N/FX3U-|||-|
||||FX2N/FX3U-|||-|
||||FX2N/FX3U-|||-|
||||FX2N/FX3U-|||-|
||||FX2N/FX3U-|||-|
||||FX2N/FX3U-|||-|
||||FX2N/FX3U-|||-|
||||||||
|||||4 -1|4 -2|4 -3|
|Calculate the totals|||||||



4 

**84** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration 

_6.7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit (FX3U-1PSU-5V)_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

- *1. Input/output occupied points by special function blocks are excluded. 

- *2. For the input extension block (including the FX2N-8ER-ES/UL and FX2N-8ER), it is not necessary to calculate the current consumption of the internal 24V DC. Include the input extension block in calculation for the nearest main unit or input/output powered extension unit located on the upstream side to the extension power supply unit. 

   - → **When the main unit is on the upstream side, refer to Subsection 6.5.1 and Subsection 6.5.2.** 

- → **When the input/output powered extension unit is on the upstream side, refer to Subsection 6.6.1 and Subsection 6.6.2.** 

- *3. A maximum of 8 special function units/blocks are connectable, including the main unit and the input/ output powered extension unit. 

## **3 Determine whether the devices can be added to the extension power supply unit.** 

Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected. 

**1. Calculate the current consumption of the built-in 5V DC power supply.** 

**==> picture [348 x 87] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Capacity of 5V DC Current consumption Calculation result<br>power supply<br>Extension power Total of current consumed<br>supply unit by extension devices<br>3 -1 4 -1<br>- =<br>0mA<br>mA mA mA<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**2. Calculate the available current supply from the internal 24V DC power supply.** 

**==> picture [365 x 195] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power supply<br>capacity for internal Current consumption Calculation result<br>24V DC<br>Extension power Total of current consumed<br>supply unit by extension devices<br>3 -2 - 4 -2<br>=<br>0mA<br>mA mA mA<br>Calculate the available input/output occupied points (excluding the occupied input/output<br>by special function blocks).<br>Connectable I/O Number of I/O<br>Calculation result<br>occupied  points occupied points<br>Extension power Total of I/O occupied points<br>supply unit by extension devices<br>3 -3 4 -3<br>- =<br> 0points<br>points points points<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**3. Calculate the available input/output occupied points (excluding the occupied input/output by special function blocks).** 

If the calculation result for the 5V DC power supply is a negative value, the current consumption exceeds the power supply capacity. 

**4** 

**5** 

**==> picture [37 x 128] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
6<br>DevicesPeripheral  Version and<br>ConfigurationSystem<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**7** 

**8** 

If the calculation result for the internal 24V DC is a negative value, the current consumption exceeds the power supply capacity. 

If the calculation result for the number of occupied input/output points is a negative value, the available number of input/output points is exceeded. 

Reconfigure the system with an input/output powered extension unit. 

**85** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.8 Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption_ 

## **6.8 Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption** 

The following tables show the number of input/output points or the number of input/output occupied points for each type of device, along with the power supply type and current consumption values needed for selecting a product. 

- Number of input/output points or input/output occupied points on each type of device 

- Output current of 24V DC service power supply of main units 

- Output current of 5V DC power supply and 24V DC service power supply of input/output powered extension units 

- Current consumed by input/output extension blocks and special function blocks 

The current consumption is determined differently in the following cases. 

- In the input/output powered extension unit, 5V DC and internal 24V DC are supplied via extension cables.It is necessary to calculate the current consumption.Subtract the current consumption of the internal 24V DC from the 24V DC service power supply. 

- The special function units/blocks connected to the AC power supply type main unit or to the 24V DC service power supply terminal of the input/output powered extension unit consume the external 24V DC. Include the current in the calculation of current consumption. 

   - When the terminal is connected with an external power supply, the current is not included in the calculation of current consumption. 

## **6.8.1 [A] Main units** 

||**No.**|**Type**|**Input/output**|**Input/output**|**Output current (mA)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**Number of input/**<br>**output points**<br>**[points]**|**Input/output**<br>**[points]**|**24V DC service power supply**|
||A1|**AC power supply type**||||
|||FX3G-14MR/ES|14(16)*1|8/6(8)|400|
|||FX3G-14MT/ES||||
|||FX3G-14MT/ESS||||
|||FX3G-24MR/ES|24(32)*1|14(16)/10(16)||
|||FX3G-24MT/ES||||
|||FX3G-24MT/ESS||||
|||FX3G-40MR/ES|40|24/16||
|||FX3G-40MT/ES||||
|||FX3G-40MT/ESS||||
|||FX3G-60MR/ES|60(64)*1|36(40)/24||
|||FX3G-60MT/ES||||
|||FX3G-60MT/ESS||||
|||**DC power supply type**||||
|||FX3G-14MR/DS|14(16)*1|8/6(8)|-|
|||FX3G-14MT/DS||||
|||FX3G-14MT/DSS||||
|||FX3G-24MR/DS|24(32)*1|14(16)/10(16)||
|||FX3G-24MT/DS||||
|||FX3G-24MT/DSS||||
|||FX3G-40MR/DS|40|24/16||
|||FX3G-40MT/DS||||
|||FX3G-40MT/DSS||||
|||FX3G-60MR/DS|60(64)*1|36(40)/24||
|||FX3G-60MT/DS||||
|||FX3G-60MT/DSS||||



- *1. Each number inside ( ) indicates the number of occupied points. 

Use numbers inside ( ) when calculating the total number of input/output points. 

**86** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.8 Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5 6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

**10** 

## **6.8.2 [B] Input/output powered extension units/blocks** 

## **1. Input/output powered extension units** 

||**No.**|**Type**|**Input/output**|**Input/output**|**Output current (mA)**|**Output current (mA)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**Number of input/**<br>**output points**<br>**[points]**|**Input/output**<br>**[points]**|**5V DC power supply**|**24V DC service**<br>**power supply**|
||B1|**AC power supply type**|||||
|||FX2N-32ER-ES/UL|32|16/16|690|250|
|||FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL|||||
|||FX2N-32ER|||||
|||FX2N-32ES|||||
|||FX2N-32ET|||||
|||FX2N-48ER-ES/UL|48|24/24||460|
|||FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL|||||
|||FX2N-48ER|||||
|||FX2N-48ET|||||
|||**DC power supply type**|||||
|||FX2N-48ER-DS|48|24/24|690|-|
|||FX2N-48ET-DSS|||||
|||FX2N-48ER-D|||||
|||FX2N-48ET-D|||||



## **2. Input/output extension blocks** 

||**No.**|**Type**|**Number of input/**<br>**output points**|**Current consumed (mA)**|**Current consumed (mA)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**5V DC**|**Internal 24V DC**|
||B2|**Types for addition of input/output**||||
|||FX2N-8ER-ES/UL|16*1|-|62.5|
|||FX2N-8ER||||
|||**Types for addition of input**||||
|||FX2N-8EX-ES/UL|8|-|50|
|||FX2N-8EX||||
|||FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL||||
|||FX2N-16EX-ES/UL|16||100|
|||FX2N-16EX||||
|||FX2N-16EX-C||||
|||FX2N-16EXL-C||||
|||**Types for addition of output**||||
|||FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL|8|-|75|
|||FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL||||
|||FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL||||
|||FX2N-8EYR||||
|||FX2N-8EYT||||
|||FX2N-8EYT-H||||
|||FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL|16||150|
|||FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL||||
|||FX2N-16EYR||||
|||FX2N-16EYT||||
|||FX2N-16EYT-C||||
|||FX2N-16EYS||||



- *1. Four inputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers. 

**87** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

6 Examination of System Configuration _6.8 Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption_ 

## **6.8.3 [C] Special function devices** 

||**No.**|**Type**|**Number of input/**<br>**occupied output**<br>**points**|**Current consumed (mA)**|**Current consumed (mA)**|**Current consumed (mA)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**5V DC**|**Internal 24V DC**|**External 24V DC**|
||C1|FX3U-4AD|8|110|0|90|
|||FX2N-2AD|8|20|50*3|0|
|||FX2N-4AD|8|30|0|55|
|||FX2N-8AD|8|50|0|80|
|||FX2N-4AD-PT|8|30|0|50|
|||FX2N-4AD-TC|8|30|0|50|
|||FX3U-4DA|8|120|0|160|
|||FX2N-2DA<br>|8<br>|30<br>|85*3<br>|0<br>|
|||FX2N-4DA|8|30|0|200|
|||FX2N-5A|8|70|0|90|
|||FX3U-4LC|8|160|0|50|
|||FX2N-2LC|8|70|0|55|
|||FX3U-16CCL-M|8*1|0|0|240|
|||FX3U-64CCL|8|0|0|220|
|||FX2N-16CCL-M|8*1|0|0|150|
|||FX2N-32CCL|8|130|0|50|
|||FX2N-64CL-M|8*2|190|Supplied from power supply for<br>CC-Link/LT||



- *1. The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network. Number of remote I/O stations  32 points 

- *2. The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network. Total number of input/output points of remote I/O stations 

- *3. When analog special function blocks (FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA) are connected to an input/output powered extension unit (FX2N-32E or FX2N-48E ), the following limitation must be taken into consideration. (When the blocks are connected to the main unit, this limitation is not applied.) The total current consumption of the analog special function blocks (FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA) should be less than the following current values. 

   - Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N-32E : 190 mA or less 

   - Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N-48E : 300 mA or less 

## **6.8.4 [D] Extension Power Supply Unit** 

||**No.**|**No.**|**No.**|**Type**|**Number of input/**<br>**occupied output**<br>**points**|**Current consumed (mA)*1**|**Current consumed (mA)*1**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||||**5V DC power supply**|**Internal 24V DC**|
||D1|||FX3U-1PSU-5V|-|1000|300|
|*1.||The ambient temperature restricts the output||||current. For details, refer to the derating curve in Section||
|||<br>6.7.||||||



**88** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

7 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers and Unit Numbers 

_7.1 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y)_ 

**1 2** 

**3** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8** 

**9 10** 

**10** 

## **7. Assignment of Input/Output Numbers and Unit Numbers** 

## **7.1 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y)** 

If input/output powered extension units/blocks have been connected when the power is turned on, the main unit automatically assigns the input/output numbers (X/Y) (octal) to the units/blocks. Therefore, it is unnecessary to specify the input/output numbers with parameters. Accordingly, it is not necessary to specify input/output numbers using parameters. It is necessary to assign input and output numbers in the following special function blocks. 

- FX2N-64CL-M 

**==> picture [160 x 11] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7.1.1 Concept of assigning<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


When the power is turned on, input/output numbers (X/Y) are assigned in accordance with the following rules. In the FX2N-64CL-M, input/output numbers are assigned to connected remote input/output stations. For details on assignment, refer to the FX2N-64CL-M manual. 

**4** 

## **1. Input/output numbers (X/Y) are octal.** 

Octal numbers are assigned as input/output numbers (X/Y) as shown below. 

- X000 to X007, X010 to X017, X020 to X027......, X070 to X077, X100 to X107... 

- Y000 to Y007, Y010 to Y017, Y020 to Y027......, Y070 to Y077, Y100 to Y107... 

## **2. Unused numbers** 

Note that unused numbers (which cause the difference between the number of occupied points and the number of effective points) are generated when the following products are used. 

- Main units (FX3G-14M , FX3G-24M , FX3G-60M ) 

- input/output extension blocks (FX2N-8ER-ES/UL, FX2N-8ER) 

## **3. Numbers for added input/output unit/block** 

To an added input/output powered extension unit/block, input numbers and output numbers following the input numbers and output numbers given to the preceding device are assigned. The last digit of the assigned numbers must begin with 0. 

When the input/output powered extension unit is connected to the main unit, input/output numbers are assigned as follows. 

- In the case of FX3G-14M 

- In the case of FX3G-24M 

**==> picture [331 x 221] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(X016,X017: Unused numbers)<br>X000 to X007 X010 to X027 X000 to X015 X020 to X037<br>Main unit Input/output powered Main unit Input/output powered<br>extension unit extension unit<br>FX3G-14MT/ES FX3G-24MT/ES<br>FX2N-32ER FX2N-32ER<br>Y000 to Y005 Y010 to Y027 Y000 to Y011 Y020 to Y037<br>(Y006,Y007: Unused numbers) (Y012 to Y017: Unused numbers)<br>In the case of FX3G-40M3G-40M-40M • In the case of FX3G-60M<br>(X044 to X047: Unused numbers)<br>X000 to X027 X030 to X047 X000 to X043 X050 to X067<br>Main unit Input/output powered Main unit Input/output powered<br>extension unit extension unit<br>FX3G-40MT/ES FX3G-60MT/ES<br>FX2N-32ER FX2N-32ER<br>Y000 to Y017 Y020 to Y037 Y000 to Y027 Y030 to Y047<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- In the case of FX3G-40M3G-40M-40M 

**89** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

7 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers and Unit Numbers _7.1 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y)_ 

## **7.1.2 Example of assigning** 

An example of assignment of input/output numbers (X/Y) is shown below. 

## **1. Example of configuration** 

**==> picture [334 x 99] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Connector<br>Input/output Special function<br>Special adapter conversion Main unit<br>extension block block<br>FX3U-4AD-ADP adapter FX3G-24MT/ES FX2N-8ER FX2N-16CCL-M<br>FX3G-CNV-ADP<br>Input/output Input<br>powered extension<br>extension unit block<br>FX2N-32ET FX2N-8EX<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Assignment of input/output numbers** 

Input/output numbers are assigned to the above example configuration as shown below. 

**==> picture [356 x 220] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(X016, X017: (X024 to X027:<br> Unused numbers)  Unused numbers)<br>- - X000 to X015 X020 to X023 -<br>Connector<br>Input/output Special function<br>Special adapter conversion Main unit<br>extension block block<br>FX3U-4AD-ADP adapter FX3G-24MT/ES FX2N-8ER FX2N-16CCL-M<br>FX3G-CNV-ADP<br>Y000 to Y011 Y020 to Y023 -<br>(Y012 to Y017: (Y024 to Y027:<br> Unused numbers)  Unused numbers)<br>X030 to X047 X050 to X057<br>Input/output Input<br>powered extension<br>extension unit block<br>FX2N-32ET FX2N-8EX<br>Y030 to Y047<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **7.1.3 Application of I/O number label** 

The input/output powered extension units/blocks come with an I/O number label. 

Apply the I/O number label to spaces on the enclosure (see the following figure) so that the input/output numbers can be identified. 

**==> picture [323 x 185] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
For X050<br>For Y040<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**90** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

7 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers and Unit Numbers _7.2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**6** 

**10** 

## **7.2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks** 

## **7.2.1 Concept of assigning** 

When power is turned on, the main unit (CPU) automatically assigns the numbers 0 to 7 to special function blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit. 

Unit numbers are not given to input/output powered extension units/blocks. 

## **1. Special function blocks connected to main unit** 

The numbers 0 to 7 are assigned to the special function blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit. 

## **2. Products to which unit numbers are not assigned** 

- Input/output powered extension units: FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ET, etc. 

- Input/output extension blocks: FX2N-16EX, FX2N-16EYR, etc. 

- • Connector conversion adapter: FX3G-CNV-ADP, FX2N-CNV-BC • Expansion boards: FX3G-232-BD, etc. • Special adapters: FX3U-232ADP(-MB), FX3U-4AD-ADP, etc. • Extension power supply unit: FX3U-1PSU-5V 

## **7.2.2 Example of assigning** 

Unit numbers are assigned to the special function blocks in the following configuration. 

→ **For assignment of input/output numbers, refer to Section 7.1.** 

**5** 

## **1. Example of configuration** 

**==> picture [334 x 99] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Connector Input<br>Special function<br>Special adapter conversion Main unit extension<br>block<br>FX3U-4AD-ADP adapter FX3G-24MT/ES block FX2N-16CCL-M<br>FX3G-CNV-ADP FX2N-8EX<br>Input/output Special<br>powered function<br>extension unit block<br>FX2N-32ET FX3U-64CCL<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**7** 

## **2. Assignment of Unit No.** 

Unit numbers are assigned to the special function blocks in the above configuration as shown below. 

**==> picture [334 x 171] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit No.<br>No.0<br>Connector Input<br>Special function<br>Special adapter conversion Main unit extension block<br>FX3U-4AD-ADP adapter FX3G-24MT/ES block FX2N-16CCL-M<br>FX3G-CNV-ADP FX2N-8EX<br>Unit No.<br>No.1<br>Input/output Special<br>powered function<br>extension unit block<br>FX2N-32ET FX3U-64CCL<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**8** 

**9** 

**10** 

**91** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

7 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers and Unit Numbers _7.2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks_ 

## **7.2.3 Application of unit number labels** 

The special function units/blocks come with unit number labels. 

Apply the unit number labels to spaces on the enclosure (see the following figure) so that the unit numbers can be identified. 

**==> picture [304 x 243] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Y818D33101<br>No.0<br>No.1<br>No.2<br>No.3<br>No.4<br>No.5<br>No.6 No.0<br>No.7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**92** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

7 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers and Unit Numbers _7.3 Assignment of Communication Channels_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**10** 

## **7.3 Assignment of Communication Channels** 

## **7.3.1 Assignment of communication channels** 

When the communication expansion board or special communication adapter is used, the main unit (CPU) automatically assigns communication channels at the time of power ON. The number of available communication channels varies depending on the main unit type. 

- Main unit (40/60 point type) : Max 2ch 

- Main unit (14/24 point type) : Max 1ch 

## **1. In the case of main unit (40/60 point type)** 

"Ch1" is assigned to the communication expansion board connected to the BD1 connector or the first special communication adapter connected to the connector conversion adapter. 

"Ch2" is assigned to the communication expansion board (FX3G-8AV-BD included) connected to the BD2 connector or the second special communication adapter connected to the connector conversion adapter. 

Only between the communication expansion board (FX3G-8AV-BD included) and the special communication adapter (which requires the connector conversion adapter) can be used. 

**==> picture [426 x 215] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Main unit (40/60 point type)<br>BD1 connector BD2 connector<br>ch2 ch1<br>ch1 ch2<br>ch1<br>Communication  Communication<br>special adapter expansion board<br>(FX3G-8AV-BD included) Connector<br>Communication<br>conversion  Or<br>adapter(BD1) expansion<br>board(BD1)<br>Communication special adapter<br>Only either one between the communication expansion board<br>and the special communication adapter (which requires the<br>connector conversion adapter) can be used.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. In the case of main unit (14/24 point type)** 

"Ch1" is assigned to the communication expansion board (FX3G-8AV-BD included) connected to the BD connector or the special communication adapter connected to the connector conversion adapter. 

**==> picture [357 x 217] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Main unit<br>(14/24 point type)<br>ch1 BD connector<br>ch1<br>ch1<br>Connector  Communication<br>conversion  Or expansion<br>adapter(BD)<br>board(BD)<br>Communication special adapter<br>Only either one between the communication expansion board<br>(FX3G-8AV-BD included) and the special communication<br>adapter (which requires the connector conversion adapter)<br>can be used.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**7** 

**8** 

**9** 

**10** 

**93** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

7 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers and Unit Numbers _7.4 "Station No." Label of Expansion Board (FX3G-485-BD)_ 

## **7.4 "Station No." Label of Expansion Board (FX3G-485-BD)** 

The "station No." label is packed together with the FX3G-485-BD. Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference (as shown in the figure below). 

**==> picture [410 x 268] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
when the memory cassette  when the memory cassette<br>is not used together is used together<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **7.5 Trimmer Layout Label of Expansion Board (FX3G-8AV-BD)** 

The trimmer layout label is packed together with the FX3G-8AV-BD. 

Adhere it in a position where it can be seen easily for quick reference (as shown in the figure below). 

**==> picture [409 x 200] intentionally omitted <==**

**94** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

**1 2 3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**8 9 10** 

## **8. Installation In Enclosure** 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 

   - 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

   - 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions 

- Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors. Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure. 

**==> picture [68 x 45] intentionally omitted <==**

## **INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

**7** 

**95** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

## **INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS** 

- Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 4.1 of this manual. Never use the product in areas with excessive dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt air, Cl2, H2S, SO2 or NO2), flammable gas, vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature, condensation, or rain and wind. If the product is used in such conditions, electric shock, fire, malfunctions, deterioration or damage may occur. 

- • Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly. Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions. 

- Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws. 

Terminal block DIN rail only Main unit, FX2N Series I/O extension unit/block, FX2N/FX3U Series DIN rail or direct mounting special function block, and special adapter • Install the product on a flat surface. If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the PC board, thereby causing nonconformities. • Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws. Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. Loose connections may cause malfunctions. • When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. • Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC’s ventilation port when installation work is completed. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. • Connect the extension cables, peripheral device cables, input/output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors. Loose connections may cause malfunctions. • Connect the display module, memory cassette, and expansion board securely to their designated connectors. Loose connections may cause malfunctions. • Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions. - Peripheral devices, display modules, expansion boards and special adapters 

- Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks 

- Battery and memory cassette 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

- Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

**96** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

- **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** • Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service power supply) on the main unit or extension units. Doing so may cause damage to the product. 

- • Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm[2] or thicker. Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to section 9.3). 

- • Do not wire vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

- • Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual. If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out. 

- • Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual. If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out. 

- • When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. 

- • Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N/FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. 

- - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. 

- • Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. 

- - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. 

- - Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires. - Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends. 

- - Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size. 

- - Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. 

- • Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. 

- - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. 

**5** 

**97** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure _8.1 Installation location_ 

## **8.1 Installation location** 

Use the PLC under the environmental conditions complying with the generic specifications (Chapter 4). 

## **Notes** 

- Keep a space of 50 mm (1.97") away between the unit main body and other devices and structure. Install the unit as far away as possible from high-voltage lines, high-voltage devices and power equipment. 

- To prevent temperature rise, do not install the PLC on a floor or a ceiling or in the vertical direction. Install it horizontally on a wall as shown below. 

- Arrange the extension cable in such a way that the left connectors of the input/output powered extension units/blocks or specialÅ@function units/blocks are connected on the side closer to the main unit. 

## **8.1.1 Installation location in enclosure** 

**==> picture [499 x 213] intentionally omitted <==**

**98** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.2 Layout in Enclosure_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**9 10** 

## **8.1.2 Spaces in enclosure** 

Extension devices can be connected on the left and right sides of the main unit of the PLC. If you intend to add extension devices, keep necessary spaces on the left and right sides. 

## **1. Configuration without extension cable** 

**==> picture [266 x 384] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>A FX3G Series A<br>main unit<br>A<br>A  50mm (1.97")<br>Configuration in 2 stages with extension cable<br>A<br>A<br>A<br>FX3G Series<br>main unit<br>A<br>Extension cable<br>·FX0N-65EC<br>·FX0N-30EC<br>Input/output<br>powered<br>extension unit<br>A A<br>Other<br>A equipment<br>Other equipment A  50mm (1.97")<br>-16EX -16EYT<br>2N 2N<br>FX FX<br>Other<br>equipment<br>-4AD- -CNV- -16EYT<br>FX3U ADP FX3G ADP FX2N<br>-CNV- C<br>2N B -16EX -<br>FX 2N 2N<br>FX FX 16CCL-M<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Configuration in 2 stages with extension cable** 

## **8.2 Layout in Enclosure** 

The PLC components can be laid out in one stage or in two stages, upper and lower. The connecting procedures in each case are explained below. 

## **8.2.1 1-stage layout** 

**==> picture [451 x 123] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Connector Input/output powered extension units/blocks<br>Special  conversion Special function blocks<br>adapter<br>adapter<br>A FX3G Series Input/output A<br>main unit powered<br>extension units<br>For the dimensions of each product, refer to the<br>external dimensions. A  50mm (1.97")<br>block block block block<br>Extension Extension Extension Extension<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [37 x 148] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
5<br>6<br>DevicesPeripheral  Version and<br>ConfigurationSystem<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [37 x 73] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7<br>Nos., Unit Nos.Input/Output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**8** 

**==> picture [37 x 53] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Installation<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**10** 

**99** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure _8.2 Layout in Enclosure_ 

## **8.2.2 2-stage layout** 

In the case of a 2-stage layout, connect the first stage and the second stage with the extension cable. When an extension block is connected at the top of the second stage, FX2N-CNV-BC (connector conversion adapter) is necessary. 

## **1. When an input/output powered extension unit is connected at the top of the 2nd stage** 

**==> picture [381 x 213] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
adapterSpecial  conversionConnector Input/output powered extensionunits/blocks<br>adapter Special function blocks<br>A<br>FX3G Series<br>main unit<br>For the dimensions of<br>each product, refer to the<br>A external dimensions.<br>Input/output A<br>powered<br>Extension cable extension units [*1]<br>·FX0N-65EC<br> (650mm(25.59"))<br>·FX0N-30EC For the dimensions of each product,<br>refer to the external dimensions. A  50mm (1.97")<br> (300mm(11.81"))<br>block block<br>Extension Extension<br>block block block<br>Extension Extension Extension<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - *1. Including FX3U-1PSU-5V 

**2. When an input/output extension block or a special function block is connected at the top of the 2nd stage** 

**==> picture [402 x 216] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Special Connector Input/output powered extensionunits/blocks<br>adapter  conversion Special function blocks<br>adapter<br>A<br>FX3G Series<br>main unit<br>For the dimensions of<br>each product, refer to<br>the external dimensions. A<br>FX2N-CNV-BC<br>Input/output A<br>powered<br>extension units<br>Extension cable<br>·FX0N-65EC<br> (650mm(25.59")) For the dimensions of each product,<br>·FX0N-30EC refer to the external dimensions. A  50mm (1.97")<br> (300mm(11.81"))<br>block block<br>Extension Extension<br>block<br>*2 block block<br>Extension Extension Extension<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *2. Except for the FX3U-4LC or FX2N-8AD 

**100** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**9 10** 

## **8.3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure** 

Examine the installation location of PLC in consideration of the environmental conditions (generic specifications). 

## **8.3.1 Installing methods** 

The PLC can be installed by the following two methods. 

## **1. Installing on DIN rail** 

- The PLC can be installed on a DIN46277 rail (35 mm (1.38") wide). 

- The PLC can be easily moved and removed. 

- The PLC is installed higher by the height of the DIN rail. 

   - → **For details on the procedures on mounting and removing the DIN rail, refer to Section 8.4.** 

## **2. Direct installing (with screws)** 

- The PLC can be installed directly in the enclosure with M4 screws. 

   - → **For the mounting hole pitch, refer to Section 8.5.** 

**==> picture [37 x 73] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
3<br>Introduction Product<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**4** 

## **8.3.2 Cautions on examining installing method** 

→ **Refer to Section 8.2.** 

## **1. Cautions when FX3U-4LC or FX2N-8AD is used** 

**5** 

When the system is laid out in two stages, do not mount the FX3U-4LC or FX2N-8AD at the start of the second stage, or else the FX2N-CNV-BC cannot be secured properly. 

## **8.3.3 Examples of installation** 

## **1. Example of installation on DIN rail** 

**==> picture [285 x 171] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
1 to 2mm (0.04" to 0.08")<br>FX3G Series FX2N- FX2N-<br>main unit 16EX 16EYT<br>DIN rail<br>1 to 2mm<br>(0.04" to 0.08") Extension cable<br>·FX0N-65EC<br>FX2N-CNV-BC [*1] ·FX0N-30EC<br>FX2N- FX2N- DIN rail<br>16EX 64CL-M<br>(+ indicates an M4 screw.)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. FX2N-CNV-BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail. 

**6** 

**7** 

**==> picture [37 x 54] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Nos., Unit Nos.Input/Output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**8** 

**==> picture [37 x 53] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Installation<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**101** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure _8.3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure_ 

## **2. Example of direct installation** 

**==> picture [273 x 172] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
1 to 2mm (0.04" to 0.08")<br>FX3G Series FX2N- FX2N-<br>main unit 16EX 16EYT<br>1 to 2mm<br>(0.04" to 0.08")<br>Extension cable<br>FX2N-CNV-BC ·FX0N-65EC<br>·FX0N-30EC<br>FX2N- FX2N-<br>16EX 64CL-M<br>(+ indicates an M4 screw.)<br>4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **3. Example of combination of installation on DIN rail and direct installation** 

As shown in the following example, when the main unit is installed on the DIN rail, the extension devices connected with the extension cable can be installed directly in the enclosure. 

**==> picture [277 x 172] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
1 to 2mm (0.04" to 0.08")<br>FX3G Series FX2N- FX2N-<br>main unit 16EX 16EYT<br>DIN rail<br>1 to 2mm<br>(0.04" to 0.08") Extension cable<br>·FX0N-65EC<br>FX2N-CNV-BC [*1] ·FX0N-30EC<br>FX2N- FX2N-<br>16EX 64CL-M<br>(+ indicates an M4 screw.)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. FX2N-CNV-BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail. 

**102** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

## **8.4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail** 

The main unit can be installed on a DIN46277 rail (35 mm (1.38") wide). 

## **8.4.1 Preparation for installation** 

## **1. Connecting extension devices** 

Some extension devices must be mounted on the main unit before the unit is installed in the enclosure. 

- Mount the special adapter or connector conversion adapter (FX3G-CNV-ADP) on the main unit before installing the main unit to the enclosure. 

- Mount the input/output powered extension units/blocks and the special function blocks in the enclosure after installing the main unit in the enclosure. 

- The expansion boards/memory cassette and the display module can be fitted to the main unit after it is installed. 

- The battery can be replaced while the main unit is installed in the enclosure. However, when the expansion board, display module, memory cassette or connector conversion adapter is attached, remove the respective device. 

→ **For the replacement method, refer to Chapter 22.** 

## **2. Affixing The Dust Proof Sheet** 

The dust proof sheet should be affixed to the ventilation port before beginning the installation and wiring work. → **For the affixing procedure, refer to the instructions on the dust proof sheet.** 

Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet when the installation and wiring work is completed. 

**103** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail_ 

## **8.4.2 Installation of main unit** 

The main unit must be installed before installing a special adapter or connector conversion adapter on the enclosure. 

   - → **For the connection procedure, refer to Subsection 8.6.3 and Subsection 8.6.4.** 

- **1 Push out all DIN rail mounting hooks (A in the right figure).** 

**==> picture [121 x 109] intentionally omitted <==**

- **2 Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove (C in the right figure) onto the DIN rail.** 

**==> picture [138 x 239] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
C<br>1 1<br>A<br>C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- **3 Lock the DIN rail mounting hooks (D in the following figure) while pressing the PLC against the DIN rail.** 

**==> picture [357 x 117] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
D D<br>3 3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**104** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5 6 7 8 9 10** 

## **8.4.3 Installation of input/output powered extension unit/block and special function block** 

## **1 Push out the DIN rail mounting hook (A in the right figure) of the input/output extension block.** 

   - For input/output powered extension units, 8-point type input/output extension blocks (except for the FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL) and special extension units/blocks, this operation is unnecessary. 

- **2 Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove (B in the right figure) onto the DIN rail.** 

**3 Push the product against the DIN rail.** 

- Keep a gap of 1 to 2 mm (0.04" to 0.08") between the products. 

**==> picture [102 x 219] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Rear panel Rear panel<br>1<br>A<br>B<br>3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**4 Connect the extension cable.** 

→ **For the procedures on connecting the extension cable, refer to Subsection 8.6.5.** 

**105** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail_ 

## **8.4.4 Removal of main unit** 

- **1 Open the terminal block cover, and remove the lower terminal block cover (A in the right figure).** 

- **2 Gradually loosen the left and right terminal block mounting screws (B in the right figure), and remove the terminal blocks.** 

   - → **For anchoring of the terminal block, refer to Subsection 9.1.2.** 

- **3 Disconnect the extension cables and the connecting cables (including expansion board and special adapters).** 

- **4 Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the hole of the DIN rail mounting hook (C in the right figure).** 

   - This step also applies for the DIN rail mounting hooks of the special adapters. 

- **5 Move the flathead screwdriver as shown in the right figure to draw out the DIN rail mounting hooks of all devices.** 

- **6 Remove the product from the DIN rail (D in the right figure).** 

- **7 Push in the DIN rail mounting hooks (E in the right figure).** 

   - For input/output powered extension units, 8-point type input/output extension blocks (except for the FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL) and special function blocks, this operation is unnecessary. 

**==> picture [151 x 467] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
B<br>B<br>A<br>6<br>D<br>5<br>C<br>4<br>7 E 7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**106** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.5 Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws)_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4 5 6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9** 

**10** 

## **8.5 Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws)** 

The product can be installed directly in the enclosure (with screws). 

## **Point** 

Position the holes so that there is a gap of 1 to 2 mm (0.04" to 0.08") between the products. 

## **8.5.1 Hole pitches for direct mounting** 

The product mounting hole pitches are shown below. 

For the pitch that varies depending on the product, refer to the table. 

## **1. Main unit (A)** 

**==> picture [89 x 10] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit: mm (inches)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [139 x 122] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4(0.16") W 4(0.16")<br>A<br>82 (3.23") 90 (3.55")<br>4(0.16")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


||**Model name**|**Mounting hole pitch(W)**|
|---|---|---|
|**A**|FX3G-14MR/ES|82 (3.23")|
||FX3G-14MT/ES||
||FX3G-14MT/ESS||
||FX3G-14MR/DS||
||FX3G-14MT/DS||
||FX3G-14MT/DSS||
||FX3G-24MR/ES||
||FX3G-24MT/ES||
||FX3G-24MT/ESS||
||FX3G-24MR/DS||
||FX3G-24MT/DS||
||FX3G-24MT/DSS||
||FX3G-40MR/ES|122 (4.81")|
||FX3G-40MT/ES||
||FX3G-40MT/ESS||
||FX3G-40MR/DS||
||FX3G-40MT/DS||
||FX3G-40MT/DSS||
||FX3G-60MR/ES|167 (6.58")|
||FX3G-60MT/ES||
||FX3G-60MT/ESS||
||FX3G-60MR/DS||
||FX3G-60MT/DS||
||FX3G-60MT/DSS||



## **2. Special adapter (B)** 

|B<br>98 (3.86")<br>15.1<br>(0.6")<br>2.5<br>(0.1")<br>106 (4.18")|B<br>98 (3.86")<br>15.1<br>(0.6")<br>2.5<br>(0.1")<br>106 (4.18")|B<br>98 (3.86")<br>15.1<br>(0.6")<br>2.5<br>(0.1")<br>106 (4.18")|**Unit: mm (inches)**|**Unit: mm (inches)**|**Unit: mm (inches)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**Model name**|**Mounting hole pitch(W)**|
||||**B**|FX3U-4AD-ADP<br>FX3U-4DA-ADP<br>FX3U-3A-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP<br>FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP<br>FX3U-232ADP(-MB)<br>FX3U-485ADP(-MB)|Refer to the figure shown<br>left.|
||B<br>98 (3.86")<br>106 (4.18")|||||
|||||||



**10** 

**107** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.5 Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws)_ 

## **3. Input/output powered extension unit(C or D)** 

## **Unit: mm (inches)** 

**==> picture [133 x 204] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
5 5<br>(0.2") W (0.2")<br>C<br>5 5<br>(0.2") W (0.2")<br>D<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


||**Model name**|**Mounting hole pitch(W)**|
|---|---|---|
|**C**|FX2N-32ER-ES/UL<br>FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL<br>FX2N-32ER<br>FX2N-32ET<br>FX2N-32ES|140 (5.52")|
|**D**|FX2N-48ER-ES/UL<br>FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL<br>FX2N-48ER<br>FX2N-48ET<br>FX2N-48ER-DS<br>FX2N-48ET-DSS<br>FX2N-48ER-D<br>FX2N-48ET-D|172 (6.78")|
||FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL|210 (8.27")|



## **4. Input/output extension block (E or F)** 

**Unit: mm (inches)** 

**==> picture [338 x 223] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4 Model name Mounting hole pitch(W)<br>(0.16") [W]<br>FX2N-8ER-ES/UL<br>FX2N-8ER<br>FX2N-8EX-ES/UL<br>FX2N-8EX<br>E E FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL 39 (1.54")<br>FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL<br>FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL<br>FX2N-8EYR<br>FX2N-8EYT<br>20 20 FX2N-8EYT-H<br>(0.87") (0.87") FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL<br>FX2N-16EX-ES/UL<br>FX2N-16EX<br>FX2N-16EX-C<br>F FX2N-16EXL-C Refer to the figure shown<br>F FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL<br>left.<br>FX2N-16EYR<br>FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL<br>FX2N-16EYT<br>FX2N-16EYT-C<br>FX2N-16EYS<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**108** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.5 Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws)_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**9 10** 

## **5. Special function unit/block (G, H, I, or J)** 

**Unit: mm (inches)** 

**==> picture [500 x 531] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4 4 4 Model name Mounting hole pitch(W)<br>(0.16") W (0.16") 75(2.96") (0.16") FX2N-2AD<br>FX2N-2DA<br>39 (1.54")<br>FX2N-64CL-M<br>FX2N-32CCL<br>FX3U-4AD<br>G H FX3U-4DA<br>FX2N-4AD<br>G FX2N-4DA<br>FX2N-4AD-PT<br>(0.16")4 W 4(0.16") (0.16")4 (3.23")82 4(0.16") FXFXFX2N2N2N-2LC-5A-4AD-TC 51 (2.01")<br>FX3U-16CCL-M<br>FX3U-64CCL<br>FX3U-1PSU-5V<br>Refer to the figure shown<br>J H FX2N-16CCL-M<br>left.<br>I<br>FX2N-20PSU 52 (2.05")<br>I<br>FX2N-8AD 67 (2.64")<br>Refer to the figure shown<br>J FX3U-4LC<br>left.<br>8.5.2 Example of mounting hole pitches<br>15.1 18.6 26 26 46<br>(0.6") (0.74") 122(4.81") (1.03") (1.03") (1.82") 172(6.78")<br>Unit:mm (inches)<br>B A F G C<br>2 * 2 * 2 * (0.08")<br>(0.08") (0.08")<br>FX3U-232ADP(-MB) FX3G-40MT/ES FX2N-16EX FX2N-64CL-M FX2N-48ER<br>* The gap between products is 2 mm (0.08").<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55") 80 (3.15")<br>90 (3.55")<br>82 (3.23") 90 (3.55")<br>98 (3.86") 105 (4.14")<br>-CNV-ADP<br>3G 80 (3.15") 82 (3.23") 98 (3.86")<br>FX<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**8** 

**109** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.5 Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws)_ 

## **8.5.3 Installation of main unit** 

Mount the special adapters and connector conversion adapter (FX3G-CNV-ADP) on the main unit before installing the unit in the enclosure. 

→ **For the connection procedure, refer to Subsection 8.6.3, Subsection 8.6.4.** 

- **1 Make mounting holes in the mounting surface according to the external dimensions diagram.** 

- **2 Fit the main unit (A in the right figure) based on the holes, and secure it with M4 screws (B in the right figure).** 

The positions and number of screws depend on the product. Refer to the external dimensions diagram. 

→ **For the external dimensions, refer to Section 4.6.** 

**==> picture [135 x 168] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
B<br>A<br>B<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **8.5.4 Installation of input/output powered extension unit/block and special function block** 

- **1 Make mounting holes in the mounting surface according to the external dimensions diagram.** 

- **2 Push in the DIN rail mounting hook (A in the right figure) of the input/output extension block.** 

If the DIN rail mounting hook is not pushed in, the screw hole is covered, and the block cannot be mounted. 

For input/output powered extension units, 8-point type input/ output extension blocks (except for the FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL) and special function blocks, this operation is unnecessary. 

## **3 Fit the input/output extension block (B in the right figure) based on the holes, and secure it with M4 screws (C in the right figure).** 

The positions and number of screws depend on the product. Refer to the external dimensions diagram. 

→ **For the external dimensions of the input/output powered extension unit, refer to Chapter 15.** 

→ **For the external dimensions of the input/output extension block, refer to Chapter 16.** 

→ **For the external dimensions of the special function blocks, refer to Chapter 18.** 

**==> picture [123 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Rear panel Rear panel<br>A<br>2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [138 x 187] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
C<br>B<br>C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**110** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

## **8.6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices** 

This section explains the connecting methods for extension devices. 

## **8.6.1 Connection of extension devices** 

The connecting method varies depending on the combination of the products, i.e. the main unit, expansion board, special adapters, input/output extension blocks and special function blocks. The connecting methods are explained with the following configuration examples. 

## **Example of configuration** 

**==> picture [373 x 274] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Connector FX2N/FX3U<br>Special  conversion Expansion Series<br>adapter adapter board extension blocks<br>FX3G Series<br>main unit<br>Connecting Connecting Connecting Connecting Connecting<br>method C method B method A method D method E<br>FX2N/FX3U FX2N/FX3U<br>Series FX2N Series input/output Series<br>extension blocks powered extension unit extension blocks<br>Extension cable<br>·FX0N-65EC<br>·FX0N-30EC<br>FXCNV-BC2N - Input/output poweredFX2N Series<br>extension unit<br>Connecting Connecting Connecting<br>method F method G method H<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**111** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices_ 

## **8.6.2 Connecting method A - connection of expansion board** 

This subsection explains how to connect the expansion board to the main unit. The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit in this example. 

- **1 Remove the top cover (A in the right figure) from the front face of the main unit.** 

**==> picture [160 x 155] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>Top cover(S)<br>1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2 Attach the provided side cover (B in the right figure) as shown in the right figure.** 

## **Caution** 

- Attachment of the side cover is not necessary when connecting the expansion board only under the top cover (S) of a 40/60-point type main unit. 

- FX3G-8AV-BD cannot attach in the top cover(S) side of a main unit. 

**==> picture [117 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
B<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **3 Connect the expansion board to the option connector (C in the right figure).** 

- **4 Fix the expansion board (E in the right figure) with provided M3 tapping screws (D in the right figure) to the main unit.** 

   - Tightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N•m 

**==> picture [117 x 194] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
C 3<br>D<br>E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [117 x 131] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
D<br>E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**112** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

## **8.6.3 Connecting method B - connection of connector conversion adapter** 

**1. This paragraph explains how to connect the connector conversion adapter to the main unit.** The FX3G-24MT/ES is used as the main unit in this example. 

**==> picture [499 x 205] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
1 Remove the top cover (A in the right figure)<br>A<br>and peripheral device connector cover (B in  B<br>the right figure) from the front face of the<br>main unit.<br>Caution<br>The peripheral device connector cover has the possibility of<br>being damaged when removed. Please remove by pressing on<br>the attaching tab (a in the figure to the right).<br>a<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**4** 

- **2 Attach the provided side cover (C in the right figure) as shown in the right figure.** 

**==> picture [91 x 116] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**5** 

**==> picture [37 x 128] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
6<br>DevicesPeripheral  Version and<br>ConfigurationSystem<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- **3 Connect the connector conversion adapter to the option connector (D in the right figure) as shown in the right figure, and fix it with provided M3 tapping screws (E in the right figure).** 

**==> picture [176 x 320] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>7<br>D<br>8<br>9<br>F<br>10<br>E<br>Nos., Unit Nos.Input/Output<br>Installation<br>WiringPower Supply Preparation and<br>Input Wiring<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - Tightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N•m 

- **4 Fix the connector conversion adapter (F in the right figure) with provided M3 tapping screws (E in the right figure) to the main unit.** 

   - Tightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N•m 

**113** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_8.6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices_ 

   **2. This paragraph explains how to connect the connector conversion adapter to the main unit.** The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit in this example. 

- **1 Remove the top cover (A in the right figure) and peripheral device connector cover (B in the right figure) from the front face of the main unit.** 

**==> picture [501 x 370] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>1 Remove the top cover (A in the right figure)  B<br>and peripheral device connector cover (B in<br>the right figure) from the front face of the main<br>unit.<br>Caution<br>The peripheral device connector cover has the possibility of being<br>damaged when removed. Please remove by pressing on the<br>attaching tab (a in the figure to the right).<br>a<br>D<br>2 Connect the connector conversion adapter to<br>the option connector (C in the right figure) as<br>shown in the right figure, and fix it with provided<br>M3 tapping screws (D in the right figure). C<br>• Tightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N•m<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- **3 Fix the connector conversion adapter (E in the right figure) with provided M3 tapping screws (D in the right figure) to the main unit.** 

**==> picture [142 x 123] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>D<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- Tightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N•m 

**114** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices_ 

**1 2** 

**3 4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8** 

**9 10** 

## **8.6.4 Connecting method C - connection of special adapter** 

When connecting the special adapter, it is necessary to attach the connector conversion adapter before the special adapter using the method described in the preceding subsection. 

## **1 Slide the special adapter connecting hooks (A in the right figure) of the main unit.** 

**==> picture [230 x 303] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
1<br>A<br>1<br>A<br>A<br>B 3<br>2<br>3<br>2<br>A<br>2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has been connected to the connector conversion adapter, read "connector conversion adapter" as "special adapter." (This applies to the following steps.) 

- **2 Connect the special adapter (B in the right figure) to the connector conversion adapter as shown in the right figure.** 

- **3 Slide the special adapter connecting hooks (A in the right figure) of the connector conversion adapter to secure the special adapter (B in the right figure).** 

## **8.6.5 Connecting method D - connection of powered extension units/blocks to main unit** 

The procedures for connecting an powered extension unit/block to the main unit are explained below. 

- **1 Remove the extension device connector cover (A in the right figure) on the right side of the main unit.** 

- **2 Connect the extension cable (B in the right figure) from the extension block to be connected (right side) to the extension device connector of the main unit.** 

**==> picture [153 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>3<br>B<br>1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - When connecting FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit or FX3U-1PSU-5V, connect the unit to be added (right side) and the existing unit (main unit) with the supplied extension cable. 

- **3 Fit the extension device connector cover (A in the right figure).** 

**10** 

**115** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices_ 

## **8.6.6 Connecting method E - connection of powered extension units/blocks** 

This subsection explains the procedures for connecting FX2N Series input/output powered extension units/ blocks or FX2N/FX3U Series special function blocks. 

## **1 Remove the top cover (B in the right figure) of the existing unit/block (left side) (A in the right figure).** 

- When connecting FX3U-1PSU-5V, remove the top cover of FX3U-1PSU-5V. 

**==> picture [139 x 145] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
B<br>3<br>1<br>C<br>A<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2 Connect the extension cable (C in the above figure) of the block to be connected (right side) to the existing unit/block (A in the above figure).** 

- When FX2N Series input/output powered extension units or FX3U-1PSU-5V units are connected, connect the unit to be added (right side) and the existing unit (left side) with the supplied extension cable. 

**3 Fit the top cover (B in the above figure)** 

## **8.6.7 Connecting method F - connection of extension cable and FX2N-CNV-BC** 

This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an extension cable and FX2N-CNV-BC to the extension cable of the powered extension unit/block. 

## **1 Separate the case of FX2N-CNV-BC into two pairs as shown right.** 

To separate the case, use a precision flathead screwdriver. 

Slightly insert the tip of the screwdriver into the part A shown in the right figure, and the hook (B in the right figure) will come off (4 places). 

- **2 Connect the extension cable on the upstream side (C in the right figure).** 

- **3 Connect the extension cable on the downstream side (D in the right figure).** 

- **4 Fit the upper cover (E in the right figure) and the lower cover (F in the right figure), and press down the upper cover until it is hooked.** 

**==> picture [112 x 143] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
B<br>A<br>A<br>A<br>1<br>A<br>1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [171 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4<br>4<br>E<br>C<br>2<br>FX0N-30EC<br>FX0N-65EC 3<br>D<br>F<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**116** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

8 Installation In Enclosure 

_8.6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8** 

**10** 

## **8.6.8 Connecting method G - connection of input/output powered extension unit** 

This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an input/output powered extension unit. 

- **1 Remove the top cover (A in the right figure) on the left side of the input/output powered extension unit.** 

- **2 Connect the connector of the provided extension cable (B in the right figure) to the extension connector of the unit/block on the upstream side (left side).** 

- **3 Connect the connector of the extension cable (supplied) (B in the right figure) to the extension connector of the input/output powered extension unit to be added.** 

**==> picture [187 x 166] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>1<br>B<br>4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- **4 Fit the top cover (A in the right figure).** 

## **8.6.9 Connecting method H - connection of extension block to input/output powered extension unit** 

This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an extension block to an input/output powered extension unit. 

- **1 Remove the extension connector cover (A in the right figure) on the right side of the input/ output powered extension unit.** 

- **2 Connect the extension cable (B in the right figure) from the extension block to be added (right side) to the extension connector of the input/output powered extension unit.** 

**==> picture [187 x 167] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>B<br>2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**9** 

- When connecting FX3U-1PSU-5V, read "input/output powered extension unit" as the unit. 

- When connecting FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit FX3U-1PSU-5V, connect the unit to be added (right side) and the existing unit (main unit) with the supplied extension cable or the optional extension cable. 

**10** 

**3 Fit the extension connector cover (A in the right figure).** 

**117** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 

## **9. Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures** 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 

   - 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

   - 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. 

- Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors. Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure. 

**==> picture [68 x 45] intentionally omitted <==**

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

- Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

**118** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6 7 8 9 10** 

|**WIRING PRECAUTIONS**|**WIRING PRECAUTIONS**|||
|---|---|---|---|
|•|Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service||power supply) on the main unit or extension units.|
||Doing so may cause damage to the product.|||
|•<br>•<br>•|Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100<br>or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a<br>wire 2 mm2or thicker.<br>Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to section 9.3).<br>Do not wire vacant terminals externally.<br>Doing so may damage the product.<br>Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.|||
||If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.|||
|•|Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.<br>If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.|||
|•<br>•|When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.<br>Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>Make sure to properly wire the FX3GSeries main unit and FX2N/FX3USeries extension equipment in accordance with the following<br>precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.|||
||-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.|||
|•|-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.|||
||Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>-<br>Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.<br>-<br>Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.|||
||-<br>Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric||wires of unspecified size.|
|•|-<br>Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.<br>Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions.|||
||Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.|||



**119** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.1 Preparation for Wiring_ 

## **9.1 Preparation for Wiring** 

## **9.1.1 Wiring procedures** 

Before starting wiring work, make sure that the main power is off. 

**1 Prepare the parts for wiring.** 

Prepare the solderless terminals and cables necessary for wiring. 

→ **For details, refer to Section 9.2.** 

**2 Wire the power supply terminals.** 

In the case of AC power supply type 

- Connect the power supply to the terminals [L] and [N]. 

In the case of DC power supply type 

- Connect the power supply to the terminals [ ] and [ ]. 

- Provide the power supply circuit with the protection circuit shown in this subsection. 

→ **For details, refer to Section 9.4 and Section 9.5.** 

## **3 Wire the ground terminal [ ] at a grounding resistance of 100 or less (Class D).** 

Connect a class D ground wire to the terminal. 

→ **For details, refer to Section 9.3 and Section 9.4.** 

## **4 Wire the input [X] terminals.** 

For a type (24V DC input type) common to sink/source input, select sink or source input by the following connection. 

In the case of AC power supply type 

- For sink input, connect the [24V] and [S/S] terminals. 

- For source input, connect the [0V] and [S/S] terminals. 

In the case of DC power supply type 

- For sink input, connect the [ ] and [S/S] terminals. 

- For source input, connect the [ ] and [S/S] terminals. 

Connect sensors and switches to the terminals. 

→ **For details, refer to Chapter 10.** 

## **5 Wire the output [Y] terminals.** 

Connect loads to the terminals. 

→ **For details, refer to Chapter 12.** 

## **9.1.2 Removal and installation of quick-release terminal block** 

Removal Unscrew the terminal block mounting screws [both right and left screws] evenly, and remove the terminal block. Installation Place the terminal block in the specified position, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws evenly [both right and left screws]. Tightening torque 0.4 to 0.5 N•m 

Do not tighten the terminal block mounting screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. 

- *Pay attention so that the center of the terminal block is not lifted. 

**120** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8** 

**9 10** 

## **9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures** 

For cable connection, a terminal block or a connector is used.The cable connecting procedures are explained below. 

## **9.2.1 Input/output terminal block (power supply and input/output wiring)** 

For the main unit, FX2N Series input/output powered extension units/blocks and FX2N/FX3U Series special function blocks, an M3 or M3.5 screw terminal block is used. 

## **1. Applicable products** 

|**Product type**|**Model name**|
|---|---|
|Main unit|All models of FX3GSeries main units|
|Input/output powered extension unit|All models of FX2NSeries input/output powered extension units|
|Input/output extension block|All models of FX2NSeries input/output extension blocks<br>(except for the FX2N-16EX-C, FX2N-16EXL-C and FX2N-16EYT-C)|
|Extension power supply unit|FX3U-1PSU-5V|
|Special function block|Refer to the manual for each product.|
|FX Series terminal block|All models|
|Power supply unit|FX2N-20PSU|



## **2. Terminal block screw size and tightening torque** 

The size of the terminal screws for each product is shown below. 

For the solderless terminals, refer to the following page. 

|**Product**|**Terminal screw**|**Tightening torque**|
|---|---|---|
|Main unit<br>FX2NSeries input/output powered extension units<br>FX2NSeries input/output extension blocks<br>FX3U-1PSU-5V|M3|0.5 to 0.8N•m|
|FX Series terminal block, FX2N-20PSU|M3.5||
|Special function block|Refer to the manual for each product.||



**121** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 

_9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures_ 

## **3. Wire end treatment** 

The solderless terminal size depends on the terminal screw size and wiring method. 

- Use solderless terminals of the following size. 

- Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.5 to 0.8 N•m. 

Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. 

## **In the case of M3 terminal screw** 

- When one wire is connected to one terminal 

**==> picture [457 x 155] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal Crimp<br> 3.2(0.13") screw terminal<br>6.2mm(0.24")<br>or less<br> 3.2(0.13")<br>6.2mm(0.24") Terminal<br>or less<br><Reference><br>Terminal Manufacturer Type No. Certification Pressure Bonding Tool<br>FV1.25-B3A<br>JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD (JST) UL Listed YA-1(JST)<br>FV2-MS3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- When two wires are connected to one terminal 

**==> picture [323 x 119] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
 3.2(0.13")<br>6.2mm(0.24") Terminal Crimp<br>screw terminal<br>or less<br>6.3mm(0.25")<br>or more<br> 3.2(0.13")<br>6.2mm(0.24") Terminal<br>or less<br>6.3mm(0.25")<br>or more<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **<Reference>** 

|**Terminal Manufacturer**|**Type No.**|**Certification**|**Pressure Bonding Tool**|
|---|---|---|---|
|JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD (JST)|FV1.25-B3A|UL Listed|YA-1(JST)|



**122** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 

_9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures_ 

**1 2 3 4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8** 

**9 10** 

## **In the case of M3.5 terminal screw** 

- When one wire is connected to one terminal 

3.7(0.15") 6.8mm(0.27") or less 3.7(0.15") 6.8mm(0.27") or less 

**==> picture [99 x 80] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal Crimp<br>screw terminal<br>Terminal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- When two wires are connected to one terminal 

3.7(0.15") 6.8mm(0.27") or less 6.0mm(0.24") or more 3.7(0.15") 6.8mm(0.27") or less 6.0mm(0.24") or more 

**==> picture [108 x 89] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal Crimp<br>screw terminal<br>Terminal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**123** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures_ 

## **9.2.2 Input/output connectors** 

The input/output connectors of FX2N Series input/output extension blocks (connector type) conform to MIL-C83503. 

Prepare the input/output cables, referring to the following tables. 

## **1. Applicable products** 

|**Classification**|**Model names**|
|---|---|
|Input/output extension blocks|FX2N-16EX-C, FX2N-16EXL-C, FX2N-16EYT-C|



## **2. Preparation of input/output connectors** 

- 1) Compliant connectors (commercially available connectors) Use 20-pin (1-key) sockets conforming to MIL-C-83503. 

   - In advance, make sure that no interference is caused with peripheral parts, such as the connector cover. 

- 2) Input/output cables (our options) 

Input/output cables with attached connectors are available. 

|**Model names**|**Length**|**Description**|**Shape**|
|---|---|---|---|
|FX-16E-500CAB-S|5m(10’4")|General-purpose input/output cable|•<br>Single wire (Wire color: red)<br>•<br>PLC side: A 20-pin connector|
|FX-16E-150CAB|1.5m(4’11")|Cables for connecting FX Series terminal block<br>and input/output connector<br>For the connection with FX Series terminal block,<br>refer to the following chapter.<br>→**[20. Terminal Block]**|•<br>Flat cables (with tube)<br>•<br>A 20-pin connector at both ends|
|FX-16E-300CAB|3m(9’10")|||
|FX-16E-500CAB|5m(10’4")|||
|FX-16E-150CAB-R|1.5m(4’11")||•<br>Round multicore cables<br>•<br>A 20-pin connector at both ends|
|FX-16E-300CAB-R|3m(9’10")|||
|FX-16E-500CAB-R|5m(10’4")|||
|FX-A32E-150CAB|1.5m(4’11")|Cables for connecting A Series Model A6TBXY36<br>connector/terminal block conversion unit and<br>input/output connector type|•<br>Flat cables (with tube)<br>•<br>PLC side: Two 20-pin connectors in 16-<br>point units.<br>•<br>Terminal block side: A dedicated<br>connector<br>•<br>One common terminal covers 32 input/<br>output terminals.|
|FX-A32E-300CAB|3m(9’10")|||
|FX-A32E-500CAB|5m(10’4")|||



- 3) Connectors for making input/output cables by users (our options) The users should prepare the electric wires and pressure bonding tool. 

|**Model name and composition of input/output connector**|**Model name and composition of input/output connector**|**Model name and composition of input/output connector**|**Applicable electric wire (UL-1061 are**<br>**recommended) and tool**|**Applicable electric wire (UL-1061 are**<br>**recommended) and tool**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Our model name**||**Details of part**<br>**(made by DDK Ltd.)**|**Electric wire size**|**Pressure bonding tool**<br>**(made by DDK Ltd.)**|
|FX2C-I/O-CON for flat cable|10-piece<br>set|Solderless connector FRC2-A020-30S|AWG28 (0.1mm2),<br>1.27 pitch, 20-core|357J-4674D: Main body<br>357J-4664N: Attachment|
|FX2C-I/O-CON-S for bulk wire|5-piece<br>set|Housing HU-200S2-001<br>Solderless contact HU-411S|AWG22 (0.3mm2)|357J-5538|
|FX2C-I/O-CON-SA for bulk wire|5-piece<br>set|Housing HU-200S2-001<br>Solderless contact HU-411SA|AWG20 (0.5mm2)|357J-13963|



- 4) Certified connectors (commercially available connectors) Connectors made by DDK Ltd. shown in Item 3). 

**124** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**10** 

## **9.2.3 Terminal block (for europe) [expansion board and special adapters]** 

The expansion board and special adapters of a terminal block type have terminal blocks for Europe. 

## **1. Applicable products** 

|**Classification**|**Model names**|
|---|---|
|Expansion Board|FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-2AD-BD, FX3G-1DA-BD|
|Special Adapters|FX3U-485ADP(-MB), FX3U-4AD-ADP, FX3U-4DA-ADP, FX3U-3A-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP,<br>FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP, FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP|



## **2. Compliant electric wires and tightening torque** 

||**Electric wire size**<br>**(stranded wire/solid wire)**|**Tightening**<br>**torque**|**End treatment**|
|---|---|---|---|
|One electric wire|0.3mm2to 0.5mm2<br>(AWG22 to 20)|0.22 to 0.25N•m|•<br>Remove the coating of the stranded wire, twist the core wires,<br>and connect the wires directly.<br>•<br>Remove the coating from the solid wire, and connect the wire<br>directly.|
|Two electric wires|0.3mm2(AWG22)×2|||
|Bar terminal with<br>insulating sleeve|0.3 mm2to 0.5 mm2<br>(AWG22 to 20)<br>(Refer to the following outline<br>drawing of bar terminal.)||•<br>Bar terminal with insulating sleeve<br>(recommended product)<br>AI 0.5-8WH : Phoenix Contact<br>•<br>Caulking tool<br>CRIMPFOX 6*1: Phoenix Contact<br>(CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2: Phoenix Contact)|



- *1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 

- *2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 

## **3. Treatment of electric wire ends** 

Treat the ends of stranded wires and solid wires without coating or using bar terminals with insulating sleeve. Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25N•m. 

- Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. 

**==> picture [455 x 154] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
• Treatment of stranded wires and solid wires without coating Stranded wire/solid wire<br>-<br>Twist the ends of stranded wires tightly so that loose wires will not<br>stick out.<br>-<br>Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.<br>9mm<br>• Treatment using bar terminal with insulating sleeve (0.36")<br>It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve  Bar terminal with insulating sleeve<br>depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath. Select the  Insulating sleeve Contact area<br>electric wire referring to the outline drawing. (Crimp area)<br><Reference><br>Manufacturer Model names Caulking tool 8mm<br>2.6mm (0.32")<br>CRIMPFOX 6 [*3]<br>Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (0.11") 14mm(0.56")<br>( or CRIMPFOX 6T-F [*4] )<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 

- *4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 

## **4. Tool** 

- For tightening the terminal, use a commercially available small screwdriver having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right. 

**9** 

## **Note :** 

If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the table above, use the following screwdriver or appropriate replacement (grip diameter : approximately 25mm(0.98")). 

<Reference> 

|**Manufacturer**|**Model names**|
|---|---|
|Phoenix Contact|SZS 0.4 x 2.5|



**==> picture [123 x 64] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With<br>straight tip<br>0.4mm 2.5mm<br>(0.02") (0.1")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**10** 

**125** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 

_9.3 Grounding_ 

## **9.3 Grounding** 

Ground the PLC as stated below. 

- Perform class D grounding. (Grounding resistance: 100 or less) 

- Ground the PLC independently if possible. 

If it cannot be grounded independently, ground it jointly as shown below. 

**==> picture [320 x 60] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Other Other Other<br>PLC PLC PLC<br>equipment equipment equipment<br>Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding<br>Best condition Good condition Not allowed<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Extension devices of PLC (except expansion board and special adapter) 

**==> picture [364 x 92] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PLC<br>Special Expansion Input/output Special Other<br>Main unit<br>adapter board extension unit extension equipment<br>Independent grounding<br>Class D grounding<br>(grounding resistance : 100  or less)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- Use ground wires thicker than AWG14 (2 mm[2] ). 

- Position the grounding point as close to the PLC as possible to decrease the length of the ground wire. 

**126** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.4 Examples of External Wiring [AC Power Supply Type]_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4 5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**10** 

## **9.4 Examples of External Wiring [AC Power Supply Type]** 

## **9.4.1 Example of input/output wiring with 24V DC service power supply** 

24V DC service power supply of the main unit can be used as a power supply for loads. 

**==> picture [421 x 502] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply of<br>100 to 240V<br>Breaker<br>Power ON<br>PL<br>MC<br>In the case of sink input wiring MC<br>Emergency<br>stop<br>Main unit *1<br>L<br>Class D<br>grounding<br>N<br>MC MC<br>S/S<br>*2 0V<br>0V Power supply for loads<br>24V *2 24V connected to sequencer<br>output terminals<br>X0 As for the details of<br>emergency stop, see<br>X1 "DESIGN PRECAUTIONS"<br>at "Safety Precautions"<br>field.<br>In the case of source input wiring<br>X7<br>Input<br>S/S<br>impedance<br>0V<br>0V<br>24V<br>24V<br>COM0<br>Y0<br>Fuse<br>COM2<br>Y2<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Load<br>*3<br>Input extension block S/S<br>X0<br>5V 0V 24V<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals (in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system). As for the details, see "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety Precautions" field. 

**8** 

**9** 

- *2 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

- *3 Connect the 24V terminal (in the case of sink input) or the 0V terminal (in the case of source input) to the S/S terminal on the input extension block. 

**127** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.4 Examples of External Wiring [AC Power Supply Type]_ 

## **9.4.2 Example of sink input [-common] wiring** 

An example of sink input [-common] wiring is given below. When connecting input/output powered extension units/blocks, carefully check the signal names on the terminal block because the sink and source input type units/blocks and the sink input type units/blocks vary in signal names on the terminal block. 

**==> picture [462 x 480] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type AC power supply of<br>100 to 240V<br>*4<br>Special adapter 24+<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Breaker<br>24-<br>Main unit *1 Class Dgrounding Power supply ON<br>L<br>PL<br>MC<br>N<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S MC Emergency<br>*7<br>source 0V stop<br>input 24V *7 24V DC*5<br>type service<br>Input extension *2,*3 power MC MC<br>5V 0V 24V block S/S supply<br>output<br>DC<br>*4<br>Special function 24+ power<br>block supply<br>5V 0V 24V 24-<br>DC AC<br>Input / output powered extension unit *1<br>Power supply for loads to<br>L<br>be connected to PLC<br>output terminals<br>N<br>24V DC<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S service As for the details of<br>source 0V power emergency stop<br>input 24V supply operation, see "DESIGN<br>type (A) (B) (C) *5 output PRECAUTIONS" at<br>*2,*3 "Safety Precautions" field.<br>Input extension S/S<br>5V 0V 24V block Sink input type<br>*6<br>Special function 24+ COM 24V DC<br>block service power<br>24+<br>5V 0V 24V 24- supply output<br>(A) (B) (C) *8<br>Output extension When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the<br>5V 0V 24V block system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

- *1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals (in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system). Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension units or earlier in extension units than the main unit. 

Do not connect the 24V terminals (24V DC service power supply) of the main unit and the input/output extension unit with each other. Connect the 0V terminal. 

- *5 

- *6 Some special extension units/blocks do not have power terminals. 

When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the extension unit or earlier than the extension unit. 

For the details, refer to "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" in 

- "Safety Precautions". 

- As for the details, see "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety Precautions" field. 

When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

- *2 Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit or the input/ output extension unit to the S/S terminal of the input extension block. 

   - *7 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. 

- *3 In the case of the sink input type, the S/S terminal is used as the 24+ terminal. 

For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

   - *8 Do not connect the 24V terminal of the main unit to the 24+ terminal (24V DC service power supply) of an input/output extension unit. 

- *4 Some special function units/blocks, special adapter do not have the power supply terminal. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. 

Connect the 0V terminal to the COM terminal. 

**128** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.4 Examples of External Wiring [AC Power Supply Type]_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**6 7** 

**8** 

**9 10** 

## **9.4.3 Example of source input [+common] wiring** 

An example of source input [+common] wiring is shown below. 

**==> picture [462 x 534] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type AC power supply of<br>*3 100 to 240V<br>Special adapter 24+<br>5V 0V 24V<br>24- Breaker<br>Class D<br>Main unit *1 grounding Power supply ON<br>L<br>PL<br>N MC<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S<br>source *6 MC<br>0V Emergency<br>input 24V *6 *4 stop<br>type<br>24V DC<br>service<br>*2<br>Input extension S/S power MC MC<br>block supply<br>5V 0V 24V output<br>DC<br>*3<br>power<br>Special function 24+ supply<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V 24-<br>DC AC<br>Input / output powered extension unit *1<br>Power supply for loads to<br>L<br>be connected to PLC<br>output terminals<br>N<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S 24V DC As for the details of<br>source 0V emergency stop<br>service<br>input 24V operation, see "DESIGN<br>power<br>type *4 PRECAUTIONS" at<br>supply<br>"Safety Precautions" field.<br>*2 output<br>Input extension S/S<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V<br>*5<br>Special function 24+<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V 24-<br>*3 Some special function units/blocks, special adapters do not<br>have a power supply terminal.<br>When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the<br>Output extension same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit.<br>block<br>When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the<br>5V 0V 24V system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including<br>special extension equipment) at the same time.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *3 Some special function units/blocks, special adapters do not have a power supply terminal. 

When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

   - *4 Do not connect the 24V terminals (24V DC service power supply) of the main unit and the input/output extension unit with each other. Connect the 0V terminal. 

- *1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals (in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system). Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension units or earlier in extension units than the main unit. 

- *5 Some special extension units/blocks do not have power terminals. 

When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the extension unit or earlier than the extension unit. 

- For the details, refer to "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" in "Safety Precautions". 

- As for the details, see "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety Precautions" field. 

When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

- *2 Connect the 0V terminal of the main unit or extension unit to the S/S terminal of the input extension block. 

- *6 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. 

**4** 

**5** 

**10** 

For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

**129** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.4 Examples of External Wiring [AC Power Supply Type]_ 

## **9.4.4 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit (sink input [-common])** 

This example shows a sink input wiring (-common),including the extension power supply unit.When adding an input extension block,check the signal name on the terminal block since the sink/source type and sink type differ from each there. 

**==> picture [496 x 524] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type AC power supply of<br>*4 100 to 240V<br>Special adapter 24+<br>5V0V 24V<br>24- Breaker<br>Class D<br>Main unit *1 grounding Power supply ON<br>L<br>PL<br>N MC<br>5V0V 24V S/S<br>Sink and MC<br>source 0V *6 Emergency<br>*6 stop<br>input 24V<br>type 24V DC<br>service<br>*2,*3<br>Input extension S/S power MC MC<br>block supply<br>5V0V 24V output<br>DC<br>*4 power<br>Special function 24+ supply<br>block<br>5V0V 24V 24-<br>DC AC<br>Extension power supply unit *1 Power supply for loads to<br>L be connected to PLC<br>output terminals<br>N<br>As for the details of emergency stop<br>5V0V 24V operation, see "DESIGN<br>PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety Precautions"<br>field.<br>Wiring precaution:<br>*5 Grounding and power cables should be positioned<br>Special function 24+ to exit the unit from above as shown in the figure.<br>block<br>5V0V 24V 24- Grounding and<br>power cables<br>*2,*3<br>Sink and<br>Input extension S/S<br>source block<br>input<br>type 5V0V 24V<br>Output extension<br>block<br>5V0V 24V<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals (in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system). 

   - Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension power supply units or earlier in extension power supply units than the main unit. 

As for the details, see "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety Precautions" field. 

- *2 Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit to the S/S terminal of the input extension block. 

- *3[In the case of the sink input type, the S/S terminal is used as the 24+ terminal.] 

- *4 Some special function units/blocks, special adapters do not have a power supply terminal. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

- *5 Some special function blocks do not have the power supply terminals. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the extension power supply unit or earlier than the extension power supply unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

- *6 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output  terminal side. For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

**130** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.4 Examples of External Wiring [AC Power Supply Type]_ 

**1** 

**2 3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8** 

**9** 

**10** 

## **9.4.5 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit (source input [+common])** 

This example shows a source input wiring (+common), including the extension power supply unit. 

**==> picture [483 x 537] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type<br>AC power supply of<br>*3<br>100 to 240V<br>Special adapter 24+<br>5V 0V 24V<br>24-<br>Breaker<br>Class D<br>Main unit *1 grounding Power supply ON<br>L<br>PL<br>N MC<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S<br>*5 MC<br>source 0V Emergency<br>input 24V *5 stop<br>type 24V DC<br>service<br>*2<br>Input extension S/S power MC MC<br>block supply<br>5V 0V 24V output<br>DC<br>*3<br>power<br>Special function 24+ supply<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V 24-<br>DC AC<br>Extension power supply unit *1<br>Power supply for loads to<br>L<br>be connected to PLC<br>output terminals<br>N<br>As for the details of emergency stop<br>5V 0V 24V<br>operation, see "DESIGN PRECAUTIONS"<br>at "Safety Precautions" field.<br>Wiring precaution:<br>*2 Grounding and power cables should be positioned<br>Sink and Input extension S/S to exit the unit from above as shown in the figure.<br>source block<br>input 5V 0V 24V Grounding and<br>type power cables<br>*4<br>Special function 24+<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V 24-<br>Output extension<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V<br>When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

- *1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals (in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system). Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension power supply units or earlier in extension power supply units than the main unit. As for the details, see "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety Precautions" field. 

   - *4 Some special function blocks do not have the power supply terminals. 

      - When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the extension power supply unit or earlier than the extension power supply unit. 

      - When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

- *2 Connect the 0V terminal of the main unit to the S/S terminal of the input extension block. 

- *3 Some special function units/blocks, special adapters do not have a power supply terminal. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. 

- *5 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. 

   - For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

**131** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.5 Examples of External Wiring [DC Power Supply Type]_ 

## **9.5 Examples of External Wiring [DC Power Supply Type]** 

## **9.5.1 Example of sink input [-common] wiring** 

An example of sink input [-common] wiring is given below. When connecting input/output powered extension units/blocks, carefully check the signal names on the terminal block because the sink and source input type units/blocks and the sink input type units/blocks vary in signal names on the terminal block. 

**==> picture [490 x 527] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type<br>24V DC<br>*1,*5<br>Special 24+<br>5V 0V 24V<br>adapter Circuit protector<br>24-<br>Main unit *1 Power supply ON<br>Class D<br>grounding<br>PL<br>MC<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S MC<br>source Emergency<br>stop<br>input<br>type<br>*3,*4<br>Input extension S/S MC MC<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V<br>*1,*5<br>Special function 24+<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V 24-<br>Power supply for loads to<br>Input/output powered extension unit *1 be connected to PLC<br>output terminals<br>As for the details of<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S emergency stop<br>source 0V operation, see "DESIGN<br>input 24V *2 PRECAUTIONS" at"<br>type (A) (B) (C) (D) Safety Precautions" field.<br>*3,*4<br>Input extension S/S<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V<br>*1,*5 Sink input type<br>Special function 24+<br>block<br>*6<br>5V 0V 24V 24- COM<br>24+<br>(B) (C)<br>Output extension<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Connect DC power to [+] and [-] terminals. The same power source for the main unit, extension units, special function unit/blocks and special adapters is preferable. When using the different power source from the main unit, turn ON the peripheral devices' power simultaneously, or earlier than the main unit's. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

   - *3 24V DC [+] supplies power to the [S/S] terminal at the input extension block. 

   - *4 In the case of the sink input type, the [S/S] terminal is used as the [24+] terminal. 

   - *5 Some special function units/blocks, special adapters do not have a power supply terminal. 

   - *6 Do not connect with [24+] and [ · ] terminal. 

- *2 Do not connect with [0V] and [24V] terminals. 

**132** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures _9.5 Examples of External Wiring [DC Power Supply Type]_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**6 7** 

**9** 

## **9.5.2 Example of source input [+common] wiring** 

An example of source input [+common] wiring is shown below. 

**==> picture [466 x 534] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type<br>24V DC<br>*1, *4<br>Special adapter 24+<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Circuit protector<br>24-<br>Main unit *1 Power supply ON<br>Class D<br>grounding<br>PL<br>MC<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S MC<br>source Emergency<br>input stop<br>type<br>*3<br>Input extension S/S MC MC<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V<br>*1, *4<br>Special function 24+<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V 24-<br>Input/output powered extension unit *1 Power supply for loads to<br>be connected to PLC<br>output terminals<br>As for the details of<br>Sink and 5V 0V 24V S/S emergency stop<br>source 0V operation, see "DESIGN<br>*2<br>input 24V PRECAUTIONS" at<br>type "Safety Precautions" field.<br>*3<br>Input extension S/S<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V<br>*1, *4<br>Special function 24+<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V 24-<br>Output extension<br>block<br>5V 0V 24V<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Connect DC power to [+] and [-] terminals. The same power source for the main unit, extension units, special function unit/blocks and special adapters is preferable. When using the different power source from the main unit, turn ON the peripheral devices' power simultaneously, or earlier than the main unit's. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special extension equipment) at the same time. 

- *2 Do not connect with [0V] and [24V] terminals. 

- *3 24V DC [-] supplies power to the [S/S] terminal at the input extension block. 

- *4 Some special function units/blocks, special adapters do not have a power supply terminal. 

**5** 

**8** 

**10** 

**133** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures 

## **10. Input Wiring Procedures** 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

- 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. 

- Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors. Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure. 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

- Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

**134** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6 7 8 9 10** 

|**WIRING PRECAUTIONS**|**WIRING PRECAUTIONS**|||
|---|---|---|---|
|•|Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service||power supply) on the main unit or extension units.|
||Doing so may cause damage to the product.|||
|•|Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100<br>wire 2 mm2or thicker.|or less) to the|grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a|
|•<br>•|Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to section 9.3).<br>Do not wire vacant terminals externally.<br>Doing so may damage the product.<br>Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.|||
||If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.|||
|•|Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.<br>If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.|||
|•<br>•|When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.<br>Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>Make sure to properly wire the FX3GSeries main unit and FX2N/FX3USeries extension equipment in accordance with the following<br>precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.|||
||-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.|||
|•|-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.|||
||Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>-<br>Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.<br>-<br>Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.|||
||-<br>Do not connect more than the specified number of|wires or electric|wires of unspecified size.|
|•|-<br>Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.<br>Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions.|||
||Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.|||



**135** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.1 Before Starting Input Wiring_ 

## **10.1 Before Starting Input Wiring** 

## **10.1.1 Sink and source input** 

The input terminals (X) of the main unit are common to sink/source input of 24V DC internal power. FX2N Series input/output powered extension units/blocks have input terminals common to sink/source input or only for sink input. 

## **1. Differences between the sink input circuit and the source input circuit** 

- Sink input [-common] Sink input means a DC input signal with current-flow from the input (X) terminal. 

   - When a sensor with a transistor output is connected, NPN open collector transistor output can be used. 

- Source input [+common] Source input means a DC input signal with current-flow into the input (X) terminal. 

   - When a sensor with a transistor output is connected, PNP open collector transistor output can be used. 

**==> picture [135 x 110] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
L<br>N<br>24V<br>0V<br>S/S<br>X<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [135 x 110] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
L<br>N<br>24V<br>0V<br>S/S<br>X<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Method of switching between sink/source input** 

- To switch the input type to sink or source input, wire the S/S terminal to the 0V or 24V ( or ) terminal. 

- In the case of AC power supply type 

   - Sink input: [24V] terminal and [S/S] terminal are connected. 

   - Source input: [0V] terminal and [S/S] terminal are connected. 

→ **Refer to Subsection 10.2.3 and Subsection 10.2.4 for wiring examples.** 

- In the case of DC power supply type 

   - Sink input: [ ] terminal and [S/S] terminal are connected. 

   - Source input: [ ] terminal and [S/S] terminal are connected. 

      - → **Refer to Subsection 10.2.5 and Subsection 10.2.6 for wiring examples.** 

**136** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.1 Before Starting Input Wiring_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

**10** 

## **3. Instructions for using** 

- Mixed use of sink/source inputs It is possible to set all input terminals (X) of the main unit to either sink input or source input mode. However, a mixture of sink and source input terminals cannot be set within a single unit. 

   - It is possible to set sink or source input mode for main units and powered input/output extension units. 

   - The input mode of input/output extension blocks is determined based upon the selection of the sink or source input mode of the main unit or powered extension unit (power source). 

- Cautions when selecting a model 

   - Sink/source input type and sink input type only unit models are both available. Select the proper type for the application. 

## **Differences from FX1N PLCs in input specifications (reference)** 

Sink input type only FX1N PLCs (manuals in Japanese are supplied) and sink/source input type FX1N PLCs (manuals in English are supplied) have different model names. 

- For sink input type only FX1N PLCs, the S/S terminal and the 24V terminal are connected internally, unlike in FX3G PLCs. 

   - When replacing a sink input type only FX1N PLC with a FX3G PLC, short-circuit the [S/S] and [24V] terminals, and use the [0V] terminal of the FX3G as the [COM] terminal of the FX1N for wiring. 

- Sink/source input type FX1N PLCs are configured in sink or source input mode using external wiring in the same way as FX3G PLCs. 

**137** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

## **10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)** 

This section explains handling of 24V DC inputs in the main unit, precautions on input device connection, and external wiring examples. 

→ **For the input specifications, refer to Section 4.3** 

## **10.2.1 Handling of 24V DC input** 

## **1. Input terminals** 

**==> picture [456 x 307] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fuse<br>L<br>Sink input N<br>When a no-voltage contact or NPN open collector transistor 100 to 240V AC<br>S/S<br>output is connected between an input (X) terminal and the 0V<br>0V<br>terminal and the circuit is closed, the input (X) turns on.<br>24V<br>Then, the input display LED lights.<br>* X000<br>X001<br>X007<br>* Input impedance<br>Source input Fuse<br>When a no-voltage contact or PNP open collector transistor L<br>output is connected between an input (X) terminal and the 24V N<br>terminal and the circuit is closed, the input (X) turns on. 100 to 240V AC<br>S/S<br>Then, the input display LED lights.<br>0V<br>24V<br>* X000<br>X001<br>X007<br>* Input impedance<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **RUN terminal setting** 

X000 to X017 (up to the largest input number in the main unit[*1] ) of the main unit can be used as RUN input terminals by setting parameters. 

*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3G-14M main unit, and X000 to X015 in the FX3G-24M main unit 

→ **For the functions of the RUN terminals, refer to Subsection 14.2.1.** 

## **2. Input circuit** 

## **Function of input circuit** 

The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler, and the second circuit is provided with a C-R filter. 

The C-R filter is designed to prevent malfunctions caused by chattering of the input contact and noise from the input line. 

There is a delay of approx. 10ms in response to input-switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON. 

## **Change of filter time** 

X000 to X007 have digital filters, and the filter time can be changed in increments of 1ms in the range from 0 to 15ms through special data register (D8020). When 0 is specified for the time, the input filter values are set as shown in the following table. 

|**Input number**|**Input filter value when 0 is specified**|
|---|---|
|X000, X001, X003, X004|10 s|
|X002, X005, X006, X007|50 s|



**138** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 

10 Input Wiring Procedures 

User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

_10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8** 

**9 10** 

## **3. Input sensitivity** 

The PLC input current and input sensitivity are shown in the following table. 

When there is a series diode or resistance at the input contact or there is a parallel resistance or leakage current at the input contact, wire the terminals in accordance with the following table. 

→ **For the instructions for connecting input devices, refer to Subsection 10.2.2.** 

|**Item**||**X000 to X007**|**X010 to max input number of the main unit**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Input voltage||AC power supply type: 24V DC 10% DC power supply type: 20.4V to 28.8V DC||
|Input current||7mA|5mA|
|Input sensitivity current|ON|4.5mA or more|3.5mA or more|
||OFF|1.5mA or less|1.5mA or less|



## **10.2.2 Instructions for connecting input devices** 

## **1. In the case of no-voltage contact** 

The input current of this PLC is 7mA/24V DC. (5mA/24V DC in X010 or later) 

Use input devices applicable to this minute current. 

If no-voltage contacts (switches) for large current are used, contact failure may occur. 

|**Input number**|**Input current**|
|---|---|
|X000 to X007|7mA/24V DC|
|X010 or more|5mA/24V DC|



## **<Example> Products of OMRON** 

|**Type**|**Model name**||**Type**|**Model name**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Microswitch|Models Z, V and D2RV||Operation switch|Model A3P|
|Proximity switch|Model TL||Photoelectric switch|Model E3S|



## **2. In the case of input device with built-in series diode** 

The voltage drop of the series diode should be approx. 4V or less. 

When lead switches with a series LED are used, up to two switches can be connected in series. Also make sure that the input current is over the input-sensing level while the switches are ON. 

**==> picture [342 x 127] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
24V 0V<br>S/S S/S<br>LED LED<br>PLC PLC<br>(sink input) X (source input) X<br>0V 24V<br>*1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 In the case of a type only for sink input, connect the device to the COM terminal. 

**139** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

## **3. In the case of input device with built-in parallel resistance** 

Use a device having a parallel resistance, Rp, of 15k or more. 

If the resistance is less than 15k , connect a bleeder resistance, Rb, obtained by the following formula as shown in the following figure. 

**==> picture [387 x 171] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4Rp<br>Rb ( k   )<br>15-Rp<br>24V 0V<br>Bleeder Bleeder<br>resistance resistance<br>S/S S/S<br>Rb Rb<br>PLC PLC<br>(sink input) X (source input) X<br>15k or 15k or<br>more Rp more Rp<br>0V 24V<br>*1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 In the case of a type only for sink input, connect the device to the COM terminal. 

## **4. In the case of 2-wire proximity switch** 

Use a two-wire proximity switch whose leakage current, I is 1.5 mA or less when the switch is off. When the current is 1.5mA or more, connect a bleeder resistance, Rb, determined by the following formula as shown in the following figure. 

**==> picture [387 x 171] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
6<br>Rb<br>I -1.5 [(k   )]<br>Bleeder Bleeder<br>24V 0V<br>resistance resistance<br>2-wire 2-wire<br>S/S S/S<br>Rb proximity Rb proximity<br>PLC I sensor PLC I sensor<br>(sink input) X (source input) X<br>0V 24V<br>*1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 In the case of a type only for sink input, connect the device to the COM terminal. 

**140** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6 7 8** 

**9** 

**10** 

**10** 

## **10.2.3 Examples of external wiring (sink input) [AC Power Supply Type]** 

**==> picture [423 x 564] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type<br>Main unit Fuse *1<br>L<br>N<br>Class D<br>*3 grounding<br>S/S<br>*4 0V<br>0V<br>*4 24V<br>24V<br>Three-<br>wire<br>X0<br>sensor<br>X1<br>Input Input<br>5V 0V 24V impedance terminal<br>Input extension block<br>S/S<br>Two-wire<br>X0 proximity<br>Sink and source *2 sensor<br>input type X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input / output powered extension unit<br>L<br>N<br>*3<br>S/S<br>0V<br>24V<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input extension block 0V 24V<br>S/S<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures." 

- *2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two-wire proximity switch, a bleeder resistance may be required. 

- *3 In the case of sink input wiring,short-circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S/S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit. 

- *4 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

**141** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

**==> picture [422 x 566] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Use of input/output extension units/blocks of sink input type<br>Main unit Fuse *1<br>L<br>N<br>Class D<br>*3 grounding<br>S/S<br>Sink and source 0V *4 0V<br>input type 24V *4 24V<br>Three-<br>wire<br>X0<br>sensor<br>X1<br>Input Input<br>5V 0V 24V impedance terminal<br>Input extension block<br>24+<br>Two-wire<br>X0 proximity<br>*2<br>sensor<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input / output powered extension unit<br>L<br>N<br>Sink input type<br>COM<br>24+<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input extension block 0V 24V<br>24+<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures." 

- *2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two-wire proximity switch, a bleeder resistance may be required. 

- *3 In the case of sink input wiring, short-circuit the S/S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit. 

- *4 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

**142** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5 6 7** 

**10** 

## **10.2.4 Examples of external wiring (source input) [AC Power Supply Type]** 

**==> picture [420 x 564] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type<br>Main unit Fuse *1<br>L<br>N<br>Class D<br>grounding<br>*3<br>S/S<br>*4 0V Three-<br>0V<br>*4 24V wire<br>24V sensor<br>X0<br>X1<br>Input Input<br>5V 0V 24V impedance terminal<br>Two-wire<br>Input extension block<br>proximity<br>S/S<br>sensor<br>X0<br>*2<br>Sink and source<br>X1<br>input type 5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input / output powered extension unit<br>L<br>N<br>*3<br>S/S<br>0V<br>24V<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input extension block 0V 24V<br>S/S<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**8** 

**9** 

- *1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures." 

- *2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two-wire proximity switch, a bleeder resistance may be required. 

- *3 In the case of source input wiring, short-circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S/S terminal and the 0V terminal of the main unit 

- *4 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

**10** 

**143** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

## **10.2.5 Examples of external wiring (sink input) [DC Power Supply Type]** 

**==> picture [418 x 565] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type<br>Main unit Fuse *1<br>Class D<br>grounding<br>*3<br>S/S<br>Three-<br>wire<br>X0<br>sensor<br>X1<br>Input Input<br>5V 0V 24V impedance terminal<br>Input extension block<br>S/S<br>Two-wire<br>X0 proximity<br>Sink and source *2 sensor<br>input type X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>*3<br>S/S<br>0V<br>*4<br>24V<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input extension block<br>S/S<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures." 

- *2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two-wire proximity switch, a bleeder resistance may be required. 

- *3 In the case of sink input wiring, short-circuit the terminals of the input/output powered extension units as well as the S/S terminal and the terminal of  the main unit. 

- *4 Do not connect with 0V and 24V terminals. 

**144** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**7** 

**10** 

**==> picture [416 x 548] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Main unit Fuse *1<br>Class D<br>grounding<br>*3<br>S/S<br>Sink and source<br>input type<br>Three-<br>wire<br>X0<br>sensor<br>X1<br>Input Input<br>5V 0V 24V impedance terminal<br>Input extension block<br>24+<br>Two-wire<br>X0 proximity<br>*2 sensor<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>Sink input type<br>COM<br>24+ *4<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input extension block<br>24+<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**8** 

**9** 

- *1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures." 

- *2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two-wire proximity switch, a bleeder resistance may be required. 

- *3 In the case of sink input wiring, short-circuit the S/S terminal and the terminal of  the main unit. 

**10** 

- *4 Do not connect 24+ terminal. 

**145** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.2 24V DC input (Sink and source input type)_ 

## **10.2.6 Examples of external wiring (source input) [DC Power Supply Type]** 

**==> picture [422 x 565] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink and source input type<br>Main unit Fuse *1<br>Class D<br>*3 grounding<br>S/S<br>Three-<br>wire<br>sensor<br>X0<br>X1<br>Input Input<br>5V 0V 24V impedance terminal<br>Two-wire<br>Input extension block proximity<br>S/S sensor<br>X0<br>*2<br>Sink and source<br>X1<br>input type 5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>*3<br>S/S<br>0V<br>*4<br>24V<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input extension block<br>S/S<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures." 

- *2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two-wire proximity switch, a bleeder resistance may be required. 

- *3 In the case of source input wiring, short-circuit the terminals of the input/output powered extension units as well as the S/S terminal and the     terminal of the main unit. 

- *4 Do not connect with 0V and 24V terminals. 

**146** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.3 100V AC Input_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3 4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

## **10.3 100V AC Input** 

## **10.3.1 Input specifications** 

Main units of a 100V AC input type are not available. Select the input for the input/output powered extension units/blocks. 

→ **For the specifications on input/output powered extension units, refer to Chapter 15.** → **For the specifications on input/output extension blocks, refer to Chapter 16.** 

## **10.3.2 Handling of 100V AC Input** 

## **1. Input terminal** 

When voltage of 100 to 120V AC is applied between the input terminal and COM terminal, the input terminal is turned on. The input display LED lights. 

Do not connect the COM terminal of an AC input type input/ output powered extension unit/block with the COM terminal of a DC system. 

## **2. Input circuit** 

The primary input circuit and the secondary input circuit are insulated with a photocoupler. 

There is a delay of approx. 25 to 30ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON. 

**==> picture [167 x 151] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fuse<br>L<br>N<br>100 to 240V AC<br>COM 100 to<br>120V AC<br>* Fuse<br>X000<br>X001<br>X007<br>* Input impedance<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **3. Input sensitivity** 

The input current and input sensitivity of these PLCs are shown in the following table. 

|**Item**||**Specifications**|**Specifications**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Input voltage||100 to 120V AC +10%, -15% 50/60Hz||
|Input current||6.2 mA/110V 60Hz<br>4.7 mA/100V 50Hz|Percentage of simultaneous power-on: 70% or<br>less|
|Input sensitivity|ON|3.8mA/80V AC||
||OFF|1.7mA/30V AC||



**147** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.3 100V AC Input_ 

## **10.3.3 Examples of external wiring (100V AC input)** 

**==> picture [460 x 558] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Main unit Fuse *1<br>L<br>N<br>Class D<br>grounding<br>S/S<br>*4 0V<br>0V<br>*4 24V<br>24V<br>24V DC X000<br>input type<br>(Sink wiring) X001<br>Three-<br>Input Input wire<br>5V 0V 24V impedance terminal sensor<br>Input extension block<br>S/S<br>X0<br>*2<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V Two-wire<br>Input proximity<br>terminal sensor<br>Input / output powered extension unit<br>FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL<br>L<br>N<br>COM<br>COM<br>100V AC X0<br>input type<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Input extension block<br>FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL COM<br>MC*3<br>X0<br>X1<br>5V 0V 24V<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures." 

- *2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two-wire proximity switch, a bleeder resistance may be required 

- *3 Do not take input signals from loads generating surge. 

- *4 The "24V" and "0V" terminals are located on the output terminal side. For details on the terminal layout, refer to Section 4.7. 

**148** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.4 Input Interruption (I00_ � _to I50_ � _)_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

## **10.4 Input Interruption (I00** � **to I50** � **)** 

The PLC (main unit) is provided with an input interruption function and has six interruption input points. Make sure that the ON duration or OFF duration of interruption input signals is 10 s or more (X000, X001, X003 and X004) or 50 s or more (X002 and X005). 

→ **For details on programming, refer to the programming manual.** 

## **10.4.1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers (input signal ON/OFF duration)** 

|**Input**<br>**number**|**Interrupt pointer**|**Interrupt pointer**|**Interrupt   disable control**|**ON or OFF duration of input signal**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||**Interruption on**<br>**leading edge**|**Interruption on**<br>**trailing edge**|||
|X000|I001|I000|M8050|10 s or more|
|X001|I101|I100|M8051||
|X002|I201|I200|M8052|50 s or more|
|X003|I301|I300|M8053|10 s or more|
|X004|I401|I400|M8054||
|X005|I501|I500|M8055|50 s or more|



## **10.4.2 Cautions for input interruption** 

## **1. Non-overlap of input numbers** 

The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, SPD, ZRN and DSZR instructions and general-purpose inputs. Take care not to overlap the input numbers. 

## **Example:** 

When the input interrupt pointer "I001" is used, X000 is occupied. Therefore, it is impossible to use C235, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254, input interruption pointer I000, pulse catch contact M8170 and SPD, ZRN and DSZR instructions at the same time. 

## **2. Cautions in wiring** 

It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables for connection cables. 

**149** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.4 Input Interruption (I00_ � _to I50_ � _)_ 

## **10.4.3 Examples of external wiring** 

It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables for connection cables. Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side. 

## **1. Examples of input interruption (I000 or I001) wiring using X000** 

When another input terminal is used, wire it according to the following diagrams. 

- 1) When 24V DC service power supply is used 

**==> picture [436 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink wiring Source wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L L<br>Class D grounding * Class D grounding *<br>N N<br>S/S S/S<br>0V 0V<br>24V 24V<br>Three-<br>X000 X000<br>wire<br>Three-wire<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. 

- 2) When 24V DC external power supply is used 

**==> picture [436 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink wiring Source wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L L<br>Class D grounding * Class D grounding *<br>N N<br>24V DC 24V DC<br>S/S S/S<br>0V 0V<br>24V 24V<br>Three-<br>X000 X000<br>wire<br>Three-wire<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- The grounding resistance should be 100 or less. 

**150** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.5 Pulse Catch (M8170 to M8175)_ 

**1** 

**2** 

**3** 

**4** 

**5 6** 

**7 8 9 10** 

## **10.5 Pulse Catch (M8170 to M8175)** 

The PLC (main unit) is provided with a pulse catch function and has 6 pulse catch input points. 

→ **For details on programming, refer to the programming manual.** 

## **10.5.1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers (ON duration of input signals)** 

|**Input number**|**Contact on sequence program**|**ON duration of input signal**|
|---|---|---|
|X000|M8170|10 s or more|
|X001|M8171||
|X002|M8172|50 s or more|
|X003|M8173|10 s or more|
|X004|M8174||
|X005|M8175|50 s or more|



## **10.5.2 Cautions for pulse catch** 

## **1. Non-overlap of input numbers** 

The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, speed detection (SPD) instructions and general-purpose input. 

Take care not to overlap the input numbers. 

## **Example:** 

When the C235, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254 is used, X000 is occupied.  Therefore, it is impossible to use pulse catch input contact M8170. 

## **2. Cautions in wiring** 

It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables for connection cables. 

**151** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures _10.5 Pulse Catch (M8170 to M8175)_ 

## **10.5.3 Examples of external wiring** 

It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables for connection cables. Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side. 

## **1. Examples of pulse catch (M8170) wiring using X000** 

When another input terminal is used, wire it according to the following diagrams. 

- 1) When 24V DC service power supply is used 

**==> picture [436 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink wiring Source wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L L<br>Class D grounding * Class D grounding *<br>N N<br>S/S S/S<br>0V 0V<br>24V 24V<br>Three-<br>X000 X000<br>wire<br>Three-wire<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. 

- 2) When 24V DC external power supply is used 

**==> picture [436 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink wiring Source wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L L<br>Class D grounding * Class D grounding *<br>N N<br>24V DC 24V DC<br>S/S S/S<br>0V 0V<br>24V 24V<br>Three-<br>X000 X000<br>wire<br>Three-wire<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- The grounding resistance should be 100 or less. 

**152** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures 

_10.6 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function (Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later)_ 

**1** 

**2 3** 

**4** 

**5** 

**6** 

**7** 

**9 10** 

## **10.6 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function (Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later)** 

Four input points in the PLC (main unit) can be used for the pulse width/period measurement function which enables measurement of the pulse width or pulse frequency in units of 10 s. 

→ **For details on programming, refer to the programming manual.** 

## **10.6.1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers** 

|**Input number**|**Pulse width/**<br>**Pulse period**<br>**measurement flag**|**Pulse period**<br>**measurement**<br>**mode**|**Ring counter value for**<br>**rising edge*1**<br>**[in units of 1/6 s]**|**Ring counter value for**<br>**falling edge*1**<br>**[in units of 1/6 s]**|**Pulse width/**<br>**Pulse period*1*2**<br>**(in units of 10 s)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|X000|M8076|M8080|D8075, D8074|D8077, D8076|D8079, D8078|
|X001|M8077|M8081|D8081, D8080|D8083, D8082|D8085, D8084|
|X003|M8078|M8082|D8087, D8086|D8089, D8088|D8091, D8090|
|X004|M8079|M8083|D8093, D8092|D8095, D8094|D8097, D8096|



- *1. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN. 

- *2. The pulse width which can be measured is a minimum of 10 s and a maximum of 100s. The pulse period which can be measured is a minimum of 20 s. 

## **10.6.2 Cautions for pulse width/period measurement function** 

## **1. Non-overlap of input numbers** 

The input terminals X000, X001, X003 and X004 can be used for high-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, speed detection (SPD) instructions and general-purpose input. 

Take care not to overlap the input numbers. 

However, overlap of input numbers is allowed for input interruptions. 

## **Example:** 

When the pulse width/period measurement flag M8076 is used, X000 is occupied. Therefore, it is impossible to use C235, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254, pulse catch contact M8170, SPD, ZRN and DSZR instructions at the same time. 

## **2. When the pulse width/period measurement function and high-speed counters are used together, the overall frequency of high-speed counters is affected.** 

→ **For more details, refer to Section 11.7.** 

## **3. Make sure that the total frequency of four input channels is 50kHz or less when using the pulse width/period measurement function.** 

→ **For details on programming, refer to the programming manual.** 

## **4. Cautions in wiring** 

**8** 

It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables for connection cables. 

**153** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

10 Input Wiring Procedures 

_10.6 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function (Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later)_ 

## **10.6.3 Examples of external wiring** 

It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables for connection cables. Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side. 

## **1. Examples of pulse width measurement wiring using X000** 

When another input terminal is used, wire it according to the following diagrams. 

- 1) When 24V DC service power supply is used 

**==> picture [436 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink wiring Source wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L L<br>Class D grounding * Class D grounding *<br>N N<br>S/S S/S<br>0V 0V<br>24V 24V<br>Three-<br>X000 X000<br>wire<br>Three-wire<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. 

- 2) When 24V DC external power supply is used 

**==> picture [436 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink wiring Source wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L L<br>Class D grounding * Class D grounding *<br>N N<br>24V DC 24V DC<br>S/S S/S<br>0V 0V<br>24V 24V<br>Three-<br>X000 X000<br>wire<br>Three-wire<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- The grounding resistance should be 100 or less. 

**154** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters 

_11.1 Outline_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**19** 

## **11. Use of High-speed Counters** 

## **11.1 Outline** 

High-speed counters use input terminals X000 to X007 of the main unit for inputs, and offer counting up to 60kHz (1 phase). 

Input terminals not used for high-speed counters are available for general-purpose inputs. 

→ **For the input specifications for X000 to X007 of the main unit, refer to Section 10.2.** 

## **11.2 Types of Counting and Operations** 

The main unit has built-in 32-bit high speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count input, 1-phase 2-count input and 2-phase 2-count input). 

For some high-speed counters, external reset input terminals or external start input terminals (start of counting) can be selected. 

**14** 

## **11.2.1 Types and input signal forms** 

The types and input signals (waveforms) of high-speed counters (1-phase 1-count input, 1-phase 2-count input and 2-phase 2-count input) are shown below. 

|**Counter type**||**Input signal form**|**Input signal form**|**Input signal form**|**Input signal form**|**Input signal form**|**Input signal form**|**Input signal form**|**Input signal form**|**Counting direction**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|1-phase 1-count<br>input|UP/<br>DOWN|||||||||Down-count or up-count is specified by turning on or off<br>M8235 to M8245.<br>ON:Down-counting<br>OFF:Up-counting|
|1-phase 2-count<br>input|UP<br>DOWN|+1<br>+1<br>-1<br>-1||||||||Up-count or down-count<br>The counting direction can be checked with M8246 to M8250.<br>ON:Down-counting<br>OFF:Up-counting|
||||||||||||
|2-phase 2-count<br>input|Phase A<br>Phase B<br>+1<br>+1<br>Up-counting<br>-1<br>-1<br>Down-counting|||||||||Automatic up-count or down-count according to change in<br>input status of phase A/B<br>The counting direction can be checked with M8251 to M8255.<br>ON:Down-counting<br>OFF:Up-counting|
||||+1||+1||-1||||
||||||||||||



**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

## **11.2.2 High-speed counter device notations** 

The input terminal assignments for FX3G PLC high-speed counters can be switched when used in combination with a special auxiliary relay. This section classifies these high-speed counter devices under the following notations. Note that an "(OP)" input cannot be programmed. 

|**Standard Device Numbers**|**Switched Device Numbers**|
|---|---|
|C248|C248(OP)|
|C253|C253(OP)|
|C254|C254(OP)|



## **18** 

**19** 

## **11.2.3 Cautions in connecting mating device** 

Encoders with the output forms in the following table can be connected to the input terminals. (The encoders may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility. Check the specifications in advance.) Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high-speed counter input terminals. 

**20** 

|**Terminals for connecting**|**Output form that can be directly connected**|
|---|---|
|Input terminals of main unit|Open collector transistor output form (applicable to 24V DC)|



**155** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.3 List of Device Numbers and Functions_ 

## **11.3 List of Device Numbers and Functions** 

→ **For details on the counter number (OP), refer to Subsection 11.2.2** 

|**Counter type**|**Device No.**<br>**(counter)**|**Response**<br>**Frequency*1**<br>**(kHz)**|**Data length**|**External reset input**<br>**terminal**|**External start**<br>**input terminal**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|1-phase 1-count input|C235|60|32-bit<br>bi-directional counter|None|None|
||C236|||||
||C237|10||||
||C238|60||||
||C239|||||
||C240|10||||
||C241|60||Provided|None|
||C242|10||||
||C243|||||
||C244|||Provided|Provided|
||C245|||||
|1-phase 2-count input|C246<br>C248(OP)|60|32-bit<br>bi-directional counter|None|None|
||C247<br>C248|10||Provided|None|
||C249<br>C250|||Provided|Provided|
|2-phase 2-count input|C251<br>C253(OP)|30|32-bit<br>bi-directional counter|None|None|
||C254(OP)|5||||
||C252<br>C253|||Provided|None|
||C254<br>C255|||Provided|Provided|



*1. When using multiple high-speed counters, make sure that the sum of used frequency does not exceed the overall frequency. 

→ **For details on the overall frequency, refer to Section 11.7.** 

**156** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers_ 

**11 12 13** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **11.4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers** 

The high-speed counter numbers are allocated to the input terminals X000 to X007 as shown in the following table. The input terminals not allocated for high-speed counters can be used as general input terminals. 

## **11.4.1 Allocation table** 

U: Up-count input 

D: Down-count input A: A-phase input B: B-phase input S: External start input 

R: External reset input 

|**Counter type**|**Counter No.**|**Input allocation**|**Input allocation**|**Input allocation**|**Input allocation**|**Input allocation**|**Input allocation**|**Input allocation**|**Input allocation**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**X000**|**X001**|**X002**|**X003**|**X004**|**X005**|**X006**|**X007**|
|1-phase 1-count<br>input|C235|U/D||||||||
||C236||U/D|||||||
||C237|||U/D||||||
||C238||||U/D|||||
||C239|||||U/D||||
||C240||||||U/D|||
||C241|U/D|R|||||||
||C242|||U/D|R|||||
||C243|||||U/D|R|||
||C244|U/D|R|||||S||
||C245|||U/D|R||||S|
|1-phase 2-count<br>input|C246|U|D|||||||
||C247|U|D|R||||||
||C248||||U|D|R|||
||C248(OP)*1||||U|D||||
||C249|U|D|R||||S||
||C250||||U|D|R||S|
|2-phase 2-count<br>input|C251|A|B|||||||
||C252|A|B|R||||||
||C253||||A|B|R|||
||C253(OP)*1||||A|B||||
||C254|A|B|R||||S||
||C254(OP)*1|||||||A|B|
||C255||||A|B|R||S|



## **14** 

## **16** 

*1. When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program, the input terminals and their associated functions are switched. 

→ **For the function switching method, refer to Subsection 11.9.2.** 

## **11.4.2 Restriction of redundant use of input numbers** 

The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high-speed counters, input interruption, pulse catch, SPD, ZRN and DSZR instructions and general-purpose inputs. Take care not to overlap the input numbers. For example, when C251 is used, X000 and X001 are occupied. Therefore, it is impossible to use C235, C236, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254, input interruption pointers I000 and I101, pulse catch contacts M8170 and M8171 and SPD, ZRN and DSZR instructions at the same time. 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**157** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.5 Handling of High-speed Counters_ 

## **11.5 Handling of High-speed Counters** 

## **11.5.1 1-phase 1-count input** 

## **Examples of program** 

- 1) For C235 

**==> picture [162 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
X010<br>Down-count/<br>M823 5<br>up-count<br>X011<br>RS T C235 Reset<br>X012<br>C235 K-5<br>Count input<br>X000<br>Main unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- C235 counts the number of times the input terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON while X012 is on. 

- While X011 is on, the counter resets when RST instruction is executed. 

- The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down-count or up-count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245. 

## 2) For C244 

**==> picture [174 x 180] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
X010<br>Down-count/<br>M824 4<br>up-count<br>X011<br>RST C244 Reset<br>X012<br>C244 D0(D1)<br>The setting is (D1,D0).<br>Count input External reset External start<br>input input<br>X000 X001 X006<br>Main unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- C244 starts counting immediately when the input terminal X006 turns on while X012 is on. The count input terminal is X000. The setting for this example is the data of the indirectly designated data register (D1,D0). 

- C244 can be reset by X011 on the sequence. For C244, X001 is allocated as the external reset input. The counter resets immediately when X001 turns on. 

- The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down-count or up-count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245. 

## **Example of operation** 

The above counter C235 operates as shown below. 

**==> picture [287 x 202] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
X010 Up-count Down-count Up-count<br>X011 Reset input<br>X012 Start input<br>X000<br>Count<br>input 3 [4] [5] [4] 3<br>C235 2<br>Current 1 [2] 1<br>value 0 0 0<br>-1<br>-2 -3 -4 -4 [-3]<br>When output has<br>operated [-5]<br>-7 [-6]<br>-5 -6-7 -8<br>C235 output contact<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**158** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.5 Handling of High-speed Counters_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

C235 is set to the up-count or down-count mode through interruption by the count input X000. 

- When the current value increases from -6 to -5, the output contact is set, and when the value decreases from -5 to -6, it is reset. 

- The current value increases and decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact. However, when the counter’s value increments from 2,147,483,647, it changes to -2,147,483,648. In the same manner, when it decrements from -2,147,483,648, it changes to 2,147,483,647. (This type of counter is called a ring counter.) 

- When RST instruction is executed after the reset input X011 turns on, the current counter's value resets to 0, and the output contact is restored. 

- The current value, output contact operation and reset status of counters are backed up (kept) even if the power is turned off. 

## **11.5.2 1-phase 2-count input** 

These counters are 32-bit up-count/down-count binary counters. 

The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the abovementioned 1-phase 1-count input high-speed counters. 

## **14** 

## **Examples of program** 

- 1) For C246 

**==> picture [440 x 144] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
X011 • While X012 is on, C246 increments the value when the input<br>RS T C246 terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON and decrements the<br>value when the input terminal X001 switches from OFF to ON.<br>X012<br>C246 D2(D3) • The down-count/up-count operations of C246 to C250 can be<br>monitored through the ON/OFF operations of M8246 to M8250.<br>The setting is (D3,D2)<br>ON: Down-counting<br>Up-counting Down-counting OFF: Up-counting<br>input input<br>X000 X001<br>Main unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - The down-count/up-count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON/OFF operations of M8246 to M8250. 

- 2) For C249 

**==> picture [170 x 143] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
X011<br>RST C249<br>X012<br>C249 K1234<br>Down-counting External start<br>input input<br>Up-counting External<br>input reset input<br>X000 X001 X002 X006<br>Main unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- While X012 is on, C249 starts counting immediately when the input terminal X006 turns on. The up-counting input terminal is X000, and the downcounting input terminal is X001. 

- C249 can be reset on the sequence by X011. For C249, X002 is allocated as reset input. When X002 turns on, C249 is immediately reset. 

- The down-count/up-count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON/OFF operations of M8246 to M8250. 

ON: Down-counting 

OFF: Up-counting 

**17** 

## **18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**159** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.5 Handling of High-speed Counters_ 

## **11.5.3 2-phase 2-count input** 

These counters are 32-bit up-count/down-count binary counters. 

The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the abovementioned 1-phase 1-count input high-speed counters. 

## **Examples of program** 

- 1) For C251 

||X011|X011|X011|X011|X011|||||~~RS~~T|~~RS~~T|||||C251|C251|C251|C251||||•|•|While X012 is on, C251 counts the operation of the input<br>terminals X000 (A-phase) and X001 (B-phase) through|While X012 is on, C251 counts the operation of the input<br>terminals X000 (A-phase) and X001 (B-phase) through|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||interruption.||
||X012||||||||~~C251~~||||K1234||||||||||•||While|X011 is turned on, the counter is reset when RST|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||instruction is executed.||
||C251||||||||~~Y002~~||||||||||||||•||When the current value exceeds the setting, Y002 turns on, and<br>when the current value becomes lower than the setting, Y002||
||M8251||||||||~~Y003~~||||||||||||||•||turns off.<br>Y003 turns on (down-count) or off (up-count) according to the||
||A-phase input|||||||||B-phase||||input|||||||||||counting direction.||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||X000||||||||X001|||||||||||||||||
|||||||Main unit|||||||||||||||||||||
|2)|For||C254||||||||||||||||||||||||
||X011|||||||||RST||||||C254|||||||||•|C254 starts counting immediately when the input terminal<br>X006 is turned on while X012 is on.|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||The count input terminals are X000 (A-phase) and X001|
||X012||||||||~~C254~~||||D0(D1)||||||||||||•|(B-phase).<br>C254 is reset by X011 on the sequence, and it is reset|
||C254||||||||~~Y004~~|||•<br>The setting is (D1,D0).||||||||||||||immediately when X002 is turned on.<br>When the current value exceeds the setting (D1,D0), Y004|
||M8254||||||||~~Y005~~|||||||||||||||||operates, and when the current value becomes lower than<br>the setting, Y004 turns off.|
|||||||B-phase input||||||||||•<br>External start input||||||||||Y005 turns on (down-count) or off (up-count) according to|
||A-phase input|||||||||External reset<br>input||||||||||||||||the counting direction.|
|||X000|||||||X001|||||X002|||||||X006||||||
|||||||||||Main|||unit||||||||||||||



- A 2-phase encoder generates A-phase output and B-phase output between which there is a 90 phase difference. The high-speed counter automatically counts up or down according to the output as shown below. 

**==> picture [174 x 48] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Phase A<br>+1 +1 -1 -1<br>Phase B<br>Up-counting Down-counting<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- The down-count/up-count operations of C251 to C255 can be monitored through the ON/OFF operations of M8251 to M8255. 

ON: Down-counting 

OFF: Up-counting 

**160** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value_ 

**11 12** 

**18 19 20** 

## **11.6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value** 

## **11.6.1 Timing of updating of current value** 

When pulses are input to an input terminal for a high-speed counter, the high-speed counter executes upcounting or down-counting. The current values of devices are updated when counting is input. 

**12** 

## **11.6.2 Comparison of current value** 

To compare and output the current value of a high-speed counter, the following two methods are available. 

## **1. Use of comparison instruction (CMP), band comparison instruction (ZCP) or contact comparison instruction** 

Use the comparison instruction (CMP), band comparison instruction (ZCP) or contact comparison instruction if the comparison result is necessary at counting. Use these instructions only when high-speed processing is not required because these instructions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC, and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained. Use the comparison instructions for high-speed counters (HSCS, HSCR and HSZ) described below if it is necessary to execute comparison and change the output contact (Y) at the same time when the current values of high-speed counters change. 

**13** 

## **14** 

## **2. Use of Comparison instruction for high-speed counters (HSCS/HSCR/HSZ instruction)** 

Comparison instructions for high-speed counters (HSCS, HSCR and HSZ instructions) perform comparison and output the comparison results with the relevant high-speed counting operation. These instructions have limitations on the number of simultaneously driven instructions as shown in the following table. 

**15** 

When the output relay (Y) has been designated for comparison results, the ON/OFF status of the output is affected directly until the END instruction output is refreshed. 

|,<br>affected directly until the END instruction output is refreshed.<br>When the PLC is a relay output type, a mechanical delay in operation (approx. 10ms) is caused.<br>Therefore, it is best to use a transistor output type PLC.<br>*1.<br>The overall frequency changes when the HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is used.<br>→**For details on the overall frequency, refer to Section 11.7.**<br>**Applied instruction**<br>**Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time**<br>HSCS*1<br>6 instructions<br>HSCR*1<br>HSZ*1|Input/Output<br>Powered<br>Extension Units||
|---|---|---|
||**16**||
||Input/Output<br>Extension<br>Blocks||



**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**161** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters 

_11.7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency_ 

## **11.7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency** 

## **1. Response Frequency and Overall Frequency** 

When any of the following functions/instructions is used, the overall frequency is restricted without regard to the operand of the instruction. 

Consider this restriction when examining the system or creating programs, and observe the specified overall frequency range. 

- When two or more high speed counters are used. 

- When the HSCS, HSCR, HSZ, PLSY, PLSR, DSZR, TBL, ZRN, PLSV, DRVI or DRVA instruction is used. 

- When the pulse width/cycle measurement function is used. 

|**Counter type**|**Counter type**|**Response**<br>**Frequency**|**Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction**|**Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ**<br>**instruction is not used**|**When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ**<br>**instruction is used**|
|1-phase 1-<br>count input|C235, C236, C238,<br>C239, C241|60kHz|200kHz<br>- (Number of positioned axes*1<br>+ Number of pulse width/cycle<br>measurement inputs) x 40kHz|60kHz<br>- (Number of positioned axes*1<br>x 5kHz) - (Number of pulse width/cycle<br>measurement inputs x 20kHz)|
||C237, C240, C242,<br>C243, C244, C245|10kHz|||
|1-phase 2-<br>count input|C246, C248(OP)|60kHz|||
||C247, C248, C249,<br>C250|10kHz|||
|2-phase 2-<br>count input|C251, C253(OP)|30kHz|||
||C252, C253, C254,<br>C254(OP), C255|5kHz|||



- *1. Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions: PLSY(FNC57), PLSR(FNC59), DSZR(FNC150), TBL(FNC152), ZRN(FNC156), PLSV(FNC157), DRVI(FNC158), DRVA(FNC159) 

## **2. Calculation of overall frequency** 

Obtain the overall frequency using the following expression: 

**Overall frequency  [(Sum of used frequency of 1-phase counters) + (Sum of used frequency of 2- phase counters)]** 

## **3. Example of calculation** 

Example1: 

When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used, and instructions related to positioning (DRVI instruction [Y000] and DRVA instruction [Y001]) are used 

Overall frequency : 200kHz - (2 axes x 40kHz) = 120kHz 

|<Counter No.><br>C235(1-phase 1-count input):<br>C236(1-phase 1-count input):<br>C237(1-phase 1-count input):<br>C253(2-phase 2-count input):|<Contents of use><br>50kHz is input.<br>50kHz is input.<br>10kHz is input.<br>5kHz is input.|
|---|---|
||Total<br>115kHz  120kHz (Overall frequency)|



Example2: 

When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used, and instructions related to positioning (DRVI instruction [Y000]) are used, Number of pulse width/cycle measurement inputs(X003) 

Overall frequency : 200 kHz - [(1 axes + 1 input) x 40 kHz] = 120 kHz 

|<Counter No.><br>C235(1-phase 1-counting):<br>C236(1-phase 1-counting):|<Contents of use><br>50kHz is input.<br>50kHz is input.|
|---|---|
||Total<br>100kHz  120kHz (Overall frequency)|



**162** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.8 Examples of External Wiring (Rotary Encoder)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**20** 

## **11.8 Examples of External Wiring (Rotary Encoder)** 

## **11.8.1 1-phase 1-input [C235 to C245]** 

The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C235 is used. When another high-speed counter number is used, wire the counter referring to the following diagrams. 

It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables for connection cables. Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side. 

- 1) NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder 

**==> picture [499 x 204] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
In the case of sink wiring<br>Rotary encoder<br>Fuse 24V DC<br>L 24V<br>0V<br>N<br>Class D<br>S/S grounding*<br>0V<br>24V Phase A<br>X000 Phase B<br>Phase Z<br>PLC<br>* The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 2) PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder 

**==> picture [333 x 176] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
In the case of source wiring<br>Rotary encoder<br>Fuse 24V DC<br>L 24V<br>0V<br>N<br>Class D<br>grounding*<br>S/S<br>0V<br>24V Phase A<br>X000 Phase B<br>Phase Z<br>PLC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. 

**19** 

**163** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.8 Examples of External Wiring (Rotary Encoder)_ 

## **11.8.2 2-phase 2-input [C251 to C255]** 

The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C251 is used. When another high-speed counter number is used, wire the counter referring to the following diagrams. 

It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables for connection cables. Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side. 

- 1) NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder 

**==> picture [333 x 176] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
In the case of sink wiring<br>Rotary encoder<br>Fuse 24V DC<br>L 24V<br>0V<br>N<br>Class D<br>S/S grounding*<br>0V<br>24V Phase A<br>X000 Phase B<br>X001 Phase Z<br>PLC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


   - The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. 

- 2) PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder 

**==> picture [333 x 176] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
In the case of source wiring<br>Rotary encoder<br>Fuse 24V DC<br>L 24V<br>0V<br>N<br>Class D<br>grounding*<br>S/S<br>0V<br>24V Phase A<br>X000 Phase B<br>X001 Phase Z<br>PLC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. 

**164** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures_ 

**11 12 13** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **11.9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures** 

## **11.9.1 Related devices** 

## **1. For switching 1-phase 1-count input counter mode to up-count or down-count** 

|**Counter type**|**Counter No.**|**Specifying device**|**Up-counting**|**Down-counting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|1-phase 1-count input|C235|M8235|OFF|ON|
||C236|M8236|||
||C237|M8237|||
||C238|M8238|||
||C239|M8239|||
||C240|M8240|||
||C241|M8241|||
||C242|M8242|||
||C243|M8243|||
||C244|M8244|||
||C245|M8245|||



## **2. For monitoring of up-count/down-count counting direction of 1-phase 2-count input and 2- phase 2-count input counters** 

|**Counter type**|**Counter No.**|**Monitoring device**|**OFF**|**ON**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|1-phase 2-count input|C246|M8246|Up-counting|Down-counting|
||C247|M8247|||
||C248|M8248|||
||C249|M8249|||
||C250|M8250|||
|2-phase 2-count input|C251|M8251|||
||C252|M8252|||
||C253|M8253|||
||C254|M8254|||
||C255|M8255|||



## **3. For switching high-speed counter function** 

|**Device No.**|**Name**|**Description**|**Reference**|
|---|---|---|---|
|M8388|Contact for changing high-speed counter<br>function|Changes the function of high-speed counter|-|
|M8392|Function switching devices|Switches the function of C248 and C253|Subsection 11.9.2|
|M8395|Function switching devices|Switches the function of C254|Subsection 11.9.2|



**18** 

**165** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

11 Use of High-speed Counters _11.10 Cautions on Use_ 

## **11.9.2 [Function switching] switching of allocation and functions of input terminals** 

When the counters C248, C253 and C254 are combined with the following special auxiliary relays, the allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed. Program the special auxiliary relays just before the counters. 

**==> picture [457 x 234] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Counter No. Function switching method Details of change<br>M8388<br>M8392<br>C248(OP) • Reset input is not given.<br>C248<br>K<br>M8388<br>M8392<br>C253(OP) • Reset input is not given.<br>C253<br>K<br>M8388<br>M8395 • The input count (2-phase 2-count) changes as follows<br>Phase A : Changes from X000 to X006.<br>C254(OP) Phase B : Changes from X001 to X007.<br>C254 • Reset input is not given.<br>• Start input is not given.<br>K<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **11.10 Cautions on Use** 

→ **For programming details, refer to the Programming Manual.** 

- If the operation of a high-speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch, the counter may malfunction due to extra noise from switch chattering or contact bounce. 

- The input filter of an input terminal for a high-speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 10 s (X000, X001, X003, X004) or 50 s (X002, X005, X006, X007). Accordingly, it is not necessary to use special data register D8020 (input filter adjustment). The input filter for input relays not being used for high-speed counters remains at 10 ms (initial value). 

- The inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/DSZR/ZRN instructions and general-purpose inputs. There should be no overlap between each input number. For example, when C251 is used, X000 and X001 are occupied. As a result, "C235, C236, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254", "input interrupt pointers I00* and I10*", "pulse catch contacts M8170 and M8171", "SPD instruction using X000 and/or X001" and "pulse width/pulse period measurement contacts M8076 and M8077" cannot be used. 

- Make sure that the signal speed for high-speed counters does not exceed the response frequency described above. If an input signal exceeds the response frequency, a WDT error may occur, or the communication functions such as a parallel link may malfunction. 

- The response frequency changes depending on the number of used counters, but the input filter value is fixed to 10 s (X000, X001, X003, X004) or 50 s (X002, X005, X006, X007). Note that noise above the response frequency may be counted depending on the filter value of the used input. 

**166** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**19 20** 

## **12. Output Wiring Procedures** 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 

   - 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

   - 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

**14** 

- 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. 

- Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors. Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure. 

**==> picture [68 x 45] intentionally omitted <==**

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

**16** 

**17** 

- Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**167** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

|•|Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service power supply) on the main unit or extension units.|Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service power supply) on the main unit or extension units.|
|---|---|---|
||Doing so may cause damage to the product.||
|•|Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100|or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a|
||wire 2 mm2or thicker.||
||Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to section 9.3).||
|•|Do not wire vacant terminals externally.||
||Doing so may damage the product.||
|•|Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.||
||If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.||
|•|Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.||
||If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.||
|•|When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting|or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.|
||Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.||
|•|Make sure to properly wire the FX3GSeries main unit|and FX2N/FX3USeries extension equipment in accordance with the following|
||precautions.||
||Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.||
||-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.||
||-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.||
|•|Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.||
||Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.||
||-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.||
||-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.||
||-<br>Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.||
||-<br>Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.||
||-<br>Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.||
||-<br>Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.||
|•|Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions.||
||Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.||
||-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.||
||-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.||



**168** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures _12.1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type_ 

**11 12** 

**13** 

## **12.1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type** 

This section explains relay outputs and external wiring. For the relay output specifications, refer to the following. 

→ **For the specifications on the main unit, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.** → **For the specifications on the input/output powered extension unit, refer to Chapter 15.** → **For the specifications on the input/output extension block, refer to Chapter 16.** 

## **12.1.1 Product life of relay contacts** 

→ **For product life of relay contacts, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.** 

## **12.1.2 Handling of relay output** 

**==> picture [547 x 203] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Handling of relay output<br>1. Output terminal<br>One common terminal is used for 4 or 8 relay output points.<br>The common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit Load<br>Y 0 14<br>voltage systems (for example,100V AC and 24V DC).<br>Y 1<br>Fuse 24V DC<br>COM1<br>Load<br>Y 4<br>Y 5<br>Fuse 100V AC 15<br>C OM2<br>PLC<br>2. External power supply<br>Use an external power supply of 30V DC or less or 240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not<br>comply with CE, UL or cUL standards) for loads.<br>Various UsesWiring for<br>Troubleshooting Maintenance, Test Run,<br>Extension Units PoweredInput/Output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**16** 

## **3. Circuit insulation** 

The PLC internal circuit and external load circuits are electrically insulated between the output relay coil and contact. The common terminal blocks are separated from one another. 

## **4. Display of operation** 

When power is applied to the output relay coil, the LED is lit, and the output contact is turned on. 

## **5. Response time** 

The response time of the output relay from when the power is applied to the coil until the output contact is turned on and from when the coil is shut off until the output contact is turned off is approx. 10ms. 

## **6. Output current** 

At a circuit voltage of 240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards), a resistance load of 2A per point or an inductive load of 80VA or less (100V AC or 200V AC) can be driven. 

→ **For the life of the contact for switching an inductive load, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.** 

When an inductive load is switched, connect a diode (for commutation) or a surge absorber in parallel with this load. 

DC circuit Diode (for commutation) AC circuit Surge absorber 

## **7. Open circuit leakage current** 

Because there is no leakage current even while output contacts are OFF, the neon ball, etc. can be driven directly. 

**17** 

**18** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**169** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures _12.1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type_ 

## **12.1.3 External wiring precautions** 

## **1. Protection circuit for load short-circuiting** 

A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the output. 

**==> picture [147 x 82] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Load<br>Y 0<br>Fuse<br>COM1<br>PLC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Contact protection circuit for inductive loads** 

An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in this product. It is recommended to use inductive loads with built-in protection circuits. When using loads without built-in protection circuits, insert an external contact protection circuit, etc. to reduce noise and extend the product life. 

## 1) DC circuit 

|Connect a diode in parallel with the load.<br>The diode (for commutation) must comply with the following<br>specifications.<br>**Item**<br>**Guide**<br>Reverse voltage<br>5 to 10 times the load voltage<br>Forward current<br>Load current or more|Connect a diode in parallel with the load.<br>The diode (for commutation) must comply with the following<br>specifications.<br>**Item**<br>**Guide**<br>Reverse voltage<br>5 to 10 times the load voltage<br>Forward current<br>Load current or more||
|---|---|---|
|||Inductive load<br>PLC output<br>contact<br>Diode<br>(for commutation)|
|**Item**|**Guide**||
|Reverse voltage|5 to 10 times the load voltage||
|Forward current|Load current or more||



## 2) AC circuit 

Connect the surge absorber (combined CR components such as a surge killer and spark killer, etc.) parallel to the load. 

Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the load being used. Refer to the table below for other specifications. 

|g   g<br>for the load being used. Refer to the table below for other<br>specifications.<br>Reference<br>**Item**<br>**Standard**<br>Static electricity capacity Approx. 0.1 F<br>Resistance value<br>Approx. 100 to 200<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. CR-10201<br>Rubycon Corporation<br>250MCRA104100M B0325<br>Inductive load<br>Surge<br>absorber<br>PLC output<br>contact|g   g<br>for the load being used. Refer to the table below for other<br>specifications.<br>Reference<br>**Item**<br>**Standard**<br>Static electricity capacity Approx. 0.1 F<br>Resistance value<br>Approx. 100 to 200<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. CR-10201<br>Rubycon Corporation<br>250MCRA104100M B0325<br>Inductive load<br>Surge<br>absorber<br>PLC output<br>contact|g   g<br>for the load being used. Refer to the table below for other<br>specifications.<br>Reference<br>**Item**<br>**Standard**<br>Static electricity capacity Approx. 0.1 F<br>Resistance value<br>Approx. 100 to 200<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. CR-10201<br>Rubycon Corporation<br>250MCRA104100M B0325<br>Inductive load<br>Surge<br>absorber<br>PLC output<br>contact|g   g<br>for the load being used. Refer to the table below for other<br>specifications.<br>Reference<br>**Item**<br>**Standard**<br>Static electricity capacity Approx. 0.1 F<br>Resistance value<br>Approx. 100 to 200<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. CR-10201<br>Rubycon Corporation<br>250MCRA104100M B0325<br>Inductive load<br>Surge<br>absorber<br>PLC output<br>contact|PLC ou<br>contact|Inductive load<br>Surge<br>absorber<br>tput|Inductive load<br>Surge<br>absorber<br>tput|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Item**|**Standard**||||||
|Static electricity capacity|Approx. 0.1 F||||||
|Resistance value|Approx. 100 to 200||||||
|Reference<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. CR-10201|||||||
|**Manufacturer**||**Model name**|**Manufacturer**|||**Model name**|
|Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.||CR-10201|Rubycon Corporation|||250MCRA104100M B0325|



## **3. Interlock** 

For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC’s internal programs as shown to the right. 

**==> picture [206 x 75] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inter- Limit of normal<br>lock rotation Normal<br>rotation<br>PLC output<br>contact Reverse<br>PLC output Limit of reverse rotation<br>contact rotation<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **4. In-phase** 

PLC output contacts (*) should be used in an "in-phase" manner. 

**==> picture [172 x 104] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Bad *<br>*<br>Good *<br>*<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**170** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures _12.1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19** 

**19** 

## **12.1.4 Example of external wiring** 

**==> picture [437 x 496] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply<br>100 to 240V<br>Main unit<br>Fuse [*1] relay output<br>Breaker COM0<br>Y0<br>Power ON<br>Fuse [*1]<br>COM2<br>PL<br>MC Y2<br>Fuse [*1]<br>MC COM4<br>Emergency<br>Y10<br>stop<br>MC MC *2<br>Fuse [*1] Output extension block<br>COM1 relay output<br>Y0<br>DC power<br>supply Y7<br>Load *2<br>Fuse [*1]<br>COM2<br>Y0<br>Y7<br>Load *2<br>Fuse [*1] Input/output powered<br>COM1 extension unit<br>Y0 relay output<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Load *2<br>Fuse [*1]<br>COM5<br>Y0<br>Y7<br>Load *2<br>Power supply for load<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Power supply for load connected to PLC output 

**18** 

For details on emergency stop operation, refer to "DESIGN PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety Precautions" field. 

- *1. The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built-in fuse. 

   - Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short-circuiting. 

- *2. "   " represents vacant terminals. 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

**20** 

- Do not wire the vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

**171** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures 

_12.2 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type_ 

## **12.2 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type** 

This section explains the procedures for handling transistor output and external wiring. For the transistor output specifications, refer to the following. 

→ **For the specifications on the main unit, refer to Subsection 4.4.2.** → **For the specifications on the input/output powered extension unit, refer to Chapter 15.** → **For the specifications on the input/output extension block, refer to Chapter 16.** 

## **12.2.1 Transistor Output Sink and Source** 

FX3G Series main units, FX2N Series input/output extension units/blocks of transistor sink output type and of transistor source output type are available. 

## **1. Differences in circuit** 

- Sink output [-common] Output to make load current flow into the output (Y) terminal is called sink output. 

- Source output [+common] Output to make load current flow out of the output (Y) terminal is called source output. 

**==> picture [149 x 92] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Load<br>Y<br>COM<br>Fuse DC<br>power<br>supply<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [149 x 94] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Load<br>Y<br> +V<br>Fuse DC<br>power<br>supply<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**172** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures 

_12.2 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**16 17** 

**19 20** 

## **12.2.2 Handling of transistor output** 

## **1. Output terminals** 

One, 4 or 8 transistor output points are covered by one common terminal. 

## **Sink output** 

Connect each COM (number) terminal to the minus side of the load power supply. 

The COM terminals are not connected internally. 

## **Source output** 

Connect each +V (number) terminal to the plus side of the load power supply. 

The +V terminals are not connected internally. 

**==> picture [149 x 131] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink output type<br>Load<br>Y 0<br>Y 1<br>Fuse DC powersupply<br>COM1<br>Load<br>Y 4<br>Y 5<br>Fuse DC powersupply<br>COM2<br>PLC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [149 x 131] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Source output type<br>Load<br>Y 0<br>Y 1<br>Fuse DC powersupply<br>+V0<br>Load<br>Y 4<br>Y 5<br>Fuse DC powersupply<br>+V1<br>PLC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**15** 

## **2. External power supply** 

For driving the load, use a smoothing power supply of 5 to 30V DC that can output current two or more times the rated current of the fuse connected to the load circuit. 

## **3. Insulation of circuit** 

The internal circuit of the PLC and the output transistor are insulated with a photocoupler. The common blocks are separated from one another. 

## **4. Display of operation** 

Operation indicator LEDs are built into the main unit and output extension blocks, and turn ON when photocouplers are actuated. 

**18** 

**173** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures 

_12.2 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type_ 

## **5. Response time** 

The time from when the PLC drives (or shuts down) the photocoupler until the transistor is turned on (or off) is shown in the following table. 

|**Classification**|**Classification**|**Response**<br>**time**|**Load current**|**Load current**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Main unit<br>14/24 point type|Y000, Y001|5 s or less|5 to 24V DC<br>10mA or more|When using an instruction related to pulse train output or<br>positioning, make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100mA<br>(5 to 24V DC).|
||Y002 or more|0.2ms or less|24V DC 200 mA or more*1||
|Main unit<br>40/60 point type|Y000 to Y002|5 s or less|5 to 24V DC<br>10mA or more|When using an instruction related to pulse train output or<br>positioning, make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100mA<br>(5 to 24V DC).|
||Y003 or more|0.2ms or less|24V DC 200mA or more*1||
|Input/output powered extension unit<br>Output extension block||0.2ms or less|24V DC 200mA*1||



- *1. The transistor OFF time is longer under lighter loads. For example, under a load of 24V DC 40mA, the response time is approx. 0.3ms. When response performance is required under light loads, provide a dummy resistor as shown below to increase the load current. 

**==> picture [405 x 114] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
• Sink output type • Source output type<br>PLC PLC<br>Dummy Dummy<br>Fuse Load Fuse Load<br>resistance resistance<br>Y Y<br>COM1 +V0<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **6. Output current** 

The maximum resistance loads for the input/output powered extension units and output extension blocks are shown in the following table. 

The ON voltage of the output transistor is approx. 1.5V. 

When driving a semiconductor element, carefully check the input voltage characteristics of the applied element. 

||**Model**|**Output**<br>**current**|**Limitation**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Main units|FX3G-14MT/<br>S|0.5A/point|The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal<br>should be the following value.<br>1 point/common: 0.5A or less<br>4 points/common: 0.8A or less<br>8 points/common: 1.6A or less<br>For FX2N-16EYT-C:<br>16 points/common: 1.6A or less<br>For FX2N-8EYT-H:<br>4 points/common: 2A or less|
||FX3G-14MT/<br>SS|||
||FX3G-24MT/<br>S|||
||FX3G-24MT/<br>SS|||
||FX3G-40MT/<br>S|||
||FX3G-40MT/<br>SS|||
||FX3G-60MT/<br>S|||
||FX3G-60MT/<br>SS|||
|Input/output powered<br>extension units|FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL|||
||FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL|||
||FX2N-48ET-DSS|||
||FX2N-32ET|||
||FX2N-48ET|||
||FX2N-48ET-D|||
|Output extension block|FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL|||
||FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL|||
||FX2N-16EYT|||
||FX2N-8EYT|||
||FX2N-8EYT-H|1A/point||
||FX2N-16EYT-C|0.3A/point||



**174** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures 

_12.2 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**14** 

**16** 

**19** 

## **7. Open circuit leakage current** 

0.1mA or less 

## **12.2.3 External wiring precautions** 

## **1. Protection circuit for load short-circuits** 

A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the output. 

**==> picture [209 x 572] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Sink output type<br>Load<br>Y<br>Fuse<br>COM1<br>PLC<br>Source output type<br>Load<br>Y<br>Fuse<br>+V0<br>PLC<br>Sink output type<br>Inductive<br>load<br>Y<br>Fuse<br>COM1<br>PLC<br>Source output type<br>Inductive<br>load<br>Y<br>Fuse<br>+V0<br>PLC<br>Interlock<br>Normal<br>Limit of normal rotation<br>rotation<br>Reverse<br>Limit of reverse PLC output rotation<br>rotation element<br>Interlock<br>Normal<br>Limit of normal rotation<br>rotation<br>Reverse<br>Limit of reverse PLC output rotation<br>rotation element<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity. 

## **2. Contact protection circuit for inductive loads** 

When an inductive load is connected, connect a diode (for commutation) in parallel with the load as necessary. The diode (for commutation) must comply with the following specifications. 

|**Item**|**Guide**|
|---|---|
|Reverse voltage|5 to 10 times of the load voltage|
|Forward current|Load current or more|



## **3. Interlock** 

For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC's internal programs, as shown to the right. 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**175** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures _12.2 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type_ 

## **12.2.4 Example of external wiring** 

## **1. Transistor output (Sink)** 

**==> picture [438 x 495] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply<br>100 to 240V Main unit<br>*1<br>Fuse transistor output (sink)<br>COM0<br>Y0<br>Breaker<br>Load<br>Power ON COM2<br>Y2<br>PL MC Fuse*1<br>COM4<br>Y10<br>MC<br>Emergency  Load<br>stop *2<br>MC MC<br>Output extension block<br>Fuse [*1] transistor output (sink)<br>COM1<br>Y0<br>DC power<br>supply Y7<br>Load *2<br>Fuse [*1]<br>COM2<br>Y0<br>Y7<br>Load *2<br>Input/output powered<br>extension unit<br>Fuse [*1]<br>COM1 transistor output<br>Y0 (sink)<br>Y7<br>Load *2<br>Fuse [*1]<br>COM2<br>Power supply for load<br>Y0<br>connected to PLC output<br>Y7<br>For details on emergency stop Load *2<br>operation, refer to "DESIGN<br>PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety<br>Precautions" field.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built-in fuse. Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short-circuiting. 

- *2. "  " represents vacant terminals. 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not wire the vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

**176** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures _12.2 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

## **2. Transistor output (Source)** 

**==> picture [437 x 488] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply<br>100 to 240V Main unit<br>Fuse [*1] transistor output<br>+V0 (source)<br>Y0<br>Breaker<br>Load<br>Power ON +V2<br>Y2<br>PL Fuse [*1]<br>MC<br>+V4<br>Y10<br>MC<br>Emergency Load<br>stop *2<br>MC MC<br>Output extension block<br>Fuse [*1] transistor output<br>+V0 (source)<br>Y0<br>DC power<br>supply Y7<br>Load *2<br>Fuse [*1]<br>+V1<br>Y0<br>Y7<br>Load *2<br>Input/output powered<br>Fuse [*1] extension unit<br>+V0 transistor output<br>Y0 (source)<br>Y7<br>Load *2<br>Fuse [*1]<br>+V1<br>Power supply for load<br>Y0<br>connected PLC output<br>Y7<br>For details on emergency stop<br>operation, refer to "DESIGN Load *2<br>PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety<br>Precautions" field.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built-in fuse. 

- Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short-circuiting. 

- *2. "  " represents vacant terminals. 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

**19** 

- Do not wire the vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

**20** 

**177** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures 

_12.3 External Wiring for Triac (SSR) Output Type_ 

## **12.3 External Wiring for Triac (SSR) Output Type** 

This section explains the procedures for handling triac output and external wiring. 

- There are not triac output type of main units. 

Select from the input/output powered extension units/blocks. 

- For the triac output specifications, refer to the following. 

   - → **For the specifications on the input/output powered extension unit, refer to Chapter 15.** → **For the specifications on the input/output extension block, refer to Chapter 16.** 

## **12.3.1 Handling of triac output** 

## **1. Output terminals** 

On the triac output type units/blocks, one common terminal is used for 8 points. Therefore, the common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems (for example, 100V AC and 200V AC). 

**==> picture [148 x 125] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Example : FX2N-16EYS<br>Load<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Fuse 100VAC U<br>COM1<br>Load<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Fuse 200VAC U<br>COM2<br>PLC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Circuit insulation** 

The PLC internal circuit and the output element (triac) are insulated with a photo-thyristor. The common terminal blocks are separate from one another. 

## **3. Display of operation** 

When the photo-thyristor is driven, the LED is lit, and the output triac is turned on. 

## **4. Response time** 

The time from when the photo-thyristor is driven or shut down until the output triac is turned on and until it is turned off is 1ms or less and 10ms or less, respectively. 

## **5. Output current** 

The max current per output point is 0.3A. However, to restrict temperature rise, the max current per one output from four points should be 0.8A (average per point is 0.2A). 

When a load with high rush current is turned on and off frequently, the root-mean-square current should be 0.2A or less. 

**==> picture [346 x 67] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
<Example><br>0.4A<br>4A<br>4 [2 ] 0.02 + 0.4 [2]   0.7<br>= 0.2A<br>0.02 + 0.7 + 10<br>0.02 0.7 10<br>sec sec sec<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **6. Open circuit leakage current** 

A C-R absorber is connected for turn-off in parallel with the triac output terminal of this type of PLC. Therefore, when the circuit opens, a leakage current will be 1mA at 100V AC and 2mA at 200V AC. 

Since the triac output type devices leak current when the circuits are open, small-size relays and micro current loads having low rated operating current may keep operating even when the triac output is turned off. Therefore, use a load of 0.4VA or more at 100V AC or 1.6VA or more at 200V AC. If the load is less than this value, connect a surge absorber as stated below in parallel with the load. 

→ **For the connection of the surge absorber, refer to 12.3.2 External wiring precautions.** 

**178** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures 

_12.3 External Wiring for Triac (SSR) Output Type_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**19 20** 

**20** 

## **12.3.2 External wiring precautions** 

## **1. Protection circuit for load short-circuits** 

A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the output. 

**==> picture [169 x 156] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Load<br>Y<br>Fuse<br>COM1<br>PLC<br>Micro current load<br>Surge<br>absorber<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Micro current load** 

The PLC's internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn-off C-R absorber. When connecting a very low current load of "0.4VA/100V AC or less, or 1.6VA/200V AC or less", please connect a surge absorber parallel to the load. 

Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the load being used. Refer to the table below for other specifications. 

|**Item**|**Guide**||||**Model name**<br>250MCRA104100M B0325|**Model name**<br>250MCRA104100M B0325|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Static electricity capacity|Approx. 0.1 F||||||
|Resistance value|Approx. 100 to 200||||||
|Reference<br> **Interlock**<br>For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where<br>a hazardous condition could result if switched ON<br>simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided<br>for interlocking the PLC's internal programs as shown to<br>the right.<br>**Manufacturer**<br>**Model name**<br>Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. CR-10201<br>Rubycon|||||||
||||**Manufacturer**||**Model name**||
|||Rubycon|Corporation||250MCRA104100M B0325||
||||||||
||||I<br>l<br>PLC output<br>element||nter-<br>ock|Limit of normal<br>rotation<br>Limit of reverse<br>rotation|
|||||||Limit of re<br>rotation|
||||||||



## **3. Interlock** 

## **4. In-phase** 

PLC output contacts (*) should be used in an "in-phase" manner. 

**==> picture [170 x 113] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
*<br>Bad *<br>*<br>Good *<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**18** 

**19** 

**179** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

12 Output Wiring Procedures _12.3 External Wiring for Triac (SSR) Output Type_ 

## **12.3.3 Example of external wiring** 

**==> picture [438 x 439] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply<br>Main unit<br>100 to 240V<br>relay output<br>COM0<br>Y0<br>Breaker<br>COM2<br>Power ON<br>For the relay output wiring Y2<br>of the main unit, refer to<br>PL Subsection 12.1.4.<br>MC COM4<br>Y10<br>MC<br>Emergency<br>stop *2<br>MC MC<br>Output extension block<br>Fuse [*1] triac output<br>COM1<br>Y0<br>Y7<br>Load *2<br>Power supply for load<br>connected to PLC output<br>For details on emergency stop Input/output powered<br>operation, refer to "DESIGN Fuse [*1] extension unit<br>PRECAUTIONS" at "Safety COM1 triac output<br>Precautions" field.<br>Y0<br>Y3<br>Load *2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built-in fuse. Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short-circuiting. 

- *2. "  " represents vacant terminals. 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not wire the vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

**180** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 

**11** 

**12** 

**19 20** 

## **13. Examples of Wiring for Various Uses** 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

- 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

- 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

- 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. 

- Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors. Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure. 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

- • Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**181** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses _13.1 Notes about Examples of Wiring_ 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

**==> picture [453 x 286] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
• Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service power supply) on the main unit or extension units.<br>Doing so may cause damage to the product.<br>• Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100   or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a<br>wire 2 mm [2]  or thicker.<br>Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to section 9.3).<br>• Do not wire vacant terminals externally.<br>Doing so may damage the product.<br>• Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.<br>If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.<br>• Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.<br>If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.<br>• When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.<br>Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>• Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N/FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following<br>precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>• Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.<br>-<br>Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.<br>-<br>Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.<br>-<br>Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.<br>• Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **13.1 Notes about Examples of Wiring** 

The examples of wiring are given under the following conditions. 

→ **For the example of positioning wiring, refer to the Positioning Control Edition.** 

- The input/output numbers are the actual numbers on the program. (They may differ from the numbers shown on the product terminals.) 

- Product input/output specifications 

Check the product input/output specifications when using any example of wiring. 

   - Products only for sink input and products both for sink input and for source input are available. 

   - Products for sink output and products for source output are available. 

- The examples of programming (applied instructions) are given based on the allocation of the input/output numbers for wiring. 

→ **For the applied instructions, refer to the Programming Manual.** 

**182** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses _13.2 Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**15 16** 

**15** 

**19** 

## **13.2 Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]** 

## **13.2.1 When DSW instructions are used** 

Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 4-digit digital switch to the data register D100 are given below. 

## **1. Main unit** 

## **Example of program** 

**==> picture [231 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>DSW X010 Y010 D100 K1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**13** 

## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit 

**==> picture [360 x 447] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Digital 10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>switch of<br>BCD<br>0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>1 2 4 8<br>S/S X010 X011 X012 X013<br>Main unit (Ex: FX3G-40MT/ES)<br>0V 24V COM4 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013<br>10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>In the case of source wiring<br>When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used<br>main unit<br>Digital 10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>switch of<br>BCD<br>0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>1 2 4 8<br>S/S X010 X011 X012 X013<br>Main unit (Ex: FX3G-40MT/ESS)<br>0V 24V +V4 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013<br>10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 2) In the case of source wiring 

When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit 

**14** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**183** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses _13.2 Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]_ 

## **2. Main unit + input/output powered extension unit/block** 

## **Example of program** 

**==> picture [231 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>DSW X010 Y030 D100 K1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring 

When the main unit and a transistor output (sink) type input/output powered extension unit/block are used 

**==> picture [351 x 200] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Digital 10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>switch of<br>BCD<br>0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>*1<br>1 2 4 8 *2<br>S/S X010 X011 X012 X013 COM 24+ X<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>Main unit Output extension block<br>Transistor output (sink)<br>0V 24V COM1 Y030 Y031 Y032 Y033<br>10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 To use the input terminal (X) of the input/output powered extension unit, wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line. *2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input/output powered extension units (ex.: FX2N-32ET). Output extension blocks do not have the terminals. 

   - 2) In the case of source wiring 

      - When the main unit and a transistor output (source) type input/output powered extension unit/block are used 

**==> picture [339 x 201] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Digital 10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>switch of<br>BCD<br>0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>*1<br>1 2 4 8 *2<br>S/S X010 X011 X012 X013 S/S 0V 24V X<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>Main unit Output extension block<br>Transistor output (source)<br>0V 24V +V0 Y030 Y031 Y032 Y033<br>10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 To use the input terminal (X) of the input/output powered extension unit, wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line. *2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input/output powered extension units (ex.: FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL). Output extension blocks do not have the terminals. 

**184** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses _13.2 Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19** 

## **3. Input/output powered extension unit Example of program** 

**==> picture [231 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>DSW X060 Y050 D100 K1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring 

   - When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input/output powered extension unit 

**==> picture [321 x 226] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>Digital<br>switch of<br>BCD<br>0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>1 2 4 8<br>COM X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067<br>First input group Input/output powered<br>extension unit<br>FX2N-32ET<br>Transistor output (sink) FX2N-48ET<br>COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053<br>10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**15** 

- 2) In the case of source wiring 

When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit 

**==> picture [355 x 226] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>Digital<br>switch of<br>BCD<br>0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>1 2 4 8<br>S/S 0V 24V X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067<br>First input group Input/output powered<br>extension unit<br>Transistor output (source) FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL<br>FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL<br>+V0 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053<br>10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**185** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses _13.2 Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]_ 

## **13.2.2 When BIN instructions are used** 

Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 2-digit digital switch to the data register D102 are given below. **Example of program** 

**==> picture [158 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>BIN K2X010 D102<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring 

   - When inputs are used for both sink and source in the used main unit or input/output powered extension unit 

**==> picture [268 x 305] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
10 [0] 10 [1]<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8<br>S/S X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017<br>Main unit,Input/output powered extension unit<br>0V 24V<br>In the case of sink wiring<br>10 [0] 10 [1]<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8<br>COM X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 2) In the case of sink wiring 

When inputs are used for sink only in the used input/output powered extension unit 

- 3) In the case of source wiring 

When inputs are used for both sink and source in the used main unit or input/output powered extension unit 

**==> picture [269 x 122] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
10 [0] 10 [1]<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8<br>S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017<br>Main unit, Input/output powered extension unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**186** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses _13.3 Input Matrix [MTR Instructions (FNC 52)]_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**16** 

**19** 

## **13.3 Input Matrix [MTR Instructions (FNC 52)]** 

This section gives examples of wiring for capturing the ON/OFF status of 24 switches to M30 to M37, M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 using MTR instructions. 

## **1. Main unit** 

## **Example of program** 

|**mple of**|**program**|**program**|**program**|**program**|**program**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|M8000||||||
||MTR|X020|Y010|M30|K3|
|||||||



## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring 

   - When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit 

**==> picture [296 x 219] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>S/S X020 X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>Main unit (Ex: FX3G-40MT/ES)<br>0V 24V COM4 Y010 Y011 Y012<br>M50 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57<br>M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47<br>M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **14** 

**15** 

## **16** 

## 2) In the case of source wiring 

When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit 

**==> picture [299 x 224] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>S/S X020 X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>Main unit (Ex: FX3G-40MT/ESS)<br>0V 24V +V4 Y010 Y011 Y012<br>M50 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57<br>M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47<br>M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **17** 

## **18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**187** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses _13.3 Input Matrix [MTR Instructions (FNC 52)]_ 

## **2. Main unit + input/output powered extension unit/block Example of program** 

**==> picture [231 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>MTR X020 Y050 M30 K3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

## 1) In the case of sink wiring 

When the main unit and a transistor output (sink) type input/output powered extension unit/block are used 

**==> picture [410 x 224] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>*1<br>*2<br>S/S X020 X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027 COM 24+ X<br>Input/output powered<br>extension unit/block<br>Main unit<br>Transistor output (sink)<br>0V 24V COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052<br>M50 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57<br>M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47<br>M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1 To use the input terminal (X) of the input/output powered extension unit, wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line. *2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input/output powered extension units (ex.: FX2N -32ET). Output extension blocks do not have the terminals. 

   - 2) In the case of source wiring 

      - When the main unit and a transistor output (source) type input/output powered extension unit/block are used 

**==> picture [396 x 223] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027<br>*1<br>*2<br>S/S X020 X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027 S/S 0V 24V X<br>Input/output powered<br>Main unit extension unit/block<br>Transistor output (source)<br>0V 24V +V0 Y050 Y051 Y052<br>M50 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57<br>M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47<br>M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


*1 To use the input terminal (X) of the input/output powered extension unit, wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line. *2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input/output powered extension units (ex.: FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL). Output extension blocks do not have the terminals. 

**188** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses _13.3 Input Matrix [MTR Instructions (FNC 52)]_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13 14** 

**13** 

**14** 

**16 17** 

**19 20** 

**20** 

## **3. Input/output powered extension unit Example of program** 

**==> picture [231 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>MTR X060 Y050 M30 K3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

## 1) In the case of sink wiring 

When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input/output powered extension unit 

**==> picture [278 x 213] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary.<br>X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067<br>X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067<br>COM X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067<br>Input/output powered extension unit FX2N-32ET<br>FX2N-48ET<br>Transistor output (sink)<br>COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053 Y054 Y055 Y056 Y057<br>M50 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57<br>M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47<br>M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **15** 

- 2) In the case of source wiring 

   - When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit 

**==> picture [305 x 218] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0.1A 50V<br>diode is<br>necessary. X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067<br>X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067<br>S/S 0V 24V X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067<br>Input/output powered extension unit FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL<br>FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL<br>Transistor output (source)<br>+V0 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053 Y054 Y055 Y056 Y057<br>M50 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57<br>M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47<br>M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **16** 

## **17** 

## **18** 

**19** 

**189** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User's Manual - Hardware Edition _13.4 Seven Segment with Latch [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)]_ 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 

## **13.4 Seven Segment with Latch [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)]** 

## **13.4.1 When SEGL instructions are used** 

This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 4-digit 7-segment display. 

## **1. Main unit** 

## **Example of program** 

**==> picture [195 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>SEGL D100 Y010 K1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring 

   - When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit 

**==> picture [471 x 184] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7-segment display to be used for sink wiring<br>(in the case of transistor output)<br>Main unit (Ex: FX3G-40MT/ES) PLC 7-segment display<br>+<br>Transistor output (sink)<br>C OM4 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013 COM5 Y014 Y015 Y016 Y017<br>1 2 4 8 10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3] Y Signal Internal<br>circuit<br>COM1 -<br>10 [3] 10 [2] 10 [1] 10 [0]<br>1 *<br>2<br>4<br>8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- Use a 7-segment display with a latch and a built-in BCD decoder. 

- 2) In the case of source wiring 

   - When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit 

**==> picture [463 x 184] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7-segment display to be used for source wiring<br>(in the case of transistor output)<br>Main unit (Ex: FX3G-40MT/ESS) PLC 7-segment display<br>+V0 +<br>Transistor output (source)<br>+ V4 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013 +V5 Y014 Y015 Y016 Y017<br>Y Signal Internal<br>1 2 4 8 10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3]<br>circuit<br>-<br>10 [3] 10 [2] 10 [1] 10 [0]<br>1 *<br>2<br>4<br>8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


* Use a 7-segment display with a latch and a built-in BCD decoder. 

**190** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 

_13.4 Seven Segment with Latch [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)]_ 

**11 12 13 14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **2. Input/output powered extension unit** 

## **Example of program** 

**==> picture [195 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>SEGL D100 Y020 K1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring 

When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input/output powered extension unit 

**==> picture [449 x 183] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7-segment display to be used for sink wiring<br>(in the case of transistor output)<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>FX2N-32ET PLC 7-segment display<br>FX2N-48ET<br>+<br>Transistor output (sink)<br>C OM1 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027<br>1 2 4 8 10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3] Y Signal Internal<br>circuit<br>COM1 -<br>1 10 [3] 10 [2] 10 [1] 10 [0] *<br>2<br>4<br>8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- Use a 7-segment display with a latch and a built-in BCD decoder. 

- 2) In the case of source wiring 

   - When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit 

**==> picture [444 x 183] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7-segment display to be used for source wiring<br>(in the case of transistor output)<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL PLC 7-segment display<br>FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL<br>+V0 +<br>Transistor output (source)<br>+V0 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027<br>1 2 4 8 10 [0] 10 [1] 10 [2] 10 [3] Y Signal Internal<br>circuit<br>-<br>10 [3] 10 [2] 10 [1] 10 [0]<br>1 *<br>2<br>4<br>8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- Use a 7-segment display with a latch and a built-in BCD decoder. 

**191** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User's Manual - Hardware Edition _13.4 Seven Segment with Latch [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)]_ 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 

## **13.4.2 When BCD instructions are used** 

This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 2-digit 7-segment display. 

## **1. Main unit** 

## **Example of program** 

**==> picture [158 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>BCD D100 K2Y010<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring 

When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit 

**==> picture [472 x 186] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7-segment display to be used for sink wiring<br>(in the case of transistor output)<br>Main unit (Ex: FX3G-40MT/ES) PLC 7-segment display<br>+<br>Transistor output (sink)<br>C OM4 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013 COM5 Y014 Y015 Y016 Y01 7<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 Y Signal Internal<br>circuit<br>COM1 -<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 2) In the case of source wiring 

   - When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit 

**==> picture [466 x 186] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7-segment display to be used for source wiring<br>(in the case of transistor output)<br>Main unit (Ex: FX3G-40MT/ESS) PLC 7-segment display<br>+V0 +<br>Transistor output (source)<br>+V4 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013 +V5 Y014 Y015 Y016 Y01 7<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 Y Signal Internal<br>circuit<br>-<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**192** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 

_13.4 Seven Segment with Latch [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)]_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13 14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **2. Input/output powered extension unit** 

## **Example of program** 

**==> picture [158 x 31] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8000<br>BCD D100 K2Y020<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Example of wiring** 

- 1) In the case of sink wiring 

When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input/output powered extension unit 

**==> picture [449 x 186] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7-segment display to be used for sink wiring<br>(in the case of transistor output)<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>FX2N-32ET PLC 7-segment display<br>FX2N-48ET<br>+<br>Transistor output (sink)<br>C OM1 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y02 7<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 Y Signal Internal<br>circuit<br>COM1 -<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 2) In the case of source wiring 

   - When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit 

**==> picture [444 x 186] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
7-segment display to be used for source wiring<br>(in the case of transistor output)<br>Input/output powered extension unit<br>FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL PLC 7-segment display<br>FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL<br>+V0 +<br>Transistor output (source)<br>+V0 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y02 7<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 Y Signal Internal<br>circuit<br>-<br>1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**193** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 

## **14. Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting** 

## **STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not touch any terminal while the PLC’s power is on. Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions. 

- Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally. 

   - Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

- Use the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual. 

   - Use the battery only for the specified purpose. 

   - Connect the battery correctly. 

   - Do not charge, disassemble, heat, put in fire, short-circuit, connect reversely, weld, swallow or burn the battery, or apply excessive forces (vibration, impact, drop, etc.) to the battery. 

   - Do not store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight. 

   - Do not expose to water, bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly. 

   - Incorrect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation, bursting, ignition, liquid leakage or deformation, and lead to injury, fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment. 

- Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation. 

   - An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents. 

- Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time. (i.e. from a programming tool and a GOT) 

Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program. 

## **STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS** 

**==> picture [273 x 37] intentionally omitted <==**

• Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette. If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC’s power is on, the data in the memory may be destroyed, or the memory cassette may be damaged. • Do not disassemble or modify the PLC. Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions. For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. • Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. • Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. - Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards, and special adapters - Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks 

- Battery and memory cassette 

**DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS** • Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other waste according to local regulations. (For details of the Battery Directive in EU countries, refer to Appendix E) 

|**TRANSPORTATION AND**|**TRANSPORTATION AND**|||
|---|---|---|---|
|**STORAGE PRECAUTIONS**||||
|•|When transporting the FX3GSeries PLC incorporating the optional battery, turn on the PLC before shipment, confirm that the battery|||
||mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is|OFF, and check the battery life.||
||If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted, the battery-backed data may be unstable during|||
||transportation.|||
|•|The PLC is a precision instrument. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifications|||
||(section 4.1). Failure to do so may cause failures in|the PLC.||
||After transportation, verify the operations of the PLC.|||
|•|When transporting lithium batteries, follow required|transportation regulations.||
||(For details of the regulated products, refer toAppendix D)|||



**194** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 

_14.1 Preparation for Test Operation_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**15** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**17** 

**19** 

## **14.1 Preparation for Test Operation** 

## **14.1.1 Preliminary inspection [power OFF]** 

Incorrect connection of the power supply terminal, contact of the DC input wire and power supply wire, or short-circuiting of output wires may result in serious damage. 

Before applying power, check that the power supply and ground terminals are connected correctly and input/ output devices are wired properly. 

## **Notes** 

The dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance test of the PLC should be measured in accordance with the following procedures. 

- 1) Remove all input/output wires and power supply wires from the PLC. 

**13** 

- 2) Connect a crossing wire to each of the PLC terminals (power supply terminal, input terminals and output terminals) except the ground terminal. For the dielectric withstand voltage test of each terminal, refer to the generic specifications for the product.(refer to Section 4.1) 

- 3) Measure the dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance between each terminal and the ground terminal. Dielectric withstand voltage: 1.5kV AC or 500V for 1min (The terminals vary in dielectric withstand voltage.) 

   - Insulation resistance: 500V DC/5M or more 

**14** 

## **14.1.2 Connection to built-in programming connector (RS-422)** 

## **1. When connecting a peripheral device** 

Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device. 

At connection, align the "positioning mark" between the cable and the main unit. 

**==> picture [300 x 170] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Programming<br>connector<br>(RS-422)<br>Positioning mark<br>Communication cable<br>Positioning mark<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. For continuous use of a peripheral device (such as GOT)** 

Cut off the area shown in the left figure below of the peripheral device connector cover (main unit) using a nipper, etc., and connect the peripheral device as shown in the right figure below. 

**==> picture [307 x 193] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Peripheral device<br>connecting  Connection example<br>connector cover<br>Communication<br>cable<br>Cut off the dotted<br>line area.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**==> picture [37 x 53] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal Block<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**195** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.1 Preparation for Test Operation_ 

## **3. For continuous use of  a peripheral device (such as GOT) (using the connector conversion adapter)** 

Cut off the area shown in the left figure below of the connector conversion adapter using a nipper, etc., and connect the peripheral device as shown in the right figure below. 

**==> picture [339 x 188] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Connection example<br>Communication<br>cable<br>Cut off the dotted<br>line area.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **14.1.3 Connection to built-in programming connector (USB)** 

Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device (personal computer). At connection, confirm the cable and connector shape. 

**==> picture [297 x 199] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Programming<br>connector<br>(USB)<br>MINI USB<br>B type 5pin(female)<br>MINI USB<br>B type<br>5pin(male)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**196** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 

_14.1 Preparation for Test Operation_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**17** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **14.1.4 Writing of program and program check [power ON and PLC stopped]** 

## **1 Turn on the PLC power.** 

Make sure that the RUN/STOP switch of the PLC is set to STOP, and turn the power on. 

## **2 Check the program.** 

Check for circuit errors and grammatical errors with the program check function of the programming tool. 

## **3 Transfer the sequence program.** 

Write the program to the PLC with the programming tool. 

## **When the memory cassette is used** 

Make sure to set the PROTECT switch of the memory cassette to OFF (shown right). 

→ **For details on handling of the memory cassette, refer to Chapter 21.** 

## **4 Verify the sequence program.** 

**==> picture [83 x 109] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PROTECT switch<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**14** 

**15** 

Verify that the program has been correctly written to the PLC. 

## **5 Execute PLC diagnosis.** 

Check for errors in the PLC main body with the PLC diagnostic function of the programming tool. 

→ **For details on the PLC diagnosis with the display module or GX Developer, refer to Section 14.6.** 

## **16** 

## **18** 

**197** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.2 Running and Stopping Procedures [Power ON]_ 

## **14.2 Running and Stopping Procedures [Power ON]** 

## **14.2.1 Methods of running and stopping** 

FX3G PLCs can be started or stopped by any of the following three methods. Two of the methods can be combined. 

The RUN/STOP switch is located under the peripheral device connector cover. 

## **1. Operation with built-in RUN/STOP switch** 

Operate the RUN/STOP switch on the front panel of the main unit to start and stop the PLC (refer to the right figure). 

Turn the switch to RUN, and the PLC will start. Turn it to STOP, and the PLC will stop. 

**==> picture [78 x 129] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
RUN/STOP switch<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Running and stopping with general-purpose input (RUN terminal)** 

## **Operation with one switch (RUN)** 

One of the input terminals X000 to X017[*1] of the main unit can be used as a RUN input terminal by a parameter setting (refer to the figure below). 

When the specified input terminal is turned on, the PLC starts. When it is turned off, the PLC is started or stopped depending on the state of the built-in RUN/STOP switch. 

*1. X000 to X007 in 14-point type main units, and X000 to X015 in 24-point type main units 

→ **For details, refer to "Kinds of Parameters and Settings" in Programming Manual.** 

**==> picture [440 x 114] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
RUN General-purpose input terminalspecified as RUN input by RUN General-purpose input terminalspecified as RUN input by<br>parameter parameter<br>S/S X000 X001 X002 S/S X000 X001 X002<br>Main unit(sink input) Main unit(source input)<br>24V 0V 24V 0V<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Operation with two switches (RUN and STOP)** 

The PLC can be started and stopped with individual RUN and STOP pushbutton switches. For this operation, a sequence program using M8035 to M8037 is necessary. 

→ **For details, refer to "Operations of Special Devices" in Programming Manual.** 

**==> picture [457 x 114] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
General-purpose input terminal General-purpose input terminal<br>RUN STOP specified as RUN input by RUN STOP specified as RUN input by<br>parameter parameter<br>S/S X000 X001 X002 S/S X000 X001 X002<br>Main unit(sink input) Main unit(source input)<br>24V 0V 24V 0V<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**198** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.2 Running and Stopping Procedures [Power ON]_ 

**11** 

**13** 

**14** 

**16 17** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **3. Starting and stopping by remote control from programming software** 

The programming software has a function to forcibly start and stop the PLC by remote control (remote RUN/ STOP function). 

However, when power is reapplied, the remote RUN/STOP function is disabled. The RUN/STOP status is then determined by the RUN/STOP switch or RUN terminal. 

For details on the start and stop procedures with remote control from programming software, refer to Paragraph 2 of Subsection 14.2.2. 

## **12** 

## **14.2.2 Use of several running/stopping methods** 

## **1. When the built-in RUN/STOP switch and the general-purpose RUN terminal are used** 

(without remote running/stopping operation from the programming software) 

The RUN/STOP status of the PLC is determined by the conditions shown in the following table. 

|**Condition of built-in RUN/STOP switch**|**Condition of general-purpose input terminal**<br>**specified as RUN terminal by parameter**|**Status of PLC**|
|---|---|---|
|RUN|OFF|RUN|
||ON|RUN|
|STOP|OFF|STOP|
||ON|RUN|



Use either built-in RUN/STOP switch or the general input specified as RUN terminal. 

(When specifying the general-purpose terminal as the RUN terminal, always set the built-in RUN/STOP switch to STOP.) 

## **2. When the remote running/stopping operation from the programming software is performed** 

## **15** 

For this operation, keep both the built-in RUN/STOP switch and the general-purpose input RUN terminal in the STOP position. 

If the stop command is given from the programming software after the PLC is started by either the built-in RUN/STOP switch or the general-purpose input RUN terminal, the PLC will be restored to the running status by giving the RUN command from the programming software. This can also be accomplished by setting the built-in RUN/STOP switch or the general-purpose input RUN terminal to STOP and then to RUN. 

**16** 

## **18** 

**199** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.3 Operation and Test [Power ON and PLC Running]_ 

## **14.3 Operation and Test [Power ON and PLC Running]** 

## **14.3.1 Self-diagnostic function** 

When the PLC’s power is turned on, its self-diagnostic function starts automatically. If there are no problems with the hardware, parameters or program, the PLC will start and the RUN command (refer to Section 14.2) is given (RUN LED is lit). If any problems are found, the "ERR" LED flashes or lights. 

## **14.3.2 Test functions** 

Functions of the programming tool to turn on/off the PLC devices and change the current values/settings are effective or ineffective depending on the PLC status as shown below. 

||: Effective<br>: Conditionallyeffective   - : Ineffective|: Effective<br>: Conditionallyeffective   - : Ineffective|: Effective<br>: Conditionallyeffective   - : Ineffective|
|---|---|---|---|
||**Item**|**In running**<br>**status**|**In stopped**<br>**status**|
|Forcible ON/OFF*1|Devices used in program|*1|*1|
||Devices not in use|||
|Change of current values of timers, counters,<br>data registers, extension registers, extension<br>file registers and file registers*4|Devices used in program|*2*3|*3|
||Devices not in use|*3|*3|
|Change of settings of timers and counters*5|When the program memory is the built-in EEPROM|||
||When the program memory is in the memory cassette<br>and the PROTECT switch is on|-|-|
||When the program memory is in the memory cassette<br>and the PROTECT switch is off|||



- *1. Forcible ON/OFF 

   - The forcible ON/OFF function is effective on the input relays (X), output relays (Y), auxiliary relays (M), state (S), timers (T) and counters (C). On the display module, the function cannot be operated for the input relays (X). 

   - The forcible ON/OFF function can turn on or off the devices only for one scan. 

      - While the PLC is running, the function is substantially effective in clearing the current values of the timers (T), counters (C), data registers (D), index registers (Z and V) and extension registers (R) and in controlling the SET/RST circuit and self-retaining circuit. (The operation to forcibly turn on timers is effective only when the timers are driven by the program.) 

   - The results of forcible ON/OFF operation performed while the PLC in the stopped state or performed for devices not used in the program are retained. 

      - However, the results of the operation performed for the input relays (X) are not retained because the relays refresh input even while the PLC is in the stopped state. (They are updated according to the input terminal conditions.) 

- *2. Since the current values may be changed according to MOV instruction in the program and the operation results, the most recently obtained values are retained. 

- *3. Only display modules can change the current value by the extension file register test function. 

- *4. The current values of the file registers stored in the program memory cannot be monitored or tested on the display module. 

- *5. Change of timer and counter settings 

The settings of the timers (T) and counters (C) can be changed only when the timers are driven by the program. 

**200** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.3 Operation and Test [Power ON and PLC Running]_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**16 17** 

**16** 

## **14.3.3 Program modification function** 

The sequence program can be transferred while the PLC is running or in the stopped state as shown below. 

: Effective   - : Ineffective 

|**Item**||**In running**<br>**status**|**In stopped**<br>**status**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Batch writing of file registers (D) and extension file registers (ER)||-||
|Writing of program to PLC<br>Partial modification of p<br>Modification of whole pr|rogram|*1||
||ogram (batch writing)|-||
|Writing of parameters to PLC||-||
|Writing of comments to PLC||-||



*1. Since the writing function is used during running, the programming tool must support the write during RUN function, such as GX Works2 or GX Developer. 

→ **For the writing function during running, refer to Subsection 5.2.5.** 

## **14.3.4 Built-in variable analog potentiometer function** 

The main unit has two built-in variable analog potentiometers (shown in the figure below). The current value increases from 0 to 255 when a variable analog potentiometer is turned clockwise. 

**==> picture [280 x 148] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Enlarged view<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**15** 

The current value of each variable analog potentiometer is stored in special data registers shown below. 

|**Volume**|**Data register to store current**|
|---|---|
|VR1 : variable analog potentiometer1|D8030 (Integer from 0 to 255)|
|VR2 : variable analog potentiometer2|D8031 (Integer from 0 to 255)|



**17** 

## **1. Use example 1 of variable analog potentiometer** 

The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of a timer. 

D8030 The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of the timer T0. T0 The setting range in this example using T0 (100ms timer) is from 0 to 25.5 sec. 

**18** 

## **2. Use example 2 of variable analog potentiometer** 

The current value of VR2 multiplied by "10" is used as the set value of a timer. 

M8000 

MUL D8031 K10 D0 The value of D8031 is multiplied by "10", and stored in D0. D0 The current value of VR2 multiplied by "10" is used as the T1 set value of the timer T1. The setting range in this example using T1 (100ms timer) is from 0 to 255 sec. 

**19** 

**20** 

**201** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection_ 

## **14.4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection** 

This PLC does not incorporate consumable parts that are factors in the reduction of service life. However, the output relays (points of contact) and batteries (option) have a limited life expectancy. 

## **14.4.1 Procedures for checking model name** 

The model name of the main unit can be checked on the nameplate on the right side. After extension devices are connected, the nameplate cannot be seen. Check the model name in the following places. 

**==> picture [384 x 142] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
When the top cover is removed<br>Model name Model name<br>(abbreviation)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **14.4.2 Periodic inspection - battery life, etc.** 

## **1. Battery** 

|**Part**<br>|**Life**<br> <br>|
|---|---|
|Model FX3U-32BL battery|<br>Standard life: 5 years (at ambient temperature of 25 C (77 F))|



## **Standard life of FX3U-32BL: 5 years (at ambient temperature of 25 C (77 F))** 

→ **For details on the standard life and recommended replacement frequency, refer to Subsection** 

**22.4.1.** 

## **2. Other devices** 

When inspecting the battery, check the following points. 

- Check that the temperature in the panel is not abnormally increased by other heat generating bodies or direct sunlight. 

- Check that dust or conductive dust has not entered the panel. 

- Check for loosening of wiring and other abnormalities. 

## **3. Battery Replacement** 

When the battery voltage drops while the PLC power is on, the "ALM" LED on the panel is lit in red, and M8005 and M8006 (latch) are turned on. 

The memory can be retained for about one month after the lamps turn on. However, the operators may not immediately find the lamps to be on. Prepare a new battery promptly, and replace the battery with the new one. 

→ **For details on the specifications and functions of the battery, refer to 22. Battery** 

## **Caution** 

Select the battery mode using a parameter when using the battery.If the battery mode is not selected, the data is not backed up, and the "ALM" LED on the panel does not light. 

→ **For the battery mode setting method, refer to Subsection 22.3.2.** 

**202** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 

_14.4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**14** 

**16 17** 

**19 20** 

## **14.4.3 Maintenance -  product life of relay contacts** 

The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used. Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life. 

## **1. Inductive load** 

Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown, which may cause arcing. At a fixed current consumption, as the power factor (phase between current and voltage) gets smaller, the arc energy gets larger. 

- 1) Main units and Input/output powered extension units and input/output extension blocks 

→ **For the applicable models, refer to Chapter 3.** 

The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads, such as contactors and solenoid valves, is 500,000 operations at 20VA. 

**13** 

The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test. 

## **Test condition: 1 sec. ON / 1 sec.OFF** 

||**Load capacity**|**Contact life**|
|---|---|---|
|20VA|0.2A/100V AC|3,000,000 times|
||0.1A/200V AC||
|35VA|0.35A/100V AC|1,000,000 times|
||0.17A/200V AC||
|80VA|0.8A/100V AC|200,000 times|
||0.4A/200V AC||



**15** 

- 2) FX Series terminal blocks 

→ **For the applicable models, refer to Chapter 3.** 

The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads, such as contactors and solenoid valves, is 500,000 operations at 35VA. 

The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test. 

## **Test condition: 1 sec. ON / 1 sec.OFF** 

||**Load capacity**|**Contact life**|
|---|---|---|
|35VA|0.35A/100V AC|3,000,000 times|
||0.17A/200V AC||
|80VA|0.8A/100V AC|1,000,000 times|
||0.4A/200V AC||
|120VA|1.2A/100V AC|200,000 times|
||0.6A/200V AC||



**16** 

**17** 

The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush overcurrent is shut down. 

Please refer to the following measures regarding the inductive load. 

→ **For precautions on the main unit, Input/output extension units, Input/output extension block,** 

## **18** 

**refer to Subsection 12.1.3-2.** 

→ **For precautions on inductive loads for the terminal block, refer to Subsection 20.7.4-2.** Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation. Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load. 

**19** 

**20** 

**203** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 

_14.4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection_ 

## **2. Lamp load** 

Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current. Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load. 

## **3. Capacitive load** 

Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current. Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load. Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters. 

* About the maximum load specifications of the resistance load, refer to the specification for each model. 

→ **For specifications on the main unit, refer to Subsection 4.4.1.** 

→ **For specifications on the input/output powered extension units, refer to Chapter 15.** → **For specifications on the input/output extension blocks, refer to Chapter 16.** → **For specifications on the terminal block, refer to Chapter 20.** 

**204** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 

_14.5 Troubleshooting with LEDs_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **14.5 Troubleshooting with LEDs** 

When trouble occurs, check the LEDs on the PLC to identify the problem with the PLC. 

## **14.5.1 POW LED [on/flashing/off]** 

|**State of**<br>**LED**|**State of PLC**|**Remedies**|
|---|---|---|
|On|Power of the specified voltage is being correctly<br>supplied to the power supply terminal.|The power supply is normal.|
|Flashing|One of the following problems may have<br>occurred.<br>•<br>Power of the specified voltage and current is<br>not being supplied to the power supply<br>terminal.<br>•<br>External wiring is incorrect.<br>•<br>Internal error of PLC|•<br>Check the supply voltage.<br>•<br>After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable, re-apply<br>power to the PLC, and check for changes in the state. If the problem<br>persists, consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.|
|Off|One of the following problems may have<br>occurred.<br>•<br>The power supply is off.<br>•<br>External wiring is incorrect.<br>•<br>Power of the specified voltage is not being<br>supplied to the power supply terminal.<br>•<br>The power cable is broken.|•<br>If the power is not off, check the power supply and the power supply<br>route.<br>If power is being supplied correctly, consult your local Mitsubishi<br>Electric representative.<br>•<br>After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable, re-apply<br>power to the PLC, and check for changes in the state. If the problem<br>persists, consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.|



## **14.5.2 ALM LED [on/off]** 

This LED is valid when the optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected using a parameter. 

|**State of**<br>**LED**|**State of PLC**|**Remedies**|
|---|---|---|
|On|The battery voltage is low.|Immediately replace the battery. (Refer to Section 22.5.)|
|Off|The battery voltage is higher than the value set<br>with D8006.|Normal|
|→**For details on the battery, refer to Chapter 22.**|||



## **18** 

**205** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 

_14.5 Troubleshooting with LEDs_ 

## **14.5.3 ERR LED [on/flashing/off]** 

|**State of**<br>**LED**|**State of PLC**|**Remedies**|
|---|---|---|
|On|A watchdog timer error may have occurred, or<br>the hardware of the PLC may be damaged.|1)<br>Stop the PLC, and re-apply power.<br>If ERR LED goes off, a watchdog timer error may have occurred.<br>Take any of the following measures.<br>-<br>Review the program.<br>The maximum value (D8012) of the scan time should not exceed<br>the setting (D8000) of the watchdog timer.<br>-<br>Check that the input used for input interruption or pulse catch is<br>not being abnormally turned on and off in one scan.<br>-<br>Check that the frequency of the pulse (duty of 50%) input to the<br>high-speed counter does not exceed the specified range.<br>-<br>Add the WDT instructions.<br>Add some WDT instructions to the program, and reset the<br>watchdog timer several times in one scan.<br>-<br>Change the setting of the watchdog timer.<br>Change the watchdog timer setting (D8000) in the program so<br>that the setting is larger than the maximum value of the scan time<br>(D8012).<br>2)<br>Remove the PLC and supply power to it from another power supply<br>on a desk.<br>If the ERR LED goes off, noise may have affected the PLC.<br>Take the following measures.<br>-<br>Check the ground wiring, and reexamine the wiring route and<br>installation location.<br>-<br>Fit a noise filter onto the power supply line.<br>3)<br>If the ERR LED does not go off even after the measures stated in<br>(1) and (2) are taken, consult your local Mitsubishi Electric<br>representative.|
|Flashing|One of the following errors has occurred in the<br>PLC.<br>•<br>Parameter error<br>•<br>Syntax error<br>•<br>Ladder error|Perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool.<br>For the remedies, refer to 14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and<br>Representation of Error Codes.|
|Off|No errors that stop the PLC have occurred.|If the operations of the PLC are abnormal, perform PLC diagnosis and<br>program check with the programming tool.<br>An I/O error, Comms.error or Runtime error may have occurred.|



**206** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

**11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19** 

## **14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes** 

Error codes can be checked with the programming tool and display module. 

## **14.6.1 Operation and check by GX Developer** 

## **1 Connect the personal computer and the PLC.** 

## **2 Execute the PLC diagnosis.** 

> Click [Diagnostics] ~~>~~ [PLC diagnostics] on the tool menu, and the diagnosis of PLC will start. 

## **3 Check the results of diagnosis.** 

Display the following window to check the errors. 

Example: one error occurs 

**==> picture [443 x 83] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
The LED status Catt Stop monitor<br>of FX PCL is<br>displayed. MB ProG.e P<br>PLC error | Open the help window of GX<br>Error indication Developer to check the error details.<br>Current error<br>[Year/s]<br>The error in PLC (No.1 | Detail6611  | [___Etormessage__—|_Emrorstep_|] Ladder error 0 2005-<br>is displayed.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [20 x 14] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
20<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [70 x 9] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Example: No error<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [7 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal Block<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**207** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

## **14.6.2 Operation and check on display module (FX3G-5DM)** 

- 1) Move the cursor to "ErrorCheck" pressing the + or - button on the menu screen (shown right). For the menu structure, refer to Section 19.5. 

Mo n i t o r / T e s t E r r o r C h e c k L ANGUAGE C o n t r a s t C l o c k Me n u K e y w o r d C a s s e t t e 

The buttons on the menu screen work as stated below. 

|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|
|ESC|The screen returns to the top screen (time display).|
|-|The cursor moves upward. When the button is held for<br>1 second or more, the cursor moves quickly.<br>When the cursor is in the uppermost position, the<br>button is ineffective.|
|+|The cursor moves downward. When the button is held<br>for 1 second or more, the cursor moves quickly.<br>When the cursor is in the lowermost position, the button<br>is ineffective.|
|OK|The flashing item at the cursor is selected.|



- 2) When the OK button is pressed, an error check is performed. The results are displayed on the error display screen (shown to the right). 

|When no err|When no err|When no err|When no err|When no err|When no err|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|E<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r<br><br>C<br>e<br><br>r<br>o<br>N||h<br>e<br>k<br>c<br>o<br>r<br>r s||||
|When 1 error||||||
|E|M<br>0<br>8<br>5<br>6<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r<br><br>C<br>E<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r|h<br>e<br>k<br>c||||
||||6 5 0 8<br>e|||
|||c o<br><br>d||||
|||||||
|||||||
|When multiple errors||||||
|E|M<br>0<br>8<br>0<br>6<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r<br><br>C<br>E<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r|h<br>e<br>k<br>c|/<br>1<br>2|||
|||||||
|||||||
|||c o<br><br>d||||
|||||||
|||||||
||-|+<br>||||
|E|M<br>0<br>8<br>3<br>6<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r<br><br>C<br>E<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r|h<br>e<br>k<br>c|/<br>2<br>2|||
|||||||
|||||||
|||c o<br><br>d||||
|||||||



   - Pressing the ESC button on the menu screen cancels the operation and returns the screen to the top screen (time display). 

- 3) If some errors have occurred, the pages can be switched with the + or - button. 

|**Button**|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|---|
|ESC||The screen returns to the Menu screen.|
|-|1 error or<br>less|Ineffective operation|
||2 errors<br>or more|The previous page of the error display screen is<br>displayed.|
|+|1 error or<br>less|Ineffective operation|
||2 errors<br>or more|The following page of the error display screen is<br>displayed.|
||OK|The screen returns to the Menu screen.|



## Displayed data 

||**Display Content**|
|---|---|
|[1]|Flag of occurred error|
|[2]|Error code|
|[3]|Number of simultaneously occurring errors<br>(displayed only when more than one error has occurred)|



- 4) Pressing the ESC button cancels the operation and returns the screen to the Menu screen. 

**208** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **14.6.3 Representation of errors** 

Errors are represented in this manual, GX Works2, and GX Developer as shown in the following table. 

- Comparison between this manual and GX Works2 

|**This manual**|**GX Works2**|
|---|---|
||**SW**<br>**DNC-GXW2-E(Ver. 1.87R)**|
|I/O configuration error|I/O Configuration Error|
|PLC hardware error|PLC Hardware Error|
|PLC/PP communication error|PLC/PP Communication Error|
|Serial communication error 1 [ch1]|Link Error|
|Serial communication error 2 [ch2]|Serial Communication Error 2[ch2]|
|Parameter error|Parameter Error|
|Syntax error|Syntax Error|
|Circuit error|Ladder Error|
|Operation error|Operation Error|
|Special block error|Special Block Error|
|Special parameter error|Special Parameter Error|



- Comparison between this manual and GX Developer 

|**This manual**|**GX Developer**|
|---|---|
||**SW**<br>**D5C-GPPW-E(Ver. 8.95Z)**|
|I/O configuration error|I/O config err|
|PLC hardware error|PLC H/W error|
|PLC/PP communication error|PLC/PP comm err|
|Serial communication error 1 [ch1]|Link error|
|Serial communication error 2 [ch2]|Link Error 2|
|Parameter error|Param error|
|Syntax error|Syntax error|
|Circuit error|Ladder error|
|Operation error|Operation err|
|Special block error|SFB Error|
|Special parameter error|-|



**209** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

## **14.6.4 Error Code List and Action** 

When a program error occurs in the PLC, the error code is stored in special data registers D8060 to D8067, D8438 and D8449. Take action based on the following information. 

|**Error**<br>**code**|**PLC**<br>**operation**<br>**at error**<br>**occurrence**|**Contents of error**|**Action**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**I/O configuration error [M8060(D8060)]**||||
|Ex-<br>ample:<br>1020|Continues<br>operation|The head number of unconnected I/O devic<br>•<br>1st to 3rd digits: Device number<br>•<br>4th digit: I/O type<br>(1 = input (X), 0 = output (Y))<br>Example: When 1020 is stored in D8060<br>Inputs X020 and later are unconnected.<br>1<br>0<br>2<br>0<br>1: Input (X), 0: Output (Y)<br>Device number: 10 to 177<br>Example: When X020 is unconnected<br>BCD conversion value|Unconnected I/O relay numbers are programmed.<br>The PLC continues its operation. Modify the program, check<br>wiring connection, or add the appropriate unit/block.|
|**Serial communication error 2 [M8438 (D8438)]**||||
|0000|—|No error||
|3801|Continues<br>operation|Parity, overrun or framing error|•<br>Inverter communication, computer link and programming:<br>Ensure the communication parameters are correctly set<br>according to their applications.<br>•<br>N:N network, parallel link, etc.:<br>Check programs according to the applications.<br>•<br>Remote maintenance:<br>Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the<br>AT commands.<br>•<br>Wiring:<br>Check the communication cables for correct wiring.|
|3802||Communication character error||
|3803||Communication data sum check error||
|3804||Communication data format error||
|3805||Command error||
|3806||Communication time-out detected||
|3807||Modem initialization error||
|3808||N:N network parameter error||
|3809||N:N Network setting error||
|3812||Parallel link character error||
|3813||Parallel link sum error||
|3814||Parallel link format error||
|3820||Inverter communication error||
|3840||Special adapter connection error|Check connection of the special adapter.|
|**PLC hardware error [M8061(D8061)]**||||
|0000|—|No error||
|6101|Stops<br>operation|Memory access error|When the memory cassette is used, check whether it is<br>mounted correctly.<br>If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used,<br>something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC. Consult<br>your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.|
|6102||Operation circuit error|Isolate the PLC and supply power to it using a different power<br>supply.<br>If the ERR LED turns OFF, noise may be affecting the PLC.<br>Take the following measures.<br>-<br>Check the ground wiring, and reexamine the wiring<br>route and installation location.<br>-<br>Fit a noise filter onto the power supply line.<br>If the ERR LED does not turn OFF even after the above<br>actions are taken, consult your local Mitsubishi Electric<br>representative.|
|6103||I/O bus error (M8069 = ON)|Verify that extension cables are correctly connected.|
|6104||Powered extension unit 24 V failure (M8069 = ON)||
|6105||Watchdog timer error|Check user program.<br>The scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000.|
|6106||I/O table creation error (CPU error)|When turning the power ON to the main unit, a 24V power<br>failure occurs in a powered extension unit. (The error occurs if<br>the 24V power is not supplied for 10 seconds or more after the<br>main power is turned ON.)|



**210** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

**11** 

|**Error**<br>**code**|**PLC**<br>**operation**<br>**at error**<br>**occurrence**|**Contents of error**|**Action**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**PLC hardware error [M8061(D8061)]**||||
|6107|Stops<br>operation|System configuration error|Check the number of the connected special function blocks.<br>For certain special function blocks, the connectable number is<br>limited.|
|**PLC/PP communication error (D8062)**||||
|0000|—|No error||
|6201|Continues<br>operation|Parity, overrun or framing error|Check the cable connection between the programming panel<br>(PP) / programming device and the PLC. This error may occur<br>when a cable is disconnected and reconnected during PLC<br>monitoring.|
|6202||Communication character error||
|6203||Communication data sum check error||
|6204||Data format error||
|6205||Command error||
|**Serial communication error 1 [M8063 (D8063)]**||||
|0000|—|No error||
|6301|Continues<br>operation|Parity, overrun or framing error|•<br>Inverter communication, computer link and programming:<br>Ensure that the communication parameters are correctly<br>set according to their applications.<br>•<br>N:N network, parallel link, etc.:<br>Check programs according to applications.<br>•<br>Remote maintenance:<br>Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the<br>AT commands.<br>•<br>Wiring:<br>Check the communication cables for correct wiring.|
|6302||Communication character error||
|6303||Communication data sum check error||
|6304||Communication data format error||
|6305||Command error||
|6306||Communication time-out detected||
|6307||Modem initialization error||
|6308||N:N network parameter error||
|6309||N:N Network setting error||
|6312||Parallel link character error||
|6313||Parallel link sum error||
|6314||Parallel link format error||
|6320||Inverter communication error||
|6340||Special adapter connection error|Check connection of the special adapter.|
|**Parameter error [M8064(D8064)]**||||
|0000|—|No error||
|6401|Stops<br>operation|Program sum check error|STOP the PLC, and correctly set the parameters.|
|6402||Memory capacity setting error||
|6403||Latched device area setting error||
|6404||Comment area setting error||
|6405||File register area setting error||
|6406||Special unit (BFM) initial value setting, positioning instruction<br>setting sum check error||
|6407||Special unit (BFM) initial value setting, positioning instruction<br>setting error||
|6409||Other setting error||
|6420||Special parameter sum check error|•<br>STOP the PLC, and correctly set the special parameters.<br>•<br>Set special parameters correctly, turn OFF the power, and<br>then turn ON the power.|
|6421||Special parameters setting error|•<br>Check the contents of the special parameter error code<br>(D8489), confirm troubleshooting for special adapters/<br>special blocks, and set special parameters correctly.<br>•<br>Set special parameters correctly, turn OFF the power, and<br>then turn ON the power.|



**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**211** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

|**Error**<br>**code**|**PLC**<br>**operation**<br>**at error**<br>**occurrence**|**Contents of error**|**Action**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**Syntax error [M8065(D8065)]**||||
|0000|—|No error||
|6501|Stops<br>operation|Incorrect combination of instruction, device symbol and device<br>number|During programming, each instruction is checked. If a syntax<br>error is detected, modify the instruction correctly.|
|6502||No OUT T or OUT C before setting value||
|6503||No setting value after OUT T or OUT C<br>Insufficient number of operands for an applied instruction||
|6504||Same label number is used more than once.<br>Same interrupt input or high-speed counter input is used more<br>than once.||
|6505||Device number is out of allowed range.||
|6506||Invalid instruction||
|6507||Invalid label number [P]||
|6508||Invalid interrupt input [I]||
|6509||Other error||
|6510||MC nesting number error||
|**Circuit error [M8066(D8066)]**||||
|0000|—|No error||
|6610|Stops<br>operation|LD, LDI is continuously used 9 times or more.|This error occurs when a combination of instructions is<br>incorrect in the entire circuit block or when the relationship<br>between a pair of instructions is incorrect.<br>Modify the instructions in the program mode so that their<br>mutual relationship becomes correct.|
|6611||More ANB/ORB instructions than LD/LDI instructions||
|6612||Less ANB/ORB instructions than LD/LDI instructions||
|6613||MPS is continuously used 12 times or more.||
|6614||No MPS instruction||
|6615||No MPP instruction||
|6616||No coil between MPS, MRD and MPP, or incorrect<br>combination||
|6617||Instruction below is not connected to bus line:<br>STL, RET, MCR, P, I, DI, EI, FOR, NEXT, SRET, IRET, FEND<br>or END||
|6618||STL, MC or MCR can be used only in main program, but it is<br>used elsewhere (e.g. in interrupt routine or subroutine).||
|6619||Invalid instruction is used in FOR-NEXT loop:<br>STL, RET, MC, MCR, I (interrupt pointer) or IRET.||
|6620||FOR-NEXT instruction nesting level exceeded||
|6621||Numbers of FOR and NEXT instructions do not match.||
|6622||No NEXT instruction||
|6623||No MC instruction||
|6624||No MCR instruction||
|6625||STL instruction is continuously used 9 times or more.||
|6626||Invalid instruction is programmed within STL-RET loop:<br>MC, MCR, I (interrupt pointer), SRET or IRET.||
|6627||No STL instruction||
|6628||Invalid instruction is used in main program:<br>I (interrupt pointer), SRET or IRET||
|6629||No P or I (interrupt pointer)||
|6630||No SRET or IRET instruction<br>STL-RET or MC-MCR instructions in subroutine||
|6631||SRET programmed in invalid location||
|6632||FEND programmed in invalid location||



**212** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

|**Error**<br>**code**|**PLC**<br>**operation**<br>**at error**<br>**occurrence**|**Contents of error**|**Action**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**Operation error [M8067(D8067)]**||||
|0000|—|No error||
|6701|Continues<br>operation|•<br>No jump destination (pointer) for CJ or CALL instruction<br>•<br>Label is undefined or out of P0 to P4095 due to indexing.<br>•<br>Label P63 is executed in CALL instruction; cannot be used<br>in CALL instruction as P63 is for jumping to END<br>instruction.|This error occurs in the execution of operation. Review the<br>program and check the contents of the operands used in<br>applied instructions.<br>Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct, an operation<br>error may still occur.<br>For example:<br>"T300Z" itself is not an error. But if Z had a value of 100, the<br>timer T400 would attempt to be accessed. This would cause<br>an operation error since there is no T400 device available.|
|6702||CALL instruction nesting level is 6 or more||
|6703||Interrupt nesting level is 3 or more||
|6704||FOR-NEXT instruction nesting level is 6 or more.||
|6705||Operand of applied instruction is inapplicable device.||
|6706||Device number range or data value for operand of applied<br>instruction exceeds limit.||
|6707||File register is accessed without parameter setting of file<br>register.||
|6708||FROM/TO instruction error|This error occurs in the execution of operation.<br>•<br>Review the program and check the contents of the<br>operands used in applied instructions.<br>•<br>Verify that the specified buffer memories exist in the<br>counterpart equipment.<br>•<br>Verify that extension cables are correctly connected.|
|6709||Other (e.g. improper branching)|This error occurs in the execution of operation. Review the<br>program and check the contents of the operands used in<br>applied instructions.<br>Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct, an operation<br>error may still occur.<br>For example:<br>"T300Z" itself is not an error. But if Z had a value of 100, the<br>timer T400 would attempt to be accessed. This would cause<br>an operation error since there is no T400 device available.|
|6710||Mismatch among parameters|This error occurs when the same device is used within the<br>source and destination in a shift instruction, etc.|
|6730||Incorrect sampling time (TS) (TS0)|<PID instruction is stopped.><br>This error occurs in the parameter setting value or operation<br>data executing PID instruction.<br>Check the contents of the parameters.|
|6732||Incompatible input filter constant ( )<br>( < 0 or 100  )||
|6733||Incompatible proportional gain (KP) (KP< 0)||
|6734||Incompatible integral time (TI) (TI< 0)||
|6735||Incompatible derivative gain (KD)<br>(KD< 0 or 201  KD)||
|6736||Incompatible derivative time (TD) (TD< 0)||
|6740||Sampling time (TS)  Scan time|<Auto tuning is continued.><br>The operation is continued in the condition "sampling time<br>(TS) = cyclic time (scan time)".|



**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**213** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

|**Error**<br>**code**|**PLC**<br>**operation**<br>**at error**<br>**occurrence**|**Contents of error**|**Action**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**Operation error [M8067(D8067)]**||||
|6742|Continues<br>operation|Variation of measured value exceeds limit.<br>(<br>PV < -32768 or +32767 <<br>PV)|<PID operation is continued.><br>The operation is continued with each parameter set to the<br>maximum or minimum value.|
|6743||Deviation exceeds limit.<br>(EV < -32768 or +32767 < EV)||
|6744||Integral result exceeds limit.<br>(Outside range from -32768 to +32767)||
|6745||Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative gain (KD).||
|6746||Derivative result exceeds limit.<br>(Outside range from -32768 to +32767)||
|6747||PID operation result exceeds limit.<br>(Outside range from -32768 to +32767)||
|6748||PID output upper limit set value < PID output lower limit set<br>value.|<Transpose of output upper limit value and output lower limit<br>value.<br>PID operation is continued.><br>Check whether the target setting contents are correct.|
|6749||Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output<br>variation alarm set value (Set value < 0)|<Alarm output is not given.<br>PID operation is continued.><br>Check whether the target setting contents are correct.|
|6750||<Step response method><br>Improper auto tuning result|<Auto tuning is finished.<br>PID operation is started.><br>•<br>The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less.<br>•<br>The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1/3 or more of the<br>deviation at start of auto tuning.<br>Check the measured value and target value, and then execute<br>auto tuning again.|
|6751||<Step response method><br>Auto tuning operation direction mismatch|<Auto tuning is forcibly finished.<br>PID operation is not<br>started.><br>The operation direction estimated from the measured value at<br>the start of auto tuning was different from the actual operation<br>direction of the output during auto tuning.<br>Correct the relationship among the target value, output value<br>for auto tuning, and the measured value, and then execute<br>auto tuning again.|
|6752||<Step response method><br>Improper auto tuning result|<Auto tuning is finished.<br>PID operation is not started.><br>Because the set value was fluctuated during auto tuning, auto<br>tuning was not executed correctly.<br>Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change<br>cycle, or set a larger value for the input filter constant.<br>After changing the setting, execute auto tuning again.|
|6753||<Limit cycle method><br>Auto tuning operation direction mismatch|<Auto tuning is forcibly finished.<br>PID operation is not<br>started.><br>Check whether the target setting contents are correct.|
|6754||<Limit cycle method><br>Abnormal PV threshold (hysteresis) set value for auto tuning<br>(SHPV< 0)||
|6755||<Limit cycle method><br>Abnormal auto tuning transfer status<br>(Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally<br>overwritten.)|<Auto tuning is forcibly finished.<br>PID operation is not<br>started.><br>Ensure that devices occupied by PID instruction are not<br>overwritten in the program.|
|6756||<Limit cycle method><br>Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning measurement<br>time ( on > , on < 0,  < 0)|<Auto tuning is forcibly finished.<br>PID operation is not<br>started.><br>The auto tuning time is longer than necessary.<br>Increase the difference (ULV - LLV) between the upper limit<br>and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning, set a<br>smaller value to the input filter constant ( ), or set a smaller<br>value to the PV threshold (SHPV) for auto tuning, and then<br>check the result for improvement.|



**214** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

|**Error**<br>**code**|**PLC**<br>**operation**<br>**at error**<br>**occurrence**|**Contents of error**|**Action**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**Operation error [M8067(D8067)]**||||
|6757|Continues<br>operation|<Limit cycle method><br>Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain. (KP= outside<br>range from 0 to 32767)|<Auto tuning is finished (KP= 32767).<br>PID operation is<br>started.><br>The variation of the measured value (PV) is small compared<br>with the output value. Multiply the measured value (PV) by<br>"10" so that the variation of the measured value will increase<br>during auto tuning.|
|6758||<Limit cycle method><br>Auto tuning result exceeds integral time.<br>(TI= outside range from 0 to 32767)|<Auto tuning is finished (KP= 32767).<br>PID operation is<br>started.><br>The auto tuning time is longer than necessary.<br>Increase the difference (ULV - LLV) between the upper limit<br>and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning, set a<br>smaller value to the input filter constant ( ), or set a smaller<br>value to the PV threshold (SHPV) for auto tuning, and then<br>check the result for improvement.|
|6759||<Limit cycle method><br>Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time.<br>(TD= outside range from 0 to 32767)||
|6760||ABS data read from servo sum check error|Check servo wiring and parameter setting. Also check ABS<br>instruction.|
|6762||Port specified by inverter communication instruction is already<br>used in another communication.|Check to make sure the port is not specified by another<br>instruction.|
|6763||Input (X) specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is already<br>used in another instruction.|Check to make sure the input (X), as specified by DSZR or<br>ZRN instruction, is not being used for the following purposes:<br>-<br>Input interrupt<br>-<br>High-speed counter C235 to C255<br>-<br>Pulse catch M8170 to M8175<br>-<br>SPD instruction|
|6764||Pulse output number is already used in a positioning<br>instruction or pulse output instruction (PLSY, PWM, etc.).|Check to make sure the pulse output destination is not being<br>driven by another positioning instruction.|
|6765||Number of applied instruction exceeds limit.|The number of times an applied instruction is used in the<br>program exceeds the specified limit.|
|6770||EEPROM access error|When the memory cassette is used, check whether it is<br>mounted correctly.<br>If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used,<br>something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC. Consult<br>your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.|
|6772||EEPROM memory cassette is protected against writing.|The write-protect switch of the EEPROM memory cassette<br>was set to ON when data was transferred to the EEPROM<br>memory.|



**17** 

**215** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes_ 

|**Error**<br>**code**|**PLC**<br>**operation**<br>**at error**<br>**occurrence**|**Contents of error**|**Action**|
|---|---|---|---|
|**Special block error [M8449 (D8449)]**||||
|020*1|Continues<br>operation|General data sum error|Verify that extension cables are correctly connected.|
|021*1||General data message error||
|022*1||System access error||
|025*1||Access sum error in other station via CC-Link||
|026*1||Message error in other station via CC-Link||
|080*1||FROM/TO error|This error occurs in the execution of operation.<br>•<br>Review the program and check the contents of the<br>operands used in applied instructions.<br>•<br>Verify that the specified buffer memories exist in the<br>counterpart equipment.<br>•<br>Verify that extension cables are correctly connected.|
|090*1||Peripheral equipment access error|•<br>Check the cable connection between the programming<br>panel (PP) / programming device and the PLC.<br>•<br>Verify that extension cables are correctly connected.|
|**Special parameter err**||**or [M8489 (D8489)]**||
|01*2|Continues<br>operation|Special parameter setting time-out error|Turn OFF the power, and check the power supply and<br>connection of special adapters/special blocks.|
|02*2||Special parameter setting error|Special parameters are set improperly.<br>•<br>Confirm troubleshooting for special adapters/special<br>blocks, and set special parameters correctly.<br>•<br>Set special parameters correctly, turn OFF the power, and<br>then turn ON the power.|
|03*2||Special parameter transfer target unconnected error|Special parameters are set, but special adapters/special<br>blocks are not connected.<br>Check<br>whether<br>special<br>adapters/special<br>blocks<br>are<br>connected.|
|04*2||Special parameter unsupported function|Check that special parameters with unsupported settings are<br>not set for connected special adapters/special blocks.|



- *1. The unit number 0 to 7 of the special function unit/block error is put in . 

*2. " " indicates the following values for each special adapter/special block where an error has occurred. 

If an error has occurred in 2 or more special adapters/special blocks, " " indicates the lowest unit number among the special adapters/special blocks in which an error has occurred. 

|**Value of**��**(decimal)**|**Special adapter/special block where an error has occurred**|
|---|---|
|00|Unit number 0 (Special block)|
|10|Unit number 1 (Special block)|
|20|Unit number 2 (Special block)|
|30|Unit number 3 (Special block)|
|40|Unit number 4 (Special block)|
|50|Unit number 5 (Special block)|
|60|Unit number 6 (Special block)|
|70|Unit number 7 (Special block)|
|81|Communication channel 1 (Special adapter)|
|82|Communication channel 2 (Special adapter)|



**216** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting _14.7 Troubleshooting_ 

**11** 

## **14.7 Troubleshooting** 

→ **For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC, refer to Section 14.2.** → **For the procedures on operating peripheral devices, refer to the manuals for the peripheral devices.** 

## **14.7.1 Output does not operate (main unit and input/output extension blocks)** 

## **1. Output does not turn on.** 

Stop the PLC, and forcibly turn the inoperable output on then off with a peripheral device or the display module to check its operation. 

Check for troubles with external wiring. 

- When the output operates The output may be turned off unintentionally in the program. Reexamine the program. (Duplicate coil or RST instructions) 

- When the output does not operate Check the configuration of the connected devices and the connection of the extension cables. If the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension cables are acceptable, the output circuit may be damaged. Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 

## **2. Output does not turn off.** 

Stop the PLC, and check that the output turns off. Check for trouble with external wiring. 

→ **For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC, refer to Section 14.2.** 

- When the output turns off The output may be turned on unintentionally in the program. Check that there are no duplicate coils in the program. 

- When the output does not turn off 

The output circuit may be damaged. Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 

## **14.7.2 24V DC input does not operate (main unit and input/output extension blocks)** 

## **1. Input does not turn on.** 

**12** 

## **13** 

**14** 

## **14** 

**15 16** 

Disconnect the external wiring and connect the S/S terminal and the 0V terminal or the 24V terminal. 

**17** 

Short-circuit the 0V terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S/S terminal and the input terminal, then check the input display LED or a peripheral device to confirm that the input turns on. 

|cec e npu spay  or a perpera evce o conrm a e npu urns on.<br> **Input does not turn off.**<br>Check for leakage current from input devices.<br>If the leakage current is 15mA or more it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance<br>**Measures**<br>When input turns on<br>Check that the input device does not have a built-in diode or parallel resistance.<br>If so, refer to Subsection 10.2.2.<br>When input does not<br>turn on<br>Measure the voltage between the 0V terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S/S terminal and the input<br>terminal with a tester to confirm that the voltage is 24V DC.<br>•<br>Check the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension<br>cables.|Extension<br>Power Supply<br>Unit||
|---|---|---|
||**18**||
||Other Extension<br>Units and<br>Options||



## **2. Input does not turn off.** 

If the leakage current is 1.5mA or more, it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance. 

**19** 

→ **For details on the measures, refer to Subsection 10.2.2.** 

**20** 

**217** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 

_14.7 Troubleshooting_ 

## **14.7.3 Cautions in registering keyword** 

## **1. Cautions in registering keyword** 

The keyword limits access to the program prepared by the user from peripheral devices. Keep the keyword carefully. 

If you forget the keyword, you cannot operate the PLC online from the programming tool depending on the type of the programming tool and the registered keyword. 

## **2. Caution on using a peripheral device which does not support the second keyword and customer keyword** 

Sequence programs in which the second keyword and customer keyword are registered cannot be all-cleared using a peripheral device that does not support the second keyword and customer keyword (such as GX Developer whose earlier than Ver. 8.72A). 

## **3. Non-resettable protect function** 

When the non-resettable protect function is set, the protect function cannot be reset. 

**218** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**16** 

## **15. Input/Output Powered Extension Units** 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

- 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

- 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

- 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

**14** 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. 

- **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** • Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

- • Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

|•<br>•|Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service power supply) on the main unit or extension units.<br>Doing so may cause damage to the product.<br>Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100<br>or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a<br>wire 2mm2or thicker.|Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service power supply) on the main unit or extension units.<br>Doing so may cause damage to the product.<br>Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100<br>or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a<br>wire 2mm2or thicker.|
|---|---|---|
|•|Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (refer to section 9.3).<br>Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.||
|•<br>•|If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.<br>Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.<br>If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.<br>Do not wire vacant terminals externally.<br>Doing so may damage the product.||
|•|When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting|or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits.|
|•|Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.<br>Make sure to properly wire the FX3GSeries main unit and FX2N/FX3USeries extension equipment in accordance with the following||
||precautions.<br>Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.<br>-<br>The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.<br>-<br>Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.||



**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**219** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.1 Outline_ 

## **15.1 Outline** 

An input/output powered extension unit is used to expand inputs/outputs. 

Power can be supplied to subsequent extension blocks from an input/output powered extension unit with a built-in 24V DC power supply. 

An input/output powered extension unit is required when the capacity of the main unit’s built-in power supply is insufficient for the current consumption demands of the extension blocks. 

## **15.1.1 Product configuration** 

There are various types of input/output powered extension units. They differ in supply voltage, number of input/output points, input form, output form and connection type. 

**==> picture [455 x 149] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Input/output powered extension units<br>Power supply Number of points Input form Output form Co nnection type<br>100 to 240V AC 32 24V DC Relay Terminal block<br>(sink/source)<br>24V DC 48 Triac<br>24V DC<br>(sink)<br>Transistor (sink)<br>100V AC<br>Transistor<br>(source)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **15.1.2 Product list** 

Each model of input/output powered extension unit has a sink and source type and a sink type. If you intend to add input/output powered extension units, we recommend you to add the same types of units as the main unit or the sink and source type. 

||||:Sink [-common],<br>Sink|:Sink [-common],<br>Sink|:Sink [-common],<br>Sink|:Sink [-common],<br>Sink|:Sink [-common],<br>Sink|:Sink [-common],<br>Sink|Sink|:Sink [-common],|:Sink [-common],|<br>Source|<br>Source|<br>Source|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||||||||||||
|**Model**|**Input**||||||||||**Output**|||**Connection**<br>**type**|
||**Type**|**Number**<br>**of points**|**Common wiring**<br>**system**|||||**Type**|||**Number**<br>**of points**|**Common wiring**<br>**system**|||
|**AC power supply co**|**mmon to 24V DC sink and s**||**ource input**||||||||||||
|FX2N-32ER-ES/UL|24V DC|16|Sink<br>Source|||||Relay|||16|-||Terminal<br>block|
|FX2N-48ER-ES/UL||24|Sink<br>Source||||||||24|-|||
|FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL||16|Sink<br>Source|Sink||Source|||||16||Source||
|||||||||Transistor|||||||
|FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL||24|Sink<br>Source|Sink||Source|||||24||Source||
||||||||||||||||
|**AC power supply only for 24V DC sink input**|||||||||||||||
|FX2N-32ER|24V DC|16|Sink|||||Relay|||16|-||Terminal<br>block|
|FX2N-48ER||24|Sink||||||||24|-|||
|FX2N-32ES||16|Sink|||||Triac(SSR)|||16|-|||
|FX2N-32ET||16|Sink|||||Transistor|||16|Sink|||
|FX2N-48ET||24|Sink||||||||24|Sink|||
|**AC power supply only for 100V AC**|||||||||||||||
|FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL|100V AC|24|-|||||Relay|||24|-||Terminal<br>block|
|**DC power supply common to 24V DC sink and s**|||**ource input**||||||||||||
|FX2N-48ER-DS|24V DC|24|Sink<br>Source|||||Relay|||24|-||Terminal<br>block|
|FX2N-48ET-DSS|||Sink<br>Source|Sink||Source||Transistor|||||Source||
||||||||||||||||
|**DC power supply only for 24V DC sink input**|||||||||||||||
|FX2N-48ER-D|24V DC|24|Sink|||||Relay|||24|-||Terminal<br>block|
|FX2N-48ET-D|||Sink|||||Transistor||||Sink|||



**220** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.2 Power supply specifications_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **15.2 Power supply specifications** 

||**Item**|**FX2N-32ER-ES/UL**<br>**FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL**<br>**FX2N-32ER**<br>**FX2N-32ES**<br>**FX2N-32ET**|**FX2N-48ER-ES/UL**<br>**FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL**<br>**FX2N-48ER**<br>**FX2N-48ET**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Classification||FX2Npowered extension unit||
|Supply voltage||100 to 240V AC||
|Allowable supply|voltage range|85 to 264V AC||
|Rated frequency||50/60 Hz||
|Power fuse||250V 3.15A(3A)|250V 5A|
|Rush current|100V AC|Up to 40A, 5ms or less||
||200V AC|Up to 60A, 5ms or less||
|Power consumption||30W|35W|
|24V DC service<br>power supply|Without extension<br>block|24V DC, 250mA or less|24V DC, 460mA or less|
||With extension block|When input/output extension blocks are connected, 24V DC service power is consumed by<br>them.<br>→**For details, refer to Chapter 6.**||
|Connection type||Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||



|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**||**Item**|**FX2N-48ER-DS**<br>**FX2N-48ET-DSS**<br>**FX2N-48ER-D**<br>**FX2N-48ET-D**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Classification||FX2Npowered extension unit||Classification|FX2Npowered extension unit|
|Supply voltage||100 to 240V AC||Supply voltage|24V DC|
|Allowable supply voltage<br>range||85 to 264V AC||Allowable supply voltage<br>range|+20% -30%|
|Power fuse||250V 5A||Power fuse|250V 5A|
|Rush current|100V AC|Up to 40A, 5ms or less||Power consumption|30W|
||200V AC|Up to 60A, 5ms or less||24V DC service power<br>supply|None|
|Power consumption||35W||Connection type|Removable terminal block (M3 screw)|
|24V DC service power<br>supply||None||||
|Connection type||Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||||



## **15.2.1 Weight, accessories, etc.** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-32ER-ES/UL**<br>**FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL**<br>**FX2N-32ER**<br>**FX2N-32ES**<br>**FX2N-32ET**|**FX2N-48ER-ES/UL**<br>**FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL**<br>**FX2N-48ER-DS**<br>**FX2N-48ET-DSS**<br>**FX2N-48ER**<br>**FX2N-48ET**<br>**FX2N-48ER-D**<br>**FX2N-48ET-D**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.65kg (1.43 lbs)|0.85kg (1.87 lbs)|1.00kg (2.2 lbs)|
|Accessories|•<br>Terminal protective cover (2 pcs.)<br>(Fitted to FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ER-<br>UA1/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS and FX2N-48ET-DSS)<br>•<br>Extension cable (55mm (2.16"))<br>Optional extension cables (FX0N-30EC and FX0N-65EC) are available.<br>•<br>Input/output number label|||
|Others|•<br>The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws.<br>•<br>Installation of the DIN46277 (35mm (1.37") wide) rail or screws.|||



**18** 

**221** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.2 Power supply specifications_ 

## **15.2.2 Part names** 

## **1. Front** 

[4] Input display LEDs [1] Top cover [5] Terminal block covers [6] Extension device connecting connector cover [7] POWER LED [2] DIN rail mounting hooks [8] Output display LEDs [3] Model name **[1] Top cover** When adding this to the main unit, connect the supplied extension cable or the optional extension cable to the connector under this top cover. **[2] DIN rail mounting hooks** The input/output powered extension unit can be installed on DIN rail **(2 places)** (35mm (1.38") wide). **[3] Model name** The model name of the input/output powered extension unit is indicated. **[4] Input display LEDs (red)** When an input terminal (X0, X1, etc.) is turned on, the corresponding LED lamps are also turned on. 

The input numbers change depending on input/output allocation. The input/output powered extension unit (48 points type) assigns input numbers in ascending order from A B C below. A C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The covers can be opened about 90 for wiring. 

**[5] Terminal block covers** The covers can be opened about 90 for wiring. Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running (the unit power is on). **[6] Extension device connecting** Connect the extension cable of input/output powered extension unit/block or special **connector cover** function unit/block to the extension device connecting connector under this cover. FX3U Series extension devices, FX2N Series extension devices, are compatible and can be connected. → **For details on extension devices, refer to Chapter 15, Chapter 16 and Section 18.1. [7] POWER LED (green)** The LED lamp is on (green) while the power supply terminal is on. **[8] Output display LEDs (red)** When an output terminal (Y0, Y1, etc.) is turned on, the corresponding LED lamps are also turned on. The output numbers change depending on input/output allocation. The input/output powered extension unit (48 points type) assigns output numbers in ascending order from A B C below. A C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

**222** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units 

_15.2 Power supply specifications_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**14** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

**20** 

## **When the terminal block covers are open** 

[10] Input (X) terminals [11] Terminal block fitting screws [9] Power supply terminal [12] Terminal names [13] Terminal block covers [12] Terminal names [15] Protective terminal [14] Output (Y) terminals covers [11] Terminal block mounting screws **[9] Power supply terminal** Connect the power supply to the input/output powered extension unit at this terminal. **[10] Input (X) terminals** Wire switches and sensors to these terminals. **[11] Terminal block mounting screws** If the input/output powered extension unit must be replaced, loosen these screws to remove the upper part of the terminal block. → **For anchoring the terminal block, refer to Subsection 9.1.2. [12] Terminal names** The signal names for the power supply, input terminals and output terminals are shown. **[13] Terminal block covers** Protects the upper and lower stages of the terminal block. **[14] Output (Y) terminals** Wire the intended loads (contactors, solenoid valves, etc.) to these terminals. **[15] Protective terminal covers** A protective terminal cover (refer to the following drawing) is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block to prevent fingers from touching terminals, thereby improving the safety. (FX2NE -ES(S)/UL, FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL, FX2NE -DS(S)) 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

## **2. Side** 

**==> picture [436 x 132] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[1] Nameplate<br>[2] DIN rail mounting groove<br>[1] Nameplate The product model name, control number and power supply specifications are shown.<br>[2] DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail (35mm (1.38") wide).<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**223** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.3 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS_ 

## **15.3 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS** 

## **15.3.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

→ **For the power supply specifications, refer to Section 15.2.** 

## **2. Input specifications (for sink input and source input)** 

**==> picture [457 x 499] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Item FX2N-32ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS<br>Input points 16 points 24 points<br>Connection type Removable terminal block (M3 screw)<br>Input form sink/source<br>Input signal voltage AC power supply type: 24V DC   10% DC power supply type: 24V DC +20% -30%<br>Input signal current 5mA/24V DC<br>Input impedance 4.3 k<br>Input response Input ON current 3.5mA or more/24V DC<br>time Input OFF current 1.5mA or less<br>Input response time Approx. 10ms<br>No-voltage contact input<br>Input signal form Sink: NPN open collector transistor<br>Source: PNP open collector transistor<br>Input circuit insulation Photo-coupler insulation<br>Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input.<br>• AC power supply type<br>Sink input wiring Source input wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L L<br>N N<br>100 to 240V AC 100 to 240V AC<br>S/S S/S<br>0V 0V<br>24V 24V<br>4.3k 4.3k<br>X X<br>Input circuit diagram • DC power supply type<br>Sink input wiring Source input wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>24V 24V<br>S/S S/S<br>DC DC<br>0V 0V<br>*1 *1<br>24V 24V<br>4.3kΩ 4.3kΩ<br>X X<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


*1. Do not connect with 0V and 24V terminals. 

**224** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.3 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **3. Output specifications (relay output type)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-32ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-32ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-32ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS**|**FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points|16 points|||24 points||
|Connection type|Removable terminal block (M3 screw)|||||
|Output unit|Relay|||||
|External power supply|30V DC or less<br>240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)|||||
|Output circuit insulation|Mechanical insulation|||||
|Indication of output operation|Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.|||||
|Max. load<br>Resistanc<br>Inductive l|e load<br>2A/point<br>The total load current per common ter<br>should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 8A o|||minal<br>r less<br>The total load current per common terminal<br>should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 8A or less<br>•<br>8 output points/common terminal: 8A or less||
||oad|80VA<br>→**For the product life, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.**<br>→**For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.1.3.**||||
|Open circuit leakage current||-||||
|Min. load||5V DC, 2mA (reference value)||||
|Response time<br>OFF<br>ON<br>ON<br>OFF||A||pprox. 10ms||
|||A||pprox. 10ms||
|Output circuit configuration|||||of [COM ].|
|||Load<br>||||
|||DC power<br>supply<br>~~Y~~<br>||||
|||Fuse|~~COM~~|||
|||External<br>power supply<br>~~Y~~<br>||||
|||Fuse<br>A com|~~COM~~<br>mon numbe|||
|||||r applies to the||
|||||||



## **15.3.2 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-32ER-ES/UL** 

**==> picture [338 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>140 (5.52") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>150 (5.91") 87 (3.43")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**225** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.3 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS_ 

## **FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-DS** 

**==> picture [384 x 145] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>172 (6.78") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>182 (7.17") 87 (3.43")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br> (mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **15.3.3 Terminal layout** 

## **FX2N-32ER-ES/UL** 

S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX 2N-32ER-ES/UL Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 

## **FX2N-48ER-ES/UL** 

S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-48ER-ES/UL Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM5 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 **-48ER-DS** S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-48ER-DS Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM5 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 

## **FX2N-48ER-DS** 

**226** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.4 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**16** 

**19** 

## **15.4 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS** 

## **15.4.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

→ **For the power supply specifications, refer to Section 15.2.** 

## **2. Input specifications (for sink input and source input)** 

**==> picture [457 x 502] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Item FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS<br>Input points 16 points 24 points<br>Connection type Removable terminal block (M3 screw)<br>Input form sink/source<br>Input signal voltage AC power supply type: 24V DC   10% DC power supply type: 24V DC +20% -30%<br>Input signal current 5mA/24V DC<br>Input impedance 4.3 k<br>Input response Input ON current 3.5mA or more/24V DC<br>time Input OFF current 1.5mA or less<br>Input response time Approx. 10ms<br>No-voltage contact input<br>Input signal form Sink: NPN open collector transistor<br>Source: PNP open collector transistor<br>Input circuit insulation Photo-coupler insulation<br>Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input.<br>• AC power supply type<br>Sink input wiring Source input wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L L<br>N N<br>1 00 to 240V AC 100 to 240V AC<br>S/S S/S<br>0V 0V<br>24V 24V<br>4.3k 4.3k<br>X X<br>Input circuit diagram<br>• DC power supply type<br>Sink input wiring Source input wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>24V 24V<br>S/S S/S<br>DC DC<br>0V 0V<br>*1 *1<br>24V 24V<br>4.3kΩ 4.3kΩ<br>X X<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

*1. Do not connect with 0V and 24V terminals. 

**227** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.4 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS_ 

## **3. Output specifications (transistor output type)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL**|**FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL**|**FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL**|**FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS**|**FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS**|**FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points|16 points|||24 points|||
|Connection type|Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||||||
|Output unit/type|Transistor/source output||||||
|External power supply|5 to 30V DC||||||
|Output circuit insulation|Photo-coupler insulation||||||
|Indication of output operation|<br>Activation of the photo-coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||||
|Max. load<br>Resistanc<br>Inductive l|e load<br>0.5A/point<br>The total load current per common ter<br>should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 0.<br>less|||minal<br>8A or<br>0.5A/point<br>The total load current per common terminal<br>should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 0.8A or<br>less<br>•<br>8 output points/common terminal: 1.6A or<br>less|||
||oad<br>12W/24V DC<br>The total of inductive loads per co<br>terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output point/common terminal: 19.2<br>less/24V DC|||mmon<br>W or<br>12W/24V DC<br>The total of inductive loads per common<br>terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output point/common terminal: 19.2W or<br>less/24V DC<br>•<br>8 output points/common terminal: 38.4W or<br>less/24V DC|||
|Open circuit leakage current||0||.1mA/30V DC|||
|Min. load||||-|||
|Response time<br>OFF<br>ON<br>ON<br>OFF||0.2ms or le||ss/200mA (at 24V DC)|||
|||0.2ms or le||ss/200mA (at 24V DC)|||
|Output circuit configuration|Load<br>Fuse<br>DC power<br>supply<br>~~Y~~<br>+V<br>A common number applies to the||||of [+V ].||
|||||~~Y~~<br>V|||
||||||of [+V||
||||||||



## **15.4.2 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL** 

**==> picture [341 x 145] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>140 (5.52") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>150 (5.91") 87 (3.43")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**228** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units 

_15.4 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-DSS** 

**==> picture [385 x 145] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>172 (6.78") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>182 (7.17") 87 (3.43")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **15.4.3 Terminal layout** 

## **FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL** 

S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 +V0 Y1 Y3 +V1 Y5 Y7 +V2 Y1 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 

## **FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL** 

S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 +V4 +V0 Y1 Y3 +V1 Y5 Y7 +V2 Y1 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 **-48ET-DSS** S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-48ET-DSS Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 +V4 +V0 Y1 Y3 +V1 Y5 Y7 +V2 Y1 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 

## **FX2N-48ET-DSS** 

**229** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.5 FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D_ 

## **15.5 FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D** 

## **15.5.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

- → **Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** 

- → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

- → **For the power supply specifications, refer to Section 15.2.** 

## **2. Input specifications (sink input)** 

**==> picture [457 x 322] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Item FX2N-32ER FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D<br>Input points 16 points 24 points<br>Connection type Removable terminal block (M3 screw)<br>Input form sink<br>Input signal voltage AC power supply type: 24V DC  10% DC power supply type: 24V DC +20% -30%<br>Input signal current 5mA/24V DC<br>Input impedance 4.3 k<br>Input response Input ON current 3.5mA or more/24V DC<br>time Input OFF current 1.5mA or less<br>Input response time Approx. 10ms<br>No-voltage contact input<br>Input signal form<br>NPN open collector transistor<br>Input circuit insulation Photo-coupler insulation<br>Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input.<br>• AC power supply type • DC power supply type<br>Sink input wiring Sink input wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L<br>N<br>Input circuit diagram 24+ 100 to 240V AC 24+ *1 24V<br>DC<br>COM COM<br>X X<br>4.3k 4.3kΩ<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *1. Do not connect with 24+ terminals. 

**230** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.5 FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **3. Output specifications (relay output type)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-32ER**|**FX2N-32ER**|**FX2N-32ER**|**FX2N-32ER**|**FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D**|**FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D**|**FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D**|**FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points|16 points||||24 points||||
|Connection type|Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||||||||
|Output unit|Relay||||||||
|External power supply|250V AC/30V DC or less||||||||
|Output circuit insulation|Mechanical insulation||||||||
|Indication of output operation|When power is applied to relay coil, LED is lit.||||||||
|Max. load<br>Resistanc<br>Inductive l|e load<br>2A/point<br>The total load current per common term<br>should be the following value.<br>•<br>8 output points/common terminal: 8A or||||inal<br>less<br>2A/point<br>The total load current per common terminal<br>should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 8A or less<br>•<br>8 output points/common terminal: 8A or less||||
||oad|80VA<br>→**For the product life, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.**<br>→**For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.1.3.**|||||||
|Open circuit leakage current||-|||||||
|Min. load||5V DC, 2mA (reference value)|||||||
|Response time<br>OFF<br>ON<br>ON<br>OFF||||Ap|prox. 10ms||||
|||||Ap|prox. 10ms||||
|Output circuit configuration||||||of [COM ].|||
|||Load|||||||
|||DC power<br>supply<br>Fuse||~~Y~~<br>|||||
|||||~~COM~~|||||
|||External<br>power supp<br>Fuse<br>A common||ly<br>~~Y~~<br>|||||
||||mon||||||
||||||||of [COM||
||||||||||



## **15.5.2 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-32ER** 

**==> picture [347 x 144] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>140 (5.52") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>150 (5.91") 87 (3.43")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**19** 

**231** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.5 FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D_ 

## **FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ER-D** 

**==> picture [387 x 145] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>172 (6.78") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>182 (7.17") 87 (3.43")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **15.5.3 Terminal layout** 

## **FX2N-32ER** 

COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX 2N-32ER Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 

## **FX2N-48ER** 

COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-48ER Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM5 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 **-48ER-D** COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-48ER-D Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM5 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 

## **FX2N-48ER-D** 

**232** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.6 FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14 15** 

**16** 

**19** 

## **15.6 FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D** 

## **15.6.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

- → **For the power supply specifications, refer to Section 15.2.** 

## **2. Input specifications (sink input)** 

**==> picture [458 x 323] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Item FX2N-32ET FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D<br>Input points 16 points 24 points<br>Connection type Removable terminal block (M3 screw)<br>Input form sink<br>Input signal voltage AC power supply type: 24V DC  10% DC power supply type: 24V DC +20% -30%<br>Input signal current 5mA/24V DC<br>Input impedance 4.3 k<br>Input response Input ON current 3.5mA or more/24V DC<br>time Input OFF current 1.5mA or less<br>Input response time Approx. 10ms<br>No-voltage contact input<br>Input signal form<br>NPN open collector transistor<br>Input circuit insulation Photo-coupler insulation<br>Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input.<br>• AC power supply type • DC power supply type<br>Sink input wiring Sink input wiring<br>Fuse Fuse<br>L<br>N<br>100 to 240V AC 24V<br>Input circuit diagram 24+ 24+ *1<br>DC<br>COM COM<br>X X<br>4.3k 4.3kΩ<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [169 x 8] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
*1. Do not connect with 24+ terminals.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**233** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.6 FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D_ 

## **3. Output specifications (transistor output type)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-32ET**|**FX2N-32ET**|**FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D**|**FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D**|**FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D**|**FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points|16 points||24 points||||
|Connection type|Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||||||
|Output unit/type|Transistor/sink output||||||
|External power supply|5 to 30V DC||||||
|Output circuit insulation|Photo-coupler insulation||||||
|Indication of output operation|<br>Activation of the photo-coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||||
|Max. load<br>Resistanc<br>Inductive l|e load<br>0.5A/point<br>The total load current per common term<br>should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 0.8A<br>less||inal<br>or<br>0.5A/point<br>The total load current per common terminal<br>should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 0.8A or<br>less<br>•<br>8 output points/common terminal: 1.6A or<br>less||||
||oad<br>12W/24V DC<br>The total of inductive loads per comm<br>terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output point/common terminal: 19.2W<br>less/24V DC||on<br>or<br>12W/24V DC<br>The total of inductive loads per common<br>terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output point/common terminal: 19.2W or<br>less/24V DC<br>•<br>8 output points/common terminal: 38.4W or<br>less/24V DC||||
|Open circuit leakage current||0.1|mA/30V DC||||
|Min. load|||-||||
|Response time<br>OFF<br>ON<br>ON<br>OFF||0.2ms or les|s/200mA (at 24V DC)||||
|||0.2ms or les|s/200mA (at 24V DC)||||
|Output circuit configuration|Load<br>Fuse<br>DC power<br>supply<br>~~Y~~<br>COM<br>A common number|||of [COM ].|||
|||Load<br>|||||
|||DC power<br>supply<br>~~Y~~|||||
||||applies to the||||
||||||of [COM||
||||||||



## **15.6.2 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-32ET** 

**==> picture [345 x 145] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>140 (5.52") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>150 (5.91") 87 (3.43")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**234** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.6 FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-D** 

**==> picture [385 x 145] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>172 (6.78") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>182 (7.17") 87 (3.43")<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **15.6.3 Terminal layout** 

## **FX2N-32ET** 

COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX 2N-32ET Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 

## **FX2N-48ET** 

COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-48ET Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM5 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 **-48ET-D** COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 FX2N-48ET-D Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM5 COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 

## **FX2N-48ET-D** 

**235** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.7 FX2N-32ES_ 

## **15.7 FX2N-32ES** 

## **15.7.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

- → **For the power supply specifications, refer to Section 15.2.** 

## **2. Input specifications (sink input)** 

|**Item**|**Item**||**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input points|||16 points||||||||
|Connection type|||Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||||||||
|Input form|||||sink||||||
|Input signal voltage|||||24V DC<br>10%||||||
|Input signal current|||||5mA/24V DC||||||
|Input impedance|||||4.3 k||||||
|Input response<br>time|Input ON current||||3.5mA or more/24V DC||||||
||Input OFF current||||1.5mA or less||||||
|Input response time|||||Approx. 10ms||||||
|Input signal form|||||No-voltage contact input<br>NPN open collector transistor||||||
|Input circuit insulation|||||Photo-coupler insulation||||||
|Indication of input operation|||||LED on panel lights when input.||||||
|Input circuit diagram||||||||||100 to 240V AC<br>Fuse|
||||Sink||inp|ut wiring||~~L~~|||
||||||||||||
||||||||||~~N~~<br>||
||||||||||||
|||||||||2|4+||
||||||||||||
|||||||||CO|M||
||||||||||||
||||||||||||
||||||||4.3k||~~X~~||
||||||||||||
||||||||||||



**236** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units 

_15.7 FX2N-32ES_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

**20** 

## **3. Output specifications (triac output type)** 

|**15.7.2**|**Item**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|**FX2N-32ES**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||Output Points|16 points||||||
||Connection type|Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||||||
||Output unit|Triac output (SSR)||||||
||External power supply|85 to 242V AC||||||
||Output circuit insulation|Photo-thyristor insulation||||||
||Indication of output operation|Activation of the photo-thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||||
||Max. load<br>Resistanc<br>Inductive l|e load<br>0.3A/point<br>The total load current per common terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 0.8A or less||||||
|||oad|15VA/100V AC, 30VA/200V AC|||||
||Open circuit leakage current||1mA/100V AC, 2mA/200V AC|||||
||Min. load||0.4VA/100V AC, 1.6VA/200V AC|||||
||Response time<br>OFF<br>ON<br>ON<br>OFF||1|ms or less||||
||||1|0ms or less||||
||Output circuit configuration|Load<br>Fuse<br>DC power<br>supply<br>~~Y~~<br>COM<br>A common numbe|||of [COM ].|||
||||Load<br>|||||
||||DC power<br>supply<br>~~Y~~<br>|||||
|||||r applies to the||||
|||||||of [COM||
|||||||||
||**External dimensions**|||||||
|||||||||
|||||||||
||150 (5.91")<br>140 (5.52") (mounting hole pitch)<br>80 (3.15")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>90 (3.55")<br>9 (0.36")<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>87 (3.43")<br>2-<br>4.5 mounting holes|||||||



## **15.7.3 Terminal layout** 

**==> picture [231 x 98] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6<br>L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7<br>FX2N-32ES<br>Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6<br>COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **18** 

**19** 

**237** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units _15.8 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL_ 

## **15.8 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL** 

## **15.8.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

- → **For the power supply specifications, refer to Section 15.2.** 

## **2. Input specifications (100V AC Input)** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input points||24 points||||||||
|Connection type||Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||||||||
|Input form||AC input||||||||
|Input signal voltage||100 to 120V AC +10%,-15% 50/60 Hz||||||||
|Input signal current||4.7 mA/100V AC<br>6.2 mA/110V AC|||50 Hz (70% or less when turned on simultaneously)<br>60 Hz (70% or less when turned on simultaneously)|||||
|Input impedance|||||Approx. 21 k<br>/50 Hz<br>Approx. 18 k<br>/60 Hz|||||
|Input response<br>time|Input ON current||||3.8mA or more/80V AC|||||
||Input OFF current||||1.7mA or less/30V AC|||||
|Input response time|||||Approx. 25 to 30ms|||||
|Input signal form|||||Contact input|||||
|Input circuit insulation|||||Photo-coupler insulation|||||
|Indication of input operation|||||LED|on panel lights when input.||||
|Input circuit diagram|||||||~~N~~<br>~~L~~<br>100 to 240V AC<br>Fuse<br>X<br>COM<br>*1 Input impedance|||
|||||||||||
|||||||||~~N~~<br>||
|||||||||||
||||||||CO|||
||||||*1|||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||||



**238** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

15 Input/Output Powered Extension Units 

_15.8 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

## **3. Output specifications (relay output type)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points|24 points||||
|Connection type|Removable terminal block (M3 screw)||||
|Output unit|Relay||||
|External power supply<br>2|30V DC or less<br>40V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)||||
|Output circuit insulation|Mechanical insulation||||
|Indication of output operation|Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||
|Max. load<br>Resistance load<br>T<br>•<br>•<br>Inductive load|2A/point<br>he total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value.<br>4 output points/common terminal: 8A or less<br>8 output points/common terminal: 8A or less||||
||80VA<br>→**For the product life, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.**<br>→**For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.1.2.**||||
|Open circuit leakage current|-||||
|Min. load|5V DC, 2mA (reference value)||||
|Response time<br>OFF<br>ON<br>ON<br>OFF|||Approx. 10ms||
||||Approx. 10ms||
|Output circuit configuration|External<br>power supp<br>Load<br>Fuse<br>DC power<br>supply<br>Fuse<br>A common|||of [COM ].|
||||~~Y~~<br>~~M~~<br>~~Y~~<br>~~M~~||
||||||
||||||
||||||
|||~~CO~~|||
||||||
||||||
|||ly<br>|||
|||||of [C|
||||||



## **15.8.2 External dimensions** 

**==> picture [499 x 279] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit : mm (inches)<br>210 (8.27") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")<br>220 (8.67") 87 (3.43")<br>15.8.3 Terminal layout<br>COM COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6<br>L N X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7<br>FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL<br>Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6<br>COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 COM5 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7<br>80 (3.15") 90 (3.55")<br> (mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**19** 

**20** 

**239** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

## **16. Input/Output Extension Blocks** 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 

   - 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

   - 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. 

      - External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. 

      - External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

- • Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work. 

   - Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual. If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out. 

- • Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual. If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out. 

- • Do not wire vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

- • When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. 

- • Make sure to properly wire the FX3G Series main unit and FX2N/FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. 

- - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. 

**240** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.1 Outline_ 

**11 12 13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **16.1 Outline** 

Connect input/output extension blocks to the PLC to add more input/output points. 8 or 16 points can be added by an input/output extension block. 

Since the power is supplied from the main unit, it is not necessary to prepare another power supply unit for each input/output extension block. 

## **16.1.1 Product configuration** 

There are various types of input/output extension blocks. Select optimum blocks considering the input type, output type, and connection unit of your system. 

**==> picture [440 x 150] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Input/output extension blocks<br>Power supply Number of points Input type Output type Co nnection unit<br>Power supply to 8 24V DC Relay Terminal block<br>inside of PLC (Sink, source)<br>16 Triac Connector<br>24V DC<br>(Sink) Transistor<br>(Source)<br>5V DC<br>Transistor<br>100V AC system (Sink)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **16.1.2 Product list** 

## **1. For input/output extension** 

Sink :Sink [-common], Source :Source [+common] 

|**Model**|**Input**|**Input**|**Input**|**Input**|**Input**|**Input**|**Output**|**Output**|**Output**|**Connection**<br>**type**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**Type**|**Number**<br>**of points**|**Common**<br>**system**||||**Type**|**Number**<br>**of points**|**Common**<br>**system**||
|**Common to both sink and source inputs**|||||||||||
|FX2N-8ER-ES/UL|24V DC|4(8)*1||Sink|Source||Relay|4(8)*1|-|Terminal block|
|**Dedicated to sink input only**|||||||||||
|FX2N-8ER|24V DC|4(8)*1||Sink|||Relay|4(8)*1|-|Terminal block|



- *1. Four inputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers. 

## **2. For input extension** 

||:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Model**|**Input**|||**Output**|||**Connection**<br>**type**|
||**Type**|**Number**<br>**of points**|**Common**<br>**system**|**Type**|**Number**<br>**of points**|**Common**<br>**system**||
|**Common to both sink and source inputs**||||||||
|FX2N-8EX-ES/UL|24V DC|8|Sink<br>Source|-|-|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EX-ES/UL|24V DC|16|Sink<br>Source|-|-|-|Terminal block|
|**Dedicated to sink input only**||||||||
|FX2N-8EX|24V DC|8|Sink|-|-|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EX|24V DC|16|Sink|-|-|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EX-C|24V DC|16|Sink|-|-|-|Connector|
|FX2N-16EXL-C|5V DC|16|Sink|-|-|-|Connector|
|**100V AC input type**||||||||
|FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL|100V AC|8|-|-|-|-|Terminal block|



**18** 

**241** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.1 Outline_ 

## **3. For output extension** 

||:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|:Sink [-common],<br>:Source [+common]<br>Sink<br>Source|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Model**|**Input**|||**Output**|||**Connection**<br>**type**|
||**Type**|**Number**<br>**of points**|**Common**<br>**system**|**Type**|**Number**<br>**of points**|**Common**<br>**system**||
|**Relay output type**||||||||
|FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL|-|-|-|Relay|8|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL|-|-|-|Relay|8|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EYR|-|-|-|Relay|8|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL|-|-|-|Relay|16|-|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYR|-|-|-|Relay|16|-|Terminal block|
|**Dedicated to sink output only**||||||||
|FX2N-8EYT|-|-|-|Transistor|8|Sink|Terminal block|
|FX2N-8EYT-H|-|-|-|Transistor|8|Sink|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYT|-|-|-|Transistor|16|Sink|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYT-C|-|-|-|Transistor|16|Sink|Connector|
|FX2N-16EYS|-|-|-|Transistor|16|-|Terminal block|
|**Dedicated to source output only**||||||||
|FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL|-|-|-|Transistor|8|Source|Terminal block|
|FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL|-|-|-|Transistor|16|Source|Terminal block|



**242** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.2 FX2N-8ER-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input, Relay Output)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17 18** 

**20** 

## **16.2 FX2N-8ER-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input, Relay Output)** 

## **16.2.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|
|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block|
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|
|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.2kg (0.44lbs)|
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.|



## **3. Input specifications (common to both sink and source inputs)** 

|**Item**|**Item**||**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input points|||4 points|||||||||||||||||
|Connection type|||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)|||||||||||||||||
|Input form|||sink/source|||||||||||||||||
|Input signal voltage|||24V DC  10%|||||||||||||||||
|Input signal current|||5mA/24V DC|||||||||||||||||
|Input impedance|||4.3k|||||||||||||||||
|ON input<br>sensitivity current|Input ON current||3.5mA or more at 24V DC|||||||||||||||||
||Input OFF current||1.5mA or less|||||||||||||||||
|Input response time|||Approx. 10ms|||||||||||||||||
|Input signal form|||Sink input: No-voltage contact input, NPN open collector transistor<br>Source input: No-voltage contact input, PNP open collector transistor|||||||||||||||||
|Input circuit insulation||||||||Photo-coupler insulation||||||||||||
|Indication of input operation||||||||LED on panel lights when input.||||||||||||
|Input circuit diagram||||||||||||||||||||
||||Sink input wiring|||||||||||Source input wiring||||||
||||Main unit|||||S|/S|||||Main unit|||S|/S||
|||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||0|V||||||||0|V||
|||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||24|V||||||||24|V||
|||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||S|/S||||||||S|/S||
||||||||4.3k|~~X~~|||||||||~~X~~|||
|||||||||||||||||4.3k||||
|||||||||||||||||||||



**19** 

**243** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.2 FX2N-8ER-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input, Relay Output)_ 

## **4. Output specifications (Relay output type)** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8ER-ES/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points||4 points|||||
|Connection type||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)|||||
|Output type||Relay|||||
|External power supply||30V DC or less<br>240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)|||||
|Output circuit insulation||Mechanical insulation|||||
|Indication of output operation||Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.|||||
|Max. load|Resistance load<br>Inductive load|2A/point<br>The total resistance load current per common should be as follows:<br>•<br>4 output points/common: 8A or less|||||
||||80VA<br>→**For the product life, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.**<br>→**For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.1.3.**||||
|Open circuit leakage current|||-||||
|Min. load|||5V DC, 2mA (reference values)||||
|Response time|OFF<br>ON<br>ON<br>OFF||Approx. 10ms||||
||||Approx. 10ms||||
|Output circuit configuration|||Load<br>DC power<br>supplyunit<br>Fuse|||~~Y~~<br>~~M1~~|
|||||||~~Y~~<br>~~M1~~|
||||||||
||||||||
||||||||
||||||||
||||||~~C~~|~~M1~~|
||||||||
||||||||



## **16.2.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

Input numbers (X) are assigned to the upper four points, and output numbers (Y) are assigned to the lower four points. 

**==> picture [383 x 215] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Input indicator Rear line<br>lamps (LED lamps) extension<br>Output indicator connector<br>lamps (LED lamps)<br>S/S<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>COM1<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**244** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.2 FX2N-8ER-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input, Relay Output)_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

## **16.2.3 External dimensions** 

**==> picture [245 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm(inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**20** 

**245** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.3 FX2N-8ER (24V DC Sink Input, Relay Output)_ 

## **16.3 FX2N-8ER (24V DC Sink Input, Relay Output)** 

## **16.3.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8ER**|
|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block|
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8ER**|
|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.2kg (0.44lbs)|
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.|



## **3. Input specifications** 

|**Item**|**Item**||**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input points|||4 points||||||
|Connection type|||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)||||||
|Input form|||Sink||||||
|Input signal voltage|||24V DC  10%||||||
|Input signal current|||5mA/24V DC||||||
|Input impedance|||4.3k||||||
|ON input<br>sensitivity current|Input ON current||3.5mA or more at 24V DC||||||
||Input OFF current||1.5mA or less||||||
|Input response time|||Approx. 10ms||||||
|Input signal form|||No-voltage contact input<br>NPN open collector transistor||||||
|Input circuit insulation|||Photo-coupler insulation||||||
|Indication of input operation|||LED on panel lights when input.||||||
|Input circuit diagram|||||||||
||||Sink input wiring||||||
||||Main unit|||S|/S||
|||||||0|V||
|||||||24|V||
||||||||||
||||||||||
|||||||24|+||
||||||4.3k|~~X~~|||
||||||||||
||||||||||



**246** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.3 FX2N-8ER (24V DC Sink Input, Relay Output)_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**18** 

**19** 

## **4. Output specifications (Relay output type)** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|**FX2N-8ER**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points||4 points|||||
|Connection type||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)|||||
|Output type||Relay|||||
|External power supply||30V DC or less<br>240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)|||||
|Output circuit insulation||Mechanical insulation|||||
|Indication of output operation||Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.|||||
|Max. load|Resistance load<br>Inductive load|2A/point<br>The total resistance load current per common should be as follows:<br>•<br>4 output points/common: 8A or less|||||
||||80VA<br>→**For the product life, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.**<br>→**For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.1.3.**||||
|Open circuit leakage current|||-||||
|Min. load|||5V DC, 2mA (reference values)||||
|Response time|<br>OFF<br>ON<br>ON<br>OFF||Approx. 10ms||||
||||Approx. 10ms||||
|Output circuit configuration|||Load<br>DC power<br>supplyunit<br>Fuse|||~~Y~~<br>~~M1~~|
|||||||~~Y~~<br>~~M1~~|
||||||||
||||||||
||||||||
||||||||
||||||~~C~~|~~M1~~|
||||||||
||||||||



## **16.3.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

Input numbers (X) are assigned to the upper four points, and output numbers (Y) are assigned to the lower four points. 

**==> picture [383 x 215] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Input indicator Rear line<br>lamps (LED lamps) extension<br>Output indicator connector<br>lamps (LED lamps)<br>24+<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>COM1<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**19** 

**20** 

**247** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.3 FX2N-8ER (24V DC Sink Input, Relay Output)_ 

## **16.3.3 External dimensions** 

**==> picture [245 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm(inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**248** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.4 FX2N-8EX-ES/UL, FX2N-16EX-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **16.4 FX2N-8EX-ES/UL, FX2N-16EX-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input)** 

## **16.4.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|
|---|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block||
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)||



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|
|---|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.2kg (0.44lbs)|0.3kg (0.66lbs)|
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.||



## **3. Input specifications (common to both sink and source inputs)** 

|**Item**|**Item**||**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EX-ES/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input points|||8 points|||||||||||16 points|||||||
|Connection type|||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)||||||||||||||||||
|Input form|||sink/source||||||||||||||||||
|Input signal voltage|||24V DC  10%||||||||||||||||||
|Input signal current|||5mA/24V DC||||||||||||||||||
|Input impedance|||4.3k||||||||||||||||||
|ON input<br>sensitivity current|Input ON current||3.5mA or more at 24V DC||||||||||||||||||
||Input OFF current||1.5mA or less||||||||||||||||||
|Input response time|||Approx. 10ms||||||||||||||||||
|Input signal form|||Sink input: No-voltage contact input, NPN open collector transistor<br>Source input: No-voltage contact input, PNP open collector transistor||||||||||||||||||
|Input circuit insulation||||||||Photo-coupler insulation|||||||||||||
|Indication of input operation||||||||LED on panel lights when input.|||||||||||||
|Input circuit diagram|||||||||||||||||||||
||||Sink input wiring||||||||||||Source input wiring||||||
||||Main unit|||||S|/S||||||Main unit|||S|/S||
||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||0|V|||||||||0|V||
||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||24|V|||||||||24|V||
||||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||S|/S|||||||||S|/S||
||||||||4.3k|~~X~~||||||||||~~X~~|||
||||||||||||||||||4.3k||||
||||||||||||||||||||||



**18** 

**19** 

**249** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.4 FX2N-8EX-ES/UL, FX2N-16EX-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input)_ 

## **16.4.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

## **FX2N-8EX-ES/UL** 

**==> picture [370 x 221] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Rear line<br>extension<br>Input indicator  connector<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>S/S<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>X4<br>X5<br>X6<br>X7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **FX2N-16EX-ES/UL** 

When an input (X) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers, and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers. 

**==> picture [415 x 226] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Input indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Rear line<br>extension  Lower<br>connector numbers<br>Input indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Higher<br>numbers<br>S/S<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>X4<br>X5<br>X6<br>X7<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>X4<br>X5<br>X6<br>X7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**250** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.4 FX2N-8EX-ES/UL, FX2N-16EX-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **16.4.3 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-8EX-ES/UL** 

**==> picture [309 x 334] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>FX2N-16EX-ES/UL<br>2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**16** 

**251** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.5 FX2N-8EX, FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C_ 

## **16.5 FX2N-8EX, FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C** 

## **16.5.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EX**|**FX2N-16EX**|**FX2N-16EX-C**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block||FX2Nconnector type extension<br>block|
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|||



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EX**|**FX2N-16EX**|**FX2N-16EX-C**|
|---|---|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.2kg (0.44lbs)|0.3kg (0.66lbs)||
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.|||



## **3. Input specifications** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-8EX**|**FX2N-8EX**|**FX2N-16EX**|**FX2N-16EX**|**FX2N-16EX**|**FX2N-16EX**|**FX2N-16EX**|**FX2N-16EX-C**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input points||8 points||16 points||||||
|Connection type||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)|||||||Connector terminal block|
|Input form|||Sink|||||||
|Input signal voltage|||24V DC  10%|||||||
|Input signal current|||5mA/24V DC|||||||
|Input impedance|||4.3k|||||||
|ON input<br>sensitivity current|Input ON current||3.5mA or more at 24V DC|||||||
||Input OFF current||1.5mA or less|||||||
|Input response time|||Approx. 10ms|||||||
|Input signal form|||No-voltage contact input<br>NPN open collector transistor|||||||
|Input circuit insulation|||Photo-coupler insulation|||||||
|Indication of input operation|||LED on panel lights when input.|||||||
|Input circuit diagram||||||||||
||||Sink input wiring|||||||
||||Main unit|||S|/S|||
|||||||0|V|||
|||||||24|V|||
|||||||||||
|||||||||||
|||||||24|+|||
||||||4.3k|~~X~~||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||||



**252** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.5 FX2N-8EX, FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **16.5.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

## **FX2N-8EX** 

**==> picture [370 x 221] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Rear line<br>Input  extension<br>indicator<br>connector<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>24+<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>X4<br>X5<br>X6<br>X7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **FX2N-16EX** 

When an input (X) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers, and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers. 

**==> picture [368 x 221] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Input indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Rear line<br>extension<br>connector<br>Input indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>24+<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>X4<br>X5<br>X6<br>X7<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>X4<br>X5<br>X6<br>X7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**253** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.5 FX2N-8EX, FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C_ 

## **FX2N-16EX-C** 

When an input (X) number is assigned, 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers, and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers. 

**==> picture [499 x 542] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover Side Side<br>No. No.<br>Input indicator  A B<br>lamps  Connector type X0 1 11 X0<br>(LED lamps) X1 2 12 X1<br>Rear line  X2 3 13 X2<br>extension  X3 4 14 X3<br>connector X4 5 15 X4<br>X5 6 16 X5<br>Input indicator<br>X6 7 17 X6<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps) Terminal arrangement X7 8 18 X7<br>9 19<br>24+ 10 20 24+<br>16.5.3 External dimensions<br>FX2N-8EX<br>2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>FX2N-16EX<br>2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**254** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.5 FX2N-8EX, FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C_ 

**11 12 13** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18 19 20** 

## **FX2N-16EX-C** 

**==> picture [223 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>|<br>ot in<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **How to connect connector (FX2N-16EX-C)** 

**==> picture [410 x 161] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(Socket)<br>Connection face of connector<br>The polarity is shown in the following table.<br>20<br>FX-16E-<br>‘ZB<br>CAB type cable<br>Cross section of 20-core flat cable<br>(Be sure to check the wire number.)<br>20<br>—<br>19 17 15 13 11 G<br>B 20 18 16 14 12 19 17 15 13 11<br>20 18 16 14 12<br>Lala 10 8 6 4 2<br>A 10 8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3 1 _<br>oO 9 7 5 3 1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Side B is for the higher input numbers, Side B 24+ X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 and side A is for the lower input numbers. Side A 24+ X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 (Exe.) Side B X050 to X057 Side A X040 to X047 

**255** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.6 FX2N-16EXL-C (5V DC Input: 16 Points)_ 

## **16.6 FX2N-16EXL-C (5V DC Input: 16 Points)** 

## **16.6.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-16EXL-C**|
|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nconnector type extension block for each application|
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-16EXL-C**|
|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.3kg (0.66lbs)|
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.|



## **3. Input specifications** 

|**Item**|**Item**|||**FX2N-16EXL-C**|**FX2N-16EXL-C**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input points||||16 points||
|Connection type||||Connector terminal block||
|Input form||||TTL level||
|Input signal voltage||||5V DC  5%||
|Input signal current||||40mA (at 5V DC), maximum||
|Input impedance||||2.2k||
|ON input<br>sensitivity current|ON(Low)|||1mA or more||
||OFF(High)|||0.4mA or less||
|Input sensing<br>voltage|ON(Low)|||1.5V DC or less||
||OFF(High)|||3.5V DC or more||
|Input response<br>time|OFF<br>ON<br>(High<br>Low)|||1ms +1 ms, -0.5 ms||
||ON<br>OFF<br>(Low<br>High)|||1ms +1 ms, -0.5 ms||
|Input signal form||||TTL input||
|Input circuit insulation||||Photo-coupler insulation||
|Indication of input operation||||LED on panel lights when input.||
|Input circuit diagram|||||~~X~~<br>5+<br>5V DC<br>External unit<br>TTL|
|||||||
|||||||
||||||5|
|||||2.2k|~~X~~|
|||||||
|||||||



**256** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.6 FX2N-16EXL-C (5V DC Input: 16 Points)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**18** 

**20** 

## **16.6.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

When an input (X) number is assigned, 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers, and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers. 

**==> picture [421 x 150] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover Side Side<br>No. No.<br>Input indicator  A B<br>lamps  Connector type X0 1 11 X0<br>(LED lamps) X1 2 12 X1<br>Rear line  X2 3 13 X2<br>extension  X3 4 14 X3<br>connector X4 5 15 X4<br>X5 6 16 X5<br>Input indicator<br>X6 7 17 X6<br>lamps<br>Terminal arrangement X7 8 18 X7<br>(LED lamps)<br>9 19<br>5+ 10 20 5+<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **16.6.3 External dimensions** 

**==> picture [499 x 356] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>16.6.4 Example of wiring<br>1. Wiring on input side<br>Sink input<br>External<br>5V DC TTL unit<br>L N S/S 0V 24V X0 5+ X0 X1 X3<br>Input circuit Input circuit<br>main unit or<br>input/output powered extension unit<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**19** 

**257** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.6 FX2N-16EXL-C (5V DC Input: 16 Points)_ 

## **How to connect connector** 

**==> picture [407 x 161] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(Socket)<br>Connection face of connector<br>The polarity is shown in the following table.<br>20<br>FX-16E-<br>CAB type cable<br>Cross section of 20-core flat cable<br>(Be sure to check the wire number.)<br>20<br>19 17 15 13 11<br>B 20 18 16 14 12 19 17 15 13 11<br>20 18 16 14 12<br>10 8 6 4 2<br>A 10 8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3 1<br>9 7 5 3 1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Side B is for the higher input numbers, Side B 5+ X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 and side A is for the lower input numbers. Side A 5+ X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 (Exe.) Side B X050 to X057 Side A X040 to X047 

**258** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.7 FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL (100V AC Input)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17 18** 

**17** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **16.7 FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL (100V AC Input)** 

## **16.7.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|
|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block|
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)||0.2kg (0.44lbs)||||||||
|Other||•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.||||||||
|**Input specifications**||||||||||
|**Item**||||**FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL**||||||
|Input points||||8 points||||||
|Connection type||||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)||||||
|Input form||||AC input||||||
|Input signal voltage||||100 to 120V AC||||||
|Input signal current||||6.2mA/110V AC 60Hz 4.7mA/100V AC 50Hz||||||
|Input impedance||||Approx. 21k<br>/50Hz<br>Approx. 18k<br>/60Hz||||||
|ON input<br>sensitivity current|Input ON current|||3.8mA/80V AC or more||||||
||Input OFF current|||1.7mA/30V AC or less||||||
|Input response time||||Approx. 25 to 30ms||||||
|Input signal form||||Voltage contact||||||
|Input circuit insulation||||Photo-coupler insulation||||||
|Indication of input operation||||LED on panel lights when input.||||||
|Input circuit diagram||||||||X*0<br>COM<br>X*7<br>100 to120V AC<br>Fuse||
|||||||||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||CO|M|
|||||Inputimpedance<br>Photocoupler||||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||X|*0|
|||||||||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||X|*7|
|||||||||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||||



## **3. Input specifications** 

**18** 

**259** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.7 FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL (100V AC Input)_ 

## **16.7.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

**==> picture [499 x 423] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Rear line<br>Input  extension<br>indicator<br>connector<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>16.7.3 External dimensions<br>2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>COM1<br>X0<br>X1<br>X2<br>X3<br>X4<br>X5<br>X6<br>X7<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**260** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.8 FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19** 

## **16.8 FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output)** 

## **16.8.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block|||
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|||
|**Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)**||||
|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL**|**FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL**|**FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL**|
|MASS (Weight)|0.2kg (0.44lbs)|0.3kg (0.66lbs)||
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.|||



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

## **3. Output specifications (Relay output type)** 

**==> picture [457 x 397] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Item FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL<br>8 points<br>Output Points 8 points 16 points (All points have separate reference<br>terminals (commons))<br>Connection type Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)<br>Output type Relay<br>30V DC or less<br>External power supply<br>240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)<br>Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation<br>Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.<br>2A/point<br>The total resistance load current per common should<br>Resistance load be as follows: 2A/point<br>• 4 output points/common: 8A or less<br>Max. load • 8 output points/common: 8A or less<br>80VA<br>Inductive load →  For the product life, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.<br>→  For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.1.3.<br>-<br>Open circuit leakage current<br>Min. load 5V DC, 2mA (reference values)<br>OFF ON Approx. 10ms<br>Response time<br>ON OFF Approx. 10ms<br>Load Load<br>Y Y0<br>Fuse Fuse<br>COM Y0<br>DC power DC power<br>supply unit supply unit<br>Output circuit configuration<br>Y Y7<br>Fuse Fuse<br>COM Y7<br>AC power AC power<br>supply unit supply unit<br>A common number applies to the   of [COM ].<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**19** 

**20** 

**261** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.8 FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output)_ 

## **16.8.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

## **FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL** 

**==> picture [370 x 221] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Rear line<br>Output  extension<br>indicator<br>connector<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>COM1<br>Y1<br>Y0<br>Y3<br>Y2<br>COM2<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL** 

**==> picture [369 x 218] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Output<br>indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Rear line<br>extension<br>connector<br>Y0<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>Y7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**262** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.8 FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output)_ 

**11 12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL** 

When an output (Y) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers, and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers. 

**==> picture [415 x 226] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Rear line<br>extension  Lower<br>connector numbers<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Higher<br>numbers<br>COM1<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>COM2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**12** 

**263** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.8 FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output)_ 

## **16.8.3 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL** 

**==> picture [237 x 525] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL<br>2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL<br>2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**264** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.9 FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL, FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**19 20** 

**20** 

## **16.9 FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL, FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output)** 

## **16.9.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL**|**FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL**|
|---|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block||
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)||



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL**|**FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL**|**FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL**|**FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL**|**FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)||0.2kg (0.44lbs)||||0.3kg (0.66lbs)|
|Other||•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.|||||
|**Output specifications (Transistor output type)**|||||||
|**Item**||**FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL**||||**FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL**|
|Output Points||8 points||||16 points|
|Connection type||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)|||||
|Output unit/type||Transistor/source output|||||
|External power supply||5 to 30V DC|||||
|Output circuit insulation||Photo-coupler insulation|||||
|Indication of output operation||Activation of the photo-coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.|||||
|Max. load|Resistance load|0.5A/point<br>The total load current per common should be as follows:<br>•<br>4 output points/common: 0.8A or less<br>•<br>8 output points/common: 1.6A or less|||||
||Inductive load|The total of inductive loads per comm<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal:<br>•<br>8 output points/common terminal:||12W/24V DC<br>on terminal should be the following value.<br>19.2W or less/24V DC<br>38.4W or less/24V DC|||
|Open circuit leakage current||||0.1mA/30V DC|||
|Min. load||||-|||
|Response time|OFF<br>ON||0.2ms o|r less for 200mA (at 24V DC)|||
||ON<br>OFF||0.2ms o|r less for 200mA (at 24V DC)|||
|Output circuit configuration||A common number applies to the<br>of [+V<br>].<br>Load<br>DC power<br>supply<br>Fuse<br>~~Y~~<br>+V|||||
||||Load||~~Y~~<br>V||
||||||||
||||Fuse||||



## **3. Output specifications (Transistor output type)** 

**18** 

**19** 

**265** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.9 FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL, FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output)_ 

## **16.9.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

## **FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL** 

**==> picture [370 x 221] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Rear line<br>Output<br>extension<br>indicator<br>connector<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>+V0<br>Y1<br>Y0<br>Y3<br>Y2<br>+V1<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL** 

When an output (Y) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers, and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers. 

**==> picture [415 x 226] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Rear line<br>extension  Lower<br>connector numbers<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Higher<br>numbers<br>+V0<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>+V1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**266** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.9 FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL, FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **16.9.3 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-8EYT-ESS/UL** 

**==> picture [236 x 336] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL<br>2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**267** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.10 FX2N-8EYR, FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output)_ 

## **16.10 FX2N-8EYR, FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output)** 

## **16.10.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

- → **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYR**|**FX2N-16EYR**|
|---|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block||
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)||



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYR**|**FX2N-16EYR**|
|---|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.2kg (0.44lbs)|0.3kg (0.66lbs)|
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.||



## **3. Output specifications (Relay output type)** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYR**|**FX2N-8EYR**|**FX2N-8EYR**|**FX2N-8EYR**|**FX2N-8EYR**|**FX2N-16EYR**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points||8 points|||||16 points|
|Connection type||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)||||||
|Output type||Relay||||||
|External power supply||250V AC 30V DC or less||||||
|Output circuit insulation||Mechanical insulation||||||
|Indication of output operation||Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||||
|Max. load|Resistance load|2A/point<br>The total resistance load current per common should be as follows:<br>•<br>4 output points/common: 8A or less<br>•<br>8 output points/common: 8A or less||||||
||Inductive load||80VA<br>→**For the product life, refer to Subsection 14.4.3.**<br>→**For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.1.3.**|||||
|Open circuit leakage current|||-|||||
|Min. load|||5V DC, 2mA (reference values)|||||
|Response time|OFF<br>ON||||Approx. 10ms|||
||ON<br>OFF||||Approx. 10ms|||
|Output circuit configuration||A c||||applies to the<br>of [COM<br>].<br>~~Y~~<br>~~M~~<br>~~Y~~<br>~~M~~||
||||Load|||~~Y~~<br>~~M~~<br>~~Y~~<br>~~M~~||
|||||||||
||||Fuse|||||
|||||||||
||||DC power<br>supply<br>Load||~~CO~~|||
|||||||||
||||Fuse|||||
|||||||||
|||||||||
||||ommon number<br>AC power<br>supply<br>~~C~~||~~C~~|~~M~~||
|||||||||



**268** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.10 FX2N-8EYR, FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **16.10.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

## **FX2N-8EYR** 

**==> picture [370 x 221] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Rear line<br>Output<br>extension<br>indicator<br>connector<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>COM1<br>Y1<br>Y0<br>Y3<br>Y2<br>COM2<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **FX2N-16EYR** 

When an output (Y) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers, and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers. 

**==> picture [415 x 226] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Rear line<br>extension  Lower<br>connector numbers<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Higher<br>numbers<br>COM1<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>COM2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**16** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**269** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.10 FX2N-8EYR, FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output)_ 

## **16.10.3 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-8EYR** 

**==> picture [237 x 331] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>FX2N-16EYR<br>2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**270** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.11 FX2N-8EYT, FX2N-16EYT, FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**16** 

**18 19 20** 

## **16.11 FX2N-8EYT, FX2N-16EYT, FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output)** 

## **16.11.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYT**|**FX2N-16EYT**|**FX2N-16EYT-C**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block||FX2Nconnector type extension block|
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|||



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYT**|**FX2N-16EYT**|**FX2N-16EYT-C**|
|---|---|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.2kg (0.44lbs)|0.3kg (0.66lbs)||
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.|||



## **3. Output specifications (Transistor output type)** 

**==> picture [457 x 393] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Item FX2N-8EYT FX2N-16EYT FX2N-16EYT-C<br>Output Points 8 points 16 points<br>Connection type Vertical terminal block (M3 screws) Connector terminal block<br>Output unit/type Transistor/sink output<br>External power supply 5 to 30V DC<br>Output circuit insulation Photo-coupler insulation<br>Indication of output operation Activation of the photo-coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.<br>0.5A/point<br>0.3A/point<br>The total load current per common should be<br>The total load current per common should be<br>Resistance load as follows:<br>as follows:<br>•• 4 output points/common: 0.8A or less8 output points/common: 1.6A or less • 16 output points/common: 1.6A or less<br>12W/24V DC<br>Max. load<br>The total of inductive loads per common 7.2 W/24V DC<br>terminal should be the following value. The total of inductive loads per common<br>Inductive load • 4 output point/common terminal: 19.2W or terminal should be the following value.<br>less/24V DC • 16 output points/common terminal: 38.4W<br>• 8 output points/common terminal: 38.4W or or less/24V DC<br>less/24V DC<br>Open circuit leakage current 0.1mA/30V DC<br>Min. load -<br>OFF ON 0.2ms or less for 200mA (at 24V DC)<br>Response time<br>ON OFF 0.2ms or less for 200mA (at 24V DC)<br>Load Load<br>Y Y<br>Fuse Fuse<br>COM1 COM<br>DC power DC power<br>Output circuit configuration supply unit supply unit<br>Y Y<br>Fuse Fuse<br>COM2 COM<br>DC power DC power<br>supply unit supply unit<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**17** 

**271** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks 

_16.11 FX2N-8EYT, FX2N-16EYT, FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output)_ 

## **16.11.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

## **FX2N-8EYT** 

**==> picture [370 x 221] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Rear line<br>Output<br>extension<br>indicator<br>connector<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>COM1<br>Y1<br>Y0<br>Y3<br>Y2<br>COM2<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **FX2N-16EYT** 

When an output (Y) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers, and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers. 

**==> picture [415 x 226] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Rear line<br>extension  Lower<br>connector numbers<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Higher<br>numbers<br>COM1<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>COM2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**272** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.11 FX2N-8EYT, FX2N-16EYT, FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output)_ 

**11 12 13 14 15 16 17** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **FX2N-16EYT-C** 

When an output (Y) number is assigned, 8 points on side A will be used for the lower output numbers, and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher output numbers. 

**==> picture [428 x 145] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover Side Side<br>No. No.<br>Output indicator  A B<br>lamps  Connector type Y0 1 11 Y0<br>(LED lamps) Y1 2 12 Y1<br>Rear line  Y2 3 13 Y2<br>extension  Y3 4 14 Y3<br>connector Y4 5 15 Y4<br>Y5 6 16 Y5<br>Output indicator<br>Y6 7 17 Y6<br>lamps<br>Terminal arrangement Y7 8 18 Y7<br>(LED lamps)<br>COM 9 19 COM<br>10 20<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **16.11.3 External dimensions** 

## **FX2N-8EYT** 

**==> picture [236 x 336] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>FX2N-16EYT<br>2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**18** 

**19** 

**273** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.11 FX2N-8EYT, FX2N-16EYT, FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output)_ 

## **FX2N-16EYT-C** 

**==> picture [223 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>|<br>of) iz<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **How to connect connector (FX2N-16EYT-C)** 

**==> picture [410 x 254] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(Socket)<br>Connection face of connector<br>The polarity is shown in the following table.<br>20<br>(‘Z FX-16E-<br>CAB type cable<br>Cross section of 20-core flat cable<br>(Be sure to check the wire number.)<br>20<br>—<br>19 17 15 13 11 eZ<br>B 20 18 16 14 12 19 17 15 13 11<br>20 18 16 14 12<br>Halal 10 8 6 4 2<br>A 10 8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3 1 _<br>oO 9 7 5 3 1<br>WiLp<br>|<br>Side B is for the higher input numbers,<br>Side B COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0<br>and side A is for the lower input numbers.<br>Side A COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0<br>EER E EEE (Exe.) Side B X050 to X057 [%]<br>Side A X040 to X047<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**274** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.12 FX2N-8EYT-H (Transistor Output)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**20** 

## **16.12 FX2N-8EYT-H (Transistor Output)** 

## **16.12.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYT-H**|
|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block|
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-8EYT-H**|**FX2N-8EYT-H**|**FX2N-8EYT-H**|**FX2N-8EYT-H**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)||0.2kg (0.44lbs)||||
|Other||•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.||||
|**Output specifications (Transistor output type)**||||||
|**Item**||**FX2N-8EYT-H**||||
|Output Points||8 points||||
|Connection type||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)||||
|Output unit/type||Transistor/sink output||||
|External power supply||5 to 30V DC||||
|Output circuit insulation||Photo-coupler insulation||||
|Indication of output operation||Activation of the photo-coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||
|Max. load|Resistance load|1A/point<br>The total load current per common should be as follows:<br>•<br>4 output points/common: 2A or less||||
||Inductive load|24W/24V DC<br>The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output point/common terminal: 48W or less/24V DC||||
|Open circuit leakage current|||0.1mA/30V DC|||
|Min. load|||-|||
|Response time|OFF<br>ON||0.2ms or less/1A|||
||ON<br>OFF||0.4ms or less/1A|||
|Output circuit configuration||Load<br>Fuse<br>DC power<br>supply unit<br>Fuse<br>DC power<br>supply unit|||~~Y~~<br>OM1<br>~~Y~~<br>OM2|
||||Load||~~Y~~<br>OM1<br>~~Y~~<br>OM2|
|||||||
||||Fuse||~~Y~~|
|||||C||
|||||||
||||Fuse||~~Y~~|
||||DC power<br>supply unit|C||
|||||||



## **3. Output specifications (Transistor output type)** 

**18** 

**19** 

**275** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.12 FX2N-8EYT-H (Transistor Output)_ 

## **16.12.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

**==> picture [370 x 222] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Rear line<br>Output<br>extension<br>indicator<br>connector<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>COM1<br>Y1<br>Y0<br>Y3<br>Y2<br>COM2<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **16.12.3 External dimensions** 

**==> picture [245 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**276** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.13 FX2N-16EYS (Triac Output: 16 Points)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **16.13 FX2N-16EYS (Triac Output: 16 Points)** 

## **16.13.1 Product specifications** 

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 

→ **Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.** 

For external wiring, refer to the following chapters. 

→ **Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring.** 

## **1. Power supply specifications** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-16EYS**|
|---|---|
|Product type|FX2Nextension block|
|Rated voltage|24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)|



## **2. Weight and Other specifications (External dimensions are described later.)** 

|**Item**|**FX2N-16EYS**|
|---|---|
|MASS (Weight)|0.3kg (0.66lbs)|
|Other|•<br>The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.<br>•<br>Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number<br>•<br>The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.|



## **3. Output specifications (Triac output type)** 

|**Item**|**Item**|**FX2N-16EYS**|**FX2N-16EYS**|**FX2N-16EYS**|**FX2N-16EYS**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output Points||16 points||||
|Connection type||Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)||||
|Output type||Triac output (SSR)||||
|External power supply||85 to 242V AC||||
|Output circuit insulation||Photo-coupler insulation||||
|Indication of output operation||Activation of the photo-thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||
|Max. load|Resistance load|0.3A/point<br>The total load current per common should be as follows:<br>•<br>8 output points/common: 0.8A or less||||
||Inductive load||15VA/100V AC, 30VA/200V AC|||
|Open circuit leakage current|||1mA/100V AC, 2mA/200V AC|||
|Min. load|||0.4VA/100V AC, 1.6VA/200V AC|||
|Response time|OFF<br>ON|||1ms or less||
||ON<br>OFF|||10ms or less||
|Output circuit configuration||A c||||
||||Load||**_`U`_**<br>~~Y~~<br>M|
|||||||
||||Fuse|||
|||||||



**18** 

**277** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

16 Input/Output Extension Blocks _16.13 FX2N-16EYS (Triac Output: 16 Points)_ 

## **16.13.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement** 

When an output (Y) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers, and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers. 

**==> picture [415 x 226] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
With cover Without cover<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Rear line<br>extension  Lower<br>connector numbers<br>Output indicator<br>lamps<br>(LED lamps)<br>Higher<br>numbers<br>COM1<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>Y0<br>Y1<br>Y2<br>Y3<br>Y4<br>Y5<br>Y6<br>Y7<br>COM2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **16.13.3 External dimensions** 

**==> picture [227 x 148] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-  4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>9(0.36")<br>40(1.58") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**278** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

17 Extension Power Supply Unit 

_17.1 Outline_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

## **17. Extension Power Supply Unit** 

- **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** • Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

- 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

- 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

- 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

**14** 

**15** 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. 

**16** 

## **17.1 Outline** 

When the internal power supplied from the FX3G Series PLC (AC power supply type) is insufficient for powering output extension blocks or special function blocks, the FX3U-1PSU-5V (extension power supply unit) is available. 

**17** 

Only one FX3U-1PSU-5V unit may be connected to a FX3G PLC system. 

Connect extension equipment to the FX3U-1PSU-5V according to the configuration specification limits described in Subsection 17.2.2. 

→ **For the system configuration with FX3U-1PSU-5V, refer to Chapter 6.** → **For the mounting, refer to Chapter 8.** → **For the wiring, refer to Chapter 9.** 

**18** 

**20** 

**279** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

17 Extension Power Supply Unit _17.2 Specifications_ 

## **17.2 Specifications** 

## **17.2.1 Generic Specifications** 

The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit. 

→ **For the generic specifications, refer to Section 4.1.** 

## **17.2.2 Performance Specifications** 

|**Items**|**Items**|**Specifications**|
|---|---|---|
|Supply voltage||100-240V AC|
|Allowable supply voltage range||85-264V AC|
|Rated frequency||50/60Hz|
|Allowable instantaneous power failure time||The allowable momentary power failure time depends on the power supply used.<br>•<br>100V AC power supply system:<br>The operation is continued to the momentary power failure for 10 or less ms.<br>•<br>200V AC power supply system:<br>The operation is continued to the momentary power failure for 100 or less ms.|
|Rush current||30A max. 5ms or less/100V AC, 65A max. 5ms or less/200V AC|
|Power consumption||20W Max.|
|Output current<br>(Internal for<br>supply)|24V DC|0.3A*1|
||5V DC|1A*1|



*1.   The output current depends on the ambient temperature as shown in the derating curve below. 

**==> picture [133 x 106] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Derating curve<br>Output current [A]<br>5V DC<br>1.0<br>0.8<br>24V DC<br>0.3<br>0.2<br>0 40 55<br>Ambient temperature [°C]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **17.2.3 External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [231 x 157] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br> 4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br> 55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**280** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

17 Extension Power Supply Unit _17.3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution_ 

**11** 

**18 19** 

## **17.3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution** 

**1. Do not use when combining with a DC power supply type main unit.** 

**2. The power is supplied as follows when the input extension block (including the FX2N-8ERES/UL and FX2N-8ER) is used on the downstream side of the extension power supply unit.** 

## **12** 

- When the main unit is located on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit The power is supplied from the main unit. 

→ **For details, refer to Chapter 6** 

- When the input/output  powered  extension unit is located on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit 

The power is supplied from the 24V DC service power supply of the input/output  powered  extension unit. 

**13** 

- → **For details, refer to Chapter 6** 

**3. Grounding and power cables should be positioned to exit the unit from above.** → **For details, refer to Subsection 9.4.4 and Subsection 9.4.5.** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**281** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) _18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

## **18. Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement)** 

## **18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks** 

## **18.1.1 FX2N-2AD** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [354 x 152] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>VIN1<br>VIN2<br>IIN1<br>IIN2<br>COM<br>COM<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.2kg (0.44lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

## **18.1.2 FX2N-2DA** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [354 x 155] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>VOUT1<br>VOUT2<br>IOUT1<br>IOUT2<br>COM1<br>COM2<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.2kg (0.44lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**282** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**16 17** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **18.1.3 FX3U-4AD** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [355 x 158] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[2-] 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>24+<br>24-<br>V+<br>CH1 VI- I+<br>CH2 FG V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55") FG<br>CH3 V+<br>(mounting hole pitch) VI-<br>I+<br>FG<br>CH4 V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.2kg (0.44lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Dust Proof sheet, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**15** 

## **18.1.4 FX3U-4DA** 

**==> picture [355 x 171] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>24+<br>24-<br>V+<br>CH1 VI- I+<br>CH2 V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>CH3 V+<br>(mounting hole pitch) VI-<br>I+<br>CH4 V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.2kg (0.44lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Dust Proof sheet, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**19** 

**283** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) _18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

## **18.1.5 FX2N-4AD** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [499 x 448] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>• MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs)<br>• Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws<br>• Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product<br>• Terminal block: M3 screws<br>• The extension cable is already connected to the extension block<br>18.1.6 FX2N-4DA<br>External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>24+<br>24-<br>V+<br>CH1 VI-<br>I+<br>FG<br>CH2 V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55") FG<br>CH3 V+<br>(mounting hole pitch) VI-<br>I+<br>FG<br>CH4 V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>24+<br>24-<br>V+<br>CH1 VI-<br>I+<br>CH2 V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>CH3 V+<br>(mounting hole pitch) VI-<br>I+<br>CH4 V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**284** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

**11 12 13** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**19** 

## **18.1.7 FX2N-4AD-PT** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [499 x 447] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>• MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs)<br>• Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws<br>• Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product<br>• Terminal block: M3 screws<br>• The extension cable is already connected to the extension block<br>18.1.8 FX2N-4AD-TC<br>External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>24+<br>24-<br>I-<br>CH1 L+<br>L-<br>FG<br>CH2 I-<br>L+<br>L-<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55") FG<br>CH3 I-<br>(mounting hole pitch) L+<br>L-<br>FG<br>CH4 I-<br>L+<br>L-<br>24+<br>24-<br>SLD<br>CH1 L+<br>L-<br>CH2 SLD<br>L+<br>L-<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>CH3 SLD<br>(mounting hole pitch) L+<br>L-<br>CH4 SLD<br>L+<br>L-<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**20** 

**285** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) _18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

## **18.1.9 FX2N-5A** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [358 x 155] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>24+<br>24-<br>OUT VI- V+<br>I+<br>V+<br>IN1 VI-<br>I+<br>V+<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55") IN2 VI-<br>I+<br>(mounting hole pitch) IN3 V+<br>VI-<br>I+<br>V+<br>IN4 VI-<br>I+<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

## **18.1.10 FX3U-4LC** 

**==> picture [243 x 171] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External Dimensions<br>2-φ4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit:mm (inches)<br>82(3.23")<br>(mounting hole pitch) 9(0.36")<br>90(3.55") 86(3.39")<br>)itch<br>p<br> hole<br>g<br>82(3.23") 90(3.55")<br>(mountin<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- •MASS(Weight): 0.4kg (0.88lbs) 

- •Installation: 35mm (1.38") wide DIN rail or screws 

- •Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Dust proof sheet, Manual supplied with product 

- •Terminal block: M3 screws 

- •The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

## **Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [390 x 75] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
CT FG PTB/TC-/COM CT FG PTB/TC-/COM OUT1 OUT2<br>CH1 CH2<br>24+ 24- CT PTA/ / PTB/TC+/VL+ CT PTA/ / PTB/TC+/VL+ COM1<br>CT FG PTB/TC-/COM CT FG PTB/TC-/COM OUT3 OUT4<br>CH3 CH4<br>CT PTA/ / PTB/TC+/VL+ CT PTA/ / PTB/TC+/VL+ COM2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**286** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) _18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**17** 

**19** 

## **18.1.11 FX2N-2LC** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [499 x 466] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>• MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs)<br>• Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws<br>• Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product<br>• Terminal block: M3 screws<br>• The extension cable is already connected to the extension block<br>18.1.12 FX2N-8AD<br>External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes<br>Unit:mm (inches)<br>V1+ I1+ COM1 V3+ I3+ COM3<br>24+ 24- V2+ I2+ COM2 V4+ I4+ COM4<br>V6+ I6+ COM6 V8+ I8+ COM8<br>V5+ I5+ COM5 V7+ I7+ COM7<br>67(2.64") 8(0.32")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>75(2.96") 75(2.96")<br>24+ 24-<br>OUT1<br>COM<br>OUT2<br>CT<br>CT<br>CH1 PTA<br>FG<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55") PTB TC+<br>PTB TC-<br>(mounting hole pitch) CT<br>CH2 PTA CT<br>FG<br>PTB TC+<br>PTB TC-<br>90(3.55") 98(3.86") 105(4.14")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.4kg (0.88lbs) 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3.5 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**19** 

**20** 

**287** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) _18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

## **18.1.13 FX3U-16CCL-M** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [339 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>38<br>°8 ©<br>j FX3 u- 16CCL P- OWER@M -<br>CE U<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>——_ | a<br>24+<br>)<br>24-<br>itch<br>p<br>)"<br> hole<br>g<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55<br>DA<br>(mountin DG DB<br>SLD<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, 

   - Terminal resistor : 2 resistors for CC-Link dedicated cable/2 resistors for CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable, Dust Proof sheet, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws for power supply terminal, CC-Link connection terminal M3.5 screws for CC-Link connection terminal block mounting screws (black) 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

## **18.1.14 FX2N-16CCL-M** 

**==> picture [317 x 172] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>ea !<br>wina8 w-------------<br>8<br>te n<br>ee oe |<br>Power C) =<br>| FXa n- 16CCL - M CCLinIk aFa2<br>=<br>a8swo| .<br>75(2.96") 9(0.36")<br>| (mounting hole pitch) < 87(3.43") :<br>85(3.35")<br>24+<br>24-<br>FG<br>SLD<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>DG<br>(mounting hole pitch) DA<br>DB<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.4kg (0.88lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, 

   - Terminal resistor : 2 resistors for CC-Link dedicated cable/2 resistors for CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screw for power supply terminal, M3.5 screw for signal terminal 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**288** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

## **18.1.15 FX2N-32CCL** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [320 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>~------------4<br>| | R HH]<br>FX2N-32CCL<br>dd/<br>a ft\<br>Gan,<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>24+<br>24-<br>FG<br>DA<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>DA<br>DB<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>DB<br>SLD<br>DG<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.2kg (0.44lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

## **18.1.16 FX3U-64CCL** 

## **External Dimensions, Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [339 x 152] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- ° 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>t =n8<br>j FX3 u- 64CCLPOWERO [ o<br>CE iB<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>55(2.17") 87(3.43")<br>i | | a<br>24+<br>24-<br>)(3.55"<br>80(3.15") 90<br>DA<br>DG<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>DB<br>SLD<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Dust Proof sheet, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3 screws for power supply terminal, CC-Link connection terminal M3.5 screws for CC-Link connection terminal block mounting screws (black) 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**19** 

**20** 

**289** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) _18.1 Special Function Units/Blocks_ 

## **18.1.17 FX2N-64CL-M** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [215 x 156] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>4(0.16") 9(0.36")<br>43(1.7") 87(3.43")<br>80(3.15") 90(3.55")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight): 0.15kg (0.33lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of special unit/block number, Manual supplied with product 

- The connector for CC-Link/LT interface is on the front face of the product 

- The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 

**290** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.2 Special Adapters_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**17** 

## **18.2 Special Adapters** 

## **18.2.1 FX3U-4AD-ADP** 

**==> picture [499 x 649] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) 24+ • MASS(Weight):0.1kg (0.22lbs)<br>24- • Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in<br>width or screws<br>V1+<br>• Accessories: Manual supplied with product<br>10 I1+<br>poles COM1 • Terminal block: European type<br>V2+<br>I2+<br>COM2<br>V3+<br>I3+<br>7(0.28") " COM3<br>74 15.5 15.1(0.6 ) 5<br>(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") poles V4+<br>I4+<br>COM4<br>18.2.2 FX3U-4DA-ADP<br>External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) 24+ • MASS(Weight):0.1kg (0.22lbs)<br>24- • Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in<br>width or screws<br>V1+<br>• Accessories: Manual supplied with product<br>10 I1+<br>poles COM1 • Terminal block: European type<br>V2+<br>I2+<br>COM2<br>V3+<br>I3+<br>7(0.28") " COM3<br>74 15.5 15.1(0.6 ) 5<br>(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") poles V4+<br>I4+<br>COM4<br>18.2.3 FX3U-3A-ADP<br>External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>24+ • MASS(Weight):0.1kg (0.22lbs)<br>2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>24- • Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in<br>width or screws<br>10 V1+ • Accessories: Manual supplied with product<br>poles I1+ • Terminal block: European type<br>COM1<br>V2+<br>I2+<br>COM2<br>VO<br>7(0.28") 74 15.5 15.1(0.6") 5 COMIO<br>(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") poles<br>)itch<br>)" p )"<br> hole<br>g<br>90(3.55 98(3.86") 106(4.18<br>(mountin<br>)itch<br>)" p )<br> hole g (4.18"<br>90(3.55 98(3.86")(mountin 106<br>)itch<br>)  hole p )"<br>(3.55" g<br>90 98(3.86") 106(4.18<br>(mountin<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**==> picture [37 x 53] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Display Module<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**20** 

**291** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.2 Special Adapters_ 

## **18.2.4 FX3U-4AD-PT(W)-ADP** 

**==> picture [499 x 670] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) 24+ • MASS(Weight):0.1kg (0.22lbs)<br>24- • Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in<br>width or screws<br>L1+<br>10 L1- • Accessories: Manual supplied with product<br>poles I1- • Terminal block: European type<br>L2+<br>L2-<br>I2-<br>L3+<br>L3-<br>7(0.28") " I3-<br>74 15.5 15.1(0.6 ) 5<br>(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") poles L4+<br>L4-<br>I4-<br>18.2.5 FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP<br>External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) 24+ • MASS(Weight):0.1kg (0.22lbs)<br>24- • Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in<br>width or screws<br>L1+<br>10 L1- • Accessories: Manual supplied with product<br>poles I1- • Terminal block: European type<br>L2+<br>L2-<br>I2-<br>L3+<br>L3-<br>7(0.28") " I3-<br>74 15.5 15.1(0.6 ) 5<br>(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") poles L4+<br>L4-<br>I4-<br>18.2.6 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP<br>External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) 24+ • MASS(Weight):0.1kg (0.22lbs)<br>24- • Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in<br>width or screws<br>10 • Accessories: Manual supplied with product<br>poles J-type • Terminal block: European type<br>J-type<br>L1+<br>L1-<br>L2+<br>L2-<br>7(0.28") " L3+<br>74 15.5 15.1(0.6 ) 5<br>(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") poles L3-<br>L4+<br>L4-<br>)itch<br>)  hole p )"<br>(3.55" g<br>90 98(3.86") 106(4.18<br>(mountin<br>)itch<br>)  hole p )"<br>(3.55" g<br>90 98(3.86") 106(4.18<br>(mountin<br>)itch<br>)" p )<br> hole g (4.18"<br>90(3.55 98(3.86")(mountin 106<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**292** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.2 Special Adapters_ 

**11** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**16** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **18.2.7 FX3U-232ADP(-MB)** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [194 x 162] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>7(0.28") 74 7.5 15.1(0.6")<br>(0.3") "<br>(2.92") 17.6(0.7 )<br>)itch<br>)" p )"<br> hole<br>g<br>90(3.55 98(3.86") 106(4.18<br>(mountin<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):80g (0.18lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- • Accessories: Manual supplied with product • Connector: RS-232C (D-SUB 9-pin, male) 

**12** 

## **Terminal Layout** 

|9<br>8<br>7<br>6<br>5<br>4<br>3<br>2<br>1|1<br>2<br>3<br>4<br>5<br>6<br>7<br>8<br>9|CD(DCD)<br>RD(RXD)<br>SD(TXD)<br>ER(DTR)<br>SG(GND)<br>DR(DSR)<br>Not used<br>Not used<br>Not used|
|---|---|---|



## **18.2.8 FX3U-485ADP(-MB)** 

## **External Dimensions** 

|**Dimensions**|||
|---|---|---|
|Un<br>4.5 mounting holes|it:mm (inches)||
|)<br>74<br>(2.92")<br>15.5<br>(0.62")|||
||90(3.55")|98(3.86")<br>(mountinghole pitch)|
||15.1(0.6")<br>17.6(0.7")||
|**Layout**|||
|RDA<br>RDB<br>SDA<br>SDB<br>SG<br>110<br>Terminal resistance<br>setting switch<br>330<br>OPEN|||
||||



- MASS(Weight):80g (0.18lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in width or screws 

- Accessories: Label for indication of link station number, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: European type 

- Terminal resistance: 330 /110 , built-in 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**293** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.3 Expansion Board_ 

## **18.3 Expansion Board** 

## **18.3.1 FX3G-232-BD** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [157 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit:mm (inches)<br>35(1.38") 5.2 12<br>(0.21") (0.48")<br>51.2(2.02")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):20g (0.05lbs) 

- Accessories: Two M3 8 tapping screws (for installation of board), Side cover, Manual supplied with product 

- • Connector: RS-232C (D-SUB 9-pin, male) 

## **Terminal Layout** 

|**Terminal Layout**||
|---|---|
|1|CD(DCD)|
|2<br>3<br>1 2 3 4 5|RD(RXD)<br>SD(TXD)|
|4|ER(DTR)|
|5|SG(GND)|
|6<br>6 7 8 9|DR(DSR)|
|7|Not used|
|8|Not used|
|9|Not used|



## **18.3.2 FX3G-422-BD** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [151 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit:mm (inches)<br>35(1.38") 2.9 12<br>(0.12") (0.48")<br>51.2(2.02")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):20g (0.05lbs) 

- Accessories: Two M3 8 tapping screws (for installation of board), Side cover, Manual supplied with product 

- • Connector: RS-422 (MINI DIN 8-pin, female) 

**294** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.3 Expansion Board_ 

**11** 

**14** 

**14** 

**18 19 20** 

## **18.3.3 FX3G-485-BD** 

**==> picture [222 x 268] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External Dimensions<br>Unit:mm (inches)<br>35(1.38") 15.1 14.1<br>(0.6") (0.56")<br>Terminal Layout<br>S S S R R Terminal resistance<br>G D D D D setting switch<br>B A B A<br>5 poles<br>110 OPEN 330<br>51.2(2.02")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):20g (0.05lbs) 

- Accessories: Two M3 8 tapping screws (for installation of board), Side cover, Label for indication of link station number(2 types), Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: European type 

- Terminal resistance:330 /110 , built-in 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

## **18.3.4 FX3G-2AD-BD** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [156 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit:mm (inches)<br>POW<br>35(1.38") 15.1 14.1<br>(0.6") (0.56")<br>51.2(2.02")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [62 x 63] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
5 poles<br>V1+ I1+ V2+ I2+ VI-<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):20g (0.05lbs) 

- Accessories: Two M3 8 tapping screws (for installation of board), Side cover, 

Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: European type 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**295** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.3 Expansion Board_ 

## **18.3.5 FX3G-1DA-BD** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [150 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit:mm (inches)<br>POW<br>35(1.38") 15.1 14.1<br>(0.6") (0.56")<br>51.2(2.02")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):20g (0.05lbs) 

- Accessories: Two M3 8 tapping screws (for installation of board), Side cover, Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: European type 

## **Terminal Layout** 

**==> picture [59 x 62] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
5 poles<br>V+ I+ VI-<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **18.3.6 FX3G-8AV-BD** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [145 x 129] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit: mm(inches)<br>35(1.38") 12<br>(0.48")<br>51.2(2.02")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):20g (0.05lbs) 

   - Two M3 8 tapping screws (for installation of board), Side cover, Trimmer layout label, Manual supplied with product 

- Accessories: 

## **Trimmer Layout** 

**==> picture [84 x 48] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
VR0 VR1 VR2 VR3<br>VR4 VR5 VR6 VR7<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**296** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.4 Power Supply_ 

**11** 

**16** 

**19** 

## **18.4 Power Supply** 

## **18.4.1 FX2N-20PSU** 

**==> picture [437 x 201] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External Dimensions, Terminal Layout<br>2- 4.5<br>mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) L N<br>24V+ 24V-<br>24V+ 24V-<br>4(0.16") 52(2.05") 9(0.36")<br>(mounting hole pitch) 75(2.96")<br>60(2.37")<br>7.5 (0.3")<br>4(0.16")<br>)90(3.55" 98(3.86")<br>(mounting hole pitch)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

- MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs) 

- Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in width or screws 

**15** 

- Accessories: Manual supplied with product 

- Terminal block: M3.5 screws 

## **18.5 Connector Conversion Adapter** 

**16** 

## **18.5.1 FX3G-CNV-ADP** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [214 x 144] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit:mm (inches)<br>74(2.92") 12 14.6<br>(0.48") (0.58")<br>90(3.55")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):0.1kg (0.22lbs) 

- Accessories: Four M3 8 tapping screws (for installation of adapter), Side cover, Manual supplied with product 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**297** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 

_18.6 Interface Module_ 

## **18.5.2 FX2N-CNV-BC** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [137 x 137] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2- 3.2<br>mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)<br>60.5(2.39")<br>30(1.19") 40(1.58")<br>16.4<br>(0.65")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):40g (0.09lbs) 

- Installation: Screws only 

## **18.6 Interface Module** 

## **18.6.1 FX-232AWC-H** 

## **External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [224 x 161] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit:mm (inches)<br>80(3.15") 25<br>(0.99")<br>60(2.37")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- MASS(Weight):0.1kg (0.22lbs) 

- Accessories: Manual supplied with product 

- • Connector: RS-232C 

   - (D-SUB 25-pin, female) RS-422 

   - (D-SUB 25-pin, female) 

**298** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.1 Specifications_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **19. Display Module(FX3G-5DM)** 

**STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS** • Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation. An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents. 

- **STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS** • Do not disassemble or modify the PLC. Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions. For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 

- • Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. - Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards, and special adapters 

- - Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks - Battery and memory cassette 

**14** 

## **19.1 Specifications** 

## **19.1.1 Applicable PLC** 

|**Model name**|**Applicability**|
|---|---|
|FX3GSeries|Ver. 1.10 or later|



## **19.1.2 Display/switch specifications** 

||**Item**|**Specifications**|
|---|---|---|
|Display device||STN monochrome liquid crystal display|
|Backlight||Green LED backlight|
|Displaed letters|Number of letters|16 letters (half-width character)  4 lines|
||Characters|Alphabets, Numbers, Japanese character|
||Language for menu display|English/Japanese|
|Button||4 operation buttons (OK, ESC, +, and -)|



**18** 

**299** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.1 Specifications_ 

## **19.1.3 Part Names** 

**==> picture [207 x 101] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Liquid crystal screen<br>"ESC" button<br>"-" button<br>"+" button<br>"OK" button<br>Cut off the part when<br>using an expansion board<br>at the same time.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Functions of operation buttons** 

The display module has 4 operation buttons as shown in the following table. 

|**Name of button**|**Function of operation button**|
|---|---|
|ESC|Use this button to cancel the operation and to return to the previous screen.|
|-|Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value.|
|+|Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value.|
|OK|Use this button to select an item or to determine the set numeric value.|



## **19.1.4 External Dimensions** 

**==> picture [194 x 135] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit: mm(inches)<br>49.4(1.95") 9.6(0.38")<br>12(0.48")<br>34.4(1.36")<br>51.2(2.02")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**300** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.2 Installation and Removal_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**14 15** 

**15** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**20** 

## **19.2 Installation and Removal** 

Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the display module. 

## **19.2.1 Installation** 

## **(when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter is not used together)** 

The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit in this example. 

## **1 Remove the top cover.** 

Remove the top cover (A in the figure on the right) as shown in the right figure. 

## **Caution:** 

Display module cannot attach in the top cover(S) side of a 40/60point types main unit. 

## **2 Install/remove the display module.** 

Attach the display module to the main unit as shown in the right figure (arrow 2). 

Remove the display module while pressing and holding the display module fixing hook (B in the figure on the right) as shown in the right figure (arrow 2'). 

**==> picture [159 x 153] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>Top cover(S)<br>1<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [118 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
B<br>2 2'<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**13** 

**14** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19** 

**301** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.2 Installation and Removal_ 

## **19.2.2 Installation** 

## **(when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter is used together)** 

The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example. 

## **1 Attach the expansion board/connector conversion adapter to the main unit.** 

## → **For the attachment method, refer to Chapter 8.** 

## **Caution:** 

- Make sure to attach the expansion board/connector conversion adapter before the display module. 

- The display module cannot be attached to the expansion board/connector conversion adapter attached on the top cover (S) side of the 40/60-point type main unit. 

## **2 Remove the upper connector cover (A in the right figure).** 

**==> picture [499 x 237] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Remove the upper connector cover (A in the  A<br>right figure). Top cover (S) 2<br>3 Remove the part B shown in the right figure<br>using a snipper, etc.<br>Caution:<br>B<br>Removal of the part B is not necessary when the connector<br>conversion adapter is used together and the main unit is the 14/24-<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Removal of the part B is not necessary when the connector conversion adapter is used together and the main unit is the 14/24point type. 

## **4 Attach the display module to the option connector of the expansion board/connector conversion adapter.** 

Attach the display module to the option connector (D in the figure on the right) of the expansion board/connector conversion adapter while pressing and holding the display module fixing hook (C in the figure on the right) as shown in the right figure (arrow 4). 

Remove the display module while pressing and holding the display module fixing hook (C in the figure on the right) as shown in the right figure (arrow 4'). 

**==> picture [122 x 152] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
C<br>4'<br>4<br>D<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**302** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.3 Summary of Functions_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **19.3 Summary of Functions** 

The display module functions are summarized below. 

|**Item**|**Item**|**Function**|**Remarks**|**Reference**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Top screen (time display)||Displays the time indicated by the main unit’s internal real-time<br>clock.|Button operation|Subsection<br>19.4.2|
|**Menu screen functions**|||||
|Monitor/Test||Input (X)*1, output (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state (S), timer (T),<br>counter (C), data register (D) [16-bit/32-bit], extended register (R)<br>[16-bit/32-bit], and extended file register (ER) [16-bit/32-bit]<br>monitor/test function.|Button operation|Section 19.6|
|ErrorCheck||Performs error checks and displays the results.|Button operation|Section 19.7|
|LANGUAGE<br>(selects the me<br>language)|nu display|Selects either Japanese or English as the menu display language.|Button operation|Section 19.8|
|Contrast||Adjusts the contrast (-5 to 10); default setting: 0|Button operation|Section 19.9|
|ClockMenu|Display|Displays the current time.|Button operation|Subsection<br>19.10.1|
||Setting|Sets the current time.|Button operation|Subsection<br>19.10.2|
|Keyword||The currently specified keyword can be canceled.|Button operation|Section 19.11|
|Cassette<br>(Memory cassette transfer)||Allows data transfers between the internal EEPROM and the<br>memory cassette.|Button operation|Section 19.12|
|**Non-menu functions**|||||
|Specified device monitor<br>function||Displays the monitor/test screen for a specified device at the top.|Requires program|Section 19.14|
|Screen saver function||Displays the screen saver if key operation is not given for specified<br>period of time.|Requires program*3|Section 19.15|
|Display screen protect function||Enables all functions, prohibits change (test) functions, and<br>protects the top screen (time display).|Requires program|Section 19.16|
|Operation button ON/OFF<br>information||Allows monitoring of operation button ON/OFF status.|Requires<br>program<br>or monitor|Section 19.17|
|Hexadecimal current value<br>display setting||Changes the display format of the current values and setting<br>values for the timer, counter, data register, extended register, and<br>extended file register to a hexadecimal display format.|Requires program*2|Section 19.18|



- *1. There is no test function for "Input (X)". 

- *2. A sequence program is required to enable a hexadecimal display of the timer (T), counter (C), data register (file register) (D) [16-bit/32-bit], extended register (R) [16-bit/32-bit], and extended file register (ER) [16-bit/32-bit] current values. 

   - → **Refer to Section 19.19 for the setting procedure.** 

- *3. When no setting is made within a program the screen saver function becomes effective after 10 minutes. 

→ **Refer to Section 19.15 for screen saver function.** 

**303** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.4 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen_ 

## **19.4 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen** 

All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in English. When the menu display language is set to Japanese, please convert the screen messages to their Japanese translations. 

→ **Refer to Section 19.20 for the Japanese and English display character correspondence table.** → **Refer to Section 19.8 for menu display language setting.** 

## **19.4.1 Title screen** 

The screen shown at right is displayed for 1.5 seconds after the power is turned on. 

|The screen shown at right is displayed for 1.5 seconds after the power|The screen shown at right is displayed for 1.5 seconds after the power||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|<br>is turned on.<br>**Content**<br>[1]<br>Model name<br>[2]<br>Version||ME L S EC - F<br>F X 3 G<br>S e r <br>V e r<br>1 . 1 0<br>.|i e s|||[1]<br>[2]|
||**Content**||||||
|[1]|Model name||||||
||||||||
|[2]|Version||||||



## **19.4.2 Top screen (time display)** 

Following the title screen display, the "Current Time screen" is then displayed. 

||||0|1|.|1|0|.|0|8||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||2|3|:|5|9|:|5|9|(|We d|)|



The specified device monitor screen is displayed instead when the specified device monitor function is used. → **Refer to Section 19.14 for details of the specified device monitor function.** 

Although the year displays in a 2-digit format (08), this can be changed to a 4-digit format (2008) by revising the program. 

→ **Refer to Subsection 19.10.3 for the 2-digit year to 4-digit year change procedure.** 

## **19.4.3 Menu screen** 

As shown in the figure at right, the menu screen displays 4 lines of the total menu. Press the [+] button to scroll downward through the menu. 

|<br>total menu. Press the [+] button to scroll downward through the menu.<br>Button operations at this menu screen are explained below.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Returns to the "top screen" (time display).<br>-<br>Scrolls upward through the menu.<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the beginning of the<br>menu.<br>+<br>Scrolls downward through the menu.<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the end of the menu.<br>OK<br>Selects the item where the cursor is blinking.|<br>total menu. Press the [+] button to scroll downward through the menu.<br>Button operations at this menu screen are explained below.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Returns to the "top screen" (time display).<br>-<br>Scrolls upward through the menu.<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the beginning of the<br>menu.<br>+<br>Scrolls downward through the menu.<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the end of the menu.<br>OK<br>Selects the item where the cursor is blinking.|L ANGUAGE<br>C o n t r a s t<br>E r r o r C h e c k<br>Mo n i t o r / T e s t|
|---|---|---|
|**Button**|**Operation Description**||
|||C l o c k Me n u<br>K e y w o r d<br>C a s s e t t e|
|ESC|Returns to the "top screen" (time display).||
|-|Scrolls upward through the menu.<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the beginning of the<br>menu.||
|+|Scrolls downward through the menu.<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the end of the menu.||
||||
|OK|Selects the item where the cursor is blinking.||



**304** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.5 Menu Structure_ 

**11** 

**16 17 18 19** 

## **19.5 Menu Structure** 

||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Title screen|OK<br>or<br>ecs.|Menu screen||~~Operation keys~~|||
|F X 3 G<br>S e r i e s<br>ME L S EC - F<br>V e r . 1 . 1 0||||OK<br>|Press the [OK] button<br>Press the [ESC] button<br>The [+] / [-] button are used to move<br>the cursor and switch between display<br>screens.<br> <br>||
|||||ESC|||
|||||+<br>-|||
|Top screen(Time display)<br>Approx. 1.5 s|||||||
||||||||
|0 1 .<br>0 . 0 8<br>2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9 (<br>)<br>Wed<br>1|ESC|C l o c k Me n u<br>C o n t r a s t<br>E r r o r C h e c k<br>Mo n i t o r / T e s<br>L A<br>GUA<br>N<br>E<br>G||t|OK|D ( 1 6 b i<br>DD ( 3 2<br>t )<br>b i t )<br>T<br>( 1 6 b i t )<br>R ( 3 2 b i t )<br>C<br>R<br>D<br>E<br>D<br>( 1 6 b i t )<br>R ( 3 2 b i t )<br>R<br>E<br>X<br>Y<br>M<br>S|
||||||ESC||
||||||OK||
|X 0 1 0<br>. . . 3 4 5 6 7<br>( S p e c i f i e d )|||||||
||ESC||||||
|||||||Displayexample|
|||||||N o<br>e r r o r s<br>E r r o r C h e c k|
||||||ESC||
||||||OK||
||||||||
|||||||L A<br>GUA<br>N<br>E<br>G<br>n<br>E<br>g l i<br>h<br>s<br>a<br>J<br>p a n<br>s<br>e<br>e|
||||||ESC||
||||||OK||
|||||||Displayexample|
|||||||C o n t r a s t<br>)<br>0<br>1<br>~<br>5<br>-<br>(<br>0|
||||||ESC||
||||||OK||
||||||||
|||||||C u r r e n t<br>t i<br>C l o c k<br>S e t t<br>me<br>i n g|
||||||ESC||
||||||||



**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**305** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.5 Menu Structure_ 

|K e<br>w<br>r<br>y<br>o<br>C a s s e t t e<br>d|OK|Displayexample|
|---|---|---|
|||e<br>h<br>T<br>K e y<br>o<br>w<br>d<br>n<br>s<br>i<br>o t<br>e<br>s<br>t<br>r|
||ESC<br>OK||
|||Displayexample|
|||P L<br>P L<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>Mem<br>r y<br>o<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>C<br>C|
||ESC||



**306** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.6 Monitor/Test Mode_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16 17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **19.6 Monitor/Test Mode** 

## **19.6.1 Relevant devices** 

Monitoring and testing can be performed from the "Monitor/Test" menu for the devices listed below. (Monitoring/testing is not possible for the file register (D) and the index register (V/Z)). : Possible : Possible under certain conditions : Not possible -: Item not supported by this device 

|**Device**|**Monitored Items**|**Monitored Items**|**Monitored Items**|**Monitored Items**|**Monitored Items**|**Test Items**|**Test Items**|**Test Items**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**Contact**|**Reset**|**Operation**<br>**Direction**|**Current**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Value**|**Forced**<br>**ON/OFF**|**Current**<br>**Value**<br>**Change**|**Setting**<br>**Change**|
|Input [X]||-|-|-|-|-|-|-|
|Output [Y]||-|-|-|-|*1|-|-|
|Auxiliary relay [M]||-|-|-|-|*1|-|-|
|State [S]||-|-|-|-|*1|-|-|
|Timer [T]|||-|||||*2|
|Counter [C]|||*3|||||*2|
||||||||||
||||||||||
|Data register [D, DD]|-|-|-||-|-||-|
|File register [D, DD]|-|-|-||-|-||-|
||||||||||
|Extended register [R, DR]|-|-|-||-|-||-|
|Extended file register [ER, DER]*4|-|-|-||-|-||-|
|Index register (V, Z)|-|-|-||-|-||-|
||||||||||



- *1. A forced ON or OFF is executed for only one operation cycle, and therefore has a considerable effect on the SET/RST and self retaining circuits when the PLC is running. 

   - Moreover, a forced ON/OFF result is retained for devices (Y,M,S) which are not being driven by an OUT instruction, etc., in the program. 

- *2. Setting values of timer and counter  can be changed when the PLC status is as shown below. 

|**Program Memory Type**|**Program Memory Type**|**RUN/STOP Status**|**Setting Change Enabled/Disabled**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Internal EEPROM||RUN|Enabled|
|||STOP|Enabled|
|Memory cassette|PROTECT switch ON|RUN|Disabled|
|||STOP|Disabled|
||PROTECT switch OFF|RUN|Enabled|
|||STOP|Enabled|



- *3. The C200 to C255 32-bit up/down counters and the high-speed counters have counting directions. 

- *4. Extended file registers stored in the EEPROM in the main unit, or extended file registers stored in the EEPROM inside the memory cassette when the memory cassette is attached. 

**307** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.6 Monitor/Test Mode_ 

## **19.6.2 Monitor mode operation** 

This section explains the procedure for monitoring the input [X], output [Y], auxiliary relay [M], state [S], timer [T], counter [C], data registers [D, DD], extended registers [R, DR], and the extended file registers [ER, DER]. The file register [D] and the index registers [V,Z] cannot be monitored. 

→ **Refer to Subsection 19.6.3 for a monitor screen display example.** → **Refer to Section 19.14 for specified device monitor operation procedures.** → **Refer to Section 19.18 for the procedure used to display the timer, counter, and data register current values as hexadecimal values.** 

- 1) At the menu screen, use the [+] and [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Monitor/Test" item, then press [OK] to display the "device selection screen" shown at right. 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)", press [ESC] at the menu screen. 

- 2) Use the [+] and [-] buttons to move the cursor to the device which is to be monitored. 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC]. 

D ( 1 6 b i t ) DD ( 3 2 b i t ) T C R ( 1 6 b i t ) DR ( 3 2 b i t ) ER ( 1 6 b i t ) D ER ( 3 2 b i t ) X Y M S 

- 3) Press [OK] to display the monitor screen for the device which was selected for monitoring. 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "device selection screen", press [ESC]. 

After the power is turned on, the number of the device to be displayed is shown as follows. 

- a) The first time the power is turned on, the display begins with device No.1. 

|||||D<br>D|0<br>1|0<br>0|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||D|2|0|
|||||D|3|0|



   - b) At subsequent power ONs, the device which was being monitored at the previous operation is displayed (they are saved in memory for each device type). 

- 4) Use the [+] and [-] buttons to move the cursor or the screen to the until the device to be monitored is displayed. 

      - → **Refer to Subsection 19.6.3 for status display.** 

|||||D|1|0|0|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||D|1|1|0|
|||||D|1|2|0|
|||||D|1|3|0|
|||||||||



|**Selected Device Type**|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|---|
|•<br>All devices|ESC|Returns to the "device selection screen".|
|•<br>Data registers (D, DD)<br>•<br>Extended registers<br>(R, DR)<br>•<br>Extended file registers<br>(ER, DER)<br>•<br>Timer (T)<br>•<br>Counter (C)|-|Scrolls upward. Press for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>If pressed again at the beginning of the device No. list, the display jumps to the end of<br>the device No. list.|
||+|Scrolls downward. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>If pressed again at the end of the device No. list, the display jumps to the beginning of<br>the device No. list.|
|•<br>Input (X)<br>•<br>Output (Y)<br>•<br>Auxiliary relay (M)<br>•<br>State (S)|-|Scrolls the display screen upward. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>If pressed again at the beginning of the device No. list, the display jumps to the end of<br>the device No. list.|
||+|Scrolls the display screen downward. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed<br>scrolling. If pressed again at the end of the device No. list, the display jumps to the<br>beginning of the device No. list.|
|•<br>All devices except (x)|OK|Switches to the test mode when hold for 1 second or longer.|



**308** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.6 Monitor/Test Mode_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **19.6.3 Monitor screen and status display** 

- → **Refer to Section 19.18 for the procedure used to display the current values as hexadecimal values.** 

## **1. Data register [D (16-bit)] / extended register [R (16-bit)] / extended file register [ER (16-bit)]** 

|**Display Content**<br>[1]<br>Device No.<br>[2]<br>Current value||D<br>0<br>D<br>1<br>D<br>2<br>D<br>3<br>0<br>0 0<br>1<br>0 0<br>1 0<br>0 0<br>1<br>1|0|[2]<br>[1]|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||||0<br>0<br>0||



## **2. Data register [DD (32-bit)] / extended register [DR (32-bit)] / extended file register [DER (32-bit)]** 

|**Display Content**<br>[1]<br>Device No.<br>[Upper 16-bit device No. (odd number)]<br>[Lower 16-bit device No. (even number)]<br>[2]<br>Current value|**Display Content**<br>[1]<br>Device No.<br>[Upper 16-bit device No. (odd number)]<br>[Lower 16-bit device No. (even number)]<br>[2]<br>Current value||D<br>D<br>1<br>1|1<br>0<br>,<br>0<br>0<br><br>0<br>0<br>1||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**Display Content**|||||
|[1]|Device No.<br>[Upper 16-bit device No. (odd number)]<br>[Lower 16-bit device No. (even number)]|||||
|||||3<br>2<br>,<br>0<br>0<br><br>0<br>0<br>1||
|||||||
|[2]|Current value|||||



## **File register (D):** 

The file register (D) current value cannot be directly monitored at the display module. 

## **3. Timer [T]** 

**==> picture [454 x 132] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[1] [2] [3]<br>Display Content<br>[1] Device No. T 0 T S R<br>Contact image T N 0 [4]<br>[2] ON:<br>OFF: Blank T V 1 0 0 0 [5]<br>Reset image<br>[3] ON:<br>OFF: Blank<br>[4] Current value<br>[5] Setting value [*1]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**16** 

**17** 

- *1. When not using it in a program, a setting value is displayed as "-----". 

**309** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.6 Monitor/Test Mode_ 

## **4. Counter [C]** 

|[1]|Device No.|**Display Content**||C0|C0|C0|to C199|to C199|to C199|[1]|[1]|[2]|[2]|[2]|||[3]|[3]|||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|[2]|Contact image<br>ON:|||C||||C|0<br>N|CS||||R||||||||0||[5]|
||OFF:<br>Blank|||||||C|V|||||||||||1|0|0||[6]|
||Reset image||||||||||||||||||||||||
|[3]|ON:||||||||||||||||||||||||
||OFF:<br>Blank||||||||||||||||||||||||
||Count direction|display||C200 to C255||||||||[1]||[2]|||[3]|||||[4]|||
|[4]|UP count:<br>DOWN count:|Blank||C|||2|0|0|S<br>C||||R||||||U|||||
||(32-bit up/down|counter and high-speed counter only)||||||C|N|||||||||||||0||[5]|
|[5]|Current value|||||||C|V||||||||||||-|1||**[**5**]**<br>6|
|[6]|Setting value*1||||||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||



*1. When not using it in a program, a setting value is displayed as "-----". 

## **5. Input [X] / Output [Y] / Auxiliary Relay [M] / State [S]** 

||**Display Content**|
|---|---|
|[1]|Device No. at beginning of line.<br>Input (X) and output (Y): 8 points per line.<br>Auxiliary relay (M), special auxiliary relay (M), and state (S): 10 points per line.|
|[2]|ON/OFF status<br>ON: Last digit of device No..<br>OFF: " . ".|



|X 0 0 0<br>X 0 1 0<br>X 0 2 0<br>X 0 3 0|0 1 2 3 4 . . .|0 1 2 3 4 . . .|[2]<br>[1]|[2]<br>[1]|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||. . . 3 4 5 6 7<br>0 1 2 . . . 6 7<br>. . . . . 5 6 .||||
||||||
||||||
|~~M~~<br>0<br>M<br>1 0<br>M<br>2 0<br>M<br>3 0|. 4 5 . . 8 9<br>. . .|||[2]<br>[1]|
||3 . . 6 7<br>. .<br>. . 2<br>. 4 5 . . 8 9<br>0 1 .<br>3 . . 6 7 . .<br>0 1 2||||
||||||



**310** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.6 Monitor/Test Mode_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**14** 

**16** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **19.6.4 Test mode operation** 

There are 3 types of test mode operations, depending on the device type. The 3 operations are explained below. 

→ **Refer to Subsection 19.6.1 for test mode subject devices.** 

## **1. Data registers [D: D (16-bit), DD (32-bit)] / extended registers [R: R (16-bit), DR (32-bit) / extended file registers [ER: ER (16-bit), DER (32-bit)]** 

- 1) Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose current value is to be changed. 

|Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose|Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose||
|---|---|---|
|<br>current value is to be changed.<br>→**Refer to Subsection 19.6.2 for monitor function operation.**<br>Hold the [OK] button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test<br>mode. The current value begins blinking (refer to fig. at right).<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the value as desired.<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press<br>[ESC].<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor screen".<br>-<br>Reduces the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed<br>reduction.<br>+<br>Increases the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed<br>increase.<br>OK<br>Registers the current value and returns to the "monitor screen".||D 1<br>0 0<br>0<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 1<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 2<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 3<br>2<br>0<br>0<br>0|
||||
|||D 1<br>0 0<br>0<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 1<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 2<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 3<br>2<br>0<br>0<br>0|
||||
|||D 1<br>0 0<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 1<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 2<br>2<br>D 1<br>0 3<br>2<br>0<br>0<br>1|
|**Button**|**Operation Description**||
|ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor screen".||
|-|Reduces the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed<br>reduction.||
||||
|+|Increases the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed<br>increase.||
|OK|Registers the current value and returns to the "monitor screen".||



- 2) Hold the [OK] button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test mode. The current value begins blinking (refer to fig. at right). 

- 3) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the value as desired. To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press [ESC]. 

**13** 

## **14** 

## **15** 

- 4) Press [OK] to register the current value and return to the "monitor screen". 

- File register (D) 

   - The display module's test function cannot be used to change the current value of the file register (D) which is stored in the program memory. 

**17** 

**19** 

**20** 

**311** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.6 Monitor/Test Mode_ 

## **2. Timer [T], counter [C]** 

- 1) Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device where the test function is to be used. However, when not using it in a program, a setting value is displayed as "-----". Test function cannot be used. → **Refer to Subsection 19.6.2 for monitor function operation.** 

- 2) Press the [OK] button to display the cursor, then select the "test subject selection screen". 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press [ESC]. 

- 3) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to select the test subject. To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press [ESC]. 

|**Test Subject**|**Test Description**|
|---|---|
|[1]|Contact forced ON/OFF|
|[2]|Current value change|
|[3]|Setting value change|



- 4) Hold the [OK] button for 1 second or longer to register the test subject selection, and switch to the test mode. 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "test subject selection screen", press [ESC] 

|**Test Subject**|**Status when [OK] is hold for 1 second or longer**|
|---|---|
|[1]|No change|
|[2]|Numeric value begins blinking.|
|[3]||



**==> picture [124 x 77] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[Monitor screen]<br>T 0 T S R<br>T N 0<br>T V 1 0 0 0<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [124 x 77] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[Test subject selection screen]<br>T 0 T S R<br>T N 0<br>T V 1 0 0 0<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [144 x 171] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[1]<br>T 0 T S R<br>T N 0 [2]<br>T V 1 0 0 0 [3]<br>T 0 T S R<br>T N 0<br>T V 1 0 0 0<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 5) Operation varies as shown below, depending on the selected test subject. a) For "contact forced ON/OFF" 

The contact ON/OFF status is highlighted when [OK] is pressed. 

|<br> For "current value change","setting value change"<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the value as desired, then<br>press [OK] to register the changed value.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Returns to the "test subject selection screen".<br>-<br>Disabled<br>+<br>Disabled<br>OK<br>Highlights the contact ON/OFF status, meaning the current<br>value can not be changed.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "test subject<br>selection screen".<br>-<br>Reduces the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-<br>speed reduction.<br>+<br>Increases the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-<br>speed increase.<br>OK<br>Registers the current value or the setting value and returns to<br>the "test subject selection screen".|<br> For "current value change","setting value change"<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the value as desired, then<br>press [OK] to register the changed value.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Returns to the "test subject selection screen".<br>-<br>Disabled<br>+<br>Disabled<br>OK<br>Highlights the contact ON/OFF status, meaning the current<br>value can not be changed.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "test subject<br>selection screen".<br>-<br>Reduces the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-<br>speed reduction.<br>+<br>Increases the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-<br>speed increase.<br>OK<br>Registers the current value or the setting value and returns to<br>the "test subject selection screen".|V<br>N<br>T<br>T<br>T<br>0<br>S<br>T|0<br>0<br>0<br>1 0<br>R|
|---|---|---|---|
|||||
|||V<br>N<br>T<br>T<br>T<br>0<br>S<br>T|0<br>0<br>0<br>1<br>R|
|**Button**|**Operation Description**|||
|ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "test subject<br>selection screen".|||
|-|Reduces the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-<br>speed reduction.|||
|+|Increases the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-<br>speed increase.|||
|OK|Registers the current value or the setting value and returns to<br>the "test subject selection screen".|||



   - b) For "current value change","setting value change" 

- 6) After the setting operation is completed, return to the "test subject selection screen", where the [ESC] button can then be pressed to return to the "monitor screen". 

**312** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.6 Monitor/Test Mode_ 

**11** 

**16** 

**19 20** 

## **3. Output [Y] / auxiliary relay [M] / special auxiliary relay [M] / state [S]** 

Forced ON/OFF operations are possible for the output [Y] / auxiliary relay [M] / special auxiliary relay [M] / state [S] contacts. 

- 1) Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose ON/ OFF status is to be changed. → **Refer to Subsection 19.6.2 for monitor function operation.** 

|<br>OFF status is to be changed.<br>→**Refer to Subsection 19.6.2 for monitor function operation.**<br>Hold the [OK] button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test<br>mode. The device then begins blinking (refer to figure at right).<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "test subject selection<br>screen", press [ESC].<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the blinking position to the device<br>where a forced ON/OFF is desired.<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press<br>[ESC].<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor screen".<br>-<br>Moves in the lower device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF subject<br>selection).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>+<br>Moves in the higher device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF subject<br>selection).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.|<br>OFF status is to be changed.<br>→**Refer to Subsection 19.6.2 for monitor function operation.**<br>Hold the [OK] button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test<br>mode. The device then begins blinking (refer to figure at right).<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "test subject selection<br>screen", press [ESC].<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the blinking position to the device<br>where a forced ON/OFF is desired.<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press<br>[ESC].<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor screen".<br>-<br>Moves in the lower device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF subject<br>selection).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.<br>+<br>Moves in the higher device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF subject<br>selection).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.|Y<br>0 0<br>Y<br>1 0<br>Y<br>2 0<br>Y<br>3 0<br>. . . . .<br>. . .<br>0<br>0<br>0<br>0<br>. . . . .<br>. . .<br>. .<br>.<br>. . .<br>. . . . .<br>. . .|
|---|---|---|
||||
|||Y<br>0 0<br>Y<br>1 0<br>Y<br>2 0<br>Y<br>3 0<br>. . . .<br>. . .<br>0<br>0<br>0<br>0<br>. .<br>. .<br>. . .<br>. . . . .<br>. . .<br>. . . . .<br>. . .|
||||
|||Y<br>0 0<br>Y<br>1 0<br>Y<br>2 0<br>Y<br>3 0<br>. . . . .<br>. . .<br>0<br>0<br>0<br>0<br>. . . . .<br>. . .<br>. . . . .<br>. . .<br>. . . . .<br>. . .|
|**Button**|**Operation Description**||
|ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor screen".||
|-|Moves in the lower device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF subject<br>selection).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.||
|+|Moves in the higher device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF subject<br>selection).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.||



- 2) Hold the [OK] button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test mode. The device then begins blinking (refer to figure at right). To cancel the operation and return to the "test subject selection screen", press [ESC]. 

- 3) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the blinking position to the device where a forced ON/OFF is desired. To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press [ESC]. 

- 4) Press the [OK] button to highlight the contact's ON/OFF status. Return to the "monitor screen", press [ESC]. 

||Y<br>0 0<br>Y<br>1 0<br>Y<br>2 0<br>Y<br>3 0<br>. . . . .<br>. . .<br>0<br>0<br>0<br>0<br>. . . 6 .<br>. . .<br>. . . . .<br>. . .<br>. . . . .<br>. . .|
|---|---|



|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|
|ESC|Returns to the "monitor screen".|
|-|Moves in the lower device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF subject<br>selection).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.|
|+|Moves in the higher device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF subject<br>selection).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.|
|OK|Highlights the contact ON/OFF status.|



**12** 

**13** 

## **14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

- 5) Press [ESC] to return to the monitor screen. 

**18** 

**313** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.7 Error Check_ 

## **19.6.5 Test mode operation notes** 

## **1. When using multiple same-number timers (T) and counters (C).** 

- Operation occurs as follows if multiple timers [T] and counters [C] are used in programs which contain CJ instructions and step ladders. 

- When a setting change is performed after switching from the device monitor to the test function mode, the setting change is applied to the timer [T] or counter [C] which is nearest to Step 0. 

- When changing the setting values for same-number timers [T] and counters [C], use the programming tool to change the program. 

## **2. When the set values of timers (T) and counters (C) are specified indirectly** 

- When the set values of timers (T) and counters (C) are specified indirectly in programs, the values of indirectly specified devices change if the set values of timers (T) and counters (C) are changed in the display module. 

## **3. When changing the values of extension file registers (ER and DER)** 

When the value of an extension file register (ER or DER) is changed, such a change is counted as write to the EEPROM memory. Be careful not to exceed the allowable number writes. 

The allowable number of writes is 10,000 or less for the memory cassette (EEPROM), and 20,000 or less for the built-in memory (EEPROM). 

## **19.7 Error Check** 

The main unit's error status displays at the "ErrorCheck" menu. 

- 1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "ErrorCheck" item, then press [OK]. The error check result then displays at the "error display screen" (refer to fig. at right). 

|,<br>the "ErrorCheck" item, then press [OK].<br>The error check result then displays at the "error display screen"<br>(refer to fig. at right).<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time<br>display)", press [ESC] at the menu screen.<br>If multiple errors have occurred, the [+] / [-] keys can be used to<br>switch between the error display pages.<br>**play Content**<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press<br>[ESC].<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Returns to the "menu screen".<br>-<br>1 error or less<br>Disabled<br>2 errors or more Displays the previous-page’s error screen.<br>+<br>1 error or less<br>Disabled<br>2 errors or more Displays the next-page’s error screen.<br>OK<br>Returns to the "menu screen".<br>**Display Content**<br>[1]<br>Active error flag<br>[2]<br>Error code<br>[3]<br>Number of concurrent errors<br>(displays only when multiple errors have occurred)|When no err|When no err|When no err|When no err|When no err|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||E<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r<br><br>C<br>e<br><br>r<br>o<br>N||h<br>e<br>k<br>c<br>o<br>r<br>r s|||
||When 1 error|||||
||E|M<br>0<br>8<br>5<br>6<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r<br><br>C<br>E<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r|h<br>e<br>k<br>c|||
|||||6 5 0 8<br>||
||||c o<br>e<br>d|||
|||||||
|||||||
||When multiple errors|||||
||E|M<br>0<br>8<br>0<br>6<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r<br><br>C<br>E<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r|h<br>e<br>k<br>c|/<br>1<br>2||
|||||1 0 2 0<br>||
||||c o<br>e<br>d|||
|||||||
|||||||
|||-|+<br>|||
||E|M<br>0<br>8<br>3<br>6<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r<br><br>C<br>E<br>o<br>r<br>r<br>r|h<br>e<br>k<br>c|/<br>2<br>2||
|||||||
|||||6 3 0 1<br>||
||||c o<br>e<br>d|||
|||||||
|||||||



- 2) If multiple errors have occurred, the [+] / [-] keys can be used to switch between the error display pages. 

## **Display Content** 

- 3) To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC]. 

**314** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.8 LANGUAGE (Menu Display Language Setting)_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

## **19.8 LANGUAGE (Menu Display Language Setting)** 

The language used at the display module menus is specified at the "LANGUAGE" menu. The language setting procedure is described below. 

All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in English. When the menu display language is set to Japanese, please convert the screen messages to their Japanese translations. 

→ **Refer to Section 19.20 for the Japanese and English display character correspondence table.** 

## **19.8.1 Changing to Japanese menus** 

The procedure for changing from English menus to Japanese menus is described below. 

- 1) Turn the PLC power on. Following a brief title screen display (1.5 seconds), the "top screen (time display)" or a "specified device monitor screen" is displayed. 

- 2) Press the [ESC] button when the specified device screen is displayed. Press the [OK] or [ESC] button when the time is displayed. Then, the menu screen shown on the right appears. Four lines out of the whole menu are displayed at one time on the menu screen. 

- 3) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "LANGUAGE" item, then press [OK] to display the "display language selection screen". 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)", press [ESC]. 

||F X<br>ME<br>Title|3 G<br>S<br>L S EC<br>screen|3 G<br>S<br>L S EC<br>screen|e r <br>- F|e r <br>- F|e r <br>- F|e r <br>- F|e r <br>- F|i||e|e|s|s|||||Wiring for<br>Various Uses||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||V e|r . 1 .||1 0|||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||**14**||
||Top|screen||(Time|||||||display)<br>Approx.<br>1.5 secs.||||||||Test Run,<br>Maintenance,<br>Troubleshooting||
|||0 1 <br>2 3 : 5||.<br>9 : <br>1|||||0 <br> 5||. <br>9||0<br> (||8<br>d )<br>We||||**15**||
||Specified device monitor<br>or|||||||||||||||||screen|Input/Output<br>Powered<br>Extension Units||
||(example)||||||||||||||||||**16**||
||X|0 1 0<br>( S p||. . <br>e c|||||. <br> i|<br>|3<br> f||4<br> i||5<br> e||6 7<br>d )||Input/Output<br>Extension<br>Blocks||
||||||||||||||||||||||
|||Mo n<br>t o <br>E r r o r C<br>L ANGUA<br>C o n t r a<br>i|||||||r<br>h<br>GE<br>/<br>e <br>s t||||T<br> c||e <br> k||s|t|**17**<br>Extension<br>Power Supply<br>Unit||
|||C l o c||k Me|||||||n||u||||||**18**||
|||K e y w<br>C a s<br>s||o <br>e||r<br> t|||t<br>d||e||||||||Other Extension<br>Units and<br>Options||
||L<br>A|G<br>N<br>U<br>A<br>n<br>E<br>g<br>l<br>a<br>J<br>p<br>a||G<br>E<br>i<br>s <br>n<br>e|||||h<br>s||e||||||||**19**<br>Display Module||



**20** 

**315** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.8 LANGUAGE (Menu Display Language Setting)_ 

- 4) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to Japanese. 

To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC]. 

|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|
|ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "menu screen".|
|-|Moves the cursor upward.|
|+|Moves the cursor downward.|
|OK|Registers the selected display language and returns to the "menu screen".|



- 5) Press [OK] to register the selected display language and return to the "menu screen". 

## **19.8.2 Changing to English menus** 

Refer to 19.8.1 Changing to Japanese menus for the access procedure from the title screen. 

- 1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "LANGUAGE" item, then press [OK] to display the "display language selection screen". 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)", press [ESC]. 

|||L|L|A|N|G|G|U|U|A|A|G|G|E|E|||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||J|a||p||a||n||e||s|e|
|||||||||||||||||||
||||||E|n||g||l||i||s||h||
|||||||||||||||||||



- 2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to "English". 

To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC]. 

|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|
|ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "menu screen".|
|-|Moves the cursor upward.|
|+|Moves the cursor downward.|
|OK|Registers the selected display language and returns to the "menu<br>screen".|



- 3) Press [OK] to register the selected display language and return to the "menu screen". 

## **19.8.3 D8302 changes by program and related devices** 

Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302. A Language setting of "1" is specified at factory default. D8302 changes by user program can also be specified. 

|**D8302*1 Current Value**|**Display Language**|~~MOV~~<br>~~K0~~<br>~~D8302~~<br>M8002<br>When the display language is set to "Japanese"|~~MOV~~<br>~~K0~~<br>~~D8302~~<br>M8002<br>When the display language is set to "Japanese"|~~MOV~~<br>~~K0~~<br>~~D8302~~<br>M8002<br>When the display language is set to "Japanese"|~~MOV~~<br>~~K0~~<br>~~D8302~~<br>M8002<br>When the display language is set to "Japanese"|~~MOV~~<br>~~K0~~<br>~~D8302~~<br>M8002<br>When the display language is set to "Japanese"|~~MOV~~<br>~~K0~~<br>~~D8302~~<br>M8002<br>When the display language is set to "Japanese"|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|K0|Japanese|||||||
|||||||||
|K1|English|||||||
||||||~~MOV~~|~~K0~~|~~D8302~~|
|Other|English|||||||
|||||||||



- *1. Latch device 

**316** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.9 Contrast_ 

**11** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **19.9 Contrast** 

The liquid crystal display contrast setting is specified at the "Contrast" menu. Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302. A contrast setting of "0" is specified at factory default. 

|1)<br>At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to<br>the "Contrast" item, then press [OK] to display the "contrast<br>adjustment screen".<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time<br>display)", press [ESC].<br>2)<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to adjust the contrast.<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press<br>[ESC].|**12**<br>Output Wiring<br>**13**<br>Wiring for<br>Various Uses<br>0<br>C<br>t<br>n<br>o<br>r a s t<br>(<br>5<br>-<br>1 0 )<br>~<br>3<br>C<br>t<br>n<br>o<br>r a s t<br>(<br>5<br>-<br>1 0 )<br>~|**12**<br>Output Wiring<br>**13**<br>Wiring for<br>Various Uses<br>0<br>C<br>t<br>n<br>o<br>r a s t<br>(<br>5<br>-<br>1 0 )<br>~<br>3<br>C<br>t<br>n<br>o<br>r a s t<br>(<br>5<br>-<br>1 0 )<br>~|
|---|---|---|
||3<br>C<br>t<br>n<br>o<br>r a s t<br>(<br>5<br>-<br>1 0 )<br>~||
||||



|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|
|ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "menu screen".|
|-|Lowers the contrast<br>(decreases the numeric value. The value can be decreased to -5.)|
|+|Increases the contrast<br>(increases the numeric value. The value can be increased to +10.)|
|OK|Registers the selected setting and returns to the "menu screen".|



**14** 

**15** 

- 3) Press the [OK] button to register the selected setting and return to the "menu screen". 

**16** 

**17** 

**19** 

**20** 

**317** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.10 Clock Menu (Current Time Setting)_ 

## **19.10 Clock Menu (Current Time Setting)** 

The "ClockMenu" menu consists of "current time" and the "clock setting" items. The current time should be set before operating the system. 

## **19.10.1 Clock setting procedure** 

- 1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "ClockMenu" item, then press [OK] to display the selection screen shown at right. 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)", press [ESC]. 

- 2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Clock setting" item. To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC]. 

- 3) Press the [OK] button to display the "Clock setting screen". To cancel the operation and return to the "selection screen", press [ESC]. 

- 4) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the blinking data as desired, then press [OK] to register the change. Settings are performed in the following sequence: Year Month Day Hours Minutes Seconds. After pressing [OK] to register the final "seconds" setting, a "Current time is set" message is displayed, completing the current time setting procedure. 

|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|
|ESC|Returns to the previous setting item.<br>Returns to the "selection screen",  when at the "Year" item ("Year"<br>is blinking) position.|
|-|Reduces the value.<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed reduction.|
|+|Increases the value.<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed increase.|
|OK|Proceeds to the next setting item.<br>"Current time is set" message displays if pressed at the "Seconds"<br>item ("Seconds" is blinking).|



- 5) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "selection screen". 

- 6) Press [ESC] to return to the "menu screen". 

|||||C<br>C|u<br>l|u<br>l|r<br>o|r<br>o|r<br>c|r<br>c|e<br>k|e<br>k|n|n|t<br>s|t<br>s|e|e|t<br> t|t<br> t||m<br>i<br>t<br>i|m<br>i<br>t<br>i|m<br>i<br>t<br>i|e<br>n|e<br>n|g|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||C<br>C|u<br>l||r<br>o||r<br>c||e<br>k||n||t<br>s||e||t<br> t|||m<br>i<br>t<br>i|||e<br>n||~~g~~|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
||||||0||1||.||1||0||.||~~2~~0<br>0||||||8|||*||
|||||2|3||:||5||9|||:|5||9||(||We||||d||)|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
||||||1||0||.||||1||.||2||0<br>0||||8||*|||
|||||2|3||:||5||9|||~~: ~~|5||9||~~(~~||We||||d||)|



The default "Year" display is a 2-digit value indicating the Western calendar year. 

**==> picture [124 x 65] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
C u r r e n t t i m e<br>C l o c k s e t t i n g<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**318** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.10 Clock Menu (Current Time Setting)_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**14** 

**19 20** 

## **19.10.2 Displaying the current time** 

- 1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "ClockMenu" item, then press [OK] to display the selection screen shown to the right. 

   - To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)", press [ESC]. 

- 2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Current time" item. 

|||||C<br>C|u<br>l|r<br>o|r<br>c|e<br>k|n|t<br>s|e|t<br> t|i<br>t|m<br>i|e<br>n|g|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|



To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC]. 

- 3) Press the [OK] button to display the current time. To cancel the operation and return to the "selection screen", press [ESC]. 

|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|
|ESC|Returns to the "selection screen".|
|-|Disabled|
|+|Disabled|
|OK|Returns to the "selection screen".|



- 4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "selection screen". 

- 5) Press [ESC] to return to the "menu screen". 

||2-digit|display||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||2|0 1 .<br>3 : 5 9 <br>1|0 . 0 8<br> : 5 9 (|We|d )|



||4-digit<br>2|display<br>0 1 .<br>3 : 5 9 <br>1|0 . 2 0<br> : 5 9 (|We<br>0 8|d )|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|



**13** 

**15** 

## **19.10.3 Changing the current time's "Year" from 2-digit format to 4-digit format** 

The "Year" data displays as 2-digit value with a default. This can be changed to a 4-digit display by the following programming. 

|M8002|MOV<br>K2000<br>D8018|
|---|---|
|||



It is also possible to set the current time with a sequence program. 

**16** 

→ **Refer to the "time setting" (special devices D8013 to D8019) section of the Programming Manual.** 

**17** 

**18** 

**319** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.11 Keyword_ 

## **19.11 Keyword** 

Keywords registered at the PLC can be canceled from the "Keyword" menu. When canceled, all operations are enabled. 

Registering or changing keywords is not possible at the display module. 

The programming tool must be used in advance to register new keywords. 

## **19.11.1 Keyword types and levels** 

Keywords can be entered in 2 ways (8-digit or 16-digit[*1] ), depending on the peripheral device in question. 

- For a [keyword (8-digit)] + [2nd keyword (8-digit)] = 16-digit input: 

   - Processing is possible only with a peripheral device version compatible with the FX3G PLC. 

- For an keyword (8-digit) input only: 

Processing is possible even with a peripheral device version that is not compatible with the FX3G PLC. 

|**Number**<br>**Of**<br>**Digits**|**Registration Method**|**Peripheral Device**|**Peripheral Device**|**Keyword**<br>**Registration Level**|**Keyword Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**FX3G**<br>**Compatible**|**Not FX3G**<br>**Compatible**|||
|16-digit<br>*1|By selecting the keyword<br>registration level at the GX<br>Developer’s setting screen.||-|Reading/writing<br>prohibited|16-digit hexadecimal value<br>(A to F, 0 to 9)<br>[Ex]<br>FAB05C25DAECF293<br>AABCDEFF34509345|
|||||Writing prohibited||
|||||All online operations<br>prohibited||
|8-digit|By entering the level at the<br>first character when entering<br>the keyword|||A<br>(A, 0 to 9 first char.)|8-digit hexadecimal value beginning with<br>"A" or "0 to 9".<br>[Ex]0ABCDEF2, AABCD345|
|||||B|8-digit hexadecimal value beginning with<br>"B".<br>[Ex]B1234567,BABCDEF7|
|||||C|8-digit hexadecimal value beginning with<br>"C".<br>[Ex]C8904567,CDEF567F|



- *1. Customer keyword/Permanent PLC lock included. However, permanent PLC lock does not have a keyword input. 

## **19.11.2 Level-specific restrictions screen list** 

: Function enabled 

: Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed. : Only monitor function is usable (test function is not available) 

- -: Function disabled 

|**Function name**|**Function name**|**None**|**Keyword: 8 digits**<br>**Label entered as the first**<br>**character at Keyword input**|**Keyword: 8 digits**<br>**Label entered as the first**<br>**character at Keyword input**|**Keyword: 8 digits**<br>**Label entered as the first**<br>**character at Keyword input**|**Keyword: 16 digits**<br>**Selected at GX Developer setting screen*1**|**Keyword: 16 digits**<br>**Selected at GX Developer setting screen*1**|**Keyword: 16 digits**<br>**Selected at GX Developer setting screen*1**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**A**|**B**|**C**|**All online**<br>**operations**<br>**prohibited**|**Writing**<br>**prohibited**|**Reading/**<br>**writing**<br>**prohibited**|
|Top screen (time display)|||||||||
|Top screen (Specified device monitor)|||||||||
|Monitor/Test|||-|||-|||
|ErrorCheck|||-|||-|||
|Menu display language setting|||-|||-|||
|Contrast adjustment|||-|||-|||
|Time|Display||||||||
||Setting||-|||-|||
|Keyword (cancel)||-|||||||
|Memory cassette transfer|||-|-||-|-||
|Display screen protect function|||-|-||-|-||



- *1. Customer keyword/Permanent PLC lock included. However, permanent PLC lock does not have a keyword input. 

**320** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.11 Keyword_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**19 20** 

## **19.11.3 Keyword storage** 

The system has no process for recovering registered keyword which are forgotten. Therefore, be sure to store the keywords in a secure location. 

## **19.11.4 Screens requiring keyword for access** 

At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Keyword" item, then press [OK] to display one of the 4 screens shown below (the screen that displays depends on the keyword status). If no keywords are registered, press [ESC] to return to the "menu screen". 

To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)", press [ESC]. 

**==> picture [447 x 361] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Menu screen Not registered<br>C o n t r a s t<br>C l o c k Me n u T h e K e y w o r d<br>K e y w o r d i s n o t s e t<br>C a s s e t t e<br>Registered<br>Keyword If keyword is correct<br>When switching to menu<br>prohibited by keyword occurs P l e a s e i n p u t<br>K e y w o r d A l l o p e r a t i o n<br>i s p o s s i b l e<br>Registered 0 * * * * * * *<br>T h i s o p e r a t i o n Registered<br>i s p r o t e c t e d Keyword + 2nd keyword If keyword is incorrect<br>b y t h e K e y w o r d P l e a s e i n p u t<br>K e y w o r d I n c o r r e c t<br>0 * * * * * * * K e y w o r d !<br>* * * * * * * *<br>Canceled<br>Ma k e K e y w o r d<br>v a l i d ?<br>O K E x e c u t e<br>E S C C a n c e l<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**==> picture [37 x 128] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
16<br>Extension Units PoweredInput/Output<br>Blocks ExtensionInput/Output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**17** 

**18** 

**321** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.11 Keyword_ 

## **19.11.5 Canceling a keyword** 

- 1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Keyword" item, then press [OK] to display the "keyword input screen". 

   - If a keyword has been registered, one of the following screens is displayed. 

   - If a 16-digit keyword is registered, an 8-digit  2-line screen (shown at left below) is displayed. 

   - If an 8-digit keyword is registered, an 8-digit  1-line screen (shown at right below) is displayed. 

**==> picture [328 x 78] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
16-digit keyword 8-digit keyword<br>P l e a s e i n p u t Keyword P l e a s e i n p u t<br>K e y w o r d K e y w o r d<br>0 * * * * * * *<br>2nd keyword<br>* * * * * * * * 0 * * * * * * *<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- 2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to specify the first digit of the keyword, then press [OK] to proceed to the next digit. To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC]. 

|||A<br>C<br>2<br>F<br>4 5~~B~~0<br>6<br>3<br>2<br>7<br>B 9 6 7<br>P<br>a<br>e<br>l<br>s e<br>K<br>w<br>y<br>e<br>o r d<br>i<br>u<br>p<br>n<br>t<br>16-digit keyword<br>Lowest order digit<br>(final digit)|A<br>C<br>2<br>F<br>4 5~~B~~0<br>6<br>3<br>2<br>7<br>B 9 6 7<br>P<br>a<br>e<br>l<br>s e<br>K<br>w<br>y<br>e<br>o r d<br>i<br>u<br>p<br>n<br>t<br>16-digit keyword<br>Lowest order digit<br>(final digit)|A<br>C<br>2<br>F<br>4 5~~B~~0<br>6<br>3<br>2<br>7<br>B 9 6 7<br>P<br>a<br>e<br>l<br>s e<br>K<br>w<br>y<br>e<br>o r d<br>i<br>u<br>p<br>n<br>t<br>16-digit keyword<br>Lowest order digit<br>(final digit)|A<br>C<br>2<br>F<br>4 5~~B~~0<br>6<br>3<br>2<br>7<br>B 9 6 7<br>P<br>a<br>e<br>l<br>s e<br>K<br>w<br>y<br>e<br>o r d<br>i<br>u<br>p<br>n<br>t<br>16-digit keyword<br>Lowest order digit<br>(final digit)|8-digit keyword<br>0<br>3<br>2<br>1<br>4 5~~6~~7<br>P<br>a<br>e<br>l<br>s e<br>K<br>w<br>y<br>e<br>o r d<br>i<br>u<br>p<br>n<br>t<br>Lowest order digit<br>(final digit)|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||A<br>C<br>2<br>F<br>4 5~~B~~0<br>6<br>3<br>2<br>7<br>B 9 6 7<br>P<br>a<br>e<br>l<br>s e<br>K<br>w<br>y<br>e<br>o r d<br>i<br>u<br>p<br>n<br>t|||||
||||||||
||||||||
||||||||
|||**Button**|**Operation Description**||||
|||ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "menu screen" if pressed when the keyword’s left-most digit<br>(highest order digit) is blinking.<br>Cancels the input and moves leftward to the next digit (higher order digit) if pressed when a digit other than<br>the left-most digit is blinking.||||
|||-|Reduces the value (F<br>E...2<br>1<br>0).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed reduction.||||
|||+|Increases the value (0<br>1<br>2...E<br>F).<br>Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed increase.||||
|OK|Highest order<br>digit to 2nd digit||Registers the specified value and moves to the next digit input position.<br>If [OK] is pressed at the lowest order digit, and if the entered keyword is correct, the Keyword is canceled.||||
||Lowest order<br>digit (final digit)||Correct Keyword||An "All operation is possible" message appears, and the Keyword is<br>canceled.||
||||Incorrect Keyword||A "Incorrect Keyword!" message appears.||



- 3) If the [OK] button is pressed at the lowest order position, the entered Keyword is registered and the message shown to the right appears. If the "Incorrect Keyword" message appears, press [ESC] and return to step 1). 

- 4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "menu screen". 

**==> picture [124 x 159] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
If keyword is correct<br>A l l o p e r a t i o n<br>i s p o s s i b l e<br>If keyword is incorrect<br>I n c o r r e c t<br>K e y w o r d !<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**322** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.11 Keyword_ 

**11** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **19.11.6 Enabling a keyword** 

|1)<br>2)|At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the<br>"keyword" item, then press [OK] to display the "enable keyword"<br>screen.<br>Press the [OK] button to enable the keyword. Or, to retain the<br>keyword's canceled status, press [ESC].<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "menu screen".<br>-<br>Disabled<br>+<br>Disabled<br>OK<br>Enables the Keyword and returns to the "menu screen".||
|---|---|---|
|||O<br>a<br>C<br>K<br>n c e<br>E<br>C<br>S<br>E x<br>c<br>t<br>u<br>e<br>e<br>l<br>Ma<br>e<br>k<br>K e y<br>o<br>w<br>d<br>a<br>v<br>l i<br>?<br>d<br>r|
||**Button**||
||ESC||
||-||
||+||
||OK||



**12** 

**13** 

**19** 

**20** 

**323** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.12 Memory Cassette Transfers_ 

## **19.12 Memory Cassette Transfers** 

Data transfers between the internal EEPROM memory and a connected memory cassette can be performed from the "Cassette" menu when the PLC is in a STOP state. 

This menu is disabled, however, if a keyword is registered in the internal EEPROM. In this case, remove the memory cassette and use the programming tool to cancel the internal EEPROM's keyword. 

|**Item**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|
|Cassette<br>PLC|Copies internal program memory (EEPROM) data to a connected memory cassette.|
|Cassette<br>PLC|Copies data from a connected memory cassette to the internal program memory (EEPROM).|



## **Caution** 

When a memory cassette is connected with a display module, perform the data transfer procedure in the display module. 

The memory cassette cannot be used for the data transfer procedure. 

## **19.12.1 Transfer from internal EEPROM to memory cassette (Cassette <- PLC)** 

- 1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette" item, then press [OK] to display the "memory cassette transfer screen". 

|"Cassette" item, then press [OK] to display the "memory cassette<br>transfer screen".<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)",<br>press [ESC].<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette<br>PLC"<br>item, then press [OK] to display the screen shown to the right.<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "memory cassette transfer<br>screen", press [ESC].<br>Press [OK] to begin the transfer.<br>Or, press [ESC] to cancel the operation.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "memory cassette<br>transfer screen".<br>-<br>Disabled<br>+<br>Disabled<br>OK<br>Executes the transfer.|"Cassette" item, then press [OK] to display the "memory cassette<br>transfer screen".<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)",<br>press [ESC].<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette<br>PLC"<br>item, then press [OK] to display the screen shown to the right.<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "memory cassette transfer<br>screen", press [ESC].<br>Press [OK] to begin the transfer.<br>Or, press [ESC] to cancel the operation.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "memory cassette<br>transfer screen".<br>-<br>Disabled<br>+<br>Disabled<br>OK<br>Executes the transfer.|Mem<br>r y<br>o<br>P L<br>a s s<br>C<br>t t e<br>e<br>a s s<br>C<br>t t e<br>e<br>P L C<br>a s s<br>C<br>t t e<br>e<br>C|
|---|---|---|
||||
|||O<br>a<br>C<br>K<br>n s e<br>E<br>C<br>S<br>x<br>E<br>c u t<br>P L<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>C<br>e<br>l|
||||
|||. . .<br>l<br>P<br>e a s e<br>w a i t<br>P L<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>C|
|**Button**|**Operation Description**||
|ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "memory cassette<br>transfer screen".||
|-|Disabled||
|+|Disabled||
|OK|Executes the transfer.||



- 2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette PLC" item, then press [OK] to display the screen shown to the right. To cancel the operation and return to the "memory cassette transfer screen", press [ESC]. 

- 3) Press [OK] to begin the transfer. Or, press [ESC] to cancel the operation. 

## **Caution** 

Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being transferred by a "memory cassette transfer" menu operation, as these actions could destroy the program, causing incorrect operation of the PLC. 

- 4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "memory cassette transfer screen". 

**324** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.12 Memory Cassette Transfers_ 

**11** 

**17** 

- Result and measures to take 

   - The transfer is not executed if a "PLC is running" message appears. 

|<br>appears.<br>In this case, set the PLC to the STOP state, then perform step 3)<br>described above.<br>The transfer is not executed if a "Transfer failed" message<br>appears.<br>In this case, turn the power off, check the memory cassette<br>connection, then attempt the operation again from the first step.<br>The transfer is not executed if a "Memory Cassette is write-<br>protected" message displays.<br>In this case, turn the power OFF, set the memory cassette<br>PROTECT switch to OFF, then attempt the operation again from<br>the first step.<br>A "Transfer completed" message appears when the transfer is<br>completed.<br>When this message appears, press [OK] or [ESC] to display the<br>"Cassette screen".|P L C<br>i s<br>r u n n<br>n g<br>i|
|---|---|
|||
||r<br>T<br>a n s<br>e<br>f<br>r<br>f a i<br>e<br>l<br>d<br>P L<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>C|
|||
||e<br>M<br>mo r y<br>C a s<br>e<br>s<br>t t e<br>s<br>i<br>r<br>w<br>i t e<br>p r o<br>-<br>t e c t e d|
|||
||r<br>T<br>a n s<br>e<br>f<br>r<br>c om<br>l<br>p<br>e t e d<br>P L<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>C|



- The transfer is not executed if a "Transfer failed" message appears. 

- The transfer is not executed if a "Memory Cassette is writeprotected" message displays. 

- A "Transfer completed" message appears when the transfer is completed. 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

- 5) Press [ESC] to display the "menu screen". 

## **19.12.2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal EEPROM (Cassette -> PLC)** 

- 1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette" item, then press [OK] to display the "memory cassette transfer screen". 

|At the menu screen use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the|At the menu screen use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the||
|---|---|---|
|,<br>"Cassette" item, then press [OK] to display the "memory cassette<br>transfer screen".<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)",<br>press [ESC].<br>Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette<br>PLC"<br>item, then press [OK] to display the screen shown to the right.<br>To cancel the operation and return to the "memory cassette transfer<br>screen", press [ESC].<br>Press [OK] to begin the transfer.<br>Or, press [ESC] to cancel the operation.<br>**Button**<br>**Operation Description**<br>ESC<br>Cancels the operation and returns to the "memory cassette<br>transfer screen".<br>-<br>Disabled<br>+<br>Disabled<br>OK<br>Executes the transfer.||Mem<br>r y<br>o<br>a s s<br>C<br>t t e<br>e<br>P L<br>a s s<br>C<br>t t e<br>e<br>C<br>P L C<br>a s s<br>C<br>t t e<br>e|
||||
|||P L<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>C<br>O<br>a<br>C<br>K<br>n s e<br>E<br>C<br>S<br>x<br>E<br>c u t e<br>l|
||||
|||. .<br>.<br>l<br>P<br>e a s e<br>w a i t<br>P L<br>C a s<br>e t t<br>s<br>e<br>C|
|**Button**|**Operation Description**||
|ESC|Cancels the operation and returns to the "memory cassette<br>transfer screen".||
|-|Disabled||
|+|Disabled||
|OK|Executes the transfer.||



- 2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette PLC" item, then press [OK] to display the screen shown to the right. To cancel the operation and return to the "memory cassette transfer screen", press [ESC]. 

- 3) Press [OK] to begin the transfer. Or, press [ESC] to cancel the operation. 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

## **Caution** 

Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being transferred by a "memory cassette transfer" menu operation, doing so may destroy the program and disorder the PLC. 

**20** 

- 4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "memory cassette transfer screen". 

**325** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.12 Memory Cassette Transfers_ 

- Result and measures to take 

   - The transfer is not executed if a "PLC is running" message appears. 

      - In this case, set the PLC to the STOP state, then perform the step 3) operation described above. 

   - The transfer is not executed if a "Transfer failed" message appears. 

      - In this case, turn the power off, check the memory cassette connection, then attempt the operation again from the first step. 

   - A "Transfer completed" message appears when the transfer is completed. 

      - When this message appears, press [OK] or [ESC] to display the "memory cassette transfer screen". 

||P|L|C||i|s||r|u n n|i|n g|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||||||||||
||C a|s|s|e|t|t|e||P L|C||
||T|r|a|n|s|f|e|r||||
||f|a|i|l|e|d||||||
|||||||||||||
||C a|s|s|e|t|t|e||P L|C||
||T|r|a|n|s|f|e|r||||
||c|om||p|l|e|t|e|d|||



- 5) Press [ESC] to display the "menu screen". 

**326** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.13 System Information (Restrictions From PLC)_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

## **19.13 System Information (Restrictions From PLC)** 

Some of the display module functions require system information settings in order to enable program control of these functions. Functions which require the use of system information are listed below. 

- Specified device monitor function → **Refer to Section 19.14 for details.** 

- Screen saver function → **Refer to Section 19.15 for details.** 

- Display screen protect function → **Refer to Section 19.16 for details.** 

- Operation button ON/OFF information → **Refer to Section 19.17 for details.** 

- Monitor/test function 

   - For hexadecimal display of current value: → **Refer to Section 19.18 for the setting procedure.** 

## **19.13.1 System information list** 

Special data register D8300 and D8301 devices with first numbers specified are assigned as system information devices (data register, auxiliary relay). The data register (excluding special data register) should be specified at the system information's "system signal 1", and the auxiliary relay (excluding special auxiliary relay) should be specified at the system information's "system signal 2". Both D8300 and D8301 have default settings of "-1". When D8300 is "-1" the screen saver function becomes effective after 10 minutes. 

→ **Refer to Section 19.14 to Section 19.18 for explanations of each system signal.** 

## **1. System signal 1** 

|**Special data**<br>**register**|**System**<br>**Information**|**Description**|**Description**|**Reference**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|D8300 = K<br>Occupies<br>5 points|D|Device type to be displayed|For specified device monitor function|Section 19.14|
||D<br>+1|Device No. to be displayed|||
||D<br>+2|Screen saver setting time (Forced display)||Section 19.15|
||D<br>+3|Device for display screen protect function||Section 19.16|
||D<br>+4|Not used||-|



## **2. System signal 2** 

|**Special data**<br>**register**|**System**<br>**Information**|**Description**|**Description**|**Reference**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|D8301 = K<br>Occupies<br>15 points|M|Request Edit of displayed device data||Section 19.14|
||M<br>+1|Edition completion response||Section 19.14|
||M<br>+2|Screen saver function invalid||Section 19.15|
||M<br>+3|Not used||-|
||M<br>+4|Operation button ON/OFF<br>information|[ESC] button ON/OFF|Section 19.17|
||M<br>+5||[-] button ON/OFF||
||M<br>+6||[+] button ON/OFF||
||M<br>+7||[OK] button ON/OFF||
||M<br>+8|Device for specifying the "Monitor/Test" menu’s current value and setting the value<br>display format (hexadecimal or decimal).||Section 19.18|
||M<br>+9|Specified device monitor display status||Section 19.14|
||M<br>+10 to 14|Not used||-|



## **19.13.2 System information setting program example** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

The following is a program example in which the system information has been assigned to D50 to D54 and M50 to M64. 

**==> picture [395 x 76] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8002<br>MOV K50 D8300 System information (system No.1) is set at D50 to D54.<br>Initial pulse<br>MOV K50 D8301 System information (system No.2) is set at M50 to M64.<br>END<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**20** 

**327** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.14 Specified Device Monitor Function_ 

## **19.14 Specified Device Monitor Function** 

The specified device monitor function can change the top screen to the monitor/test screen for a device specified by the user. 

For the specified device monitor function, specify the device type to be displayed in "D " of the system information (system signal 1), and specify the device number to be displayed in "D +1" of the system information (system signal 1). 

It is necessary to turn ON M to enable the test operation on the specified device monitor screen. 

## **19.14.1 System information - specified device monitor function** 

## **1. System signal 1** 

|**System Information**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|D|Device type to be displayed|
|D<br>+1|Device No. to be displayed*1|



- *1. Maximum or minimum value of the corresponding device if the device number is set outside the allowable range 

The table below shows the device type to be displayed in accordance with the numeric value written in D . 

If any numeric value outside the range from 1 to 10 is written in D , the specified device monitor function is disabled. 

|**Value stored in D**|**Device type**|
|---|---|
|1|Input(X)|
|2|Output(X)|
|3|Auxiliary relay(M)|
|4|State(S)|
|5|Timer(T)|
|6|Counter(C)|
|7|Data register(D)|
|8|Data register(DD)|
|9|Extended register(R)|
|10|Extended register(DR)|
|others|Not used|



## **2. System signal 2** 

|**System Information**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|M|Request Edit of displayed device data<br>ON : Enables the test function.<br>OFF : Disables the test function (and enables only monitoring).|
|M<br>+1|Edition completion response*1|
|M<br>+4|"ESC" key status|
|M<br>+5|"-" key status|
|M<br>+6|"+" key status|
|M<br>+7|"OK" key status|
|M<br>+9|Specified device monitor display status<br>ON : The specified device monitor screen is displayed.<br>OFF : Any screen other than the specified device monitor screen is displayed.|



- *1. Turns ON after completion of a test operation for a specified device monitor (or when the OK or ESC key operated). 

To turn OFF, the request edit of a specified device monitor is turned off or it is turned off in the user’s program. 

**328** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.14 Specified Device Monitor Function_ 

**11 12 13** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**16** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **19.14.2 Differences between specified device monitor screen and monitor/test screen** 

The figure below shows differences between the specified device monitor screen and the monitor/test screen. → **Refer to Subsection 19.14.5 for a display example of the specified device monitor screen.** → **Refer to Subsection 19.6.3 for a display example of the monitor/test screen.** 

|→**Refer**|**to Subsecti**|**on 19.6.3 for a disp**|**on 19.6.3 for a disp**|**on 19.6.3 for a disp**|**on 19.6.3 for a disp**|**on 19.6.3 for a disp**|**lay ex**|**ample of the m**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|-Specified Device Monitor Screen||-Monitor/Test|||||Screen||
|D 1 0 0<br>3 2 7 6<br>7<br>0<br>When D1000 is specified||D<br>0<br>D<br>1<br>0<br>0 0<br>1<br>1 0<br>When D1000 is||||||0<br>3 2 7 6 7<br>monitored|
|( S p e c i f i e d )||||||D<br>D<br>1<br>1|2<br>3<br>0 0<br>0 0|0<br>0|
|In the case of a specified device monitor<br>screen "specified" is displayed.|||||||||



## **19.14.3 Program example1 (when monitoring/testing a timer)** 

In this program example, the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to "timer (T)". Sets the device No. to "T10". 

For testing the timer T10, turn ON M0 to enable the test operation. 

In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64. 

**==> picture [402 x 173] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8002<br>MOV K50 D8300 System information (system No.1) is set at D50 to D54.<br>Initial pulse<br>MOV K50 D8301 System information (system No.2) is set at M50 to M64.<br>MOV K5 D50 Sets the device type to "Timer".<br>MOV K10 D51 Sets the device No. to "T10".<br>Test operation<br>enable command<br>M0<br>M50 When M0 turns ON, the test operation for T10 is enabled.<br>END<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**17** 

**329** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.14 Specified Device Monitor Function_ 

## **19.14.4 Program example2 (when monitoring consecutive timers using operation keys)** 

In this program example, the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to "timer (T)". The operation keys [+] and [-] in the display module are available to scroll device numbers T0 to T10 during monitoring. 

In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64. 

**==> picture [447 x 280] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8002<br>System information (system No.1) is<br>MOV K50 D8300<br>set at D50 to D54.<br>Initial pulse<br>System information (system No.2) is<br>MOV K50 D8301<br>set at M50 to M64.<br>MOV K5 D50 Sets the device type to "Timer".<br>RST D51 Resets the device number D51.<br> Specified device<br>monitor screen<br>"+" button ON displayed<br>M56 M55 M59<br>INCP D51<br> Specified device The timer number is scrolled using<br>monitor screen the [+] or [-] button while the<br>"-" button ON displayed specified device monitor screen is<br>M55 M56 M59 displayed.<br>DECP D51<br>= K11 D51 MOV K0 D51<br>The device number is specified<br>within the allowable range.<br>= K-1 D51 MOV K10 D51<br>END<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**330** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.14 Specified Device Monitor Function_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**14** 

**16** 

**19 20** 

## **19.14.5 Program example3 (when monitoring non-consecutive timers using operation keys)** 

In this program example, the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to "timer (T)". The operation keys [+] and [-] in the display module are available to scroll device numbers T1, T5, T10 and T20 during monitoring. 

In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64. 

**==> picture [447 x 387] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M8002<br>System information (system No.1) is<br>MOV K50 D8300<br>set at D50 to D54.<br>Initial pulse<br>System information (system No.2) is<br>MOV K50 D8301<br>set at M50 to M64.<br>MOV K5 D50 Sets the device type to "Timer".<br>RST Z0 Resets the index register.<br>MOV K1 D100<br>MOV K5 D101<br>Transfers the timer device numbers<br>to D100 to D103.<br>MOV K10 D102<br>MOV K20 D103<br> Specified device<br>monitor screen<br>"+" button ON displayed<br>M56 M55 M59<br>INCP Z0<br> Specified device The timer number is scrolled using<br>monitor screen the [+] or [-] button while the<br>"-" button ON displayed specified device monitor screen is<br>M55 M56 M59 displayed.<br>DECP Z0<br>= K4 Z0 MOV K0 Z0<br>The device number is specified<br>within the allowable range.<br>= K-1 Z0 MOV K3 Z0<br>M8000<br>The device number to be<br>MOV D100Z0 D51<br>RUN monitor displayed is specified.<br>END<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**331** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.14 Specified Device Monitor Function_ 

## **19.14.6 Monitor operation on specified device monitor screen** 

The monitor operation on the specified device monitor screen is common for all devices. 

It is not possible to monitor extension file registers (ER and DER), file registers (D) and index registers (V and Z). 

→ **Refer to Subsection 19.14.5 for a display example of the specified device monitor screen.** 

   - → **Refer to Section 19.18 for the procedure used to display the timer, counter, and data register current values as hexadecimal values.** 

- 1) Press the [ESC] button to return to the menu screen. 

**==> picture [124 x 65] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
D 1 0 0 0 3 2 7 6 7<br>( S p e c i f i e d )<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


|**Selected Device Type**|**Button**|**Operation Description**|
|---|---|---|
|All devices except|ESC|Returns to the "menu screen".|
||-|Disabled|
||+|Disabled|
||OK|Disabled|



## **19.14.7 Specified device monitor screen for monitoring** 

- → **Refer to Section 19.18 for the procedure used to display the current values as hexadecimal values.** 

## **1. Data register [D (16-bit)] / extended register [R (16-bit)]** 

## **2. Data register [DD (32-bit)] / extended register [DR (32-bit)]** 

## **File register (D):** 

The file register (D) current value cannot be directly monitored at the display module. 

## **3. Timer [T]** 

## **4. Counter [C]** 

|||D|1|0|0|0|||||3|2|7|6|7|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||(|S|p|e|c|i|f|i|e|d|)|||
|||||||||||||||||
|||D|1|0|0|1|,|1|0|0|0|||||
||||||||||||3|2|7|6|7|
||||(|S|p|e|c|i|f|i|e|d|)|||
|||||||||||||||||
||T||0|||T|S|||R||||||
|||T|N||||||||||||0|
|||T|V|||||||||1|0|0|0|
||||(|S|p|e|c|i|f|i|e|d|)|||



||C0|C0|to C199|to C199|to C199|||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||C|||0|C|S|R||||
|||||C|N||||||0|
|||||C|V|||1|0|0|0|
||||||( S p|e|c i|f i e d|)|||
||C200 to C255|||||||||||
|||C|2|0|0|C|S|R|U|||
|||||C|N||||||0|
|||||C|V|||1|0|0|0|
||||||( S p|e|c i|f i e d|)|||



**332** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.14 Specified Device Monitor Function_ 

**11** 

**19 20** 

|**5. **|**Input [X] / Output [Y] / Auxiliary Relay [M] / State [S]**|X|0|1 0<br>. . . 3 4 5 6 7|1 0<br>. . . 3 4 5 6 7|1 0<br>. . . 3 4 5 6 7|||High-Speed<br>Counters||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||( S p e c i f i e d )|||||**12**||
|||M1|0|0<br>. . . 3 4 5 6 7<br>0<br>.|||. .||Output Wiring||
|||||( S p e c i f i e d )|||||**13**||
|**19.14.8 **|**Test operation on specified device monitor screen**<br>To perform the test operation on the specified device monitor screen, it is necessary to turn ON M<br>system information (system signal 2).||||||in the||Wiring for<br>Various Uses||
||The device test operation is same as the operation in the monitor/test mode.<br>→**Refer to Subsection 19.6.1**||**for the operation method.**||||||**14**||
||||||||||Test Run,<br>Maintenance,<br>Troubleshooting||



**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**333** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.15 Screen saver function_ 

## **19.15 Screen saver function** 

The screen saver function displays the dedicated screen to prevent burning of the screen when a key operation is not given for the specified time in the display module. 

For the screen saver function, set the screen saver setting time in "D +2" of the system information 

(system signal 1). The screen saver function is set as 10 minutes as an initial value in D8300, when "-1" or D +2 is "0". 

## **19.15.1 System information - Screen saver function** 

## **1. System signal 10** 

|**System Information**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|D<br>+2|Screen saver setting time (in units of min)<br>-1 or less<br>: Forced screen saver function (to always display the dedicated screen)<br>0<br>: 10 minutes (initial value)<br>1 to 240<br>: Can be set in units of minute within this range<br>241 or more : 240 minutes|
|**System signal 2**||
|**System Information**|**Description**|
|M<br>+2|Screen saver function invalid|



## **2. System signal 2** 

## **19.15.2 Screen saver display** 

When a key operation is not given within the specified screen saver setting time, the dedicated screen shown below appears and scrolls from the right to the left and from the top to the bottom. 

When a key operation is given while the dedicated screen is displayed, the former screen appears. 

The key operation given for the first time after the dedicated screen appeared resets the screen saver function, and is invalid as a key operation. 

**==> picture [435 x 85] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
The dedicated screen scrolls<br>Display screen example The dedicated screen appears until a key operation is given<br>S c r e e n s a v e r n s a v e r<br>0 1 . 1 0 . 0 8 S c r<br>2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9 ( We n )<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


The former screen appears after a key operation was given 

## **19.15.3 Program example (screen saver time setting)** 

In this program example, the screen saver time is set to "5 minutes". Use this program as a reference when other time settings are specified. 

In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64. 

|M8002|||||System information (system No.1) is set at D50 to D54.<br>System information (system No.2) is set at M50 to M64.<br>Sets the screen save time "5 minutes".|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||||
|Initial pulse||~~MOV~~|~~K50~~|~~D8300~~||
|||||||
|||||||
|||~~MOV~~|~~K50~~|~~D8301~~||
|||||||
|||||||
|||~~MOV~~|~~K5~~|~~D52~~||
|||||||
|||||||
|||||~~END~~||



**334** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.16 Display Screen Protect Function_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **19.16 Display Screen Protect Function** 

The display screen protect function prevents accidental operation by restricting the display module functions. The display screen protect function is enabled when no keyword is registered. 

The display screen protect function's protection level is specified in the system information (system signal 1) "D +3". 

→ **Refer to Section 19.3 for display module function.** → **Refer to Subsection 19.11.5 for the "keyword cancel" procedure.** → **Refer to Section 19.13 for system information setting.** 

## **19.16.1 System information - display screen protect function** 

## **1. System signal 1** 

|**System**<br>**Information**|**Setting**<br>**Content**<br>**(Level)**|**Function Restriction Summary**|
|---|---|---|
|D<br>+3|1|All functions except the "top screen (time display)"<br>and "top screen (specified device monitor)" functions are disabled.|
||2|The following functions are disabled: "monitor/test’s ’test’ function", "contrast setting", "time change",<br>"menu display language setting",and "memory cassette transfer".|
||Other<br>values|All functions are enabled.|



## **2. System signal 2** 

System signal 2 is unrelated to this function. 

## **19.16.2 Program example (screen protect function setting)** 

In this program example, the display screen protect function is set to "level 2". Use this program as a reference when other level settings are specified. 

In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64. 

|M8002|||||System information (system No.1) is set at D50 to D54.<br>System information (system No.2) is set at M50 to M64.<br>Sets the display screen protect function to "level 2".|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||||
|Initial pulse||~~MOV~~|~~K50~~|~~D8300~~||
|||||||
|||||||
|||~~MOV~~|~~K50~~|~~D8301~~||
|||||||
|||||||
|||~~MOV~~|~~K2~~|~~D53~~||
|||||||
|||||||
|||||~~END~~||



**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**335** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.16 Display Screen Protect Function_ 

## **19.16.3 Keyword and display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions** 

If a keyword has been registered, that keyword related restriction takes priority over the "display screen protect function" 

: Usable 

: Timer and counter settings cannot be changed 

: Only monitor function is usable (test function is not available) 

: Unusable 

|**Function Name**|**Function Name**||**Keyword**|**Keyword**|**Keyword**|**Display Screen**<br>**Protect**|**Display Screen**<br>**Protect**|**Display Screen**<br>**Protect**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**16-digit keyword*1 setting-->**||**None**|**All online**<br>**operations**<br>**prohibited**|**Writing**<br>**prohibited**|**Reading/writing**<br>**prohibited**|**None**|**1**|**2**|
|**8-digit keyword setting (level) -->**|||**A (All operations**<br>**prohibited)**|**B (Read/**<br>**Incorrect write**<br>**protection)**|**C (Erroneous**<br>**write prohibited)**||||
|Top screen (time display)|||||||||
|Top screen(specified device monitor)|||||||*2||
||||||||||
||||||||||
|Monitor/Test|||||||||
||||||||||
|ErrorCheck|||||||||
||||||||||
||||||||||
|Display screen protect function|||||||||
||||||||||
||||||||||
|Menu display language setting|||||||||
||||||||||
|Contrast adjustment|||||||||
||||||||||
|Time|Display||||||||
||||||||||
||||||||||
||Setting||||||||
||||||||||
|Keyword (cancel)||-|||||||
||||||||||
|Memory cassette transfer|||||||||
||||||||||



- *1. Customer keyword/Permanent PLC lock included. However, permanent PLC lock does not have a keyword input. 

- *2. The test function can be enabled or disabled by setting the specified device monitor. 

## **19.16.4 Relationship between keyword and display screen protect function** 

If the PLC's keyword registration function is used, that keyword related restriction takes priority over the display module's "display screen protect function". The relationship between keywords and the display screen protect function is shown below. 

|**Keyword**<br>**registration**|**Keyword Status**|**Display Screen Protect**<br>**Status**|**Function Restrictions**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Keyword is registered|Keyword is not canceled|Keyworde is being used|Restriction of functions is according to the keyword level.|
|||Keyword is not being used||
||Keyworde is canceled|Keyword is being used|All functions are enabled (no restrictions).|
|||Keyworde is not being used||
|Keyword is not registered||Keyword is being used|Restriction of functions is according to the display screen<br>protect function.|
|||Keyword is not being used|All functions are enabled (no restrictions).|



**336** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.16 Display Screen Protect Function_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **19.16.5 Keyword levels** 

## **1. For 8-Digit Keyword** 

|**8-Digit Keyword Level**|**Keyword Content**|**Keyword Input Example**|
|---|---|---|
|A (All operations prohibited)|8-digit hexadecimal value beginning with "A"<br>or "0 to 9" numeral.|0ABCDEF2<br>AABCD345|
|B (Read/Incorrect write protection)|8-digit hexadecimal value beginning with "B".|B1234567<br>BABCDEF7|
|C (Erroneous write prohibited)|8-digit hexadecimal value beginning with "C".|C8904567<br>CDEF567F|



## **2. For 16-Digit Keyword (Customer keyword/Permanent PLC lock included)** 

|**16-Digit Keyworde Level**|**Keyword Content**|**Keyword Input Example**|
|---|---|---|
|All online operations prohibited|"A to F", "0 to 9" 16-digit value.|0ABCDEF262297529<br>AABCDEBF34523724|
|Writing prohibited|"A to F", "0 to 9" 16-digit value.|B123456789012345<br>7ABCDEF73DAEB93A|
|Reading/writing prohibited|"A to F", "0 to 9" 16-digit value.|2890445234817567<br>CDEF567FABDFEA46|



## **19.16.6 Relationship between specified device monitor function and display screen protect function** 

When the display screen protect function is used, the generated function restriction has higher priority than the specified device monitor function. 

The table below shows the relationship between the specified device monitor function and the display screen protect function. 

|**Specified device**<br>**monitor function**|**Display screen protect function status**|**Display screen protect function status**|**Display screen protect function status**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**None**|**1 (Initial screen fixing function)**|**2 (Test function prohibition**<br>**setting)**|
|Invalid|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Clock display<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Enabled|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Fixed to clock display<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Disabled|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Clock display<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Enabled<br>•<br>Only monitoring of specified<br>device is enabled.|
|Valid<br>Only monitoring is<br>enabled.<br>(M<br>= OFF)|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Specified device monitor<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Enabled<br>•<br>Testing of specified device is<br>disabled.|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Specified device monitor<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Disabled|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Specified device monitor<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Enabled<br>•<br>Only monitoring of specified<br>device is enabled.|
|Valid<br>Both monitoring and<br>testing are enabled.<br>(M<br>= ON)|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Specified device monitor<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Enabled<br>•<br>Both monitoring and testing of<br>specified device are enabled.|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Specified device monitor<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Disabled<br>•<br>Both monitoring and testing of<br>specified device are enabled.|•<br>Initial screen:<br>Specified device monitor<br>•<br>Transition to another screen:<br>Enabled<br>•<br>Only monitoring of specified<br>device is enabled.|



**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**337** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.16 Display Screen Protect Function_ 

## **19.16.7 Pointers for using the display screen protect function** 

The display screen protect function settings should be specified in a sequence program. 

- The protect function is enabled by using the display module's "monitor/test function" to change the system information's (system signal 1) "D +3" current value to "1" or "2". 

- Once the setting is made, it cannot be canceled from the display module. 

- To cancel the setting, use the programming tool to change the system information's (system signal 1) "D +3" current value to a value other than "1" and "2". If the system information's (system signal 1) "D +3" is set in a general purpose data register, however, the display screen protect function can be canceled by turning the power off, then on again. 

**338** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.17 Operation Button ON/OFF Information_ 

**11 12 13** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**16** 

**19 20** 

## **19.17 Operation Button ON/OFF Information** 

Operation button ON/OFF information can be monitored at the system information (system signal 2) "M +4 to M +7" while the PLC is running. Various applications of this function are described below. → **Refer to Section 19.13 for system information setting.** 

## **19.17.1 Various applications** 

## **1. Operation button function checks** 

The programming tool can be used to monitor the system information's (system signal 2) "operation button ON/OFF information", to verify that operation buttons are functioning properly. 

## **2. Specified device monitor function device changes** 

Devices handled in the specified device monitor function can be changed over by using both the "specified device monitor display status" and "operation button ON/OFF information" in the system information (system signal 2). 

## → **Refer to Section 19.14 for the specified device monitor function setting procedure.** 

**14** 

## **19.17.2 System information - operation button ON/OFF information** 

## **1. System signal 1** 

System signal 1 has no system information related to this function. 

## **2. System signal 2** 

|**System Information**|**Status**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|M<br>+4|ON|[ESC] button is pressed.|
||OFF|[ESC] button is not pressed.|
|M<br>+5|ON|[-] button is pressed.|
||OFF|[-] button is not pressed.|
|M<br>+6|ON|[+] button is pressed.|
||OFF|[+] button is not pressed.|
|M<br>+7|ON|[OK] button is pressed.|
||OFF|[OK] button is not pressed.|



**17** 

**18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**339** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.18 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format_ 

## **19.18 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format** 

The procedure for specifying a hexadecimal display format for current values which display at the "Monitor/ Test" menu explained below. The display format is specified by the system information's (system signal 2) "M +8" ON/OFF status. 

The display formats which correspond to the ON and OFF statuses are shown in Section 19.13 below. The display format should either be fixed as decimal or hexadecimal. Switching between the two should be possible by an external operation. 

→ **Refer to Section 19.13 for system information setting.** 

## **19.18.1 System information - specifying a hexadecimal current value display format** 

## **1. System signal 1** 

System signal 1 is unrelated to this function. 

## **2. System signal 2** 

|**System**<br>**Information**|**Setting**<br>**Content**|**Display**<br>**Format**|**Display Subjects**|
|---|---|---|---|
|M<br>+8|ON|Hexadecimal|Timer (T) [current value/setting value], counter (C) [current value/setting value], data<br>register (D) [16-bit/32-bit], extended register (R) [16-bit/32-bit], and extended file register<br>(ER) [16-bit/32-bit]|
||OFF|Decimal||



## **19.18.2 Program example 1 (specifying a hexadecimal data display format)** 

The following program example specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values and setting values which display at the "Monitor/Test" screen. In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64. 

|M8002|||||System information (system No.1) is set at D50 to D54.<br>System information (system No.2) is set at M50 to M64.<br>Specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values which appear<br>at the Monitor/Test screen.|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||||
|Initial pulse<br>M8000||~~MOV~~|~~K50~~|~~D8300~~||
|||||||
|||||||
|||~~MOV~~|~~K50~~|~~D8301~~||
|||||||
|RUN monitor||||~~M58~~||
|||||||
|||||~~END~~||



## **19.18.3 Program example 2 (specifying a decadal data display format)** 

The following program example specifies a decimal display format for current values and setting values which appear at the "Monitor/Test" screen. In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64. 

|M8002|||||System information (system No.1) is set at D50 to D54.<br>System information (system No.2) is set at M50 to M64.<br>Specifies a decimal display format for current values which appear at<br>the Monitor/Test screen.|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||||
|Initial pulse<br>M8000||~~MOV~~|~~K50~~|~~D8300~~||
|||||||
|||~~MOV~~|~~K50~~|~~D8301~~||
|RUN monitor||~~M58~~||||



**340** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **19.19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions** 

The following is a list of error messages which the system displays after an operation is performed. 

|**Relevant Menu Screen**|**English**|**Japanese**|**Corrective Action**|
|---|---|---|---|
|•<br>All menus|This operation<br>is protected<br>by the keyword||Cancel the keyword, then attempt the operation again.|
|•<br>Keyword|The keyword<br>is not set||No keyword has been registered.<br>Keyword cannot be registered from the display module. A<br>programming tool such as GX Developer, etc., is required<br>to register keyword.|
||Incorrect<br>Keyword!||The entered keyword does not match the registered<br>keyword. Verify the registered keyword, then enter the<br>correct keyword.|
|•<br>Monitor/test<br>(setting change*1)<br>•<br>Memory cassette transfer|PLC is running||Stop the PLC, then attempt the operation again.|
||Memory Cassette<br>is<br>write-protected||Turn the memory cassette’s write-protected status to<br>OFF, then attempt the operation again.|
|•<br>Keyword<br>(setting change)<br>•<br>Memory cassette transfer|Fatal error<br>occurred||For details, refer to Subsection 19.19.1.|
|•<br>Memory cassette transfer|Memory Cassette<br>is not<br>connected||Turn the PLC power OFF, install the memory cassette,<br>then attempt the operation again.|
||The Keyword<br>is set in the<br>Internal Memory||Remove the memory cassette, restart the unit (power<br>OFF<br>ON), then use the programming tool to cancel the<br>keyword in the internal EEPROM.|
|•<br>Memory cassette transfer<br>(reading/writing)|Transfer<br>completed||Transfer successful.|
||Transfer<br>failed||Check if the memory cassette is properly installed.|



**14** 

**15** 

*1. The setting value can also be changed when the PLC is in RUN mode. 

**341** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) _19.19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions_ 

## **19.19.1 When a "Fatal error occurred" message appears** 

Operation is possible with the "Level C" or "Level B" keyword function restrictions. 

However, the system is probably in one of the statuses described below. Check these statuses in the order shown below, and take the appropriate corrective action. 

## **1. Perform an error check at the display module, and if an error is active, take the appropriate corrective action.** 

→ **Refer to Section 19.7 for the error check procedure.** 

## **If a program error is active:** 

The fatal error was probably activated due to a program error. Use the programming tool to correct the program. 

→ **Refer to Section 14.6 for error codes and corrective actions.** → **Refer to Subsection 14.5.3 for watchdog timer error corrective actions.** 

## **If no program error is active:** 

There may be a problem with the PLC's memory content. Perform the following procedure. 

- 1) Use the programming tool to perform a program memory all-clear. 

- 2) Rewrite the program. 

- 3) Stop the PLC, turn the power ON, display the "Error Check" screen and check to refer to if the "Fatal error occurred" message appears. 

   - If the "Fatal error occurred" message appears, perform the corrective action described at item "2" below. 

   - If the "Fatal error occurred" message does not appear, set the PLC to a RUN state, then check again if the message appears. 

      - If the message appears, a watchdog timer error has probably occurred. In this case, the program should be re-examined. 

→ **Refer to Subsection 14.5.3 for watchdog timer error corrective actions.** 

## **2. If the "Fatal error occurred" message still appears after performing the corrective actions described in item 1 above, perform the following procedure to check for symptom changes.** 

## **Turn the power OFF and disconnect all extension devices.** 

**(extension connectors, extension cables, and expansion board connectors)** 

**Turn the power ON again at the main unit, display the "Error Check" screen again, and check if the "Fatal error occurred" message appears.** 

- 1) If the "Fatal error occurred" message appears: The main unit hardware may have failed. Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 

- 2) If the "Fatal error occurred" message does not appear: Turn the power OFF, connect the extension devices, then operate the system again to check for errors. If the problem persists, there may be main unit or extension device hardware failure. Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 

**342** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

19 Display Module(FX3G-5DM) 

_19.20 Menu Display Characters - Japanese and English Display Character Correspondence Table_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**16 17** 

## **19.20 Menu Display Characters - Japanese and English Display Character Correspondence Table** 

|**Menu Screen**|**Menu Screen**|**Japanese**|**English**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Menu|||Monitor/Test<br>ErrorCheck<br>LANGUAGE<br>Contrast<br>ClockMenu<br>Keyword<br>Cassette|
|ErrorCheck|||ErrorCheck<br>No errors|
||||ErrorCheck<br>Error code|
|LANGUAGE|||LANGUAGE<br>Japanese<br>English|
|Contrast|||Contrast|
|ClockMenu|||Current time<br>Clock setting|
||||Clock setting|
||||Current time<br>is set|
|Keyword|||Please input<br>Keyword<br>********<br>********|
||||Make Keyword<br>valid?<br>OK<br>Execute<br>ESC<br>Cancel|
||||All operation<br>is possible|
||||Incorrect<br>Keyword!|
|Memory cassette<br>transfer<br>Cassette<br>PLC<br>Cassette<br>PLC<br>Cassette<br>PLC<br>Cassette<br>PLC|||Memory Cassette<br>Cassette<br>PLC<br>Cassette<br>PLC|
||Cassette<br>PLC||Cassette<br>PLC<br>Please wait...|
||Cassette<br>PLC||Cassette<br>PLC<br>Please wait...|
||Cassette<br>PLC<br>Cassette<br>PLC||Transfer<br>completed|
||||Transfer<br>failed|



**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

**343** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block 

## **20. Terminal Block** 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 

   - 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 

   - 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. 

      - External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

   - 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 

## **DESIGN PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. 

- Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors. Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure. 

**==> picture [68 x 45] intentionally omitted <==**

## **INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS** 

- Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

**344** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

## **INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS** 

- Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in section 4.1 of this manual. Never use the product in areas with excessive dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt air, Cl2, H2S, SO2 or NO2), flammable gas, vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature, condensation, or rain and wind. If the product is used in such conditions, electric shock, fire, malfunctions, deterioration or damage may occur. 

- • Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly. Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions. 

- • Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws. Terminal block DIN rail only Main unit, FX2N Series I/O extension unit/block, FX2N/FX3U Series special DIN rail or direct mounting 

- function block, and special adapter 

- • Install the product on a flat surface. If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the PC board, thereby causing nonconformities. 

- • When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. 

- • Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC's ventilation port when installation work is completed. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. 

- • Connect the extension cables, peripheral device cables, input/output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors. Loose connections may cause malfunctions. 

- • Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions. - Peripheral devices, display modules, expansion boards and special adapters 

- - Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks 

**14** 

- Battery and memory cassette 

**==> picture [68 x 44] intentionally omitted <==**

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. 

**16** 

- Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

**17** 

- Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual. If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out. 

- Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual. If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out. 

- • Do not wire vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

- When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. 

**18** 

- Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. 

- - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. 

**19** 

**20** 

**345** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.1 Outline_ 

## **20.1 Outline** 

A terminal block is used to convert connector type input/output terminals into a terminal block. Moreover, dedicated input and output terminal blocks (built-in element types) can be used to receive AC input signals for conversion to relay / transistor / triac output types. 

**==> picture [309 x 166] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Optional cable or<br>user-fabricated cable<br>Terminal block Terminal block<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**346** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.1 Outline_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

## **20.1.1 Product configuration** 

The connection destinations shown below are products which can be connected by "connector connector" cables. An individual-wire type can also be used for wiring to the terminal blocks of PLC-side input/output products. 

|**Model Name**|**Number of**<br>**Input Points**|**Number of**<br>**Output**<br>**Points**|**Function**|**Connection Destination**|**Drive Power**<br>**Supply**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|FX-16E-TB|16 input points or<br>16 output points||Connects directly to<br>PLC input/output<br>terminals.|FX2N-16EX-C (sink input)<br>FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|*1|
|FX-32E-TB|32 input points,<br>32 output points,<br>or 16 input & 16 output points|||||
|FX-16EX-A1-TB*2|16|-|100V AC input type|FX2N-16EX-C (sink input)|*4|
|FX-16EYR-TB*3|-|16|Relay output type|FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|24V DC 80mA|
|FX-16EYS-TB*3|-|16|Triac output type|FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|24V DC<br>112mA|
|FX-16EYT-TB*3|-|16|Transistor output (sink)<br>type|FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|24V DC<br>112mA|
|FX-16EYT-H-TB*3|-|16|Transistor output (sink)<br>type|FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|24V DC<br>112mA|



- *1. A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N-16EX-C. The current consumption is shown in the table below. 

|||**Power Supply Voltage**<br>**Current Consumption**|
|---|---|---|
||FX2N-16EX-C|24V DC<br>112mA|
|The applications shown below are not supported.<br>**Unsupported Applications**<br>High-speed<br>processing<br>High-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, speed detection (SPD) instruction<br>Time division<br>inputs<br>Input matrix (MTR) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction<br>Other<br>Absolute current value read (ABS) instruction|||



- *2. The applications shown below are not supported. 

- *3. The applications shown below are not supported. 

**Unsupported Applications** Pulse Y output (PLSY) instruction, acceleration/deceleration setup (PLSR) instruction, pulse width modulation (PWM) instruction, DOG search zero return (DSZR) instruction, batch data positioning mode (TBL) instruction, Pulse outputs absolute current value read (ABS) instruction, zero return (ZRN) instruction, variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction, drive to increment (DRVI) instruction, drive to absolute (DRVA) instruction Time division Input matrix (MTR) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction inputs Time division Seven segment with latch (SEGL) instruction output 

**17** 

**18** 

- *4. A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N-16EX-C. The current consumption is shown in the table below. 

||**Power Supply Voltage**|**Current Consumption**|
|---|---|---|
|FX2N-16EX-C|24V DC|160mA|



**20** 

**347** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.2 External Dimensions and Component Names_ 

## **20.2 External Dimensions and Component Names** 

**==> picture [48 x 7] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FX-16E-TB<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [49 x 8] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FX-32E-TB<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [148 x 237] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
150(5.91")<br>FX-16EX-A1-TB<br>150(5.91")<br>)(2.17"55<br>)(2.17"55<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [198 x 260] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
150(5.91") 45(1.78")<br>FX-16EYR-TB<br>FX-16EYS-TB<br>FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB<br>150(5.91")<br>mm (inches)<br>)(2.17"55<br>)(2.17"55<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Units: Accessories: 

Input/output No. labels, terminal block arrangement cards 

|**No.**|**Name**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|
|**[1]**<br>CN|1 connector|-|
|**[2]**<br>CN|2 connector|Present at FX-32E-TB.|
|**[3]**<br>Op|eration indicator LED|Present at FX-16EYR-TB, FX-16EYS-TB, FX-16EYT-TB,<br>FX-16EYT-H-TB.|
|**[4]**<br>PO|WER LED|Present at FX-16EX-A1-TB.|
|**[5]**<br>CN|2 terminal block (M3.5 screws)|Present at FX-32E-TB.|
|**[6]**<br>CN|1 terminal block (M3.5 screws)|-|
|**[7]**<br>Na|meplate|-|
|**[8]**<br>DIN<br>(DI|rail mounting groove<br>N rail width: 35mm(1.38"))|-|
|**[9]**<br>DIN|rail mounting hook|-|



**348** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block 

_20.3 Terminal Layout_ 

**11 12 13** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16 17** 

**15** 

**18** 

**19** 

**19** 

## **20.3 Terminal Layout** 

## **1. FX-16E-TB** 

When connected to the FX2N-16EYT-C 

**==> picture [307 x 161] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Lower numbers Higher numbers<br>1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM<br>0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM<br>When connected to the FX2N-16EX-C<br>Lower numbers Higher numbers<br>24+ 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7<br>24+ 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. FX-32E-TB** 

When connected to the FX2N-16EYT-C 

**==> picture [324 x 331] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Lower numbers Higher numbers<br>CN2 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM<br>0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM<br>CN1 CN2<br>Lower numbers Higher numbers<br>CN1 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM<br>0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM<br>When connected to the FX2N-16EX-C<br>Lower numbers Higher numbers<br>CN2 24+ 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7<br>24+ 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6<br>CN1 CN2<br>Lower numbers Higher numbers<br>CN1 24+ 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7<br>24+ 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**16** 

**17** 

**20** 

**349** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.3 Terminal Layout_ 

## **3. FX-16EX-A1-TB** 

**==> picture [308 x 104] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Lower numbers Higher numbers<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **4. FX-16EYR-TB, FX-16EYS-TB, FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB** 

**==> picture [308 x 96] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Lower numbers Higher numbers<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**350** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block 

_20.4 Installation Work_ 

**11** 

**12** 

## **20.4 Installation Work** 

→ **Refer to Section 8.1 for installation location.** 

## **20.4.1 Installation** 

**1 Turn OFF all power supplies connected to the PLC, input/output devices, and terminal blocks. 2 Align the top side of the "DIN rail mounting groove" (refer to Fig.1 at right) with the DIN rail. 3 Press the product onto the DIN rail (refer to Fig.2 at right).** 

- **20.4.2 Removal 1 Turn the power supply OFF. 2 Disconnect the wiring and input/output cables. 3 Place a flathead screwdriver against the DIN rail mounting hook in the posture shown (refer to Fig.1 at right)** 

- **4 Move the flathead screwdriver in direction shown at right (refer to Fig.2) to detach the DIN rail mounting hook from the DIN rail.** 

- **5 Remove the product from the DIN rail.** 

**==> picture [109 x 131] intentionally omitted <==**

## **20.4.3 Input/output cable connection** 

The terminal block's CN1 and CN2 connectors comply with the MIL-83503 standard. 

**==> picture [381 x 180] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
→  Refer to Subsection 9.2.2 for input/output cable information<br>Input/output cable<br>Terminal block<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**13** 

**==> picture [37 x 148] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
14<br>15<br>Troubleshooting Maintenance, Test Run,<br>Extension Units PoweredInput/Output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [37 x 73] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
16<br>Blocks ExtensionInput/Output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [37 x 73] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
17<br>UnitPower Supply Extension<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**18** 

**==> picture [37 x 128] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
19<br>Options Units and Other Extension<br>Display Module<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**20** 

**==> picture [37 x 53] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal Block<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**351** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.4 Installation Work_ 

## **20.4.4 Connection to terminal block** 

## **1. Terminal Screw Size** 

The product terminal screws are as shown in the table below. 

|**Model Name**|**Terminal Screw Size**|
|---|---|
|FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB<br>FX-16EX-A1-TB<br>FX-16EYR-TB<br>FX-16EYS-TB<br>FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB|M3.5|



## **2. Wire end treatment and tightening torque** 

Use solderless terminals of the following size. 

Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.5 to 0.8 N•m. 

Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. 

- When 1 wire is connected to 1 terminal: 

Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below, and install it as shown in the lower right figure. 

**==> picture [319 x 87] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal Crimp<br> 3.7(0.15") screw terminal<br>6.8mm(0.27")<br>or less<br> 3.7(0.15")<br>6.8mm(0.27") Terminal<br>or less<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- When 2 wires are connected to 1 terminal: 

Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below, and install it as shown in the lower right figure. 

**==> picture [326 x 119] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
 3.7(0.15")<br>6.8mm(0.27") Terminal Crimp<br>screw terminal<br>or less<br>6.0mm(0.24")<br>or more<br> 3.7(0.15")<br>6.8mm(0.27") Terminal<br>or less<br>6.0mm(0.24")<br>or more<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**352** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.5 FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB_ 

**11 12** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**14** 

**16** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

## **20.5 FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB** 

The FX-16E-TB and FX-32E-TB items must be connected using an FX2N series input/output connector type extension block. 

||**Input Connector**|**Output Connector**|
|---|---|---|
|nnectable models|FX2N-16EX-C (sink input)|FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|



## **20.5.1 Internal circuit** 

**==> picture [449 x 438] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0  to  7 (Lower Nos.) 0 to  7 (Higher Nos.)<br>*1 *2 *2 *2 *2<br>CN2 *1 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM<br>0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM<br>*2 *2 *2 *2<br>*1 *1<br>(20) (10)<br>COM (19) (9) COM<br>*2 *2<br>7 (18) (8) 7<br>6 (17) (7) 6<br>5 (16) (6) 5<br>4 (15) (5) 4<br>3 (14) (4) 3<br>2 (13) (3) 2<br>1 (12) (2) 1<br>0 (11) (1) 0<br>0 2 4 6<br>1 3 5 7<br>0 2 4 6<br>CN1 1 3 5 7<br>*1<br>(20) (10) *1<br>*2 COM (19) (9) COM *2<br>7 (18) (8) 7<br>6 (17) (7) 6<br>5 (16) (6) 5<br>4 (15) (5) 4<br>3 (14) (4) 3<br>2 (13) (3) 2<br>1 (12) (2) 1<br>0 (11) (1) 0 *1 *2 *2 *2 *2<br>1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM<br>0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM<br>*1 *2 *2 *2 *2<br>0 to 7 (Lower Nos.) 0 to  7 (Higher Nos.)<br>FX-32E-TB<br>FX-16E-TB<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

- *1 "24+" when connected to FX2N-16EX-C. 

- *2 " "  when connected to FX2N-16EX-C. 

**20** 

**353** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.5 FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB_ 

## **20.5.2 Example of input external wiring** 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

- Do not wire vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

## **1. When connected to an FX2N-16EX-C (sink input) input extension block** 

**==> picture [336 x 215] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0 to 7 (Lower Nos.) 0 to  7 (Higher Nos.)<br>Input numbers in<br>the FX2N-16EX-C<br>1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7<br>24+ 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6<br>24+<br>24+ 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7<br>24+ 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6<br>24V<br>DC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **20.5.3 Output external wiring** 

## **WIRING PRECAUTIONS** 

   - Do not wire vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. 

**1. When connected to an FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output) output extension block** 

**==> picture [336 x 235] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0 to 7 (Lower Nos.) 0 to  7 (Higher Nos.)<br>PLC's COM<br>output No.<br>1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7<br>Vacant 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6<br>terminal COM<br>1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM<br>0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM<br>MC1 MC2<br>24V<br>DC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**354** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.6 FX-16EX-A1-TB_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **20.6 FX-16EX-A1-TB** 

The FX-16EX-A1-TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series input extension block (24V DC). 

||**Input Connector**|
|---|---|
|Connectable models|FX2N-16EX-C (sink input)|



The applications shown below are not supported. 

||**Unsupported Applications**|
|---|---|
|High-speed processing|High-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, speed detection (SPD) instruction|
|Time division inputs|Input matrix (MTR) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction|
|Other|Absolute current value read (ABS) instruction|



## **20.6.1 Specifications** 

|**Item**|**Item**||||**AC**|**AC**|**Input Type**||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Input/output circuitry**||CN1<br>Connector<br>side|Photocoupler<br>Terminal block|Photocoupler|||||||
|||||||||~~0~~t|o 7||
||||||||||||
||||||||||||
||||||||||||
|||||||||C|M||
||||||||||n||
||||||||||||
||||||||||||
||||||||||||
|**Input signal voltage**||100 to 120V AC +10%,|-15% 50/60Hz||||||||
|**Input signal current**||4.7mA / 100V AC 50Hz<br>6.2mA / 110V AC 60Hz|||||||||
|**Input impedance**||Approx. 21k<br>/ 50Hz<br>Approx. 18k<br>/ 60Hz|||||||||
|**Input sensitivity**|**ON**|3.8mA / 80V AC or more|||||||||
||**OFF**|1.7mA / 30V AC or more|||||||||
|**Response time*1**||25 to 30ms|||||||||
|**Input signal format**||Voltage contact|||||||||
|**Circuit isolation**||Photocoupler isolation|||||||||
|**Input operation display**||No input LEDs (equipped with 24V power supply LED indicator)|||||||||
|**Power consumption**||1.2W (48mA 24V DC)*2|||||||||



**14** 

*1. This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC. 

*2. 3.9W (160mA, 24V DC) is required when connected to the FX2N-16EX-C. 

**355** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.6 FX-16EX-A1-TB_ 

## **20.6.2 Internal circuit** 

**==> picture [499 x 553] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
CN1<br>(20) (10)<br>COM (19) (9) COM<br>7 (18) (8) 7<br>Photo- 6 (17) (7) 6 Photo-<br>coupler 5 (16) (6) 5 coupler<br>4 (15) (5) 4<br>3 (14) (4) 3<br>2 (13) (3) 2<br>1 (12) (2) 1<br>0 (11) (1) 0<br>Photo- Photo-<br>coupler coupler<br>0 to 3 4 to 7 0 to  3 4 to  7<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>0 to 7 Lower numbers 0 to  7 Higher numbers<br>20.6.3 Example of input external wiring<br>PLC input<br>0 to  3 4 to 7 0 to  3 4 to  7<br>No.<br>Photo-couple r<br>power supply<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>100 to<br>120V AC<br>24V DC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**356** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.7 FX-16EYR-TB_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **20.7 FX-16EYR-TB** 

The FX-16EYR-TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block (transistor). 

||**Output Connector**|
|---|---|
|Connectable models|FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|



The applications shown below are not supported. 

||**Unsupported Applications**|
|---|---|
|Pulse outputs|Pulse Y output (PLSY) instruction, acceleration/deceleration setup (PLSR) instruction, pulse width modulation<br>(PWM) instruction, DOG search zero return (DSZR) instruction, batch data positioning mode (TBL) instruction,<br>absolute current value read (ABS) instruction, zero return (ZRN) instruction, variable speed pulse output<br>(PLSV) instruction, drive to increment (DRVI) instruction, drive to absolute (DRVA) instruction|
|Time division inputs|Input matrix (MTR) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction|
|Time division output|Seven segment with latch (SEGL) instruction|



## **20.7.1 Specifications** 

|**Item**|**Item**|||**Relay output**|**Relay output**|||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Input/output circuitry**||CN1<br>Connector side<br>2||LED<br>24V DC<br>5mA<br> <br>~~4+~~||||
|||||||0 t|o 7|
||||2|~~4+~~||||
|||||||||
|||||||CO|Mn|
|||||||||
|||||||||
|||||||||
|||||||||
|**Load**|**voltage**|||250V AC or less, 30V DC or less||||
|**Max.**<br>**load**|**Resistance load**|2A / point<br>The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal : 8A or less||||||
||**Inductive load**|80 VA||||||
|**Min. load**||5V DC, 2mA Reference value||||||
|**Open-circuit**<br>**leakage**<br>**current**||-||||||
|**Response time*1**||Approx. 10ms||||||
|**Circuit isolation**||Mechanical isolation||||||
|**Operation indicators**||Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||||
|**Power consumption**||1.92W (80mA 24V DC)||||||



*1. This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC. 

**357** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.7 FX-16EYR-TB_ 

## **20.7.2 Internal circuit** 

**==> picture [371 x 238] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(20) (10)<br>COM (19) (9) COM<br>7 (18) (8) 7<br>6 (17) (7) 6<br>5 (16) (6) 5<br>4 (15) (5) 4<br>3 (14) (4) 3<br>2 (13) (3) 2<br>1 (12) (2) 1<br>0 (11) (1) 0<br>0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>0 to 7 Lower numbers 0 to  7 Higher numbers<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **20.7.3 Example of output external wiring** 

**==> picture [390 x 213] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
0 to 7 Lower numbers 0 to  7 Higher numbers<br>PLC output 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br>No.<br>Relay<br>power<br>supply<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>Fuse Fuse<br>24V DC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**358** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.7 FX-16EYR-TB_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**16** 

**18 19** 

## **20.7.4 External wiring precautions** 

## **1. Protection circuit for load short-circuits** 

A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the output. 

**==> picture [147 x 82] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Load<br>0 to 7<br>Fuse<br>COMn<br>Terminal block<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Contact protection circuit for inductive loads** 

An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in the terminal block. It is recommended to use inductive loads with built-in protection circuits. When using loads without built-in protection circuits, insert an external contact protection circuit, etc. to reduce noise and extend the product life. 

## 1) DC circuit 

Connect a diode (for commutation) parallel to the load. The diode (for commutation) must comply with the following specifications. 

||**Guide**|
|---|---|
|Reverse voltage|5 to 10 times of the load voltage|
|Forward current|Load current or more|



- 2) AC circuit Connect the surge absorber (combined CR components such as a surge killer and spark killer, etc.), parallel to the load. 

Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the load being used. Refer to the table below for other specifications. 

**==> picture [175 x 157] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
inductive load<br>PLC output<br>contact Diode<br>(for commutation)<br>inductive load<br>PLC output<br>contact<br>Surge<br>absorber<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

||**Guide**|
|---|---|
|Static electricity capacity|Approx. 0.1 F|
|Forward current|Approx. 100 to 200|



## Reference 

|**Manufacturer**|**Model name**|
|---|---|
|Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.|CR-10201|



**==> picture [208 x 260] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Manufacturer Model name<br>Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325<br>Forward<br>Interlock limit<br>Forward<br>PLC output<br>contact<br>Reverse<br>PLC output Reverse<br>contact limit<br>*<br>Bad *<br>*<br>Good *<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **3. Interlock** 

For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC's internal programs as shown to the right. 

## **4. In-phase** 

PLC output contacts (*) should be used in an "in-phase" manner. 

**17** 

## **18** 

**19** 

**20** 

**==> picture [37 x 53] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal Block<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**359** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.7 FX-16EYR-TB_ 

## **20.7.5 Product life of relay contacts** 

The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used. Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life. 

## **1. Inductive load** 

Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown, which may cause arcing. At a fixed current consumption, as the power factor (phase between current and voltage) gets smaller, the arc energy gets larger. 

The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads, such as contactors and solenoid valves, is 500,000 operations at 35VA. 

The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test. 

**Test condition: 1 sec. ON / 1 sec.OFF** 

||**Load Capacity**|**Contact Life**|
|---|---|---|
|35VA|0.35A / 100V AC|3,000,000 times|
||0.17A / 200V AC||
|80VA|0.8A / 100V AC|1,000,000 times|
||0.4A / 200V AC||
|120VA|1.2A / 100V AC|200,000 times|
||0.6A / 200V AC||



The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush overcurrent is shut down. 

→ **For precautions on using inductive loads, refer to Subsection 20.7.4-2.** Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation. Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load. 

## **2. Lamp load** 

Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current. Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load. 

## **3. Capacitive load** 

Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current. Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load. Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters. 

→ **For the maximum specified resistance load, refer to Subsection 20.7.1.** 

**360** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.8 FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15** 

**16** 

**17** 

**19 20** 

**19** 

**20** 

## **20.8 FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB** 

The FX-16EYT(-H)-TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block (transistor). 

||**Output Connector**|
|---|---|
|Connectable models|FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|



The applications shown below are not supported. 

**Unsupported Applications** Pulse Y output (PLSY) instruction, acceleration/deceleration setup (PLSR) instruction, pulse width modulation (PWM) instruction, DOG search zero return (DSZR) instruction, batch data positioning mode (TBL) instruction, Pulse outputs absolute current value read (ABS) instruction, zero return (ZRN) instruction, variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction, drive to increment (DRVI) instruction, drive to absolute (DRVA) instruction Time division inputs Input matrix (MTR) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch (SEGL) instruction 

## **20.8.1 Specifications** 

|**Item**|**Item**||||||**Transistor output**|**Transistor output**|**Transistor output**|**Transistor output**||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**F**|**X-16EYT-TB**||||||**FX-16EYT-H-TB**|||||
|**Input/output**<br>**circuitry**||CN1<br>Connector<br>side<br>24|||||5 to 30V<br>DC<br>~~0 t~~o 7<br>~~CO~~Mn<br>Fuse<br>External<br>wiring||CN1<br>Connector<br>side<br>24|||||||
||||24|||||||24|||~~0 to~~||~~7~~<br>Fuse|
|||||3.3k<br>~~+~~|Photo-<br>coupler||~~0 t~~||||Photo-<br>coupler<br>3.3k<br>~~+~~||~~0 t~~|||
|||||||||||||||~~o~~||
|||||LED<br>2|4V DC<br>7mA||||||LED||~~C~~|||
||||||||~~CO~~|Mn||||||~~M~~||
|||||||||||||||~~n~~||
|||||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||||
|**Load voltage**|||||||5 to 30V DC|||||||||
|**Max.**<br>**load**|**Resistance**<br>**load**|0.5A/point<br>The total load current of resistance loads per common<br>terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 0.8A or less|||||||1A/point<br>The total load current of resistance loads per common<br>terminal should be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 3A or less|||||||
||**Inductive**<br>**load**|12W/24V DC<br>The total of inductive loads per common terminal should<br>be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output point/common terminal: 19.2W or less/24V<br>DC|||||||24W/24V DC<br>The total of inductive loads per common terminal should<br>be the following value.<br>•<br>4 output point/common terminal: 72W or less/24V<br>DC|||||||
|**Open-circuit**<br>**leakage current**||0.1mA / 30V DC||||||||||||||
|**Res-**<br>**ponse**<br>**time**|**OFF**<br>**ON*1**|0.2ms or less/24V DC|||||||0.3ms or less/24V DC|||||||
||**OFF**<br>**ON*1**|1.5ms or less/24V DC|||||||4ms or less/24V DC|||||||
|**Output**<br>**element's**<br>**ON voltage**||1.5V||||||||||||||
|**Circuit isolation**||Photo-coupler isolation||||||||||||||
|**Operation**<br>**indicators**||Activation of the photo-coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||||||||||||
|**Power**<br>**consumption**||2.7W (112mA 24V DC)||||||||||||||



**18** 

- *1. This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC. 

**361** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.8 FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB_ 

## **20.8.2 Internal circuit** 

**==> picture [376 x 251] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Photo- (20) (10)<br>3.3k coupler COM (19) (9) COM 3.3k<br>7 (18) (8) 7<br>6 (17) (7) 6 Photo-<br>5 (16) (6) 5 coupler<br>4 (15) (5) 4<br>3 (14) (4) 3<br>Photo- 2 (13) (3) 2<br>3.3k coupler 1 (12) (2) 1 3.3k<br>0 (11) (1) 0<br>Photo-<br>coupler<br>0 to 7 Lower numbers 0 to 7 Higher numbers<br>0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br>* * * *<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- For the FX-16EYT-H-TB, the output transistor elements are as shown in the figure below. 

## **20.8.3 Example of output external wiring** 

**==> picture [373 x 202] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PLC output 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br>No.<br>* * * *<br>Photo-coupler<br>power supply<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>Fuse Fuse<br>24V DC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- For the FX-16EYT-H-TB, the output transistor elements are as shown in the figure below. 

**362** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block 

_20.8 FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB_ 

**11** 

**12** 

**13** 

**15 16 17** 

**16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **20.8.4 External wiring precautions** 

## **1. Protection circuit for load short-circuits** 

**==> picture [206 x 296] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Load<br>0 to 7<br>Fuse<br>COMn<br>Terminal block<br>inductive<br>load<br>0 to 7<br>Fuse<br>COMn<br>Terminal block<br>Forward<br>limit Interlock<br>Forward<br>Reverse<br>Reverse PLC output<br>limit element<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the output. Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity. 

## **2. Transistor protection circuit for inductive loads** 

The transistor output circuit in the terminal block is equipped with a Zener diode (50V) for protection. 

When an inductive load is connected, however, a diode should be connected parallel to the load when required. The diode must comply with the specifications shown below. 

Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Forward current Load current or more 

## **3. Interlock** 

For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC's internal programs as shown to the right. 

**14** 

**15** 

**363** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.9 FX-16EYS-TB_ 

## **20.9 FX-16EYS-TB** 

The FX-16EYS-TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block (transistor). 

||**Output Connector**|
|---|---|
|Connectable models|FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)|



The applications shown below are not supported. 

||**Unsupported Applications**|
|---|---|
|Pulse outputs|Pulse Y output (PLSY) instruction, acceleration/deceleration setup (PLSR) instruction, pulse width modulation<br>(PWM) instruction, DOG search zero return (DSZR) instruction, batch data positioning mode (TBL) instruction,<br>absolute current value read (ABS) instruction, zero return (ZRN) instruction, variable speed pulse output (PLSV)<br>instruction, drive to increment (DRVI) instruction, drive to absolute (DRVA) instruction|
|Time division inputs|Input matrix (MTR) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction|
|Time division output|Seven segment with latch (SEGL) instruction|



## **20.9.1 Specifications** 

|**Item**|**Item**|||||||**Triac output**|**Triac output**|**Triac output**|**Triac output**|||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Input/output**<br>**circuitry**||CN1<br>connector<br>side<br>24||||||||||0 to 7<br>COMn<br>External wiring<br>Fuse||
||||||33k<br>7m|||||||||
||||24||~~+~~|.<br>||||||0 to|7|
|||||||||||||||
||||||LED|||||2.2<br>0.015<br>F<br>**_`U`_**||||
|||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||CO|Mn|
|||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||
|**Load**|**voltage**|85 to 242V AC||||||||||||
|**Max.**<br>**load**|**Resistance**<br>**load**|0.3A/point*1||The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following<br>value.<br>•<br>4 output points/common terminal: 0.8A or less||||||||||
||**Inductive**<br>**load**|15VA/100V AC<br>36VA/200V AC||||||||||||
|**Min. load**||0.4VA/100V AC<br>1.6 VA/200V AC||||||||||||
|**Open-circuit**<br>**leakage current**||1mA/100V AC<br>2mA/200V AC||||||||||||
|**Response time*2**||2ms or less||||||||||||
|**Circuit isolation**||Photocoupler isolation||||||||||||
|**Operation**<br>**indicators**||Activation of the photo-thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.||||||||||||
|**Power**<br>**consumption**||2.7W (112mA 24V DC)||||||||||||



- *1. In systems where frequent large-load ON/OFF switching occurs due to rush currents, the root mean square current should be 0.2 A or less. 

**==> picture [347 x 65] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
<Example><br>0.4A<br>4A<br>4 [2]     0.02 + 0.4 [2]    0.7<br>= 0.2A<br>0.02 + 0.7 + 10<br>0.02 0.7 10<br>sec sec sec<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


- *2. This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC. 

**364** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block 

_20.9 FX-16EYS-TB_ 

**11 12 13** 

**12** 

**13** 

**14** 

**15 16** 

**17** 

**18** 

**19 20** 

## **20.9.2 Internal circuit** 

**==> picture [377 x 269] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(20) (10)<br>3.3k COM (19) (9) COM 3.3k<br>7 (18) (8) 7<br>6 (17) (7) 6 Photo-<br>Photo- 5 (16) (6) 5 thyristor<br>thyristor 4 (15) (5) 4<br>3 (14) (4) 3<br>2 (13) (3) 2<br>3.3k 1 (12) (2) 1 3.3k<br>0 (11) (1) 0<br>Photo-<br>Photo- thyristor<br>thyristor<br>0 to 7 Lower numbers 0 to  7 Higher numbers<br>Surge absorbers are connected to each output<br>0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br>U U U U<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **20.9.3 Example of output external wiring** 

**==> picture [397 x 205] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Surge absorbers are connected to each output<br>PLC output 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br>No.<br>Photo-coupler U U U U<br>power supply<br>24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4<br>24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4<br>Load<br>24V DC<br>Fuse Fuse Fuse<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**365** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

20 Terminal Block _20.9 FX-16EYS-TB_ 

## **20.9.4 External wiring precautions** 

## **1. Protection circuit for load short-circuits** 

A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the output. 

## **2. Micro current load** 

The PLC's internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn-off C-R absorber. When connecting a very low current load of "0.4VA/100V AC or less or 1.6VA/200V AC or less", please connect a surge absorber parallel to the load. 

Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the load being used. Refer to the table below for other specifications. 

**==> picture [169 x 175] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Load<br>0 to 7<br>Fuse<br>COMn<br>Terminal block<br>Micro current load<br>U Surge<br>absorber<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


||**Guide**|
|---|---|
|Static electricity capacity|Approx. 0.1 F|
|Resistance value|Approx. 100 to 200|



## Reference 

|**Manufacturer**|**Model name**|
|---|---|
|Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.|CR-10201|



**==> picture [224 x 141] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Manufacturer Model name<br>Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325<br>Forward<br>Interlock limit<br>Forward<br>U<br>Reverse<br>Reverse<br>limit<br>U<br>PLC output<br>element<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **3. Interlock** 

For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC's internal programs as shown to the right. 

## **4. In-phase** 

**==> picture [169 x 174] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
*<br>U *<br>Bad<br>U<br>*<br>U<br>Good *<br>U<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


PLC output contacts (*) should be used in an "in-phase" manner. 

**366** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette 

_21.1 Outline_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A** 

**B** 

**C** 

**D E** 

## **21. Memory Cassette** 

## **STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS** 

- Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette. If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC's power is on, the data in the memory may be destroyed, or the memory cassette may be damaged. 

- • Do not disassemble or modify the PLC. Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions. For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 

## **21.1 Outline** 

The memory cassette can be installed at the main unit, and when installed, the memory cassette's internal program is used in place of the internal EEPROM memory. The loader function transfers (reads and writes) programs between the memory cassette and the internal EEPROM. 

## **21.2 Specifications** 

## **21.2.1 Electrical specifications** 

|**Model Name**|**Max. Memory Capacity**|**Memory Type**|**Max.**<br>**Allowable**<br>**Write**|**PROTECT**<br>**Switch**|**Loader**<br>**Function**|**Compatible**<br>**Versions**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|FX3G-EEPROM-32L|32000 steps<br>(2k/4k/8k/16k selectable)|EEPROM<br>memory|10,000 times|Provided|Provided|1st article<br>(Ver.1.00)|



## **21.2.2 Part names and External dimensions** 

FX3G-EEPROM-32L 

[1]RD key 

**==> picture [227 x 125] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Units: mm (inches)<br>[5] [8]<br>[4]<br>[3] [7]<br>[2]<br>[1]<br>[6]<br>35(1.38") 9.6(0.38")<br>51.2(2.02")<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


(Reading: PLC memory cassette) [2]RD LED [3]WR key (writing: memory cassette PLC) 

[4]WR LED 

[5]Memory cassette fixing holes (2- 3.2 Mounting holes) 

- [6]PROTECT switch 

- [7]Detachment lever 

- [8]Main unit connector 

**367** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette _21.3 Installation_ 

## **21.3 Installation** 

Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the memory cassette. 

## **21.3.1 Installation** 

**(when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter is not used together)** 

The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit in this example. 

**1 Remove the top cover.** 

Remove the top cover (A in the right figure) as shown in the right figure. 

## **2 Attach the side cover.** 

Attach the side cover (B in the right figure) as shown in the right figure. 

## **Caution:** 

- Make sure to attach the side cover before the memory cassette. However, attachment of the side cover is not necessary when using only the loader function and not always connecting the memory cassette. 

- Attachment of the side cover is not necessary when installing the memory cassette under the top cover (S) of a 40/60-point type main unit. 

## **3 Raise the memory cassette detachment lever.** 

Raise the memory cassette detachment lever ("C"). 

## **4 Attach the memory cassette.** 

Install the memory cassette to the main unit. 

**==> picture [160 x 608] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>Top cover(S)<br>1<br>B<br>C<br>3<br>4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**368** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette 

_21.3 Installation_ 

**21 22** 

**A B C D** 

**E** 

## **5 The memory cassette (E in the right figure) can be fixed with provided M3 tapping screws (D in the right figure) to the main unit.This work is not required when fixation is not necessary.** 

- Tightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N•m 

## **Caution:** 

- Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided. Use M3 x 8 (shorter) screws. 

   - Do not use M3 x 16 (longer) screws because they may damage the main unit. 

**==> picture [117 x 128] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
D<br>E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **21.3.2 Installation** 

## **(when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter is used together)** 

The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example. 

## **1 Attach the expansion board/connector conversion adapter to the main unit.** 

→ **For the attachment method, refer to Chapter 8.** 

## **Caution:** 

Make sure to attach the expansion board/connector conversion adapter before the memory cassette. Tightening with tapping screws (M3 x 8) is not necessary. 

## **2 Remove the upper connector cover (A in the right figure).** 

## **3 Remove the part B shown in the right figure using snipper, etc.** 

## **Caution:** 

Removal of the part B is not necessary when the connector conversion adapter is used together. 

## **4 Raise the memory cassette detachment lever.** 

Raise the memory cassette detachment lever ("C"). 

**==> picture [116 x 127] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [89 x 191] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
B<br>C<br>4<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**369** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette _21.3 Installation_ 

## **5 Attach the memory cassette to the option connector of the expansion board/connector conversion adapter.** 

Attach the memory cassette to the option connector (E in the right figure) of the expansion board/connector conversion adapter. 

## **6 Fix the memory cassette (G in the right figure) with provided M3 tapping screws (F in the right figure) to the expansion board/connector conversion adapter.** 

- Tightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N•m 

## **Caution:** 

- Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided. Use M3 x 16 (longer) screws. 

- Fixation is not necessary when using only the loader function and not always connecting the memory cassette. 

**==> picture [117 x 187] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
5<br>E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [117 x 131] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
F<br>G<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**370** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette _21.4 Removal_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A B C** 

**D** 

**E** 

## **21.4 Removal** 

Be sure that the power is OFF when removing the memory cassette. 

## **21.4.1 Removal** 

**(when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter are not used together)** 

The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit in this example. 

**1 Raise the memory cassette detachment lever.** 

Raise the memory cassette detachment lever ("A"). 

## **2 Remove the tapping screws (B in the right figure) which fix the memory cassette.** 

Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws. 

## **3 Grasp the detachment lever and pull it.** 

Grasp the detachment lever ("C") and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette. 

## **4 Remove the side cover.** 

Remove the side cover (D in the right figure) as shown in the right figure. 

## **Caution:** 

The side cover is not attached when the memory cassette is installed under the top cover (S) of a 40/60-point type main unit. 

## **5 Attach the top cover.** 

Attach the top cover (E in the right figure) as shown in the right figure. 

**==> picture [117 x 308] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>B 1<br>C<br>3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [117 x 286] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
D<br>4<br>E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**371** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette _21.4 Removal_ 

## **21.4.2 Removal** 

## **(when the expansion board/connector conversion adapter are used together)** 

The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example. 

## **1 Raise the memory cassette detachment lever.** 

Raise the memory cassette detachment lever ("A"). 

## **2 Remove the tapping screws (B in the right figure) which fix the memory cassette.** 

Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws. 

**==> picture [117 x 134] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
1<br>A<br>B<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **3 Grasp the detachment lever and pull it.** 

Grasp the detachment lever ("D") and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette. 

**==> picture [117 x 186] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
D<br>3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **4 Attach the upper connector cover (E in the right figure).** 

## **5 Fix the expansion board with the tapping screws (F in the right figure) provided for fixing the memory cassette.** 

- Tightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N•m 

**==> picture [117 x 130] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
F<br>E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **Caution:** 

- Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided. Use M3 x 8 (shorter) screws. 

Do not use M3 x 16 (longer) screws removed in the step 2 because they may damage the main unit. 

**372** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette _21.5 Saved Data Content_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A** 

**B** 

**C** 

**D** 

**E** 

## **21.5 Saved Data Content** 

The following data is saved on the memory cassette. 

||**Item**|**Description**|**Description**|**Saving Method**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Program<br>Memory|Parameters|•<br>Memory capacity setting<br>-<br>Memory capacity (default setting: 8k steps)<br>2k/4k/8k/16k/32k steps<br>-<br>Comment capacity<br>-<br>File register capacity<br>•<br>Modem initializing settings, Battery mode settings, RUN terminal settings<br>•<br>RS/RS2 instructions / computer link function communication settings<br>•<br>Positioning settings<br>•<br>Special parameters*1*2||Programming tool*3|
||Sequence programs|User-created sequence programs|Comments and file registers can be<br>created in the memory by setting<br>them in the parameter memory<br>capacity.||
||Comments|Max. 3150 points<br>(0 to 63 blocks,<br>1 block = 50 points / 500 steps)|||
||File registers|Max. 7000 points<br>(0 to 14 blocks,<br>1 block = 500 points / 500 steps)|||
|Extended|file registers|ER0 to ER23999 (24000 points)||•<br>Sequence program<br>•<br>GX Works2<br>•<br>GX Developer|



- *1. This function is supported in FX3G PLC Ver. 2.00 or later. Do not connect a memory cassette with special parameters saved to any FX3G PLC earlier than Ver. 2.00. 

- *2. This function is supported in GX Works2 Ver. 1.87R or later. 

- *3. The maximum number of points for the memory capacity, comments, and file registers, can be specified when the FX3G programming tool is selected. The maximum number of points cannot be specified when a programming tool other than the FX3G is selected. 

**373** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette _21.6 PROTECT Switch_ 

## **21.6 PROTECT Switch** 

## **21.6.1 PROTECT switch setting** 

Reading from and writing to memory cassette operations can be performed by using the programming tool. 

Because sequence programs are written by an electronic format, a special ROM writer and ultraviolet eraser are not required. 

The PROTECT switch must be turned OFF to enable writing. 

**==> picture [112 x 91] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PROTECT<br>switch<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **21.6.2 PROTECT switch operation** 

## **1. Preparing the operation tools** 

Set the PROTECT switch knob by using the tip of a pair of tweezers, a 

**==> picture [446 x 61] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
precision screwdriver, or a tool with a tip width of approx. 0.8mm (0.04"). Shape of tool tip Good<br>Do not use objects with round tips, as the round tip can easily slip off the<br>switch knob, possibly resulting in an incorrect setting.<br>Tool tip Bad<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **2. Switch operation procedure** 

As shown in the figure below, the switch knob can be "pushed" or "pulled".  When setting the switch, do not set it in an intermediate position. 

**==> picture [266 x 80] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Switch setting<br>Push tool<br>direction Switch Switch case Pull<br>knob direction<br>OFF ON OFF ON<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **21.6.3 Precautions when setting and using the switch** 

- Leaving the switch knob at an intermediate position for an extended period can cause an equipment failure. 

**374** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette 

_21.7 Memory Cassette <-> PLC (EEPROM Memory) Transfers by Loader Function_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A B** 

**C D** 

**E** 

## **21.7 Memory Cassette <-> PLC (EEPROM Memory) Transfers by Loader Function** 

The FX3G-EEPROM-32L loader function ([WR] and [RD] key operation) is explained in this section. 

- Program transfers (reading/writing) are possible between the memory cassette and the PLC's internal EEPROM memory. 

- The loader function is enabled while the PLC is stopped. 

- When the display module is connected, data can be transferred from the memory cassette by performing the data transfer procedure in the display module. 

   - (It is not possible to transfer data from the memory cassette by performing the data transfer procedure in the memory cassette.) 

→ **For the data transfer method in the display module, refer to Chapter 20.** 

## **21.7.1 Writing (WR: 32L ->  PLC)** 

A memory cassette program is written to the PLC's internal EEPROM memory. 

Required condition: The PLC must be stopped. 

## **1 Install the memory cassette on the main unit.** 

(Setting the PROTECT switch to ON (on memory cassette's rear face) prevents accidental overwriting of memory cassette program.) 

→ **Refer to Section 21.3 for the installation procedure.** 

- Verify that the PLC power is OFF, then install the memory cassette on the PLC. 

- Turn the PLC power ON. 

- Raise the memory cassette's eject lever. 

## **2 Press the [WR] key 1 time.** 

The [WR] LED lights, and a preparation status is established. 

- To cancel, press the [RD] key. 

**==> picture [103 x 91] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
WR LED<br>WR key<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **3 Press the [WR] key again.** 

Writing is executed, and the [WR] LED blinks. 

- It takes several seconds to write data to the built-in EEPROM. The WR LED flickers while data is written. 

## **4 Remove the memory cassette from the main unit.** 

Writing is completed when the [WR] LED goes off. 

After turning the PLC power OFF, remove the memory cassette from the PLC. 

→ **Refer to Section 21.4 for the removal procedure.** 

**375** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

21 Memory Cassette _21.8 Operation Precautions_ 

## **21.7.2 Reading (RD: 32L <- PLC)** 

Programs are read from the PLC's internal RAM memory to the memory cassette. 

Required condition: The PLC must be stopped, and the PROTECT switch must be OFF. 

## **1 Install the memory cassette on the main unit.** 

→ **Refer to Section 21.3 for the installation procedure.** 

- Verify that the PLC power is OFF, then install the memory cassette on the PLC. (Set the PROTECT switch to OFF.) 

- Turn the PLC power ON. 

- Raise the memory cassette's eject lever. 

## **2 Press the [RD] key 1 time.** 

**==> picture [101 x 91] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
RD LED<br>RD key<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


The [RD] LED lights, and a preparation status is established. 

- To cancel, press the [WR] key. 

## **3 Press the [RD] key again.** 

Reading is executed, and the [RD] LED blinks. 

- It takes several seconds to read data from the built-in EEPROM. The RD LED flickers while data is read. 

## **4 Remove the memory cassette from the main unit.** 

Reading is completed when the [RD] LED goes off. 

After turning the PLC power OFF, remove the memory cassette from the PLC, then turn the PROTECT switch ON. 

→ **Refer to Section 21.4 for the removal procedure.** 

## **21.8 Operation Precautions** 

## **1. Tapping screws provided for fixing the memory cassette** 

Two types of (longer and shorter) M3 tapping screws are packed together with the memory cassette. Read carefully the installation method described in Section 21.3, and use the proper type. 

## **2. Number of available units** 

Only one memory cassette may be connected to a FX3G main units. 

## **3. EEPROM memory writing count** 

10,000 writing operations are permitted at the EEPROM memory. 

## **4. Precaution for file register (D) usage** 

Writing to the flash memory occurs at each PLC operation cycle if BMOV instructions are used in a continuous execution format with regard to a file register. 

To prevent this, be sure to use "pulse execution format" (BMOVP) instructions. 

## **5. Precaution for extended file register (ER) usage** 

Do not use continuous constant-execution RWER instructions with regard to extended file registers. Use the individual instructions only when required. 

## **6. Loader function when the display module is used together** 

When the display module is used together, the loader function is enabled by performing the transfer procedure in the display module. 

Data is not transferred even if the transfer procedure is performed in the memory cassette. For the data transfer procedure in the display module, refer to Chapter 20. 

**376** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

22 Battery _22.1 Battery Purpose_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A** 

**B** 

**C** 

**D** 

**E** 

## **22. Battery** 

## **STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS** 

- Use the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual. 

   - Use the battery only for the specified purpose. 

   - Connect the battery correctly. 

   - Do not charge, disassemble, heat, put in fire, short-circuit, connect reversely, weld, swallow or burn the battery, or apply excessive forces (vibration, impact, drop, etc.) to the battery. 

   - Do not store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight. 

   - Do not expose to water, bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly. 

   - Incorrect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation, bursting, ignition, liquid leakage or deformation, and lead to injury, fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment. 

- **STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS** • Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. 

   - Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards, and special adapters 

   - - Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal blocks 

   - Battery and memory cassette 

- **TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS** • When transporting the FX3G Series PLC incorporating the optional battery, turn on the PLC before shipment, confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF, and check the battery life. If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted, the battery-backed data may be unstable during transportation. 

- • When transporting lithium batteries, follow required transportation regulations. (For details of the regulated products, refer to Appendix E) 

The battery is not incorporated in the PLC main unit at shipment from the factory. Order it if necessary. 

## **22.1 Battery Purpose** 

The battery backs up the following contents against power interruption. Proper parameter setting is required to back up the device memory and current time. 

→ **For the parameter setting method, refer to Section 22.3.** 

|**Item**|**Data Retained By Backup Battery**|
|---|---|
|Device memory|Auxiliary relay M1536 to M7679, state S1000 to S4095, data register D1100 to D7999,<br>extended register R0 to R23999|
|Current time*1|Current time clock|



*1. The data is backed up by the large-capacity capacitor built in the PLC at shipment from the factory. → **For backup by the capacitor, refer to Section 4.5.** 

## **22.2 Specifications** 

|**Item**|**Specifications**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|
|Nominal voltage|3V|Battery voltage can be monitored with PLC data register D8005.|



**377** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

22 Battery _22.3 Setting for Battery_ 

## **22.3 Setting for Battery** 

The battery is not incorporated in the main unit at shipment from the factory. It is necessary to attach the optional battery if backup is required. 

In addition, the battery mode is set via a parameter. 

## **22.3.1 Attaching the battery** 

The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit in this example. 

**1 Turn the power OFF.** 

**==> picture [452 x 201] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Turn the power OFF. A<br>ot<br>Remove the top cover (A in the right figure).<br>4<br>2<br>When the expansion board, connector conversion adaptor or<br>LE A Be?<br>memory cassette is attached, remove it. ~~ <nTZ a<br>Nl BA SA]<br>> Z LEApS y<br>. ‘8 SZ Z<br>Attach the battery. C D<br>Insert the battery connector (B in the right figure) of the battery.<br>B<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [290 x 20] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2 Remove the top cover (A in the right figure).<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [137 x 20] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
3 Attach the battery.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


Push the battery into the battery holder (C in the right figure). 

Set the battery cable as shown in D in the right figure. 

**==> picture [152 x 19] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
4 Attach the top cover.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


When the expansion board, connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette was removed in the step 2, attach it again. 

## **22.3.2 Setting the battery mode (GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later)** 

The following setting using a parameter is required to use the battery. 

Note that the battery does not back up the data if the following setting is not provided. 

→ **For the backup target data, refer to Section 22.1.** 

- On the "PLC system[1]" tab on the "FX parameter" window, check the check box "Use Battery". (Refer to the window below.) 

**==> picture [95 x 17] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Put a check mark to the<br>check box "Use Battery."<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**378** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

22 Battery _22.4 Battery Handling_ 

**21 22** 

**A B C D E** 

## **22.4 Battery Handling** 

When the battery voltage is low, a "ALM" LED lights (red) while the power is ON, and M8005 and M8006 are switches ON. 

Although the battery will continue to function for approximately 1 month after the "ALM" LED switches ON, a replacement battery should be ordered and installed as soon as possible. 

## **22.4.1 Battery life and replacement guidelines** 

## **FX3U-32BL battery life : Approx. 5 years (ambient temperature : 25 C(77 F))** 

[Guarantee period: 1 year after delivery or 18 months after production] 

The life of the battery changes with respect to ambient temperature. When planning for battery replacement, please estimate the battery life according to the graph to the right and order the replacement batteries in advance. 

**==> picture [131 x 144] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Battery life vs. temperature<br>7<br>6<br>5<br>4<br>3<br>2<br>1<br>0<br>0 10 20 30 40 50<br>Ambient temperature( C)<br>Battery Life(years)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **22.4.2 Reading the date of manufacture** 

How to read the battery lot number (reference) 

**==> picture [93 x 76] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Nameplate<br>Model name<br>LOT<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**==> picture [378 x 171] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Connector<br>Model name<br>LOT<br><Product during December, 2009 or earlier> <Product from January, 2010><br>9 Z 1 0 1<br>Month (Example: Dec): Month (Example: Jan):<br>1 to 9 = Jan to Sept, 1 to 9 = Jan to Sept,<br>X = Oct, Y = Nov, Z = Dec X = Oct, Y = Nov, Z = Dec<br>Year (Example: 2009) Year (Example: 2010)<br>Last digit of year Last two digit of year<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **22.4.3 Special "battery low-voltage" device & notification program example** 

Prepare a system which allows constant external monitoring of the battery status, using an indicator lamp, etc. 

- M8005 

M8005 

> Y001 Y001 is output when a battery low-voltage condition occurs. Battery low-voltage 

- M8006 

Battery low-voltage is latched. 

- D8005 Battery voltage can be monitored. 

**379** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

22 Battery _22.5 Battery Replacement_ 

## **22.5 Battery Replacement** 

## **Before replacing the battery** 

Step 4 of the replacement procedure (below), must be performed within 20 seconds after step 3, or the memory content could be lost. 

The FX3G-40MT/ES is used as the main unit in this example. 

## **1 Turn the power OFF.** 

## **2 Remove the top cover (A in the right figure).** 

When the expansion board, connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette, remove it. 

**==> picture [117 x 152] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A<br>5<br>2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


## **3 Remove the old battery.** 

Extract the old battery from the battery holder ("B"), and disconnect the battery connector ("C"). 

## **4 Install the new battery.** 

→ **For the installation procedure, refer to Subsection 22.3.1.** 

## **5 Attach the top cover.** 

**==> picture [137 x 95] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
C<br>B<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


When the expansion board, connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette was removed in the step 2, attach it again. 

## **Caution** 

- 1) After replacing the battery, check whether the backup target devices (keep devices) and clock data are backed up correctly, confirm safety, and then run the PLC. 

- 2) If the backup target devices (keep devices) are not backed up correctly, clear them, and set their initial values and clock data again if necessary. 

   - → **For the clear method of keeping devices, refer to the programming manual.** 

## **22.6 Battery Related Precautions** 

## **1. The FX3G series uses a different battery type than those used for the FX2N (F2-40BL) and FX2NC (FX2NC-32BL) series.** 

- Not for use with the FX3G series. 

## **2. Make sure to select the battery mode using a parameter when using the battery.** 

**380** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A B C D E** 

## **Appendix A: Special Device List** 

The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays (indicated as "special M" in tables) and special data registers (indicated as "special D" in tables) are shown below. 

Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the series of the PLC. 

Do not use the undefined / blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in the sequence program since they are occupied by the CPU. 

In addition, do not activate or write to the devices with brackets on the first letter such as [M]8000 or [D]8001 in the program. 

→ **For detailed explanation, refer to the Programming Manual.** 

## **Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)** 

|**Number and**<br>**name**<br>**PLC Status**<br>[M]8000<br>RUN monitor<br>NO contact<br>[M]8001<br>RUN monitor<br>NC contact<br>[M]8002<br>Initial pulse<br>NO contact|**Operation and function**<br>RUN<br>input<br>M8000<br>M8001<br>M8061<br>Error occurrence|**Operation and function**<br>RUN<br>input<br>M8000<br>M8001<br>M8061<br>Error occurrence|**Operation and function**<br>RUN<br>input<br>M8000<br>M8001<br>M8061<br>Error occurrence|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**<br>-<br>-<br>-||**Number and**<br>**name**<br>**Clock**<br>[M]8010<br>[M]8011<br>10ms clock<br>pulse<br>[M]8012<br>100ms clock<br>pulse<br>[M]8013<br>1sec clock pulse|**Operation and function**<br>Not used<br>ON and OFF in 10ms cycle<br>(ON: 5ms, OFF: 5ms)<br>ON and OFF in 100ms cycle<br>(ON: 50ms, OFF: 50ms)<br>ON and OFF in 1sec cycle<br>(ON: 500ms, OFF: 500ms)|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**<br>-<br>-<br>-<br>-|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|[M]8003<br>Initial pulse<br>NC contact<br>[M]8004<br>Error occurrence<br>[M]8005<br>Battery voltage low<br>[M]8006<br>Battery error latch<br>[M]8007<br>[M]8008|ON when either M8060, M8061,<br>M8064, M8065, M8066, or M8067<br>is ON.<br>ON when battery voltage is below<br>the value set in D8006.<br>It is set when battery voltage low is<br>detected.<br>Not used<br>1 scan time<br>M8002<br>M8003|||-<br>D8004<br>D8005<br>D8006<br>-<br>-||[M]8014<br>1min clock pulse<br>M 8015<br>M 8016<br>M 8017<br>[M]8018<br>M 8019<br>**Flag**|ON and OFF in 1min cycle<br>(ON: 30sec, OFF: 30sec)<br>Clock stop and preset<br>For real time clock<br>Time read display is stopped<br>For real time clock<br>30 seconds correction<br>For real time clock<br>Installation detection (Always ON)<br>For real time clock<br>Real time clock (RTC) error<br>For real time clock|-<br>-<br>-<br>-<br>-<br>-|
|[M]8009<br>24V DC down|ON when 24V DC power fails in<br>any input/output powered<br>extension unit or special function|||D8009||[M]8020<br>Zero<br>[M]8021|ON when the result of addition/<br>subtraction is 0.<br>ON when the result of subtraction is|-<br>-|
||block.|||||Borrow|less than the min. negative number.||
|||||||M 8022<br>Carry|ON when 'carry' occurs as a result<br>of addition or when an overflow<br>occurs as a result of shift operation.|-|
|||||||[M]8023|Not used|-|
|||||||M 8024*1|BMOV direction specification<br>(FNC 15)|-|
|||||||M 8025 to M 8027|Not used|-|
||||||||Interrupt permission during FROM/||
|||||||M 8028|TO (FNC 78 and 79) instruction|-|
||||||||execution.||
|||||||[M]8029<br>Instruction<br>execution complete|ON when operation such as DSW<br>(FNC 72) is completed.|-|



*1. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. 

**381** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)_ 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Operation and function**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**PLC Mode**|||
|M 8030*1<br>Battery LED OFF|When M8030 set to ON, LED on<br>PLC is not lit even if low battery<br>voltage is detected.|-|
|M 8031*1<br>Non-latch memory<br>all clear|If this special auxiliary relay is<br>activated, the ON/OFF image<br>memory of Y, M, S, T, and C, and<br>present values of T, C, D, special<br>data registers and R are cleared to<br>zero.<br>However, file registers (D) in<br>program memory, and extension<br>file registers (ER) in the memory<br>cassette are not cleared.|-|
|M 8032*1<br>Latch memory<br>all clear||-|
|M 8033<br>Memory hold<br>STOP|When PLC is switched from RUN<br>to STOP, image memory and data<br>memory are retained.|-|
|M 8034*1<br>All outputs disable|All external output contacts of PLC<br>are turned OFF.|-|
|M 8035<br>Forced RUN mode|Refer to Programming Manual for<br>details.|-|
|M 8036<br>Forced RUN signal||-|
|M 8037<br>Forced STOP signal||-|
|[M]8038<br>Parameter setting|Communication parameter setting<br>flag (for N:N network setting)|D8176 to<br>D8180|
|M 8039<br>Constant scan<br>mode|When M8039 is ON, PLC waits<br>until scan time specified in D8039<br>and then executes cyclic operation.|D8039|



*1. Executed at END instruction 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Operation and function**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**Interrupt Disable**|||
|M8050<br>(Input interrupt)<br>I00<br>disable*4|•<br>If an input interrupt or timer<br>interrupt occurs while a special<br>auxiliary relay for that interrupt<br>(M8050 - M8058) is ON, the<br>interrupt will not operate.<br>For example, turning M8050 ON<br>disables the I00<br>interrupt;<br>hence, the interrupt routine is<br>not processed even in an<br>allowable program area.<br>•<br>If an input interrupt or timer<br>interrupt occurs while a special<br>auxiliary relay for that interrupt<br>(M8050 - M8058) is OFF,<br>a)<br>The<br>interrupt<br>will<br>be<br>accepted.<br>b)<br>The interrupt routine will be<br>processed promptly if it is<br>permitted by the EI (FNC<br>04) instruction. However, if<br>the DI (FNC 05) instruction<br>disables interrupts, the<br>interrupt program will not<br>be processed until EI (FNC<br>04) permits the interrupts.|-|
|M8051<br>(Input interrupt)<br>I10<br>disable*4||-|
|M8052<br>(Input interrupt)<br>I20<br>disable*4||-|
|M8053<br>(Input interrupt)<br>I30<br>disable*4||-|
|M8054<br>(Input interrupt)<br>I40<br>disable*4||-|
|M8055<br>(Input interrupt)<br>I50<br>disable*4||-|
|M8056<br>(Timer interrupt)<br>I6<br>disable*4||-|
|M8057<br>(Timer interrupt)<br>I7<br>disable*4||-|
|M8058<br>(Timer interrupt)<br>I8<br>disable*4||-|
|M 8059|Not used|-|



*4. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. 

## **Step Ladder and Annunciator** 

|M 8040<br>Transfer disable|While M8040 is turned ON, transfer<br>between states is disabled.|-|
|---|---|---|
|[M]8041*2<br>Transfer start|Transfer from initial state is<br>enabled in automatic operation<br>mode.|-|
|[M]8042<br>Start pulse|Pulse output is given in response<br>to a start input.|-|
|M 8043*2<br>Zero return<br>complete|Set this in the last state of zero<br>return mode.|-|
|M 8044*2<br>Zero point<br>condition|Set this when machine zero return<br>is detected.|-|
|M 8045<br>All output reset<br>disable|Disables the 'all output reset'<br>function when the operation mode<br>is changed.|-|
|[M]8046*3<br>STL state ON|ON when M8047 is ON and either<br>of S0 to S899 or S1000 to S4095 is<br>active.|M8047|
|M 8047*3<br>STL monitoring<br>enable|D8040 to D8047 are enabled when<br>M8047 is ON.|D8040 to<br>D8047|
|[M]8048*3<br>Annunciator operate|ON when M8049 is ON and either<br>of S900 to S999 is ON.|-|
|M 8049*2<br>Annunciator enable|D8049 is enabled when M8049 is<br>ON.|D8049<br>M8048|



- *2. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. 

*3. Executed at END instruction. 

## **Error Detection** 

|[M]8060|I/O configuration error|D8060|
|---|---|---|
|[M]8061|PLC hardware error|D8061|
|[M]8062*5|Serial communication error [ch0]|D8062|
|[M]8063*5*6|Serial communication error 1<br>[ch1]|D8063|
|[M]8064|Parameter error|D8064|
|[M]8065|Syntax error|D8065<br>D8069<br>D8314<br>D8315|
|[M]8066|Ladder error|D8066<br>D8069<br>D8314<br>D8315|
|[M]8067*7|Operation error|D8067<br>D8069<br>D8314<br>D8315|
|M 8068|Operation error latch|D8068<br>D8312<br>D8313|
|M 8069*8|I/O bus check|-|



- *5. Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON. 

- *6. Serial communication error 2 [ch2] PLC is detected by M8438. 

- *7. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN. 

- *8. When M8069 is ON, I/O bus check is executed. 

**382** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)_ 

**21 22** 

**A B** 

**C D E** 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Operation and function**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**||**Number and**<br>**name**<br>**Operation and function**||**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Parallel Link**||||**RS (FNC 80) and Computer Link [ch1]**|||
|M 8070*1<br>M 8071*1|Parallel link<br>Set M8070 when using master<br>station.<br>Parallel link<br>Set M8071 when using slave<br>station.|-<br>-||[M]8120<br>Not used<br>[M]8121*3<br>RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Send wait flag<br>M 8122*3<br>RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Send request||-<br>-<br>D8122|
|*1.<br>Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.<br>[M]8072<br>Parallel link<br>ON when operating<br>-<br>[M]8073<br>Parallel link<br>ON when M8070 or M8071<br>setting is incorrect<br>-<br>**Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function**||||M 8123*3<br>RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Receive complete flag<br>[M]8124<br>RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Carrier detection flag<br>[M]8125<br>Not used<br>[M]8126<br>Computer link [ch1]: Global ON<br>[M]8127<br>Computer link [ch1]:<br>On-demand send processing||D8123<br>-<br>-|
|[M]8075*2|Pulse width/Pulse period<br>measurement setting flag|-||M 8128<br>Computer link [ch1]:<br>On-demand error flag||D8127<br>D8128|
|[M]8076*2<br>[M]8077*2|[X000] Pulse width/Pulse period<br>measurement flag<br>[X001] Pulse width/Pulse period<br>measurement flag|D8074 to<br>D8079<br>D8080 to<br>D8085||M 8129<br>Computer link [ch1]:<br>On-demand Word/Byte<br>changeover<br>RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Time-out check flag||D8129|
|[M]8078*2<br>[M]8079*2<br>M 8080*2<br>M 8081*2<br>M 8082*2<br>M 8083*2|[X003] Pulse width/Pulse period<br>measurement flag<br>[X004] Pulse width/Pulse period<br>measurement flag<br>[X000] Pulse period measurement<br>mode<br>[X001] Pulse period measurement<br>mode<br>[X003] Pulse period measurement<br>mode<br>[X004] Pulse period measurement<br>mode|D8086 to<br>D8091<br>D8092 to<br>D8097<br>D8074 to<br>D8079<br>D8080 to<br>D8085<br>D8086 to<br>D8091<br>D8092 to<br>D8097||*3.<br>Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to<br>instruction is OFF.<br>**Positioning [PLSY, PLSR instruction]**<br>M 8145<br>[Y000] Pulse output stop command<br>M 8146<br>[Y001] Pulse output stop command<br>[M]8147<br>[Y000] Pulse output monitor<br>(BUSY/READY)<br>[M]8148<br>[Y001] Pulse output monitor<br>(BUSY/READY)<br>**Inverter Communication Function**<br><br>|STOP or RS<br>-<br>-<br>-<br>-||



||**Positioning [PLSY,**<br>M 8145<br>M 8146|**PLSR instruction]**<br>[Y000] Pulse output stop command<br>[Y001] Pulse output stop command|-<br>-|
|---|---|---|---|
||[M]8147<br>[Y000] Pulse output monitor<br>(BUSY/READY)<br>[M]8148<br>[Y001] Pulse output monitor<br>(BUSY/READY)<br>**Inverter Communication Function**<br>[M]8150<br>Not used<br>[M]8151*5<br>Inverter communication in<br>execution [ch1]||-<br>-<br>-<br>D8151|
||[M]8152*4*5|Inverter communication error [ch1]|D8152|
||[M]8153*4*5<br>[M]8154<br>[M]8155|Inverter communication error latch<br>[ch1]<br>Not used|D8153<br>-<br>-|
||[M]8156*5|Inverter communication in<br>execution [ch2]|D8156|
||[M]8157*4*5|Inverter communication error [ch2]|D8157|
||[M]8158*4*5<br>[M]8159|Inverter communication error latch<br>[ch2]<br>Not used|D8158<br>-|



*2. Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later. 

|**Flag**|**Flag**||
|---|---|---|
|[M]8090 to [M]8100|Not used|-|
|**Memory Information**|||
|[M]8101|Not used|-|
|[M]8102||-|
|[M]8103||-|
|[M]8104||-|
|[M]8105|ON during writing in RUN mode|-|
|[M]8106|Not used|-|
|[M]8107|Not used|-|
|[M]8108|Not used|-|
|**Output Refresh Error**|||
|[M]8109|Output refresh error|D8109|
|[M]8110 to [M]8119|Not used|-|



- *4. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN. 

*5. Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later. 

**383** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)_ 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Operation and function**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**||**Number and**<br>**name**|**Operation and function**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Advanced Function**||||**N:N Network**|||
|M 8160|Not used|-||[M]8180||-|
|M 8161*1*2|8-bit process mode|-||[M]8181|Not used|-|
|M 8162|High speed parallel link mode|-||[M]8182||-|
|[M]8163<br>M 8164||-<br>-||[M]8183|Data communication error<br>(Master station)||
|M 8165|Not used|-||[M]8184|Data communication error<br>(Slave station No.1)||
|[M]8166<br>M 8167||-<br>-||[M]8185|Data communication error<br>(Slave station No.2)||
|M 8168*1|SMOV (FNC 13) instruction:<br>HEX data handling function|-||[M]8186|Data communication error<br>(Slave station No.3)||
|*1.<br>Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.<br>[M]8169<br>Not used<br>-||||[M]8187|Data communication error<br>(Slave station No.4)|D8201 to<br>D8218|
|*2.<br>Applicable to RS (FNC 80), ASCI (FNC 82), HEX (FNC 83),<br>and CCD (FNC 84) instructions.||||[M]8188|Data communication error<br>(Slave station No.5)||
|**Pulse Catch**||||[M]8189|Data communication error<br>(Slave station No.6)||
|M 8170*3<br>M 8171*3|Input X000 pulse catch<br>Input X001 pulse catch|-<br>-||[M]8190|Data communication error<br>(Slave station No.7)||
|M 8172*3|Input X002 pulse catch|-||[M]8191<br>[M]8192|Data communication in execution|-|
|M 8173*3|Input X003 pulse catch|-||[M]8193||-|
|M 8174*3|Input X004 pulse catch|-||[M]8194||-|
|M 8175*3|Input X005 pulse catch|-||[M]8195|Not used|-|
|M 8176|Not used|-||[M]8196||-|
|M 8177||-||[M]8197||-|
|*3.<br>Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.||||M 8198||-|
|||||M 8199||-|
|**Communication Po**|**rt Channel Settin**||||||



|**Communication Port Channel Settin**|**Communication Port Channel Settin**|**Communication Port Channel Settin**|
|---|---|---|
|**g**|||
|M 8178|Parallel link channel switch<br>(OFF: ch1/ON: ch2)|-|
|M 8179|N:N network channel switch*4|-|



- *4. The channel is specified by either creating or not creating M8179 in setting program. 

ch1: not creating M8179 in setting program ch2: creating M8179 in setting program 

**384** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)_ 

**21 22** 

**A B** 

**C** 

**D E** 

**==> picture [499 x 656] intentionally omitted <==**

**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
|||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Corres-|Corres-|
|Number and|ponding|Number and|ponding|
|Operation and function|Operation and function|
|name|special|name|special|
|device|device|
|Counter Up/down Counter Counting Direction|High Speed Counter Up/down Counter Monitoring|
|M 8200|C200|-|[M]8246|C246|-|
|M 8201|C201|-|[M]8247|C247|-|
|M 8202|C202|-|[M]8248|C248|When C|of 1-phase 2-|-|
|M 8203|C203|-|[M]8249|C249|input or 2-phase|-|
|M 8204|C204|-|[M]8250|C250|2-input counter is in down|-|
|mode, the corresponding|
|M 8205|C205|-|[M]8251|C251|-|
|M8|turns ON.|
|M 8206|C206|-|[M]8252|C252|•|OFF:Down count operation|-|
|M 8207|C207|-|[M]8253|C253|•|ON:Up count operation|-|
|M 8208|C208|-|[M]8254|C254|-|
|M 8209|C209|-|[M]8255|C255|-|
|M 8210|C210|-|[M]8256 to [M]8259|Not used|-|
|M 8211|C211|-|Analog Expansion Board (Refer to Appendix A-3 for details)|
|M 8212|C212|-|M8260 to M8269|[*1]|1st expansion board|[*2]|-|
|M 8213|C213|-|M8270 to M8279|[*1]|2nd expansion board|[*3]|-|
|M 8214|C214|-|
|Analog Special Adapter (Refer to Appendix A-4 for details)|
|M 8215|C215|-|
|When M8|is ON, the|M8280 to M8289|1st special adapter|[*4]|-|
|M 8216|C216|-|
|M 8217|C217|corresponding Cchanged to down mode. is|-|M8290 to M8299|2nd special adapter|[*4]|-|
|M 8218|C218|•|ON: Down count operation|-|*1.|Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later.|
|M 8219|C219|•|OFF: Up count operation|-|*2.|1st expansion board becomes an expansion board|
|connected to BD connector of main units (14/24 point type),|
|M 8220|C220|-|or BD1 connector of main units (40/60 point type).|
|M 8221|C221|-|*3.|2nd expansion board becomes an expansion board|
|M 8222|C222|-|connected to BD2 connector of main units (40/60 point|
|type).|
|M 8223|C223|-|*4.|Connected analog special adapters are counted from the|
|M 8224|C224|-|main unit side.|
|M 8225|C225|-|
|Flag|
|M 8226|C226|-|
|[M]8300 to [M]8303|Not used|-|
|M 8227|C227|-|
|M 8228|C228|-|[M]8304 Zero|Turns ON when the multiplication ordivision result is 0.|-|
|M 8229|C229|-|[M]8305|Not used|-|
|M 8230|C230|-|Turns ON when the division result|
|-|
|M 8231|C231|-|[M]8306 Carry|overflows.|
|M 8232|C232|-|[M]8307 to [M]8311|Not used|-|
|M 8233|C233|-|[M]8312|[*5]|Real time clock data lost error|-|
|M 8234|C234|-|[M]8313 to [M]8328|Not used|-|
|High Speed Counter Up/down Counter Counting Direction|[M]8329|Instruction execution abnormal end|-|
|M 8235|C235|-|*5.|Backed up against power interruption, and automatically|
|M 8236|C236|-|cleared when M8312 itself is cleared or when the clock data|
|M 8237|C237|-|is set again.|
|M 8238|C238|-|
|When M8|is ON, the|
|M 8239|C239|-|
|corresponding C|is|
|M 8240|C240|changed to down mode.|-|
|M 8241|C241|•|ON: Down count operation|-|
|M 8242|C242|•|OFF: Up count operation|-|
|M 8243|C243|-|
|M 8244|C244|-|
|M 8245|C245|-|

**----- End of picture text -----**<br>


**385** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)_ 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Operation and function**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**||**Number and**<br>**name**|**Operation and function**||**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Positioning**||||**RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]**||||
|[M]8330 to [M]8337|Not used|-||[M]8370|Not used||-|
|M 8338*1<br>[M]8339|PLSV (FNC157) instruction:<br>Acceleration/deceleration operation<br>Not used|-<br>-||M 8371*2<br>M 8372*2|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0] Send wait flag<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0] Send request||-<br>D8372|
|[M]8340|[Y000] Pulse output monitor<br>(ON: BUSY/ OFF: READY)|-||M 8373*2|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Receive complete flag||D8373|
|M 8341*1<br>M 8342*1|[Y000] Clear signal output function<br>enable<br>[Y000] Zero return direction<br>specification|-<br>-||[M]8374 to [M]8378 Not used<br>M 8379<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Time-out check flag<br>**High Speed Counter Function**|||-<br>-|
|M 8343|[Y000] Forward limit|-||[M]8380 to [M]8387|Not used||-|
|M 8344<br>M 8345*1|[Y000] Reverse limit<br>[Y000] DOG signal logic reverse|-<br>-||[M]8388<br>M 8389 to M 8391|Contact for high speed counter<br>function change<br>Not used||-<br>-|
|M 8346*1|[Y000] Zero point signal logic<br>reverse|-||M 8392|Function changeover device for<br>C248 and C253||-|
|M 8347|Not used|-||[M]8393|Not used||-|
|[M]8348|[Y000] Positioning instruction<br>activation|-||[M]8394|Not used||-|
|M 8349*1|[Y000] Pulse output stop command|-||[M]8395|Function changeover device for<br>C254||-|
|[M]8350<br>M 8351*1|[Y001] Pulse output monitor<br>(ON: BUSY/ OFF: READY)<br>[Y001] Clear signal output function<br>enable|-<br>-||[M]8396<br>[M]8397<br>**Ring Counter**|Not used||-<br>-|
|M 8352*1|[Y001] Zero return direction<br>specification|-||M 8398|Ring counter operation<br>(in units of 1ms, 32 bits)*3||D8398<br>D8399|
|M 8353|[Y001] Forward limit|-||[M]8399|Not used||-|
|M 8354|[Y001] Reverse limit|-||*2.<br>Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when||||
|M 8355*1<br>M 8356*1|[Y001] DOG signal logic reverse<br>[Y001] Zero point signal logic<br>reverse|-<br>-||RS2 instruction [ch0] is OFF.<br>*3.<br>1ms ring counter (D8399, D8398) will operate<br>turns ON.|||after M8398|
|M 8357|Not used|-||**RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]**||||
|[M]8358|[Y001] Positioning instruction<br>activation|-||[M]8400<br>[M]8401*4|Not used<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] Send wait flag||-<br>-|
|M 8359*1|[Y001] Pulse output stop command|-||M 8402*4|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] Send request||D8402|
|[M]8360|[Y002] Pulse output monitor<br>(ON: BUSY/ OFF: READY)|-||M 8403*4|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Receive complete flag||D8403|
|M 8361*1|[Y002] Clear signal output function<br>enable|-||[M]8404|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Carrier detection flag||-|
|M 8362*1|[Y002] Zero return direction<br>specification|-||[M]8405|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Data set ready (DSR) flag||-|
|M 8363|[Y002] Forward limit|-||[M]8406|||-|
|M 8364|[Y002] Reverse limit|-||[M]8407|Not used||-|
|M 8365*1|[Y002] DOG signal logic reverse|-||[M]8408|||-|
|M 8366*1|[Y002] Zero point signal logic<br>reverse|-||M 8409|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Time-out check flag||-|
|M 8367|Not used|-||*4.<br>Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when||||
|[M]8368|[Y002] Positioning instruction<br>activation|-||RS2 instruction [ch1] is OFF.||||
|M 8369*1|[Y002] Pulse output stop command|-||||||



- *1. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. 

**386** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)_ 

**21 22** 

**A B** 

**C** 

**D** 

**E** 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Operation and function**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] and Computer Link [ch2]**|||
|[M]8410 to [M]8420|Not used|-|
|[M]8421*1|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Send wait flag|-|
|M 8422*1|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Send request|D8422|
|M 8423*1|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Receive complete flag|D8423|
|[M]8424|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Carrier detection flag|-|
|[M]8425|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Data set ready (DSR) flag|-|
|[M]8426|Computer link [ch2] Global ON|D8427<br>D8428<br>D8429|
|[M]8427|Computer link [ch2]<br>On-demand send processing||
|M 8428|Computer link [ch2]<br>On-demand error flag||
|M 8429|Computer link [ch2]<br>On-demand Word/Byte changeover<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Time-out check flag||



*1. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when RS2 instruction [ch2] is OFF. 

|**Error Detection**|**Error Detection**|**Error Detection**|
|---|---|---|
|[M]8430 to [M]8437|Not used|-|
|M 8438*2|Serial communication error 2 [ch2]|D8438|
|[M]8439 to [M]8448|Not used|-|
|[M]8449|Special block error flag|D8449|
|[M]8450 to [M]8459|Not used|-|
|**Positioning**|||
|M 8460 to M8463|Not used|-|
|M 8464|DSZR (FNC150), ZRN (FNC156)<br>instructions [Y000]<br>Clear signal device specification<br>function enabled|D8464|
|M 8465|DSZR (FNC150), ZRN (FNC156)<br>instructions [Y001]<br>Clear signal device specification<br>function enabled|D8465|
|M 8466|DSZR (FNC150), ZRN (FNC156)<br>instructions [Y002]<br>Clear signal device specification<br>function enabled|D8466|
|[M]8467|Not used|-|



*2. Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON. 

|**Error Detection**|**Error Detection**|**Error Detection**|
|---|---|---|
|[M]8468 to [M]8488|Not used|-|
|[M]8489*3|Special parameter error|D8489|
|[M]8490 to [M]8511|Not used|-|



- *3. Supported in Ver. 2.00 or later. 

**387** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)_ 

## **Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)** 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Content of register**|**Content of register**|**Content of register**|**Content of register**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**PLC Status**|||||||||
|D 8000<br>Watchdog timer<br> <br> <br> <br><br> <br> <br>||Default value is 200ms<br>(in 1ms steps)<br>(Writes from system ROM at power<br>ON)<br>Value overwritten by program is<br>valid after END or WDT instruction<br>execution.||||||-|
|[D]8001<br>PLC type and<br>system version||||||||D8101|
|||2|6|1|0|0|||
||||||||||
|[D]8002<br>Memory capacity<br><br><br><br>||•<br>2...2K steps<br>•<br>4...4K steps<br>•<br>8...8K steps<br>•<br>If 16K steps or more<br>"K8" is written to D8002 and<br>"16" or "32" is written to D8102.||||||M8002<br>D8102|
|[D]8003<br>Memory type<br> <br> <br> <br>||Stores the memory type (built-in<br>EEPROM or memory cassette) and<br>the PROTECT switch ON/OFF<br>status of the memory cassette.*1||||||-|
|[D]8004<br>Error number M||||||||M8004|
||||||||||
||||8|0|6|0|||
||||||||||
|[D]8005<br>Battery voltage|||||3|0||M8005|
|[D]8006<br>Low battery<br>voltage detection<br>level<br> <br> <br>||Default: 2.7V (in units of 0.1V)<br>(Writes from system ROM at power<br>ON)||||||M8006|
|[D]8007<br>||Not used||||||-|
|D 8008<br>||Not used||||||-|
|[D]8009<br>24V DC failed<br>device<br> <br> <br>||Lowest input device number of<br>input/output powered extension unit<br>in which 24V DC has failed.||||||M8009|
|*1.|D8003 becomes the undermentioned content.||||||||
||**Present**<br>**value**|**Type of memory**|||||**Protect switch**||
||02H|EEPROM memory cassette|||||OFF||
||0AH|EEPROM memory cassette|||||ON||
||10H|Built-in memory in PLC|||||-||



|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**Clock**|||
|[D]8010<br>Present scan<br>time*2|Accumulated instruction-execution<br>time from 0 step<br>(in units of 0.1ms)|-|
|[D]8011<br>Minimum scan<br>time*2|Minimum value of scan time<br>(in units of 0.1ms)|-|
|[D]8012<br>Maximum scan<br>time*2|Maximum value of scan time<br>(in units of 0.1ms)|-|
|D 8013<br>Second data|0 to 59 seconds<br>(for real time clock)|-|
|D 8014<br>Minute data|0 to 59 minutes<br>(for real time clock)|-|
|D 8015<br>Hour data|0 to 23 hours<br>(for real time clock)|-|
|D 8016<br>Day data|1 to 31 days<br>(for real time clock)|-|
|D 8017<br>Month data|1 to 12 months<br>(for real time clock)|-|
|D 8018<br>Year data|2 digits of year data (0 to 99)<br>(for real time clock)|-|
|D 8019<br>Day-of-the-week<br>data|0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday)<br>(for real time clock)|-|



*2. Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan operation (when M8039 is activated). 

|**Input Filter**|**Input Filter**||
|---|---|---|
|D 8020<br>Input filter<br>adjustment|Input filter value of X000 to X007<br>(Default: 10ms)|-|
|[D]8021|Not used|-|
|[D]8022||-|
|[D]8023||-|
|[D]8024||-|
|[D]8025||-|
|[D]8026||-|
|[D]8027||-|
|**Index Register Z0 and V0**|||
|[D]8028|Value of Z0 (Z) register*3|-|
|[D]8029|Value of V0 (V) register*3|-|



*3. The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to D8195. 

**388** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A B C D E** 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**Analog Volume and Constant Scan**|||
|[D]8030|Value of analog volume<br>VR1 (Integer from 0 to 255)|-|
|[D]8031|Value of analog volume<br>VR2 (Integer from 0 to 255)|-|
|[D]8032 to [D]8038|Not used|-|
|D 8039<br>Constant scan<br>duration|Default: 0 ms (in 1 ms steps)<br>(Writes from system ROM at power<br>ON)<br>Can be overwritten by program|M8039|
|**Stepladder and Annunciator**|||
|[D]8040*1<br>ON state number 1|The smallest number out of active<br>state ranging from S0 to S899 and<br>S1000 to S4095 is stored in D8040<br>and<br>the<br>second-smallest<br>state<br>number is stored in D8041.<br>Active state numbers are then<br>sequentially stored in registers up<br>to D8047 (Max. 8 points).|M8047|
|[D]8041*1<br>ON state number 2|||
|[D]8042*1<br>ON state number 3|||
|[D]8043*1<br>ON state number 4|||
|[D]8044*1<br>ON state number 5|||
|[D]8045*1<br>ON state number 6|||
|[D]8046*1<br>ON state number 7|||
|[D]8047*1<br>ON state number 8|||
|[D]8048|Not used|-|
|[D]8049*1<br>On state minimum<br>number|When M8049 is ON, the smallest<br>number out of active annunciator<br>relay ranging from S900 to S999 is<br>stored in D8049.|M8049|
|D]8050 to [D]8059|Not used|-|



*1. Executed at END instruction 

|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|[D]8060|If the unit or block corresponding to a<br>programmed<br>I/O number is not actually loaded,<br>M8060 is set to ON and the first<br>device number of the erroneous block<br>is written to D8060.<br>1<br>0<br>2<br>0<br>1: Input X<br>0: Output Y<br>Device number<br>10 to 177<br>Example:If X020 is unconnected.<br>BCD converted<br>value||||||M8060|
|||1||0|2|0||
|||||||||
|||||||||
|[D]8061|Error||code for PLC hardware error||||M8061|
|[D]8062*2|Error<br>error<br>[ch0]||code for PC/PP communication<br>or serial communication error 0||||M8062|
|[D]8063*2|Error<br>error||code for serial communication<br>1 [ch1]||||M8063|
|[D]8064|Error||code for parameter error||||M8064|
|[D]8065|Error||code for syntax error||||M8065|
|[D]8066|Error||code for ladder error||||M8066|
|[D]8067*3|Error||code for operation error||||M8067|



|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**Error Detection (Refer to Subsection 14.6.3 for details)**|||
|D 8068|Operation error step number latched|M8068|
|[D]8069*3|Error step number of M8065 to M8067|M8065 to<br>M8067|



*2. Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON. *3. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN. 

|**Parallel Link**|**Parallel Link**|**Parallel Link**|**Parallel Link**|
|---|---|---|---|
|[D]8070||Parallel link error time-out check<br>time: 500ms|-|
|[D]8071 to [D]8073||Not used|-|
|**Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function**||||
|D 8074*4|Lower|[X000] Ring counter value for rising<br>edge (1/6 s unit)|M8076<br>M8080|
|D 8075*4|Upper|||
|D 8076*4|Lower|[X000] Ring counter value for falling<br>edge (1/6 s unit)||
|D 8077*4|Upper|||
|D 8078*4|Lower|[X000] Pulse width/Pulse period<br>(10 s unit)||
|D 8079*4|Upper|||
|D 8080*4|Lower|[X001] Ring counter value for rising<br>edge (1/6 s unit)|M8077<br>M8081|
|D 8081*4|Upper|||
|D 8082*4|Lower|[X001] Ring counter value for falling<br>edge (1/6 s unit)||
|D 8083*4|Upper|||
|D 8084*4|Lower|[X001] Pulse width/Pulse period<br>(10 s unit)||
|D 8085*4|Upper|||
|D 8086*4|Lower|[X003]  Ring counter value for rising<br>edge (1/6 s unit)|M8078<br>M8082|
|D 8087*4|Upper|||
|D 8088*4|Lower|[X003] Ring counter value for falling<br>edge (1/6 s unit)||
|D 8089*4|Upper|||
|D 8090*4|Lower|[X003] Pulse width/Pulse period<br>(10 s unit)||
|D 8091*4<br>|Upper|||
|D 8092*4|Lower|[X004] Ring counter value for rising<br>edge (1/6 s unit)|M8079<br>M8083|
|D 8093*4|Upper|||
|D 8094*4|Lower|[X004] Ring counter value for falling<br>edge (1/6 s unit)||
|D 8095*4|Upper|||
|D 8096*4|Lower|[X004] Pulse width/Pulse period<br>(10 s unit)||
|D 8097*4|Upper|||



*4. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN. Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later. 

## **Memory Information** 

|[D]8101<br>PLC type and<br>system version|2|6|1|0|0|-|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|[D]8102<br> <br> <br> <br> <br>|2......2K steps<br>4......4K steps<br>8......8K steps<br>16....16K steps<br>32....32K steps|||||-|
|[D]8103 to<br>[D]8107<br>|Not used|||||-|
|[D]8108<br> <br>|Number of special function blocks<br>connected|||||-|



**389** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)_ 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**||**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Output Refresh Error**||||**Inverter Communication Function**|||
|[D]8109|Y number where output refresh<br>error occurs|M8109||D 8150*3*5|Response wait time of inverter<br>communication [ch1]|-|
|[D]8110 to [D]8119|Not used|-|||Step number of instruction during||
|**RS (FNC 80) and Computer Link [ch1]**||||[D]8151*5|inverter communication [ch1]<br>Default: -1|M8151|
|D 8120*1|RS (FNC 80) instruction and<br>computer link [ch1]<br>Communication format setting|-||[D]8152*4*5|Error code for inverter<br>communication [ch1]|M8152|
|D 8121*1|Computer link [ch1]<br>Station number setting|-||[D]8153*3*5|Inverter communication error step<br>number latched [ch1]<br>Default: -1|M8153|
|[D]8122*2|RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Remaining points of transmit data|M8122||[D]8154|Not used|-|
|[D]8123*2|RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Monitoring receive data points|M8123||D 8155*3*5|Response wait time of inverter<br>communication [ch2]|-|
|D 8124|RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Header <Default: STX>|-||[D]8156*5|Step number of instruction during<br>inverter communication [ch2]|M8156|
||||||Default: -1||
|D 8125<br>[D]8126<br>D 8127|RS (FNC 80) instruction:<br>Terminator <Default: ETX><br>Not used<br>Computer link [ch1]<br>Specification of on-demand head|-<br>-||[D]8157*4*5<br>[D]8158*4*5|Error code for inverter<br>communication [ch2]<br>Inverter communication error step<br>number latched [ch2]<br>Default: -1|M8157<br>M8158|
|D 8128|device register<br>Computer link [ch1]<br>Specification of on-demand data<br>length register|M8126 to<br>M8129||*3.<br>Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON.<br>*4.<br>Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.<br>[D]8159<br>Not used<br>-|||
||RS (FNC 80) instruction, computer|||*5.<br>Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later.|||
|D 8129*1|link [ch1]<br>Time-out time setting|||**Advanced Function**|||
|||||D8160|||



|**Advanced Function**|**Advanced Function**|||
|---|---|---|---|
|[D]8160|||-|
|[D]8161|||-|
|[D]8162|||-|
|[D]8163|||-|
|D 8164||Not used|-|
|[D]8165|||-|
|[D]8166|||-|
|[D]8167|||-|
|[D]8168|||-|
|[D]8169||Access restriction status*6|-|



*1. Latch device 

*2. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. 

## **Positioning** 

|[D]8130 to [D]8135|Not used|Not used|-|
|---|---|---|---|
|D 8136|Lower|PLSY (FNC 57), PLSR (FNC<br>59) instructions:<br>Accumulated total number of<br>pulses output to Y000 and<br>Y001|-|
|D 8137|Upper||-|
|[D]8138|Not used||-|
|[D]8139|||-|
|D 8140|Lower|Accumulated number of<br>pulses output to Y000 for<br>PLSY (FNC 57) and PLSR<br>(FNC 59) instructions|-|
|D 8141|Upper||-|
|D 8142|Lower|Accumulated number of<br>pulses output to Y001 for<br>PLSY (FNC 57) and PLSR<br>(FNC 59) instructions|-|
|D 8143|Upper|||
|[D]8144|Not used||-|
|D 8145|||-|
|D 8146|||-|
|D 8147|||-|
|D 8148|||-|
|[D]8149|||-|



- *6. Access restriction status 

|**Present**<br>**value**|**Access restriction**<br>**status**|**Program**|**Program**|**Monitor**<br>**-ing**|**Present**<br>**value**<br>**change**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**|**Write**|||
|H**00*8|2nd keyword is not set|*7|*7|*7|*7|
|H**10*8|Write protection||-|||
|H**11*8|Read / write protection|-|-|||
|H**12*8|All online operation<br>protection|-|-|-|-|
|H**20*8|Keyword cancel|||||



*7. Accesses are restricted by the keyword setting status. 

- *8. "**" indicates areas used by the system. 

**390** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A** 

**B** 

**C** 

**D E** 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**N:N Network (setting)**|||
|[D]8170|Not used|-|
|[D]8171||-|
|[D]8172||-|
|[D]8173|Station number|-|
|[D]8174|Total number of slave stations|-|
|[D]8175|Refresh range|-|
|D 8176|Station number setting|M8038|
|D 8177|Total slave station number setting||
|D 8178|Refresh range setting||
|D 8179|Retry count setting||
|D 8180|Comms time-out setting||
|[D]8181|Not used|-|
|**Index Register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7**|||
|[D]8182|Value of Z1 register|-|
|[D]8183|Value of V1 register|-|
|[D]8184|Value of Z2 register|-|
|[D]8185|Value of V2 register|-|
|[D]8186|Value of Z3 register|-|
|[D]8187|Value of V3 register|-|
|[D]8188|Value of Z4 register|-|
|[D]8189|Value of V4 register|-|
|[D]8190|Value of Z5 register|-|
|[D]8191|Value of V5 register|-|
|[D]8192|Value of Z6 register|-|
|[D]8193|Value of V6 register|-|
|[D]8194|Value of Z7 register|-|
|[D]8195|Value of V7 register|-|
|[D]8196|Not used|-|
|[D]8197||-|
|[D]8198||-|
|[D]8199||-|
|**N:N Network (monitoring)**|||
|[D]8200|Not used|-|
|[D]8201|Current link scan time|-|
|[D]8202|Maximum link scan time|-|
|[D]8203|Number of communication error at<br>master station|M8183 to<br>M8191|
|[D]8204|Number of communication error at<br>slave station No.1||
|[D]8205|Number of communication error at<br>slave station No.2||
|[D]8206|Number of communication error at<br>slave station No.3||
|[D]8207|Number of communication error at<br>slave station No.4||
|[D]8208|Number of communication error at<br>slave station No.5||
|[D]8209|Number of communication error at<br>slave station No.6||
|[D]8210|Number of communication error at<br>slave station No.7||



|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|[D]8211|Code of communication error at<br>master station|M8183 to<br>M8191|
|[D]8212|Code of communication error at<br>slave station No.1||
|[D]8213|Code of communication error at<br>slave station No.2||
|[D]8214|Code of communication error at<br>slave station No.3||
|[D]8215|Code of communication error at<br>slave station No.4||
|[D]8216|Code of communication error at<br>slave station No.5||
|[D]8217|Code of communication error at<br>slave station No.6||
|[D]8218|Code of communication error at<br>slave station No.7||
|[D]8219 to [D]8259|Not used||
|**Analog Expansion Board (Refer to Appendix A-3 for details)**|||
|D8260 to D8269*1|1st expansion board*2|-|
|D8270 to D8279*1|2nd expansion board*3|-|
|**Analog Special Adapter (Refer to Appendix A-4 for details)**|||
|D 8280 to D 8289|1st special adapter*4|-|
|D 8290 to D 8299|2nd special adapter*4|-|



- *1. Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later. 

- *2. 1st expansion board becomes an expansion board connected to BD connector of main units (14/24 point type), or BD1 connector of main units (40/60 point type). 

- *3. 2nd expansion board becomes an expansion board connected to BD2 connector of main units(40/60 point type). 

- *4. Connected analog special adapters are counted from the main unit side. 

## **Display module** 

|**Display module**|||
|---|---|---|
|D8300*5|Control device (D) for display<br>module<br>Default: K-1|-|
|D8301*5|Control device (M) for display<br>module<br>Default: K-1|-|
|D 8302*5*6|Language display setting<br>•<br>Japanese: K0<br>•<br>English: Other than K0|-|
|D 8303*5|LCD contrast setting value<br>•<br>Default: K0|-|



- *5. Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later. 

- *6. Latch device 

**391** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)_ 

|||**Corres-**||||**Corres-**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**ponding**<br>**special**||**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**ponding**<br>**special**|
|||**device**||||**device**|
|**Positioning**<br>[D]8329 to [D]8339|Not used|-||[D]8379|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Time-out time setting|-|
|D 8340<br>D 8341<br>D 8342|Lower<br>Y000] Current value register<br>Default: 0<br>Upper<br>[Y000] Bias speed Default: 0|-<br>-||D 8380<br>D 8381|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Header 1 and 2 <Default: STX><br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Header 3 and 4|-<br>-|
|D 8343<br>D 8344|Lower<br>[Y000] Maximum speed<br>Default: 100000<br>Upper|-||D 8382|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Terminator 1 and 2 <Default: ETX>|-|
|D 8345|[Y000] Creep speed<br>Default: 1000|-||D 8383|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Terminator 3 and 4|-|
|D 8346<br>D 8347|Lower<br>[Y000] Zero return speed<br>Default: 50000<br>Upper|-||[D]8384|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Receive sum (received data)|-|
|D 8348|[Y000] Acceleration time<br>Default: 100|-||[D]8385|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Receive sum (calculated result)|-|
|D 8349|[Y000] Deceleration time<br>Default: 100|-||[D]8386|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Receive sum (calculated result)|-|
|D 8350|Lower<br>[Y001] Current value register|||[D]8387|Not used|-|
|D 8351|Default: 0<br>Upper|-||[D]8388||-|
|D 8352<br>D 8353|[Y001] Bias speed Default: 0<br>Lower<br>[Y001] Maximum speed|-||[D]8389<br>**Ring Counter**|Operation mode display [ch0]|-|
|D 8354|Default: 100000<br>Upper|-||D 8398|Lower<br>Up-operation ring counter of 0<br>to 2,147,483,647|M8398|
|D 8355|[Y001] Creep speed<br>Default: 1000|-||D 8399|(in units of 1ms, 32-bit)*2<br>Upper||
|D 8356<br>D 8357|Lower<br>[Y001] Zero return speed<br>Default: 50000<br>Upper|-||**RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]**<br>D 8400|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Communication format setting|-|
|D 8358|[Y001] Acceleration time<br>Default: 100|-||[D]8401|Not used|-|
|D 8359|[Y001] Deceleration time<br>Default: 100|-||[D]8402*1|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Remaining points of transmit data|M8402|
|D 8360<br>D 8361|Lower<br>[Y002] Current value register<br>Default: 0<br>Upper|-||[D]8403*1<br>[D]8404|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Monitoring receive data points<br>Not used|M8403<br>-|
|D 8362|[Y002] Bias speed Default: 0|-||[D]8405|Communication parameter display [ch1]|-|
|D 8363<br>D 8364|Lower<br>[Y002] Maximum speed<br>Default: 100000<br>Upper|-||[D]8406<br>[D]8407|Not used|-<br>-|
|D 8365|[Y002] Creep speed<br>Default: 1000|-||[D]8408||-|
|D 8366<br>D 8367<br>D 8368<br>D 8369<br>**RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]**|Lower<br>[Y002] Zero return speed<br>Default: 50000<br>Upper<br>[Y002] Acceleration time<br>Default: 100<br>[Y002] Deceleration time<br>Default: 100|-<br>-<br>-||D 8409<br>D 8410<br>D 8411<br>D 8412|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Time-out time setting<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Header 1 and 2 <Default: STX><br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Header 3 and 4<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Terminator 1 and 2 <Default: ETX>|-<br>-<br>-<br>-|
|D 8370|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Communication format setting|-||D 8413|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Terminator 3 and 4|-|
|[D]8371<br>[D]8372*1<br>[D]8373*1|Not used<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Remaining points of transmit data<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch0]<br>Monitoring receive data points|-<br>M8372<br>M8373||[D]8414<br>[D]8415<br>[D]8416|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Receive sum (received data)<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]<br>Receive sum (calculated result)<br>RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] Send sum|-<br>-<br>-|
|[D]8374||-||[D]8417 to [D]8418|Not used|-|
|[D]8375||-||[D]8419|Operation mode display [ch1]|-|
|[D]8376|Not used|-||*1.<br>Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP.|||
|[D]8377||-||*2.<br>1ms ring counter (D8399, D8398) will operate after M8398|||
|[D]8378||-||turns ON.|||



**392** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)_ 

**21 22** 

**A B C** 

**D E** 

|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] and Computer Link [ch2]**|||
|D 8420|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Communication format setting|-|
|D 8421|Computer link [ch2]<br>Station number setting|-|
|[D]8422*1|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Remaining points of transmit data|M8422|
|[D]8423*1|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Monitoring receive data points|M8423|
|[D]8424|Not used|-|
|[D]8425|Communication parameter display<br>[ch2]|-|
|[D]8426|Not used|-|
|D 8427|Computer link [ch2]<br>Specification of on-demand head<br>device register|M8426 to<br>M8429|
|D 8428|Computer link [ch2]<br>Specification of on-demand data<br>length register||
|D 8429|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2], computer link<br>[ch2]<br>Time-out time setting||
|D 8430|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Header 1 and 2 <Default: STX>|-|
|D 8431|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Header 3 and 4|-|
|D 8432|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Terminator 1 and 2 <Default: ETX>|-|
|D 8433|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Terminator 3 and 4|-|
|[D]8434|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Receive sum (received data)|-|
|[D]8435|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]<br>Receive sum (calculated result)|-|
|[D]8436|RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Send sum|-|
|[D]8437|Not used|-|



|**Number and**<br>**name**|**Content of register**|**Correspond-**<br>**ing special**<br>**device**|
|---|---|---|
|**Error Detection**|||
|[D]8438*2|Error code for serial communication<br>error 2 [ch2]|M8438|
|**RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] and Computer Link [ch2]**|||
|[D]8439|Operation mode display [ch2]|-|
|**Error Detection**|||
|[D]8440 to [D]8448|Not used|-|
|[D]8449|Special block error code|M8449|
|[D]8450 to [D]8459|Not used|-|
|**Positioning**|||
|[D]8460 to [D]8463|Not used|-|
|D 8464|DSZR (FNC150) and ZRN<br>(FNC156) instructions:<br>[Y000] Clear signal device<br>specification|M8464|
|D 8465|DSZR (FNC150) and ZRN<br>(FNC156) instructions:<br>[Y001] Clear signal device<br>specification|M8465|
|D 8466|DSZR (FNC150) and ZRN<br>(FNC156) instructions:<br>[Y002] Clear signal device<br>specification|M8466|
|D 8467|Not used|-|
|*2.<br>Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON.|||
|**Error Detection**|||
|[D]8468 to [D]8488|Not used|-|
|[D]8489*3|Error code for special parameter<br>error|M8489|
|[D]8490 to [D]8511|Not used|-|
|*3.<br>Supported in Ver. 2.00 or later.|||



*1. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. 

**393** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List 

_Appendix A-3 Analog expansion boards[M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279]_ 

## **Appendix A-3 Analog expansion boards[M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279]** 

When analog expansion boards are connected, operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the position of connected analog special adapters. Devices which cannot be written are shaded in "Operation and function" column. 

→ **For details, refer to the Analog Control Edition.** 

## **Appendix A-3-1 Special auxiliary relays (M8260 to M8279)** 

|**Number**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|
|---|---|---|
||**FX3G-2AD-BD**|**FX3G-1DA-BD**|
|Compatible<br>Versions|Ver.1.10 or later|Ver.1.10 or later|
|**1st expansion board**|||
|M 8260|Input mode switching Ch1|Output mode switching|
|M 8261|Input mode switching Ch2|Not used|
|M 8262|Not used|Not used|
|M 8263|Not used|Not used|
|M 8264|Not used|Output hold mode|
|M 8265|Not used|Not used|
|M 8266|Not used|Not used|
|M 8267|Not used|Not used|
|M 8268|Not used|Not used|
|M 8269|Not used|Not used|
|**2nd expansion board**|||
|M 8270|Input mode switching Ch1|Output mode switching|
|M 8271|Input mode switching Ch2|Not used|
|M 8272|Not used|Not used|
|M 8273|Not used|Not used|
|M 8274|Not used|Output hold mode|
|M 8275|Not used|Not used|
|M 8276|Not used|Not used|
|M 8277|Not used|Not used|
|M 8278|Not used|Not used|
|M 8279|Not used|Not used|



**394** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A: Special Device List User's Manual - Hardware Edition _Appendix A-3 Analog expansion boards[M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279]_ 

Appendix A: Special Device List 

**21 22** 

**A B** 

**C** 

**D** 

**E** 

## **Appendix A-3-2 Special data registers (D8260 to D8279)** 

|**Number**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|
|---|---|---|
||**FX3G-2AD-BD**|**FX3G-1DA-BD**|
|Compatible<br>Versions|Ver.1.10 or later|Ver.1.10 or later|
|**1st analog expansion board**|||
|D 8260|Input data Ch1|Output data|
|D 8261|Input data Ch2|Not used|
|D 8262|Not used|Not used|
|D 8263|Not used|Not used|
|D 8264|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|
|D 8265|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|
|D 8266|Not used|Not used|
|D 8267|Not used|Not used|
|D 8268|Error status|Error status|
|D 8269|Model code: 3|Model code: 4|
|**2nd analog expansion board**|||
|D 8270|Input data Ch1|Output data|
|D 8271|Input data Ch2|Not used|
|D 8272|Not used|Not used|
|D 8273|Not used|Not used|
|D 8274|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|
|D 8275|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|
|D 8276|Not used|Not used|
|D 8277|Not used|Not used|
|D 8278|Error status|Error status|
|D 8279|Model code: 3|Model code: 4|



**395** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-4 Analog special adapters[M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299]_ 

## **Appendix A-4 Analog special adapters[M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299]** 

When analog special adapters are connected, operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the number of connected analog special adapters. Devices which cannot be written are shaded in "Operation and function" column. 

→ **For details, refer to the Analog Control Edition.** 

## **Appendix A-4-1 Special auxiliary relays (M8280 to M8299)** 

|**Number**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**FX3U-4AD-ADP**|**FX3U-4DA-ADP**|**FX3U-3A-ADP**|
|Compatible<br>Versions|Ver.1.00 or later|Ver.1.00 or later|Ver.1.20 or later|
|**1st analog special adapter**||||
|M 8280|Input mode switching Ch1|Output mode switching Ch1|Input mode switching Ch1|
|M 8281|Input mode switching Ch2|Output mode switching Ch2|Input mode switching Ch2|
|M 8282|Input mode switching Ch3|Output mode switching Ch3|Output mode switching|
|M 8283|Input mode switching Ch4|Output mode switching Ch4|Not used|
|M 8284|Not used|Output hold mode cancel<br>Ch1|Not used|
|M 8285|Not used|Output hold mode cancel<br>Ch2|Not used|
|M 8286|Not used|Output hold mode cancel<br>Ch3|Output hold mode cancel|
|M 8287|Not used|Output hold mode cancel<br>Ch4|Sets whether or not input<br>channel 1 is used.|
|M 8288|Not used|Not used|Sets whether or not input<br>channel 2 is used.|
|M 8289|Not used|Not used|Sets whether or not output<br>channel is used.|
|**2nd analog special adapter**||||
|M 8290|Input mode switching Ch1|Output mode switching Ch1|Input mode switching Ch1|
|M 8291|Input mode switching Ch2|Output mode switching Ch2|Input mode switching Ch2|
|M 8292|Input mode switching Ch3|Output mode switching Ch3|Output mode switching|
|M 8293|Input mode switching Ch4|Output mode switching Ch4|Not used|
|M 8294|Not used|Output hold mode cancel<br>Ch1|Not used|
|M 8295|Not used|Output hold mode cancel<br>Ch2|Not used|
|M 8296|Not used|Output hold mode cancel<br>Ch3|Output hold mode cancel|
|M 8297|Not used|Output hold mode cancel<br>Ch4|Sets whether or not input<br>channel 1 is used.|
|M 8298|Not used|Not used|Sets whether or not input<br>channel 2 is used.|
|M 8299|Not used|Not used|Sets whether or not output<br>channel is used.|



**396** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List 

_Appendix A-4 Analog special adapters[M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299]_ 

**21** 

**22 A B** 

**C D E** 

|**Number**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**FX3U-4AD-PT(W)-ADP**|**FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP**|**FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP**|
|Compatible<br>Versions|Ver.1.00 or later|Ver.1.00 or later|Ver.1.00 or later|
|**1st analog special adapter**||||
|M 8280|Temperature unit selection|Temperature unit selection|Temperature unit selection|
|M 8281|Not used|Type-K/-J switching|Input sensor selection|
|M 8282|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8283|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8284|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8285|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8286|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8287|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8288|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8289|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|**2nd analog special adapter**||||
|M 8290|Temperature unit selection|Temperature unit selection|Temperature unit selection|
|M 8291|Not used|Type-K/-J switching|Input sensor selection|
|M 8292|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8293|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8294|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8295|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8296|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8297|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8298|Not used|Not used|Not used|
|M 8299|Not used|Not used|Not used|



**397** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List _Appendix A-4 Analog special adapters[M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299]_ 

## **Appendix A-4-2 Special data registers (D8280 to D8299)** 

|**Number**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**FX3U-4AD-ADP**|**FX3U-4DA-ADP**|**FX3U-3A-ADP**|
|Compatible<br>Versions|Ver.1.00 or later|Ver.1.00 or later|Ver.1.20 or later|
|**1st analog special adapter**||||
|D 8280|Input data Ch1|Output data Ch1|Input data Ch1|
|D 8281|Input data Ch2|Output data Ch2|Input data Ch2|
|D 8282|Input data Ch3|Output data Ch3|Output data|
|D 8283|Input data Ch4|Output data Ch4|Not used|
|D 8284|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8285|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8286|Averaging time for Ch3<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|Not used|
|D 8287|Averaging time for Ch4<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|Not used|
|D 8288|Error status|Error status|Error status|
|D 8289|Model code: 1|Model code: 2|Model code: K50|
|**2nd analog special adapter**||||
|D 8290|Input data Ch1|Output data Ch1|Input data Ch1|
|D 8291|Input data Ch2|Output data Ch2|Input data Ch2|
|D 8292|Input data Ch3|Output data Ch3|Output data|
|D 8293|Input data Ch4|Output data Ch4|Not used|
|D 8294|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8295|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8296|Averaging time for Ch3<br>(1 to 4095|Not used|Not used|
|D 8297|Averaging time for Ch4<br>(1 to 4095)|Not used|Not used|
|D 8298|Error status|Error status|Error status|
|D 8299|Model code: 1|Model code: 2|Model code: K50|



**398** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix A: Special Device List 

_Appendix A-4 Analog special adapters[M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299]_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A B C** 

**D** 

**E** 

|**Number**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|**Operation and function**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**FX3U-4AD-PT(W)-ADP**|**FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP**|**FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP**|
|Compatible<br>Versions|Ver.1.00 or later|Ver.1.00 or later|Ver.1.00 or later|
|**1st analog special adapter**||||
|D 8280|Ch1 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch1 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch1 temperature<br>measurement data|
|D 8281|Ch2 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch2 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch2 temperature<br>measurement data|
|D 8282|Ch3 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch3 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch3 temperature<br>measurement data|
|D 8283|Ch4 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch4 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch4 temperature<br>measurement data|
|D 8284|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8285|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8286|Averaging time for Ch3<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch3<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch3<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8287|Averaging time for Ch4<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch4<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch4<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8288|Error status|Error status|Error status|
|D 8289|Model code: PT: 20<br>PTW: 21|Model code: 10|Model code: K11|
|**2nd analog special adapter**||||
|D 8290|Ch1 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch1 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch1 temperature<br>measurement data|
|D 8291|Ch2 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch2 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch2 temperature<br>measurement data|
|D 8292|Ch3 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch3 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch3 temperature<br>measurement data|
|D 8293|Ch4 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch4 temperature<br>measurement data|Ch4 temperature<br>measurement data|
|D 8294|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch1<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8295|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch2<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8296|Averaging time for Ch3<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch3<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch3<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8297|Averaging time for Ch4<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch4<br>(1 to 4095)|Averaging time for Ch4<br>(1 to 4095)|
|D 8298|Error status|Error status|Error status|
|D 8299|Model code: PT: 20<br>PTW: 21|Model code: 10|Model code: K11|



**399** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix B: Instruction List _Appendix B-1 Basic Instructions_ 

## **Appendix B: Instruction List** 

## **Appendix B-1 Basic Instructions** 

|**Mnemonic**|**Function**||**Mnemonic**|**Function**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Contact Instruction**|||**Out Instruction**||
|LD|Initial logical operation contact type NO (normally open)||OUT|Final logical operation type coil drive|
|LDI|Initial logical operation contact type NC (normally closed)||SET|SET Bit device latch ON|
|LDP|Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse||RST|RESET Bit device OFF|
|LDF|Initial logical operation of Falling/trailing edge pulse||PLS|Rising edge pulse|
|AND|Serial connection of NO (normally open) contacts||PLF|Falling/trailing edge pulse|
|ANI|Serial connection of NC (normally closed) contacts||**Master Control Instruction**||
|ANDP|Serial connection of Rising edge pulse||MC|Denotes the start of a master control block|
|ANDF|Serial connection of Falling/trailing edge pulse||MCR|Denotes the end of a master control block|
|OR|Parallel connection of NO (normally open) contacts||**Other Instruction**||
|ORI|Parallel connection of NC (normally closed) contacts||NOP|No operation or null step|
|ORP|Parallel connection of Rising edge pulse||**End Instruction**||
|ORF|Parallel connection of Falling/trailing edge pulse||END|Program END, I/O refresh and Return to Step 0|
|**Connection Instruction**|||||
|ANB|Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits||||
|ORB|Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits||||
|MPS|Stores the current result of the internal PLC operations||||
|MRD|Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations||||
|MPP|Pops (recalls and removes) the currently stored result||||
|INV|Invert the current result of the internal PLC operations||||
|MEP|Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse||||
|MEF|Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse||||



## **Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instructions** 

|**Mnemonic**|**Function**|
|---|---|
|STL|Starts step ladder|
|RET|Completes step ladder|



**400** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix B: Instruction List _Appendix B-3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number_ 

**21 22** 

**A B C D** 

**E** 

## **Appendix B-3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number** 

|**FNC No.**|**Mnemonic**|**Function**||**FNC No.**<br>**Mnemonic**||**Function**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Program Flow**||||**Data Operation**|||
|00|CJ|Conditional Jump||40<br>ZRST||Zone Reset|
|01<br>02|CALL<br>SRET|Call Subroutine<br>Subroutine Return||41<br>DECO<br>42<br>ENCO||Decode<br>Encode|
|03|IRET|Interrupt Return||43<br>SUM||Sum of Active Bits|
|04|EI|Enable Interrupt||44<br>BON||Check Specified Bit Status|
|05|DI|Disable Interrupt||45<br>MEAN||Mean|
|06|FEND|Main Routine Program End||46<br>ANS||Timed Annunciator Set|
|07<br>WDT<br>08<br>FOR<br>09<br>NEXT<br>**Move and Compare**||Watchdog Timer Refresh<br>Start a FOR/NEXT Loop<br>End a FOR/NEXT Loop||47<br>ANR<br>48<br>-<br>49<br>FLT<br>**High Speed Processing**||Annunciator Reset<br>Conversion to Floating Point*1|
|10<br>11|CMP<br>ZCP|Compare<br>Zone Compare||50<br>REF<br>51<br>-||Refresh|
|12<br>13<br>14<br>15|MOV<br>SMOV<br>CML<br>BMOV|Move<br>Shift Move<br>Complement<br>Block Move||52<br>MTR<br>53<br>HSCS<br>54<br>HSCR<br>55<br>HSZ||Input Matrix<br>High Speed Counter Set<br>High Speed Counter Reset<br>High Speed Counter Zone Compare|
|16<br>FMOV<br>17<br>-<br>18<br>BCD<br>19<br>BIN<br>**Arithmetic and Logical**||Fill Move<br>Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal<br>Conversion to Binary<br>**Operation**||56<br>SPD<br>57<br>PLSY<br>58<br>PWM<br>59<br>PLSR<br>**Handy Instruction**||Speed Detection<br>Pulse Y Output<br>Pulse Width Modulation<br>Acceleration/Deceleration Setup|
|20|ADD|Addition||60<br>IST||Initial State|
|21<br>22<br>23<br>24<br>25<br>26|SUB<br>MUL<br>DIV<br>INC<br>DEC<br>WAND|Subtraction<br>Multiplication<br>Division<br>Increment<br>Decrement<br>Logical Word AND||61<br>SER<br>62<br>ABSD<br>63<br>INCD<br>64<br>-<br>65<br>-<br>66<br>ALT||Search a Data Stack<br>Absolute Drum Sequencer<br>Incremental Drum Sequencer<br>Alternate State|
|27<br>WOR<br>Logical Word OR<br>28<br>WXOR<br>Logical Exclusive OR<br>29<br>-<br>**Rotation and Shift Operation**<br>30<br>ROR<br>Rotation Right<br>31<br>ROL<br>Rotation Left||||67<br>RAMP<br>68<br>-<br>69<br>-<br>**External FX I/O Device**<br>70<br>-<br>71<br>-||Ramp Variable Value|
|32|-|||72<br>DSW||Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)|
|33|-|||73<br>-|||
|34|SFTR|Bit Shift Right||74<br>SEGL||Seven Segment With Latch|
|35|SFTL|Bit Shift Left||75<br>-|||
|36|WSFR|Word Shift Right||76<br>-|||
|37|WSFL|Word Shift Left||77<br>-|||
|38|SFWR|Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]||78<br>FROM||Read From A Special Function Block|
|39|SFRD|Shift Read [FIFO Control]||79<br>TO||Write To A Special Function Block|
||||||||



**401** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix B: Instruction List 

_Appendix B-3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number_ 

|**FNC No.**|**Mnemonic**|**Function**||**FNC No.**|**Mnemonic**|||**Function**|**Function**|**Function**|**Function**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**External FX Device**||||**External**|**Device**|||||||
|80|RS|Serial Communication||170|GRY|Decimal to Gray Code||||Conversion||
|81|PRUN|Parallel Run (Octal Mode)||171|GBIN|Gray Code to|Decimal|||Conversion||
|82|ASCI|Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion||172|-|||||||
|83|HEX|ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion||173|-|||||||
|84|CCD|Check Code||174|-|||||||
|85|VRRD|Volume read*1||175|-|||||||
|86|VRSC|Volume scale*1||176|RD3A|Read from Dedicated Analog Block||||||
|87|RS2|Serial Communication 2||177|WR3A|Write to Dedicated Analog Block||||||
|88|PID|PID Control Loop||178|-|||||||
|89|-|||179|-|||||||
|**Floating Point**<br>110<br>ECMP||Floating Point Compare*1||**Data Comparison**<br>220 to<br>223<br>-||||||||
|111<br>112<br>113 to|-<br>EMOV<br>-|Floating Point Move*1||224<br>225|LD=<br>LD>|Load Compare<br>Load Compare||<br> <br>S1<br>S1|=<br>>||S2<br>S2|
|119||||226|LD<|Load Compare||<br>S1|<||S2|
|120|EADD|Floating Point Addition*1||227|-|||||||
|121|ESUB|Floating Point Subtraction*1||228|LD<>|Load Compare||<br>S1|||S2|
|122|EMUL|Floating Point Multiplication*1||229|LD<=|Load Compare||<br>S1|||S2|
|123|EDIV|Floating Point Division*1||230|LD>=|Load Compare||<br>S1|||S2|
|124|-|||231|-|||||||
|125|-|||||||||||
|126|-|||232|AND=|AND Compare||S1|=||S2|
|||||||||||||
|127|ESQR|Floating Point Square Root*1||233|AND>|AND Compare||S1|>||S2|
|128|-|||234|AND<|AND Compare||S1|<||S2|
|129|INT|Floating Point to Integer Conversion*1||235|-|||||||
|**Positioning Control**||||236|AND<>|AND Compare||S1|||S2|
|150<br>151|DSZR<br>-|DOG Search Zero Return||237|AND<=|AND Compare||S1|||S2|
|152|TBL|Batch Data Positioning Mode||238|AND>=|AND Compare||S1|||S2|
|153|-|||239|-|||||||
|154|-|||240|OR=|OR Compare||S1|=|S2||
|155|ABS|Absolute Current Value Read||241|OR>|OR Compare||S1|>|S2||
|156|ZRN|Zero Return||||||||||
|157|PLSV|Variable Speed Pulse Output||242|OR<|OR Compare||S1|<|S2||
|158|DRVI|Drive to Increment||243|-|||||||
|||||||||||||
|159|DRVA|Drive to Absolute||244|OR<>|OR Compare||S1||S2||
|||||||||||||
|**Real Time Clock Control**||||245|OR<=|OR Compare||S1||S2||
|160<br>161|TCMP<br>TZCP|RTC Data Compare<br>RTC Data Zone Compare||246<br>247|OR>=<br>-|OR Compare||S1||S2||
|162|TADD|RTC Data Addition||||||||||
|||||248|-|||||||
|163|TSUB|RTC Data Subtraction||||||||||
|||||249|-|||||||
|164|-|||||||||||
|||||**External**|**Device Communication (Inverter Communication)**|||||||
|165|-|||||||||||
|166|TRD|Read RTC data||270|IVCK|Inverter Status Check*1||||||
|167|TWR|Set RTC data||271|IVDR|Inverter Drive*1||||||
|168|-|||272|IVRD|Inverter Parameter Read*1||||||
|169|HOUR|Hour Meter||273|IVWR|Inverter Parameter Write*1||||||
|||||274|-|||||||
|||||275|IVMC|Inverter Multi Command*2||||||



**402** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix B: Instruction List _Appendix B-3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number_ 

**21 22** 

**A B C D E** 

|**FNC No.**|**Mnemonic**|**Function**|
|---|---|---|
|**Extension File Register Control**|||
|290|LOADR|Load From ER|
|291|-||
|292|-||
|293|-||
|294|RWER|Rewrite to ER|
|295|-||
|296|-||
|297|-||
|298|-||
|299|-||



*1. Supported in Ver. 1.10 or later. 

*2. Supported in Ver. 1.40 or later. 

**403** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix B: Instruction List _Appendix B-3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number_ 

## **MEMO** 

**404** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix C: Discontinued models 

**21** 

**22** 

**A B C D E** 

## **Appendix C: Discontinued models** 

The table below lists the discontinued MELSEC-F Series PLC models and programming tools described in this manual. 

|**Discontinued model**|**Production stop date**|**Repair acceptance period**|
|---|---|---|
|FX-16EYT-H-TB|August 31, 2009|Until August 31, 2016|
|FX-10P|June 30, 2008|Until June 30, 2015|
|FX-232AW|September 30, 2004|Until September 30, 2011|
|FX-232AWC|June 30, 2004|Until June 30, 2011|



**405** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix C: Discontinued models 

## **MEMO** 

**406** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix D: Precautions for Battery Transportation _Appendix D-1 Regulated FX3G Series products_ 

**21** 

**22** 

**A B** 

**C D E** 

## **Appendix D: Precautions for Battery Transportation** 

When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations. 

The batteries for the FX3G Series CPU unit are classified as shown in following table. 

## **Appendix D-1 Regulated FX3G Series products** 

- 1) Included modules and batteries 

None. (FX3G Series CPU units do not include batteries when shipped from the factory.) 

- 2) Batteries to be built in modules (spare parts and optional parts) 

|**Product name**|**Battery type**|**Product supply**<br>**status**|**Lithium Content**<br>**(gram/unit)**|**Mass*1 (gram/unit)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|FX3U-32BL|lithium metal battery|Cell|0.15|30|



- *1. The value indicates the mass with packaging. 

## **Appendix D-2 Transport guidelines** 

Comply with IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG code and the local transport regulations when transporting products listed above. 

Also, consult with the shipping carrier. 

**407** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix D: Precautions for Battery Transportation _Appendix D-2 Transport guidelines_ 

## **MEMO** 

**408** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix E: Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States _Appendix E-1 Disposal precautions_ 

**21 22** 

**A B** 

**C** 

**E** 

## **Appendix E: Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States** 

This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states. 

## **Appendix E-1 Disposal precautions** 

In EU member states, there is a separate collection system for waste batteries. Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection/recycling center. 

The symbol shown in following figure is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built-in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers. 

for battery *1. This symbol to the left is for EU member states only. The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) EU Article 20 "Information for end-users" and Annex II. The symbol to the left indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes. 

## **Appendix E-2 Exportation precautions** 

The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and/ or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states. 

**D** 

- To print the symbol on batteries, devices, or their packaging 

- To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products 

- 1) Labelling To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no symbol, to EU member states on September 26, 2008 or later, print the symbol shown in the figure above on the batteries, devices, or their packaging. 

**E** 

- 2) Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states on September 26, 2008 or later, provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol. 

   - If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided, separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices. 

## **POINT** 

The requirements apply to batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive(2006/66/EC). 

## **Appendix E-3 Regulated FX3G Series products** 

- 1) Included modules and batteries None. (FX3G Series CPU units do not include batteries when shipped from the factory.) 

- 2) Batteries to be built in modules (spare parts and optional parts) 

|**Product name**|**Battery type**|
|---|---|
|FX3U-32BL|Lithium Manganese Dioxide Battery|



**409** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Appendix E: Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States _Appendix E-3 Regulated FX3G Series products_ 

## **MEMO** 

**410** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Edition 

Warranty 

## **Warranty** 

Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product. 

**1.  Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range** 

   - If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. 

## **[Gratis Warranty Term]** 

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. 

## **[Gratis Warranty Range]** 

- 1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product. 

- 2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases. 

   - a) Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design. 

   - b) Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 

   - c) When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided. 

   - d) Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced. 

   - e) Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact (cycles). 

   - f) Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. 

   - g) Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 

   - h) Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user. 

## **2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production** 

- 1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. 

- 2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued. 

## **3. Overseas service** 

Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ. 

## **4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability** 

- Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks. 

## **5. Changes in product specifications** 

- The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice. 

## **6. Product application** 

- 1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault. 

- 2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications. 

   - In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications. 

However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at the users discretion. 

**411** 

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual - Hardware Editionl 

Revised History 

## **Revised History** 

|**Date**|**Revision**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|11/2008|A|First Edition|
|12/2008|B|•<br>The following products are added:<br>-<br>Main unit of relay output type<br>FX3G-14MR/ES, FX3G-24MR/ES, FX3G-40MR/ES, FX3G-60MR/ES<br>-<br>Programming tool<br>FX-30P<br>•<br>The accessing path to the FX3Gfrom CC-Link Network are added.<br>•<br>Explanation corrections for manufacturer’s serial number.(Section 2.2 and 5.1)<br>•<br>EC directive (CE Marking) Compliance added.<br>•<br>Errors are corrected.|
|3/2009|C|•<br>The following products are added:<br>-<br>Main unit of transister output (source) type<br>FX3G-14MT/ESS, FX3G-24MT/ESS, FX3G-40MT/ESS, FX3G-60MT/ESS|
|12/2009|D|•<br>The following products are added:<br>-<br>Main unit of DC power supply type<br>FX3G-14MR/DS, FX3G-24MR/DS, FX3G-40MR/DS, FX3G-60MR/DS,<br>FX3G-14MT/DS, FX3G-24MT/DS, FX3G-40MT/DS, FX3G-60MT/DS,<br>FX3G-14MT/DSS, FX3G-24MT/DSS, FX3G-40MT/DSS, FX3G-60MT/DSS<br>-<br>Input/output powered extension unit of DC power supply type<br>FX2N-48ER-DS, FX2N-48ET-DSS, FX2N-48ER-D, FX2N-48ET-D<br>-<br>Analog special adapter<br>FX3U-3A-ADP<br>•<br>Ver. 1.20 is supported :<br>-<br>Supports FX3U-3A-ADP<br>-<br>Supports the hardware error function of FX3U-4DA-ADP<br>•<br>Precautions for Battery Transportation are added (Appendix D)<br>•<br>Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States are<br>added (Appendix E)|
|3/2010|E|•<br>Explanation corrections for manufacturer’s serial number and lot number.<br>•<br>Explanation corrections for battery’s lot number.|
|7/2011|F|•<br>The following products are added:<br>-<br>Input/output extension block<br>FX2N-8EYR-S-ES/UL<br>-<br>Special function block<br>FX3U-4LC<br>•<br>Ver. 1.40 is supported.<br>-<br>One instruction is added (Appendix B-3)<br>•<br>GX Works2 is added.<br>•<br>Errors are corrected.|
|3/2012|G|•<br>The following product is added:<br>-<br>Special function block<br>FX3U-16CCL-M<br>•<br>Errors are corrected.|
|5/2012|H|•<br>Ver. 2.00 is supported.<br>-<br>Supports parameter setting in the FX3U-16CCL-M.<br>-<br>Supports accessing the other station from CC-Link.<br>-<br>Special parameter error (M8489 and D8489) is added.<br>Description of special auxiliary relays and special data registers is added.<br>(Appendix A)<br>-<br>The error code for parameter error is added. (Subsection 14.6.4)<br>-<br>The error code for special block error is added. (Subsection 14.6.4)|
||||



**412** 

## **USER'S MANUAL** 

## **Hardware Edition** 

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS: 840, CHIYODA CHO, HIMEJI, JAPAN 

|MODEL|FX3G-HW-E|
|---|---|
|MODEL CODE|09R521|



Effective May 2012 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 

JY997D31301H (MEE)